Anda di halaman 1dari 543

HARYANA VIDYUT PRASARAN NIGAM LIMITED (INDIA)

ICB No. WB/2008/G-08

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

OF

PACKAGE G-08(A)

220 KV GIS SUBSTATION A-4 FARIDABAD

VOLUME – II
Chief Engineer/MM,
Haryana Vidyut Prasaran Nigam Limited
Shakti Bhawan, Sector-6,
Panchkula-134109
Ph: 0172-2583724 / 2583744
Fax:- 0172-2583724 / 2565746
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
BID DOCUMENT NO. G-8 VOLUME-II
FOR 220 kV GIS SUB-STATION MATERIAL
SECTION –1 GENERAL 1-16
SECTION –2 GENERAL TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS 1-77
SECTION-2A SPECIFICATION FOR SF-6 GAS INSULATED SWITCHGEAR (220 1-25
KV)
SECTION –3 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION OF POWER TRANSFORMER
Chapter-1 100 MVA, 220/66 KV Transformer 1-24
SECTION –4 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION OF SWITCH GEAR
Chapter-1 198 & 60 kV Gapless SA 1-11
Chapter-2 72.5 kV Isolator & L&E 1-16
Chapter-3 72.5 kV SF-6 Breaker 1-23
SECTION –5 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR PROTECTIVE GEAR
Chapter-1 72.5 kV CT and 245 kV & 72.5 kV NCTs 1-10
Chapter-2 245 & 72.5 kV CVT/PT 1-13
Chapter-3 Control and Relay Panel without automation 1-37
SECTION –6 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION OF ELECTRICAL AND
MECHANICAL. AUX
Chapter-1 220 kV XLPE Power Cable 1-11
Chapter-2 220V & 48V Battery 1-9
Chapter-3 220 V Battery Charger 1-5
Chapter-4 220 V DCDB 1-6
Chapter-5 415V, LT Switch Board 1-8
Chapter-6 Fire Fighting equipment 1-5
Chapter-7 i) Unarmoured copper control cable 1-3
ii) Armoured copper control cable 4-6
Chapter-8 11 kV XLPE Power Cable 1-3
Chapter-9 200 KVA, 11/0.4 kV Distribution Transformer 1-9
Chapter-10 LT Power Cables 1-4
Chapter-11 MK 1-8
Chapter-12 100 KVA DG Set 1-10
Chapter-13 AAC Tarantulla Conductor 1-14
SECTION –7 SWITCH YARD ERECTION AND INSTALLATION 1-28
SECTION –8 STEEL STRUCTURE 1-4
SECTION –9 CIVIL WORKS 1-40
SECTION-10 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION OF PLCC EQUIPMENT
Chapter-1 PLC Terminal with protection coupler 1-11
Chapter-2 Line Trap 1-3
Chapter-3 Coupling Device 1-2
Chapter-4 48 V Battery Charger 1-12
Chapter-5 HF Cable 150ohm (Balanced) 1-5
LIST OF DRAWINGS 1-1
LIST OF GUARANTEED CHARACTERSTICS 1-85
Section-1 (General)

1.00 INTRODUCTION:
The scope of this specification covers construction of 220 kV GIS S/Stn. A-4 Faridabad
(up-gradation of 66 kV S/Stn. A-4 Faridabad to 220 KV Level) of PURCHASER on
supply-cum-erection (turnkey) basis as per Annexure-I on single source responsibility
basis.

1.00.1 a) Complete design and engineering of all the system, sub-systems, equipment, material
and services.
b) Providing engineering data, drawings and O&M Manuals for purchasers review, approval
and records
c) Packaging transportation and insurance from the manufacturers works to the site
including port and custom clearance if required.
d) Receipt, storage, insurance, preservation and conservation of equipment at the site.
e) All civil works as required.
f) Fabrication, pre assembly (if any), erection, testing and putting in to satisfactory
operating of all the equipment/material including successful commissioning.
g) Furnishing of spares on CIP basis.
h) Satisfactory conclusion of the contract.

1.00.2 SCOPE:
Detailed scope of work under this package is listed at clause 1.02.0.
In addition to the requirements indicated in this section (Technical Specification), all
requirements as stated in other sections shall also be considered as a part of this
specification as if completely bound herewith.

1.00.3 The bidder shall be responsible for providing all material, equipment and services
specified or otherwise which are required to fulfill the intent of ensuring operatability,
maintainability and the reliability of the complete work.

1.00.4 It is not intent to specify all aspects of design and construction of equipment mentioned
herein. The systems, subsystems and equipment shall confirm in all respects and shall
be capable of performing in continuous commercial operation.

1.00.5 Whenever a material or article is specified or described by the name of a particular


brand, manufacturer or trade mark, the specific item shall be understood as establishing
type, function and quality desired. Products of other manufactures may also be
considered, provided sufficient information is furnished so as to enable the purchaser to
determine that the products are equivalent to those named.

1.00.6 The bidder may also make alternative offers provided such offers are superior in his
opinion, in which case adequate technical information, operational feed back etc., shall
be submitted with the offer to enable the purchaser to asses the superiority and reliability
of the alternative offered. For each alternative offer, its implications on the performance
shall be clearly brought out in the bid for the Owner to make an overall assessment. In
any case, the base offer shall necessarily be in line with specifications. Under no
circumstances the specified equipment etc., shall be brought out as an alternative.

1.00.7 Any deviation or variation from the scope requirement and/or intent of this specification
shall be clearly mentioned under Deviation Schedule of the Bid Proposal Sheets
irrespective of the fact that such deviation/variation may be standard practice or a
possible interpretation of the specification by the bidder. Except for the
deviation/variations which are accepted by the purchaser before the award of the

1
contract, it will be the responsibility of the bidder to fully meet the intent and the
requirements of the specification within the quoted price. No other departure from the
specification except for the declared deviation indicated by the bidder in his proposal
shall be considered. The interpretation of the purchaser in respect of the scope, details
and services to be performed by the bidder shall be binding, unless specifically clarified
other wise by the purchaser in writing before the award of contract.

1.00.8 The drawing enclosed with the specification is preliminary drawings for bidding purpose
only and subject to changes that may be necessary during detailed engineering after
award, keeping the basic parameters as specified.

1.01.0 Project information


1.01.1 The project information relating to the materialogical data, site conditions, site date
including preliminary soil data of the proposed substations are given in Section-B of this
specification.

1.02.0 Scope of work


1.02.1 The Scope of turnkey basis shall comprise, but not limited to the design, engineering,
manufacture, testing and inspection at manufacturers works, packing supply ,
transportation, transit insurance, delivery to site, unloading, storage and equipment
erection including associated civil works, fire detection hydrant systems, structural
works, cabling, lighting , earthing, any other electrical, mechanical auxiliary
equipment/system, supervision of erection, site testing and commissioning of the 220 KV
Substation(s), training of purchasers personal as required.

1.02.2 The weed growth/ tree cutting shall be responsibility of the bidder. Bidder may note that
purchaser shall not pay any compensation for any loss or damage to the properties or
for tree cutting due to bidder’s works.

1.02.3 The equipment and materials to be supplied by the bidder shall enable completion of the
substation(s) in all respects. The equipment and services as detailed in all sections of
the bidding documents and as shown on the Bid drawings shall be within the scope of
supply of the bidder.

The scope of work shall cover in complete conformity with the specifications, the
following specified equipment/items. Any equipment/items though not specifically
mentioned below but which are required to make the substations complete in all
respects for their safe, efficient, reliable and trouble free operation shall not be deemed
to be included and the same shall be supplied and erected by the Bidder, unless they
are specifically excluded elsewhere in this specifications.

• A GELO of the 220 kV SF-6 Gas insulated S/Stn. A-4 Faridabad (up-gradation of 66 kV
S/Stn. A-4 Faridabad to 220 KV Level) with Double Bus Bar arrangement is enclosed
with the specification. The major electrical equipment required with the switchgear are
also shown in the schematic and listed at Annexure-1.The required mandatory
maintenance equipment are listed as per Annexure-II. However, it may be noted that this
list is not exhaustive and in case any additional equipment is required, the same should
be included in the scope of the supply and the offer should be complete and
comprehensive. In addition, all necessary platform, supports, ladder, cat walks etc. for
maintenance works shall also be supplied.
• The scope also includes shifting of existing 10/12.5 MVA, 66/11 KV T/F from bay No. C-
6 to C-1 & up-gradation of existing 66 KV Double Bus and 66 KV Bus-Coupler bay with
twin tarantulla conductor.

2
• Tentative layout of 220kV GIS building is enclosed with this specification. Bidder shall
treat the dimensions and functional details as a minimum i.e. required under the
scope of specifications. They may however be required to optimize the same during
detailed engineering without affecting any of the functional requirements specified.

• 2 No. 220/66 kV, 100 MVA, Power Transformers

• Control relay & protection equipment

• 220kV XLPE Cable with termination arrangements from line to switchgear (GIS) &
transformer to GIS.

• 11 kV XLPE Cables between 11 kV switchgears and LT transformers along with their


termination arrangements.

• 2 No. 11 KV/433 V 200 KVA Transformers along with switchgear. The existing station
T/F shall be spared and returned to HVPNL. Existing batteries, battery charger, ACDB
and DCDB shall also be spared and returned to HVPNL.

• Grounding/earthing.

• Lighting (Indoor & Outdoor)

• 1.1 kV Power and control cables, instrumentation cables

• Lightening protection

• Erection testing and commissioning of all equipment at site.

• Equipment/structure if any spared shall be returned to HVPNL.

• All civil works associated with erection of SF-6 Gas insulated metal clad, switchgear
including their foundation and cable trenches etc. Civil works shall also include
construction of building, drains, sewerage works and septic tanks, requisite water
facilities etc.
• Cable/Gas Insulated Bus duct sealing ends.
• Recommended spare parts, maintenance tools and other equipment necessary for
maintenance purposes for five years of trouble free services.
• Electrical auxiliary equipment.
• Mechanical auxiliary equipment and services like fire protection, air conditioning and
ventilation, EOT cranes etc.
• Training of purchaser’s design and O&M Personnel.

1.03.0 Services and items


The scope also includes but not limited to the following services/items described herein
and elsewhere in specification.
a) System design and engineering
b) Supply of equipment and material
c) Civil Works
d) Structural works
e) Erection works
f) Project management and site supervision
g) Testing and commissioning

3
h) Interface coordination

1.04.0 System Design and Engineering


a) The Bidder shall be responsible for detailed design and engineering of overall system, sub-
systems, elements, system facilities, equipments, auxiliary services, etc. It shall include
proper definition and execution of all interfaces with systems, equipment, material and
services of purchaser for proper and correct design, performance and operation of the
project.
b) Bidder shall provide complete engineering data, drawings, reports, manuals, etc. for
purchaser’s review, approval and records.
c) The scope shall also include the design and engineering as per details elaborated
elsewhere in this specification.
d) The Bidder shall carry out earth resistivity measurements at the substation site(s) (based on
four electrode method)
e) For all structural works, the bidder shall prepare all fabrication drawings. Similarly for civil
works, the detailed construction drawings shall be prepared by the Bidder.

1.05.0 Supply of Equipment and Material


a) The Bidder shall be responsible for design, engineering, manufacture, testing & inspection
at manufacturer’s works, supply transportation, insurance, delivery at site, unloading,
storage, in plant transportation at site, complete erection & supervision, site testing &
inspection, and successful commissioning of all equipment and material listed at ‘Bill of
Quantities’ enclosed as Annexure-1 of this section, detailed elsewhere in specification and
as shown on the Bid drawings. Any item though not specifically mentioned, but is required to
complete the project works in all respects for its safe, reliable, efficient and trouble free
operation shall also be taken to be included, and the same shall be supplied and erected by
the Bidder without extra cost unless it is explicitly excluded elsewhere in the specifications.

b) All consumables, wastages and damages shall be to the account of bidder.

1.06.0 Civil Works


a) The civil works to be executed by the bidder in accordance with specification shall
include design (wherever applicable), engineering, supply of material and construction of
all items given under Bill of Quantities and all other items required for completing the
substations in all respects.
b) The civil works shall include leveling/dressing, site surfacing (gravel filling), construction
of control room building, roads as per PURCHASER drawings and design and
construction of GIS block building including foundation for all equipments, burying of
pipes/cables (if required), drains and road culverts.
c) All civil works shall be carried out as per the specifications covered under Section-9 of
the bid/contract documents and PWD specifications/latest IS Codes.
d) Demolition of some of existing residential/ office structures in the colony at 66 kV S/Stn.
A-4 Faridabad for utilizing space to facilitate upgradation of 66 kV S/Stn.
A-4 Faridabad to 220 kV level as per GELO.

1.07.0 Erection Works


a) The bidder shall construct, erect and install all equipment and material required for
completion of substation(s) covered under the project. He shall be responsible for
provision of all labour, tools and tackles and supervisory staff for safe, reliable, proper
and correct erection of all equipment required for successful completion of the
substation(s).
b) The tools and plant shall include, but not limited to, special hoisting equipment, cranes,
slings, consumables and all other articles and supplies as required.
c) The bidder shall ensure periodic cleaning of work site and removal of all waste material,
packaging material, surplus earth and left-over and their proper disposal.

4
d) The bidder has to employ suitable manpower and supervision personnel. The bidder is
solely and fully responsible for the safety of personnel and materials. Any damages to
the existing facilities shall be made good by the bidder at no extra cost to the purchaser.
The bidder shall coordinate with site personnel for arranging shut down for
interconnection with the existing systems, if required.

1.08.0 Project management and site supervision


a) The bidder shall be responsible for the overall management and supervision of works.
He shall experiences, skilled, knowledgeable and competent personnel for all phase of
the project, so as to provide the purchaser with a high quality system.
b) The bidder’s supervisory personnel shall provide operation and maintenance assistance
during the warranty period.
c) A Project execution schedule called Master Network (MNW) in the form of PERT
chart/network shall be prepared by the bidder for purchaser’s approval. The MNW shall
identify milestones of key event for each work/ component in the areas of engineering,
procurement, manufacturer, dispatch, erection and commissioning. It shall indicate
interfaces and inputs required to be given by Purchaser.

1.09.0 Testing and Commissioning


a) The scope includes testing and commissioning of all equipment, subsystems and
systems of the project and putting them into successful commercial operation. The
scope shall include but not limited to the requirements given elsewhere in the
specification.
b) The bidder shall be responsible to provide all necessary testing and commissioning
personnel, tools and plant, testing equipment, etc. All expenses for carrying out the
routine tests as specified in relevant standard shall be to bidder’s account. However the
expenses w.rt. purchaser/purchaser’s representative for witnessing these tests
which bidder shall take into account shall be as follows:-
i) For Inspections/tests to be carried out for equipment offered from within
purchaser’s country.
All tour expenses shall be borne by purchaser.
ii) For inspections/tests to be carried out for equipment offered from outside
purchaser’s country:-

It is envisaged that inspection/testing of all such equipment shall be witnessed. Each


inspection shall be carried out by a team of 3 to 4 engineers nominated by the
purchaser. Their TO & Fro travel expenditure from purchaser’s country to the place of
inspection/testing shall be borne by the bidder. However all boarding and lodging
charges for these engineers shall be borne by the purchaser.

1.10.0 Interface Coordination


The bidder shall identify all interface issues with purchaser and other agencies, and shall
be responsible for such interfacing, coordination and exchange of all necessary
information.

1.11.0 Terminal Points


a) The approach road up to the GIS substation area shall be provided by the Purchaser. All
internal roads (if any) shall have to be constructed by the bidder.
b) Purchaser shall provide assistance to the bidder for obtaining statuary clearances for
providing temporary connections for construction of power and water. The bidder shall
arrange for necessary meters etc. and shall pay applicable energy and water charges as
per applicable rates to the purchaser/any other statutory body.

1.12.0 Arrangements by the bidder

5
Bidder shall make his own necessary arrangements for the following and for those listed
anywhere else in this specification.
a) Construction power supply at all work areas.
b) Construction water.
c) Construction office and store (open and covered)
d) Construction workshop and material/field testing laboratory
e) Boarding & lodging arrangement for their personnel.
f) Fire protection and security arrangements during construction stage.
g) Any other requirements of the Haryana Governemnt and as per the purchaser’s rules,
regulations and practices.

1.13.0 Mandatory Maintenance Equipment


The Bidder shall include in his scope mandatory maintenance equipment as specified.
The prices of these shall be indicated in respective schedules. These would be
considered in bid evaluation.

A List of mandatory maintenance equipment is given at Annexure-II to section. The


Owner reserves the right to buy any or all of these. The Bidder shall furnish the itemized
and total prices for this equipment in the offer.

In Compliance with the requirements of Bid documents, the prices for mandatory
maintenance equipment must be given separately, and shall be used for bid evaluation
purposes. All mandatory maintenance equipment shall be delivered at site.

1.14.0 Commissioning spares


The bidder shall supply spares, which he expects to consume during installation, testing
and commissioning of system. The quantity of these spares shall be decided based on
his previous experience, such that site works shall not be hampered due to non-
availability of these spares. Bidder shall submit a complete list of such spares along with
the bid, the cost of which shall be deemed to have been included in the lumpsum
proposal price of the package. The unused commissioning spares may be left at the site
for use by the purchaser, if so agreed at a cost to be negotiated.

No mandatory or recommended spares will be used during the commissioning of the


equipment/plant before take over by the purchaser.

1.15.0 Recommended spares


1.15.0.1 In addition to the mandatory maintenance equipment, the bidder shall also provide a list
of recommended spares giving unit prices and total prices for 5 years of normal
operation of equipment in the relevant schedule of the BPS. The Purchaser reserves the
right to buy any or all the recommended spares. The recommended spares parts shall
be delivered at the site(s). The list of recommended spares to be furnished by the bidder
should also contain the following:

a) Population of each item installed along with reference drawing number.


b) Service life expectancy of each item.
c) Offer validity period.

1.15.0.2 Price of recommended spares will not be used for evaluation of bids. The price of these
spares will remain valid for a period of not less than 120 days after the date on which the
validity of main bid expires. The prices of any recommended spares shall be subject to
review by the purchaser and shall be finalized after mutual discussions.

1.16.0 Tools & Tackles

6
The Bidder shall also supply at each substation site one set of all special tool and
tackles, etc. which are required by the purchaser’s maintenance staff to maintain the
works successfully at no extra cost. The list of such tools and tackles shall be enclosed
with the offer.

1.17.0 Training of purchaser’s Personnel

(a) Training at Manufacturer’s works:

The successful Bidder shall arrange for training of 2 persons of the employer at the
manufacturer’s works of GIS for 5 working days in Design, manufacture and testing of
GIS being supplied. To and fro air fare including boarding and lodging charges for the
Employer’s Engineer shall be born by the Employer.

(b) Training at Site:

The Successful Bidder shall arrange for training to 5 persons including operating field
staff of Employer for five days at the site in operation and maintenance of GIS. The
charges of training shall include To and fro air fares, Boarding and lodgings, Training
material etc. of the contractor’s personnel.

1.18.0 SCHEDULE OF QUANTITIES

The detailed description of various items/equipment and civil works are indicated at
Annexure – I to VI & Schedule E1. The bill of quantity of major equipment is also
indicated and wherever the quantities are not indicated the bidder is required to compute
the quantity. Bidder is required to indicate unit rate and total price of the items under a
particular head in bid proposal sheets. Bidder should include all such items in the bid
proposal sheets, which may not be specifically mentioned but are essential for the
execution of the contract.

1.19.0 GENERAL ELECTRICAL LAYOUT (GELO)

The GELO for 220 kV Sub-station A-4, Faridabad (up-gradation of 66 kV S/Stn.


A-4 Faridabad to 220 KV Level) is enclosed as indicated at Annexure-IV.

1.20.0 LOCATIONS OF THE SUBSTATION

The location of the substations is in Faridabad at A-4, Faridabad.

1.21.0 METEOROLOGICAL DATA.

The meteorological data of the substation is indicated at Annexure-III. However, for


design purpose, ambient temperature should be considered as 50° C.

1.22.0 SOIL DATA


The earth resistivity for 220 kV Substation A-4, Faridabad shall be ascertained by the
bidder himself.

1.23.0 DRAWING

1. The bidder shall maintain inter equipment distances, bay length, bay width etc in
accordance with the enclosed general/electrical layouts of the respective substations

7
while doing so the bidder will ensure that the statutory electrical clearances required for
substation are maintained. (Annexure-IV)
2. The drawing enclosed give the basic scheme, layout of substation, substation buildings,
associated service etc. In case of any discrepancy between the drawing and text of
specification the bidder is advised to get these clarified before submission of bid. No
claim what-so-ever on this score shall be entertained after award of contract.
3. The bidder shall adopt PURCHASER design of galvanized steel structure for tower,
beam and equipment supporting structures for 220/66 kV S/Stn(s).

The PLCC equipments will be in the scope of the bidder for all the S/Stn. (Both ends)
including supply, Erection and commissioning.
Notes:
1. The bidder or his authorised representative should visit the site of works and its
surroundings to obtain himself at his responsibility and expenses, all information
regarding general site characteristics, accessibility, infrastructure details and
factual position in respect of scope of work viz-a-viz GELO drg. attached with the
bid document. Any alteration/addition envisage in the document must be got
clarified before submission of the bid.

2. No extra payment shall be made on account of any change in the layout drgs.
required for providing DSLP as per Rezvik method.

3. In addition to switch-yard lighting (as per Section-7) of Vol-II the successful


bidder is required to provide fluorescent tube fitting (2x4 feet) along the periphery
of fencing at a interval of 30 meters.

8
ANNEXURE-I

EQUIPMENT/ MATERIALS TO BE SUPPLIED AND ERECTED FOR 220 KV GIS


SUB-STATION AT A-4, FARIDABAD

MAIN EQUIPMENT

1.0 220 kV GIS

220 kV GIS with 8 (including one spare T/F bay & 2 No. spare line bays) bays and associated
local control panels, control cables all consumables and hardware etc. as per enclosed GELO
Drawing and as per the technical specification.

Sr.No. Description Unit Qty.


1. 245 kV, 3150A, 40 kA for 1 sec, SF6 gas insulated set 2
transformer feeder bay module each comprising of SF6
gas insulated circuit breaker, current transformer, bus-bar
disconnectors with common grounding switch,
disconnectors with safety grounding switch(es), local
control cubicle, SF6 gas monitoring system for complete
bay, gas insulated terminal connection for connecting
transformer bushing with GIS module through XLPE cable
with termination kit and accessories etc. to complete
Transformer Bay Module with following main equipment
for each bay:-
1. 245 KV Circuit Breaker (Single Phase) - 3
2. 245 KV Isolator (motor operated) - 6
with earth switch(single phase)
3. High speed motor operated - 3
earth switch (single phase)
4. CT (Single Phase) - 3
(300-150/0.577-1-1-1-1A)
2. 245 kV, 3150A, 40 kA for 1 sec, SF6 gas insulated Line set 2
feeder bay module each comprising of SF6 gas insulated
circuit breaker, current transformer, bus-bar disconnectors
with common grounding switch, disconnectors with safety
grounding switch(es), high speed fault making grounding
switch, local control cubicle, SF6 gas monitoring system
for complete bay, gas insulated terminal connection for
connecting Overhead line (Air) with GIS module through
XLPE cable with termination kit and accessories etc. to
complete Feeder Bay Module with following main
equipment for each bay:-
1. 245 KV Circuit Breaker (Single Phase)- 3
2. 245 KV Isolator (motor operated) - 9
with earth switch(single phase)
3. High speed motor operated - 3
earth switch (single phase)
4. CT (Single Phase) - 3
(1200-800-400/1-1-1-1-1A)

9
Sr.No. Description Unit Qty.
3. 245 kV, 40 kA for 1 sec, 3 single phase (isolated), SF6 gas set 2
insulated, metal enclosed 3150A bus bars each enclosed
in bus enclosures running along the length of the
switchgear to interconnect each of circuit breaker bay
module. Each bus bar set shall be complete with voltage
transformer, disconnectors, bus bar grounding switch, SF6
gas monitoring system for the complete bus etc with
following main equipment for each bay:-
1. High speed motor operated - 3
earth switch (single phase)
2. Inductive Bus PTs (Single Phase) - 3

4. 245 kV, 3150A, 40 kA for 1 sec, SF6 gas insulated Bus set 1
Coupler Bay Module comprising of SF6 gas insulated
circuit breaker, current transformer, disconnectors
switches, disconnector with safety grounding switch(es).
Local control cubicle, SF-6 gas monitoring system for the
complete bay etc with following main equipment for each
bay:-
1. 245 KV Circuit Breaker (Single Phase) - 3
2. 245 KV Isolator (motor operated) - 6
with earth switch(single phase)
3. CT (Single Phase) - 3
(1200-800-400/1-1-1-1-1A)

10
ANNEXURE-II
METEOROLOGICAL DATA

Equipment to be supplied against this specification shall be suitable for satisfactory continuous
operation under the following tropical conditions:

i) Location In the state of Haryana

ii) Max. Ambient air temp. (deg. C) 50

iii) Min ambient air temp. (deg. C) -2.5

iv) Daily average air temp. (deg. C) 35

v) Average no. of Thunder storm 45


days per Annum

vi) Maximum Relative Humidity (%) 100

vii) Minimum Relative Humidity (%) 26

viii) Average annual rain fall (mm) 900

ix) Max. wind pressure (kg/sq m) 195

x) Max. altitude above mean sea 1000


level (meters)
xi) Isoceraunic level (days/year) 45

xii) Seismic level 0.3 g


(horizontal acceleration)

xiii) Average no. of rainy days 120


per Annum

NOTE: Moderately hot and humid tropical climate conductive to rust and fungus growth. The
climate conditions are also prone to wide variations in ambient condition. Smoke is also
present in the atmosphere. Heavy lightening also occurs during June to October.

11
ANNEXURE-III

Sr. NAME OF SUB STATION SINGLE LINE LAYOUT DRG.


No. DIAGRAM NO. NO.

1. 220 kV GIS S/Stn.A-4, Faridabad HGD-1/3158 HGD-1/3158

12
MODEL TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
SEC-2 GTR
(GENERAL TECHNICAL REQUIREMENT)
SECTION-2 GTR (GENERAL TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS)

CLAUSE NO. PARTICULARS PAGE NO.

1.0 Foreword 1
2.0 General Requirement 1
3.0 Standards 2
4.0 Services to be performed by the 2
Equipment being furnished
5.0 Engineering Data and Drawings 11
6.0 Material/Workmanship 14
7.0 Design Improvements/Coordination 18
8.0 Quality Assurance Programme 19
9.0 Type Testing, Inspection & 20
Inspection Certificate
10.0 Tests 23
11.0 Packaging & Protection 23
12.0 Finishing of Metal Surfaces 24
13.0 Handling, Storing & Installation 26
14.0 Tools and Tackles 28
15.0 Auxiliary Supply 28
16.0 Support Structure 29
17.0 Clamps and Connectors including 30
Terminal Connectors
18.0 Control Cabinets, Junction Boxes, Terminal 32
Boxes & Marshalling Boxes for Outdoor Equipment
19.0 Auxiliary Switches 33
20.0 Terminal Blocks and Wiring 34
21.0 Lamps and Sockets 35
CLAUSE NO. PARTICULARS PAGE NO.

22.0 Bushings, Hollow Column Insulators, 36


Support Insulators
23.0 Motors 37
24.0 Technical Requirement of Equipments 39
Annexure-A Corona and Radio Interference Voltage 47
(RIV) Test
Annexure-B List of Specifications 50
SEC-GTR (GENERAL TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS)

1.0 FOREWORD
1.1 The provisions under this section are intended to supplement general
requirements for the materials, equipments and services covered
under other sections of Bid documents and is not exclusive.
However in case of conflict between the requirements specified in this
section and requirements specified under other sections, the
requirements specified under respective sections shall prevail.
2.0 GENERAL REQUIREMENT
2.1 The bidders shall submit the technical requirements, data and
information as per the technical data sheets provided in the Volume II
of bid documents.
2.2 The bidders shall furnish catalogues, engineering data, technical
information, design documents, drawings etc.
2.3 It is recognised that the bidders may have standardised on the use
of certain components, materials, processes or procedures different
from those specified herein. Alternate proposals offering similar
equipment based on the manufacturer’s standard practice will also be
considered provided such proposals meet the specified designs,
standard and performance requirements and are acceptable to the
HVPNL.
2.4 Except for lighting fixtures, wherever a material or article is specified
or defined by the name of a particular brand, Manufacturer or Vendor,
the specific name mentioned shall be understood as establishing type,
function and quality and not as limiting competition. For lighting
fixtures , makes shall be as defined in Section- Lighting System.
2.5 Equipment furnished shall be complete in every respect with all
mountings, fittings, fixtures and standard accessories normally
provided with such equipment and/or needed for erection, completion
and safe operation of the equipment as required by applicable codes
though they may not have been specifically detailed in the Technical
Specifications unless included in the list of exclusions. Materials and
components not specifically stated in the specification but which are

Page - 1
necessary for commissioning and satisfactory operation of the
switchyard/substation unless specifically excluded shall be deemed to
be included in the scope of the specification and shall be supplied
without any extra cost. All similar standard components/parts of
similar standard equipment provided, shall be inter-changeable with
one another.
3.0 STANDARDS
3.1 The works covered by the specification shall be designed, engineered,
manufactured, built, tested and commissioned in accordance with the
Acts, Rules, Laws and Regulations of India.
3.2 The equipment to be furnished under this specification shall conform
to latest issue with all amendments (as on the date of bid opening) of
standard specified under Annexure -B of this section, unless
specifically mentioned in the specification.
3.3 The Bidder shall note that standards mentioned in the specification
are not mutually exclusive or complete in themselves, but intended to
compliment each other.
3.4 The Bidder shall also note that list of standards presented in this
specification is not complete. Whenever necessary the list of
standards shall be considered in conjunction with specific IS/IEC.
3.5 When the specific requirements stipulated in the specifications exceed
or differ than those required by the applicable standards, the
stipulation of the specification shall take precedence.
3.6 Other internationally accepted standards which ensure equivalent or
better performance than that specified in the standards specified
under Annexure B / individual sections for various equipments shall
also, be accepted, however the salient points of difference shall be
clearly brought out in additional information schedule of Vol III along
with English language version of such standard. The equipment
conforming to standards other than specified under Annexure-B /
individual sections for various equipments shall be subject to
HVPNL’s approval.
3.7 The bidder shall clearly indicate in his bid the specific standards in
accordance with which the works will be carried out.
4.0 SERVICES TO BE PERFORMED BY THE EQUIPMENT BEING
FURNISHED
4.1 The lighting impulse voltage shall be 1050kVp.
4.2 All equipments shall also perform satisfactorily under various other
electrical, electromechanical and meteorological conditions of the site
of installation.
Page 2
4.3 All equipment shall be able to withstand all external and internal
mechanical, thermal and electromechanical forces due to various
factors like wind load, temperature variation, ice & snow, (wherever
applicable) short circuit etc for the equipment.
4.4 The bidder shall design terminal connectors of the equipment taking
into account various forces that are required to withstand.
4.5 The equipment shall also comply to the following:
a) All outdoor EHV equipments except marshalling kiosks shall be
suitable for hot line washing.
b) To facilitate erection of equipment, all items to be assembled at
site shall be “match marked”.
c) All piping, if any between equipment control cabinet/ operating
mechanism to marshalling box of the equipment, shall bear
proper identification to facilitate the connection at site.
4.6 Operating times of circuit breakers, protective relays and PLCC
equipment have been specified in respective sections.
4.7 EHV equipments and system shall be designed to meet the following
major technical parameters as brought out hereunder.
4.7.1 System Parameter

S.NO Description of 220 kV 66 kV 11 kV


parameters System System System

1. System operating 220kV 66kV 11kV


voltage

3. Rated frequency 50Hz 50Hz 50Hz

4. No. of phase 3 3 3

Page - 3
S.NO Description of 220 kV 66 kV 11 kV
parameters System System System
5. Rated Insulation
levels
i) Full wave impulse 1050kVp 325kVp 75kVp
withstand
voltage(1.2/50
micro sec.)

ii) Switching impulse - - -


withstandvoltage
(250/2500micro
sec.) dry and wet

Iii) One minute power 460kV 140kV 28kV


frequency dry and
wet withstand
voltage (rms)

6. Corona extinction 156kV - -


voltage

7. Max. radio 1000 500 -


interference micro- micro-
voltage for volt volt
frequency
between 0.5 MHz
and 2 MHz
156kV rms for
220kV system &
92 kV rms for
132kV system

8. Minimum 25 mm/kV 25 mm/kV 25 mm/kV


creepage distance (6125 (1813 (300
mm) mm) mm)

Page - 4
9.Min. clearances
S.NO Description of 220 kV 66 kV 11 kV
parameters System System System
i) Phase to phase (for 2100 mm 800 mm
Rod -
conductor
configuration)
and
(for
conductor
conductor
configuration)
ii) Phase to earth 2100 mm 800mm
iii) Sectional 5000 mm 3000 mm
clearances
10. Rated short circuit 40 kA 31.5 kA 25 kA
current for 1 sec.
duration

11. System neutral Effectively Effectively Effectively


earthing earthed earthed earthed

4.7.2 Major Technical Parameters

The major technical parameters of the equipments are given


below. For other parameters and features respective technical
sections should be referred.
(A) 100MVA 220/66KV Power Transformer
Maximum Continuous Capacity(MVA) ONAN ONAF OFAF
50 75 100
Rated Voltage HV LV
220KV 66KV
Percentage Impedance 12.5% at 100MVA Base
Vector Group YYO
Page 5
Insulation level HV LV Neutral
Lightning Impulse withstand voltage 950KV 325KV 170KV
Power Frequency withstand voltage 395KV 140KV 70KV

Page 6
(A) For 245 kV & 72.5 kV Circuit Breaker and Isolator
Rated voltage kV (rms) 245 72.5

Rated frequency (Hz) 50 50

No. of Poles 3 3

Design ambinet 50 50
temperature (°C)
Rated insulation levels :
1) Full wave impulse withstand voltage (1.2/50 micro sec.)

- between line ± 1050 kVp ±325 kVp


terminals and ground

- between terminals ± 1050 kVp ±325 kVp


with circuit breaker open

- between terminals ± 1200 kVp ±375 kVp


with isolator open

2) One minute power frequency dry and wet withstand voltage


- between line 460 kV (rms) 140 kV (rms)
terminals and ground

Page - 7
- between terminals 460 kV (rms) 140 kV (rms)
with circuit breaker open
- between terminals 530 kV (rms) 160kV (rms)
with Isolator open
Max. radio interference 1000 500
voltage (microvolts) for (at 156 kV (at 92 kV
frequency between 0.5 MHz rms) rms)
and 2 MHz in all positions of
the equipments.

Minimum creepage distance :-


Phase to ground (mm) 6125 1813
Between CB Terminals (mm) 6125 1813
System neutral earthing Effectively Effectively
earthed earthed
Seismic acceleration - 0.3g horizontal -
Rating of Auxiliary - 10 A at 220 V DC -
Contacts
Breaking capacity of 2 A DC with circuit time
Auxiliary Contacts constant of not less than 20 ms.
Phase to phase spacing (mm) 4000 (min.) 2000

Auxiliary Switch shall also Comply with other clauses of this chapter.

(B) FOR 245 kV & 72.5 kV CT/CVT/SA

Rated voltage kV (rms) 245 72.5


Rated frequency (Hz) 50 50
No. of poles 1 1

Page - 8
Design ambient temperature (°C) 50 50
Rated insulation levels :

1) Full wave impulse withstand voltage (1.2/50 micro sec.)


- between line terminals ± 1050 kVp ±325 kVp
and ground for CT and CVT
- for arrester housing ± 1050 kV peak ±325 kVp

2) One minute power frequency dry and wet withstand voltage


- between line terminals 460 kV rms 140 kV rms
and ground for CT and CVT

- for arrester housing

460 kV rms 140kV rms


Max. radio interference
1000 for CT/CVT 500
voltage (microvolts) for
500 for SA
frequency between 0.5 MHz
(at 156 kV (at 92 kV
and 2 MHz in all positions
rms) rms)
of the equipment.
Minimum creepage distance :-
Phase to ground (mm)
6125 1813
System neutral earthing
- Effectively earthed -
Seismic acceleration
- 0.3g horizontal -
Partial discharge for :-
- Surge arrester at
1.05 COV - Not exceeding 50 pc. -
- for CT/CVT
- Not exceeding 10 pc. –

(C) For 72.5 kV ISOLATOR


Rated Voltage kV (rms) 72.5

Rated frequency (Hz) 50

No. of Poles 3

Design ambinet 50
temperature (°C)
Rated insulation levels :
Page 9
P
1) Full wave impulse withstand voltage (1.2/50 micro sec.)
- between line ± 325 kVp
terminals and ground
- between terminals ± 375 kVp
with Isolator open
2) One minute power frequency dry and wet withstand
voltage
- between line 140 kV (rms)
terminals and ground
- between terminals 160 kV (rms)
with Isolator open
Minimum creepage distance :-
Phase to ground (mm) 1813
Seismic acceleration 0.3g horizontal.

Rating of Auxiliary Contacts 10 A at 220 V DC


Breaking capacity of 2 A DC with circuit
Auxiliary Contacts time constant of
not less than 20 ms.
Phase to phase spacing (mm) 2000
Auxiliary Switch shall also Comply with other clauses of this chapter.
(D) Technical Parameters of Bushings/Hollow Column
insulators/support insulators :
For For For

220 kV 66 kV 11 kV
System System System
(a) Rated Voltage (kV) 245 72.5 12

Page-10
(b) Impulse withstand ±1050 ±325 ±170
voltage(Dry& Wet) (kVp)
(c) Switching surge - - -
Withstandvoltage
(dry and wet) (kVp)
(d) Power frequency 460 140 70
withstand voltage
(dry and wet) (kV rms)

(e) Total creepage 6125 1813 900


distance (mm)
(f) Pollution Class-III Heavy (as per IEC 71) and as specified in
Section-2 for all class of equipment.
(g) Insulator shall also meet requirement of and IEC-815 for 220 kV
system, as applicable having alternate long & short
sheds.
5.0 ENGINEERING DATA AND DRAWINGS
5.1 The engineering data shall be furnished by the Bidder in
accordance with the Schedule for each set of equipment as specified
in the Bid Document.
5.2 The list of drawings/documents which are to be submitted to the
HVPNL as detailed below/in individual sections.
The Bidder shall necessarily submit all the drawings/ documents
unless anything is waived.
The Bidder shall submit 4 (four) sets of drawings/ design
documents /data/ test reports as may be required for the approval of
the HVPNL.
5.3 Drawings
5.3.1 All drawings submitted by the Bidder including those submitted at
the time of bid shall be in sufficient detail to indicate the type, size,
arrangement, material description, Bill of Materials, weight of each
component, break-up for packing and shipment, dimensions, internal &
the external connections, fixing arrangement required and any other
information specifically requested in the specifications.
5.3.2 Each drawing submitted by the Bidder shall be clearly marked with
the name of the HVPNL, the unit designation, the specifications
title, the specification number and the name of the Project. If
standard catalogue pages are submitted, the applicable items shall be
indicated therein. All titles, noting, markings and writings on the
drawing shall be in English. All the dimensions should be in metric
units.
Page-11
5.3.3 Further work by the Bidder shall be in strict accordance with these
drawings and no deviation shall be permitted without the written
approval of the HVPNL, if so required.
5.4 The review of these data by the HVPNL will cover only general
conformance of the data to the specifications and documents,
interfaces with the equipment provided under the specifications,
external connections and of the dimensions which might affect
substation layout. This review by the HVPNL may not indicate a
thorough review of all dimensions, quantities and details of the
equipment, materials, any devices or items indicated or the accuracy
of the information submitted. This review and/or approval by the
HVPNL shall not be considered by the Bidder, as limiting any of
his responsibilities and liabilities for mistakes and deviations from the
requirements, specified under these specifications and documents.
5.5 All manufacturing and fabrication work in connection with the
equipment prior to the approval of the drawings shall be at the
Bidder’s risk. The Bidder may make any changes in the
design which are necessary to make the equipment conform to the
provisions and intent of the Contract and such changes will again be
subject to approval by the HVPNL. Approval of Bidder’s
drawing or work by the HVPNL shall not relieve the Bidder of
any of his responsibilities and liabilities under the Contract.
5.6 All engineering data submitted by the Bidder after final process
including review and approval by the HVPNL shall form part of the
Contract Document and the entire works performed under these
specifications shall be performed in strict conformity, unless
otherwise expressly requested by the HVPNL in Writing.
5.7 Approval Procedure
The successful bidder shall submit 4 sets of drawings as detailed in
relevant specifications complete in all respects for approval to HVPNL as
per schedule given in bar-chart. The following schedule shall be
followed generally for approval and for providing final
documentation.

i) Approval/comments/ within 4 weeks of receipt of


by HVPNL on initial drawings by HVPNL.
submission
ii) Resubmission Within 3 (three) weeks
(where ever from date of comments
required) including both ways postal
time).
iii) Approval or comments Within 3 weeks of receipt
of resubmission.
iv) Furnishing of final sets of Before commissioning of S/Stn.
drawings (10 copies for each item
per sub-station)
Page-12
v) Furnishing of instruction & Before commissioning of S/Stn.
operation manual (10
copies for each item per
sub-station)

vi) Furnishing of CD-ROM of final Before commissioning of S/Stn.


Drawings (2 Nos. for each item
Per sub-station)

vii) Furnishing of CD-ROM of Instruction Before commissioning of S/Stn.


Manual & operation (2 Nos. for each item per
Sub-station)

(viii) Furnishing of CD-ROM of Automation Before commissioning of S/Stn.


Software(2 Nos. for each sub-station)

(ix) Furnishing of CD-ROM of Application


software for numerical relays (2 Before commissioning of S/Stn.
Nos. for each sub-station)

Page-13
NOTE :

(1) The Bidder may please note that all resubmissions must
incorporate all comments given in the earlier submission by the
HVPNL or adequate justification for not incorporating the
same must be submitted failing which the submission of
documents is likely to be returned.
(2) The drawings which are required to be referred frequently during
execution should be submitted on cloth lined paper. The list of
such drawings shall be intimated to the Bidder at the time
of approval of drawings.
(3) All major drawings should be submitted in Auto Cad.

(4) The instruction Manuals shall contain full details of drawings of


all equipment being supplied under this contract, their exploded
diagrams with complete instructions for storage, handling,
erection, commissioning, testing, operation, trouble shooting,
servicing and overhauling procedures.
(5) If after the commissioning and initial operation of the substation,
the instruction manuals require any modifications/
additions/changes, the same shall be incorporated and the
updated final instruction manuals shall be submitted by the
Bidder to the HVPNL.
(6) The Bidder shall furnish to the HVPNL catalogues of spare
parts.
5.8 List of drawings other than equipment drawings (detailed in relevant
specifications) to be submitted for approval shall be as under:-
1) Earthmat design and layout
2) Switchyard structural layout and section (for reference and record of
HVPNL).
3) DSLP Calculation and drawings (for reference and record of HVPNL).
4) Earth Resistivity measurement report (for reference & record of HVPNL).
5) Wiring diagram & cable schedule of each bay.
6) Trench Layout drawing.
6.0 MATERIAL/ WORKMANSHIP
6.1 General Requirement
6.1.1 Where the specification does not contain references to workmanship,
equipment, materials and components of the covered equipment, it is
essential that the same must be new, of highest grade of the best
quality of their kind, conforming to best engineering practice and
suitable for the purpose for which they are intended.
Page-14
6.1.2 Incase where the equipment, materials or components are indicated in
the specification as “similar” to any special standard, the HVPNL
shall decide upon the question of similarity. When required by the
specification or when required by the HVPNL the Bidder shall
submit, for approval, all the information concerning the materials or
components to be used in manufacture. Machinery, equipment,
materials and components supplied, installed or used without such
approval shall run the risk of subsequent rejection, it being
understood that the cost as well as the time delay associated with the
rejection shall be borne by the Bidder.

6.1.3 The design of the Works shall be such that installation, future
expansions, replacements and general maintenance may be
undertaken with a minimum of time and expenses. Each component
shall be designed to be consistent with its duty and suitable factors of
safety, subject to mutual agreements. All joints and fastenings shall
be devised, constructed and documented so that the component parts
shall be accurately positioned and restrained to fulfill their required
function. In general, screw threads shall be standard metric threads.
The use of other thread forms will only be permitted when prior
approval has been obtained from the HVPNL.
6.1.4 Whenever possible, all similar part of the Works shall be made to
gauge and shall also be made interchangeable with similar parts. All
spare parts shall also be interchangeable and shall be made of the
same materials and workmanship as the corresponding parts of the
Equipment supplied under the Specification. Where feasible, common
component units shall be employed in different pieces of equipment in
order to minimize spare parts stocking requirements. All equipment of
the same type and rating shall be physically and electrically
interchangeable.
6.1.5 All materials and equipment shall be installed in strict accordance with
the manufacturer’s recommendation(s). Only first-class work in
accordance with the best modern practices will be accepted.
Installation shall be considered as being the erection of equipment at
its permanent location. This, unless otherwise specified, shall include
unpacking, cleaning and lifting into position, grouting, levelling,

Page-15
aligning, coupling of or bolting down to previously installed equipment
bases/foundations, performing the alignment check and final
adjustment prior to initial operation, testing and commissioning in
accordance with the manufacturer’s tolerances, instructions and the
Specification. All factory assembled rotating machinery shall be
checked for alignment and adjustments made as necessary to re-
establish the manufacturer’s limits suitable guards shall be provided for
the protection of personnel on all exposed rotating and / or moving
machine parts and shall be designed for easy installation and
removal for maintenance purposes. The spare equipment(s) shall be
installed at designated locations and tested for healthiness.
6.1.6 The Bidder shall apply oil and grease of the proper specification to
suit the machinery, as is necessary for the installation of the
equipment. Lubricants used for installation purposes shall be drained
out and the system flushed through where necessary for applying the
lubricant required for operation. The Bidder shall apply all
operational lubricants to the equipment installed by him.
6.1.7 All oil, grease and other used in the Works/ Equipment
shall be purchased in India unless the Bidder has any special
requirement for the specific application of a type of oil or grease not
available in India.
6.1.8 A cast iron or welded steel base plate shall be provided for all rotating
equipment which are to be installed on a concrete base unless
otherwise agreed to by the HVPNL. Each base plate shall support
the unit and its drive assembly, shall be of design with pads for
anchoring the units, shall have a raised up all around and shall have
threaded in air connections, if so required.
6.1.9 Corona and radio interference voltage test for equipments shall be in
line with the procedure given at
Annexure-A.
6.2 Provisions For Exposure to Hot and Humid climate
Outdoor equipment supplied under the specification shall be suitable for
service and storage under tropical conditions of high temperature, high
humidity, heavy rainfall and environment favourable to the growth
of fungi and mildew. The indoor equipments located in
nonairconditioned areas shall also be of same type.

Page-16
6.2.1 Space Heaters

6.2.1.1 The heaters shall be suitable for continuous operation at 240 V as


supply voltage. On-off switch and fuse shall be provided.
6.2.1.2 One or more adequately rated thermostatically connected heaters
shall be supplied to prevent condensation in any compartment. The
heaters shall be installed in the compartment and electrical
connections shall be made sufficiently away from below the heaters to
minimize deterioration of supply wire insulation. The heaters shall be
suitable to maintain the compartment temperature to prevent
condensation.
6.2.1.3 Suitable anti condensation heaters with the provision of thermostat
shall be provided.
6.2.2 FUNGI STATIC VARNISH
Besides the space heaters, special moisture and fungus resistant
varnish shall be applied on parts which may be subjected or
predisposed to the formation of fungi due to the presence or deposit of
nutrient substances. The varnish shall not be applied to any
surface of part where the treatment will interfere with the operation or
performance of the equipment. Such surfaces or parts shall be
protected against the application of the varnish.
6.2.3 Ventilation opening
Wherever ventilation is provided, the compartments shall have
ventilation openings with fine wire mesh of brass to prevent the entry of
insects and to reduce to a minimum the entry of dirt and dust.
Outdoor compartment openings shall be provided with shutter type
blinds and suitable provision shall be made so as to avoid any
communication of air / dust with any part in the enclosures of the
Control Cabinets, Junction boxes and Marshalling Boxes, panels etc.
Page-17
6.2.4 Degree of Protection
The enclosures of the Control Cabinets, Junction boxes and
Marshalling Boxes, panels etc. to be installed shall provide degree of
protection as detailed here under:
a) Installed out door: IP- 55
b) Installed indoor in air conditioned area: IP-31 c)
Installed in covered area: IP-52
d) Installed indoor in non air conditioned area where possibility of
entry of water is limited: IP-41.
e) For LT Switchgear (AC & DC distribution Boards) : IP-52
The degree of protection shall be in accordance with IS:13947 (Part-I)
/ IEC-947 (Part-I) / IS 12063 / IEC 529. Type test report for degree
of protection test, on each type of the box shall be submitted for
approval.
6.3 RATING PLATES, NAME PLATES AND LABELS
6.3.1 Each main and auxiliary item of substation is to have permanently
attached to it in a conspicuous position a rating plate of non-corrosive
material upon which is to be engraved HVPNL PO No., manufacturer’s
name, year of manufacture, equipment name, type or serial number
together with details of the loading conditions under which the item of
substation in question has been designed to operate, and such diagram
plates as may be required by the HVPNL. The rating plate of each
equipment shall be according to IEC requirement.
6.3.2 All such nameplates, instruction plates, rating plates of transformers,
reactors, CB, CT, CVT, SA, Isolators, C & R panels and PLCC
equipments shall be bilingual with Hindi inscription first followed by
English. Alternatively two separate plates one with Hindi and the
other with English inscriptions may be provided.
6.4 FIRST FILL OF CONSUMABLES, OIL AND LUBRICANTS
All the first fill of consumables such as oils, lubricants, filling
compounds, touch up paints, soldering/brazing material for all copper
piping of circuit breakers and essential chemicals etc. which will be
required to put the equipment covered under the scope of the
specifications, into successful Operation, shall be furnished by the
Bidder unless specifically excluded under the exclusions in these
specifications and documents.
7.0 DESIGN IMPROVEMENTS / COORDINATION
7.1 The bidder shall note that the equipment offered by him in the bid
only shall be accepted for supply. However, the HVPNL or the
Bidder may propose changes in the specification of the equipment or
quality thereof and if the HVPNL & Bidder agree upon any
such changes, the specification shall be modified accordingly.
Page-18
7.2 If any such agreed upon change is such that it affects the price and
schedule of completion, the parties shall agree in writing as to the
extent of any change in the price and/or schedule of completion
before the Bidder proceeds with the change. Following such
agreement, the provision thereof, shall be deemed to have been
amended accordingly.
7.3 The Bidder shall be responsible for the selection and design of
appropriate equipments to provide the best co-ordinated performance
of the entire system. The basic design requirements are detailed out
in this Specification. The design of various components, subassemblies
and assemblies shall be so done that it facilitates easy field assembly andmaintenance.
7.4 The Bidder has to coordinate designs and terminations with the
agencies (if any) who are Consultants/Bidder for the HVPNL.
The names of agencies shall be intimated to the successful bidders.
7.5 The Bidder will be called upon to attend design co-ordination
meetings with the Engineer, other Bidder’s and the Consultants of
the HVPNL (if any) during the period of Contract. The Bidder
shall attend such meetings at his own cost at Panchkula or at mutually
agreed venue as and when required and fully cooperate with such
persons and agencies involved during those discussions.
8.0 QUALITY ASSURANCE PROGRAMME
8.1 To ensure that the equipment and services under the scope of this
Contract whether manufactured or performed within the Bidder’s Works
or at his Sub-Bidder’s premises or at the HVPNL’s site or at any other
place of Work are in accordance with the specifications, the Bidder shall
adopt suitable quality assurance programme to control such activities at
all points necessary. Such programme shall be broadly outlined by the
Bidder and finalised after discussions before the award of contract.
The detailed programme shall be submitted by the Bidder after the
award of contract and finally accepted by HVPNL after discussion.
However, in case detailed valid programme approved by HVPNL for the
equipment already exist, same would be followed till its validity. A
quality assurance programme of the Bidder shall generally cover the
following:
(a) His organisation structure for the management and
implementation of the proposed quality assurance programme :
(b) Documentation control system;
(c) Qualification data for bidder’s key personnel;
(d) The procedure for purchases of materials, parts components and
selection of sub-Bidder’s services including vendor analysis,
source inspection, incoming raw material inspection, verification
of material purchases etc.
(e) System for shop manufacturing and site erection controls
including process controls and fabrication and assembly control;
Page-19
(f) Control of non-conforming items and system for corrective
actions;
(g) Inspection and test procedure both for manufacture and field
activities.

(h) Control of calibration and testing of measuring instruments and


field activities;
(i) System for indication and appraisal of inspection status;
(j) System for quality audits;
(k) System for authorising release of manufactured product to the
Purcahser.
(l) System for maintenance of records;
(m) System for handling storage and delivery; and
(n) A quality plan detailing out the specific quality control measures
and procedures adopted for controlling the quality characteristics
relevant to each item of equipment furnished and/or services
rendered.
The HVPNL or his duly authorised representative reserves the right to
carry out quality audit and quality surveillance of the system and
procedure of the Bidder/his vendor’s quality management and control
activities.
8.2 Quality Assurance Documents
The Bidder would be required to submit all the Quality Assurance
Documents as stipulated in the Quality Plan at the time of HVPNL’s
inspection of equipment/material

9.0 TYPE TESTING, INSPECTION, TESTING & INSPECTION


CERTIFICATE
9.1 All equipment being supplied shall conform to type tests including
additional type tests as per technical specification and shall be subject
to routine tests in accordance with requirements stipulated under
respective sections. HVPNL reserves the right to witness any or all
the type tests. The Bidder shall intimate the HVPNL the
detailed program about the tests atleast three (3) weeks in advance in
case of domestic supplies & six (6) weeks in advance in case of
foreign supplies.
9.2 The reports for all type tests and additional type tests as per technical
specification shall be furnished by the Bidder alongwith equipment
/ material drawings. The type tests conducted earlier should have
either been conducted in accredited laboratory (accredited based on
ISO / IEC Guide 25 / 17025 or EN 45001 by the national accredition
body of the country where laboratory is located ) or witnessed by the
representative(s) of HVPNL or Utility. The test reports
submitted shall be of the tests conducted within last 7 (Seven) years
Page-20
prior to the date of bid opening. In case the test reports are of the
test conducted earlier than 7 (Seven) years prior to the date of bid
opening, the Bidder shall repeat these test(s) at no extra cost to the
HVPNL.
In the event of any discrepancy in the test reports i.e. any test report
not acceptable due to any design / manufacturing changes (including
substitution of components) or due to non-compliance with the
requirement stipulated in the Technical Specification or any/all
additional type tests not carried out, same shall be carried out without
any additional cost implication to the HVPNL.
9.3 The HVPNL intends to repeat the type tests and additional type
tests on transformers for which test charges shall be payable as per
provision of contract. The price of conducting type tests and additional
type tests shall be included in Bid price and break up of these shall be
given in the relevant schedule of Bid Proposal Sheets. These Type test
charges would be considered in bid evaluation. In case Bidder does not
indicate charges for any of the type tests or does not mention the name
of any test in the price schedules, it will be presumed that the
particular test has been offered free of charge. Further, in case any
Bidder indicates that he shall not carry out a particular test, his offer
shall be considered incomplete and shall be liable to be rejected.
For outdoor receptacles, trefoil clamps, diesel engine, alternator,
motors, cable glands and junction boxes, type testing and type test
reports as per relevant standard shall be submitted for HVPNL’s
approval.
9.4 The HVPNL, his duly authorized representative and/or outside
inspection agency acting on behalf of the HVPNL shall have at all
reasonable times free access to the Bidder’s/sub-vendors
premises or Works and shall have the power at all reasonable times to
inspect and examine the materials and workmanship of the Works
during its manufacture or erection if part of the Works is being
manufactured or assembled at other premises or works, the
Bidder shall obtain for the Engineer and for his duly authorized
representative permission to inspect as if the works were
manufactured or assembled on the Bidder’s own premises or
works. Inspection may be made at any stage of manufacture,
despatch or at site at the option of the HVPNL and the equipment
if found unsatisfactory due to bad workmanship or quality, material is
liable to be rejected.
Page - 21
9.5 The Bidder shall give the HVPNL /Inspector thirty (30) days
written notice of any material being ready for joint testing including
Bidder and HVPNL. Such tests shall be to the Bidder’s
account except for the expenses of the Inspector. The HVPNL
/inspector, unless witnessing of the tests is virtually waived, will
attend such tests within thirty (30) days of the date of which the
equipment is notified as being ready for test/inspection.
9.6 The HVPNL or Inspector shall, within fifteen (15) days from the
date of inspection as defined herein give notice in writing to the
Bidder, of any objection to any drawings and all or any equipment
and workmanship which in his opinion is not in accordance with the
Contract. The Bidder shall give due consideration to such
objections and shall either make the modifications that may be
necessary to meet the said objections or shall confirm in writing to
the HVPNL /Inspector giving reasons therein, that no modifications
are necessary to comply with the Contract.
9.7 When the factory tests have been completed at the Bidder’s or
Sub-Bidder’s works, the HVPNL/inspector shall issue a
certificate to this effect within fifteen (15) days after completion of
tests but if the tests are not witnessed by the HVPNL /Inspector,
the certificate shall be issued within fifteen (15) days of receipt of the
Bidder’s Test certificate by the HVPNL/Inspector. The completion of
these tests or the issue of the certificate shall not bind the HVPNL to
accept the equipment should, it, on further tests after erection, be
found not to comply with the Contract. The equipment shall be
dispatched to site only after approval of test reports and issuance of
Despatch Instruction by the HVPNL .
9.8 In all cases where the Contract provides for tests whether at the
premises or at the works of the Bidder or of any Sub-Bidder,
the Bidder except where otherwise specified shall provide free of
charge such items as labour, materials, electricity, fuel, water, stores,
apparatus and instruments as may be reasonably demanded by the
HVPNL /Inspector or his authorized representative to carry out
effectively such tests of the equipment in accordance with the
Contract and shall give facilities to the HVPNL /Inspector or to his
authorized representative to accomplish testing.

Page - 22
9.9 The inspection by HVPNL and issue of Inspection Certificate thereon
shall in no way limit the liabilities and responsibilities of the Bidder in
respect of the agreed quality assurance programme forming a part of the
Contract.
9.10 The HVPNL will have the right of having at his own expenses any other
test(s) of reasonable nature carried out at Bidder’s premises or at site
or in any other place in addition of aforesaid type and routine tests, to
satisfy that the material comply with the specification.
9.11 The HVPNL reserves the right for getting any field tests not specified in
respective sections of the technical specification conducted on the
completely assembled equipment at site. The testing equipments for these
tests shall be provided by the HVPNL.
10. TESTS
10.1 Pre-commissioning Tests
On completion of erection of the equipment and before charging, each
item of the equipment shall be thoroughly cleaned and then inspected
jointly by the HVPNL and the Bidder for correctness and
completeness of installation and acceptability for charging, leading to
initial pre-commissioning tests at Site. The list of pre-commissioning tests to
be performed and shall be included in the Bidder’s quality assurance
programme.
10.2 Commissioning Tests
10.2.1 The testing equipments required for testing and commissioning shall be
arranged by the Bidder.
10.2.2 The specific tests requirement on equipment shall be included in quality
assurance program.
10.2.3 The Bidder shall be responsible for obtaining statutory clearances
from the concerned authorities for commissioning the equipment and the
switchyard. However necessary fee shall be reimbursed by HVPNL
on production of requisite documents.
11.0 PACKAGING & PROTECTION
11.1 All the equipments shall be suitably protected, coated, covered or boxed
and crated to prevent damage or deterioration during transit, handling
and storage at Site till the time of erection. On request of the HVPNL,
the Bidder shall also submit packing details/associated drawing for
any equipment/material under his scope of supply, to facilitate the
HVPNL to repack any equipment/material at a later date, in case the
need arises. While packing all the materials, the limitation from the point
of view of availability of Railway wagon sizes in India should be taken
into account. The Bidder shall be responsible for any loss or damage
Page - 23
during transportation, handling and storage due to improper packing. Any
demurrage, wharfage and other such charges claimed by the
transporters, railways etc. shall be to the account of the Bidder.
HVPNL takes no responsibility of the availability of the wagons.
11.2 All coated surfaces shall be protected against abrasion, impact,
discolouration and any other damages. All exposed threaded portions
shall be suitably protected with either a metallic or a non-metallic
protecting device. All ends of all valves and pipings and conduit
equipment connections shall be properly sealed with suitable devices to
protect them from damage.
12.0 FINISHING OF METAL SURFACES
12.1 All metal surfaces shall be subjected to treatment for anti-corrosion
protection. All ferrous surfaces for external use unless otherwise
stated elsewhere in the specification or specifically agreed, shall be
hot-dip galvanized after fabrication. High tensile steel nuts & bolts and
spring washers shall be electro galvanized to service condition 4. All
steel conductors including those used for earthing/grounding (above
ground level) shall also be galvanized according to IS: 2629.

12.2 HOT DIP GALVANISING


12.2.1 The minimum weight of the zinc coating shall be 610 gm/sq. m and
minimum thickness of coating shall be 85 microns for all items thicker
than 6mm. For items lower than 6mm thickness requirement of
coating thickness shall be as per relevant Standard/Specification. For
surface which
shall be embedded in concrete, the zinc coating shall be 610 gm/sq. m
minimum.
12.2.2 The galvanized surfaces shall consist of a continuous and uniform
thick coating of zinc, firmly adhering to the surface of steel. The
finished surface shall be clean and smooth and shall be free from
defects like discoloured patches, bare spots, unevenness of coating,
spelter which is loosely attached to the steel globules, spiky deposits,
blistered surface, flaking or peeling off, etc. The presence of any of
these defects noticed on visual or microscopic inspection shall render
the material liable to rejection.
12.2.3 After galvanizing. no drilling or welding shall be performed on the
galvanized parts of the equipment excepting that nuts may be
threaded after galvanizing. Sodium dichromate treatment shall be
provided to avoid formation of white rust after hot dip galvanization.
12.2.4 The galvanized steel shall be subjected to six one minute dips in
copper sulphate solution as per IS-2633.

Page - 24
12.2.5 Sharp edges with radii less than 2.5 mm shall be able to withstand
four immersions of the Standard Preece test. All other coatings shall
withstand six immersions. The following galvanizing tests should
essentially be performed as per relevant Indian Standards.
- Coating thickness
- Uniformity of zinc
- Adhesion test
- Mass of zinc coating
12.2.6 Galvanized material must be transported properly to ensure that
galvanized surfaces are not damaged during transit. Application of
zinc rich paint at site shall not be allowed.
12.3 PAINTING
12.3.1 All sheet steel work shall be degreased, pickled, phosphated in
accordance with the IS-6005 “Code of practice for phosphating iron
and sheet”. All surfaces, which will not be easily accessible after shop
assembly, shall beforehand be treated and protected for the life of the
equipment. The surfaces, which are to be finished painted after
installation or require corrosion protection until installation, shall be
shop painted with at least two coats of primer. Oil, grease, dirt and
swaf shall be thoroughly removed by emulsion cleaning. Rust and
scale shall be removed by pickling with dilute acid followed by
washing with running water, rinsing with slightly alkaline hot water
and drying.
12.3.2 After phosphating, thorough rinsing shall be carried out with clean
water followed by final rinsing with dilute dichromate solution and
oven drying. The phosphate coating shall be sealed with application of
two coats of ready mixed, stoving type zinc chromate primer. The first
coat may be “flash dried” while the second coat shall be stoved.
12.3.3 After application of the primer, two coats of finishing synthetic enamel
paint shall be applied, each coat followed by stoving. The second
finishing coat shall be applied after inspection of first coat of painting.
12.3.4 The exterior colour of the paint shall be as per shade no: 631 (for
outdoor) & 631 (for indoor) of IS-5 and inside shall be glossy white for
all equipment, marshalling boxes, junction boxes, control cabinets,
panels etc. unless specifically mentioned under respective sections of
the equipments. Each coat of primer and finishing paint shall be of
slightly different shade to enable inspection of the painting. A small
quantity of finishing paint shall be supplied for minor touching up
required at site after installation of the equipments.

Page - 25
12.3.5 In case the Bidder proposes to follow his own standard surface finish
and protection procedures or any other established painting
procedures, like electrostatic painting etc., the procedure shall be
submitted alongwith the Bids for HVPNL’s review & approval.
12.3.6 The colour scheme as given below shall be followed for Fire Protection
and Air Conditioning systems
S.No. PIPE LINE Base colour Band
colour
Fire Protection System
1 Hydrant and Emulsifier system FIRE RED -
pipeline
2 Emulsifier system detection line FIRE RED Sea Green
- water
3 Emulsifier system detection line FIRE RED Sky Blue
-Air
4 Pylon support pipes FIRE RED
Air Conditioning System
5 Refrigerant gas pipeline - at Canary Yellow -
compressor suction
6 Refrigerant gas pipeline - at Canary Yellow Red
compressor discharge
7 Refrigerant liquid pipeline Dark -
Admiralty
Green
8 Chilled water pipeline Sea Green -
9 Condenser water pipeline Sea Green Dark Blue

The direction of flow shall be marked by → (arrow) in black colour.

Base Colour Direction of flow Band Colour

13.0 HANDLING, STORING AND INSTALLATION


13.1 In accordance with the specific installation instructions as shown on
manufacturer’s drawings or as directed by the HVPNL or his
representative, the Bidder shall unload, store, erect, install, wire, test
and place into commercial use all the equipment included in the
contract. Equipment shall be installed in a neat, workmanlike manner so
that it is level, plumb, square and properly aligned and oriented.
Commercial use of switchyard equipment means completion of all site
tests specified and energisation at rated voltage.

Page - 26
13.2 Bidder may engage manufacturer’s Engineers to supervise the
unloading, transportation to site, storing, testing and commissioning of
the various equipment being procured by them separately.
Bidder shall unload, transport, store, erect, test and commission the
equipment as per instructions of the manufacturer’s supervisory
Engineer(s) and shall extend full cooperation to them.
13.3 In case of any doubt/misunderstanding as to the correct interpretation
of manufacturer’s drawings or instructions, necessary clarifications
shall be obtained from the HVPNL. Bidder shall be held
responsible for any damage to the equipment consequent to not
following manufacturer’s drawings/instructions correctly.
13.4 Where assemblies are supplied in more than one section, Bidder
shall make all necessary mechanical and electrical connections
between sections including the connection between buses. Bidder
shall also do necessary adjustments/alignments necessary for proper
operation of circuit breakers, isolators and their operating
mechanisms. All components shall be protected against damage
during unloading, transportation, storage, installation, testing and
commissioning. Any equipment damaged due to negligence or
carelessness or otherwise shall be replaced by the Bidder at his
own expense.
13.5 Bidder shall be responsible for examining all the shipment and
notify the HVPNL immediately of any damage, shortage,
discrepancy etc. for the purpose of HVPNL’s information only. The
Bidder shall submit to the HVPNL every week a report detailing
all the receipts during the weeks. However, the Bidder shall be
solely responsible for any shortages or damages in transit, handling
and/or in storage and erection of the equipment at Site. Any
demurrage, wharfage and other such charges claimed by the
transporters, railways etc. shall be to the account of the Bidder.
13.6 The Bidder shall be fully responsible for the equipment/material
until the same is handed over to the HVPNL in an operating
condition after commissioning. Bidder shall be responsible for the
maintenance of the equipment/material while in storage as well as
after erection until taken over by HVPNL, as well as protection of
the same against theft, element of nature, corrosion, damages etc.
13.7 Where material / equipment is unloaded by HVPNL before the
Bidder arrives at site or even when he is at site, HVPNL by
right can hand over the same to Bidder and there upon it will be
the responsibility of Bidder to store the material in an orderly and
proper manner.

Page - 27
13.8 The Bidder shall be responsible for making suitable indoor storage
facilities, to store all equipment which require indoor storage.
13.9 The words ‘erection’ and ‘installation’ used in the specification are
synonymous.
13.10 Exposed live parts shall be placed high enough above ground to meet
the requirements of electrical and other statutory safety codes.
13.11 The design and workmanship shall be in accordance with the best
engineering practices to ensure satisfactory performance throughout
the service life. If at any stage during the execution of the Contract, it
is observed that the erected equipment(s) do not meet the above
minimum clearances as given in clause 4.7.1 the Bidder shall
immediately proceed to correct the discrepancy at his risks and cost.

13.12 Equipment Bases

A cast iron or welded steel base plate shall be provided for all rotating
equipment which is to be installed on a concrete base unless
otherwise agreed to by the HVPNL. Each base plate shall support the
unit and its drive assembly, shall be of a neat design with pads for
anchoring the units, shall have a raised lip all around, and shall have
threaded drain connections.

14.0 TOOLS AND TACKLES

The Bidder shall supply with the equipment one complete set of all
special tools and tackles for the erection, assembly, dis-assembly and
maintenance of the equipment. However, these tools and tackles shall
be separately, packed and brought on to Site.
15.0 AUXILIARY SUPPLY
15.1 The sub-station auxiliary supply is normally met through a system
indicated under section “Electrical & Mechanical Auxiliaries” having the
following parameters. The auxiliary power for station supply, including
the equipment drive, cooling system of any equipment, air-
conditioning, lighting etc shall be designed for the specified
Parameters as under. The DC supply for the instrumentation and
PLCC system shall also conform the parameters as indicated in the
following.

Page - 28
Normal Variation Frequency Phase Neutral
Voltage in Voltage in HZ /Wire
connection

415V +/- 10% 50 +/- 5% 3/ Solidly


4 Wire Earthed.
240V +/- 10% 50 +/- 5% 1/ Solidly
2 Wire Earthed.
220V 190V to240V DC - Isolated
2 wire
System
48V _ DC _ 2 wire
system
(+) earthed

Combined variation of voltage and frequency shall be limited to +/- 10%.


16.0 SUPPORT STRUCTURE
16.1 HVPNL has standardized the design of support structure and other
control dimensions as given in standard structural (design) drawings
enclosed with Section-Project. The Bidder shall strictly adhere to
these dimensions. The Bidder is required to supply standard
structures of various equipment. Bidder may also refer relevant
Clauses of Section (Structure) in this regard. All brackets, angels, stool
or other members necessary for attaching the operating mechanism
to the supporting structure shall be engineered and supplied by the
Bidder. The Support structures for all equipments shall be supplied by the
Bidder.
16.2 The support structures should be hot dip galvanised with minimum
610 gram/sq.m net of zinc.
16.3 In case of any deviation in this regard the bid is liable to be
considered technically non responsive and shall be liable to be
rejected.
16.4 Support structure shall meet the following mandatory requirements :
16.4.1 The minimum vertical distance from the bottom of the lowest
porcelain part of the bushing, porcelain enclosures or supporting

Page - 29
insulators to the bottom of the equipment base, where it rests on the
foundation pad shall be 2.55 metres.
17.0 CLAMPS AND CONNECTORS INCLUDING TERMINAL
CONNECTORS
17.1 All power clamps and connectors shall conform to IS:5561 & NEMA
CC1 and shall be made of materials listed below :
a) For connecting Aluminum alloy casting,
ACSR conductors conforming to designation A6
of IS:617 and all test shall
conform to IS:617
b) For connecting Bimetallic connectors made
equipment ter- from aluminum alloy casting,
minals made of conforming to designation A6
copper with of IS 617 with 2mm thick
ACSR conductors bimetallic liner and all test
shall conform to IS:617
c) For connecting G.I Galvanised mild steel shield
wire
d) i) Bolts, nuts & i) Electrogalvanised for sizes
Plain, washers below M12, for others hot
dip galvanised.
ii) Spring washers ii) Electro-galvanised mild
for items steel suitable for atleast
‘a’ to ‘c’ service condition-3 as per
IS:1573
17.2 Each equipment shall be supplied with the necessary terminals and
connectors, as required by the ultimate design for the particular
installation. The conductor terminations of equipment shall be either
expansion, sliding or rigid type suitable for single/twin Tarantulla
Conductor. The requirement regarding external corona and RIV as
specified for any equipment shall include its terminal fittings and the
equipment shall be factory tested with the connectors in position. If
corona rings are required to meet these requirements they shall be
considered as part of that equipment and included in the scope of work.
17.3 Where copper to aluminum connections are required, bi-metallic
clamps shall be used, which shall be properly designed to ensure that
any deterioration of the connection is kept to a minimum and
Page - 30
restricted to parts which are not current carrying or subjected to
stress. The design details of the joint shall be furnished to the
HVPNL by the Bidder.
17.4 Low voltage connectors, grounding connectors and accessories for
grounding all equipment as specified in each particular case, are also
included in the scope of Work.
17.5 No current carrying part of any clamp shall be less than 10 mm thick.
All ferrous parts shall be hot dip galvanized. Copper alloy liner of
minimum 2 mm thickness shall be cast integral with aluminum body
for Bi-metallic clamps.
17.6 All casting shall be free from blow holes, surface blisters, cracks and
cavities. All sharp edges and corners shall be blurred and rounded off.
17.7 Flexible connectors, braids or laminated straps made for the terminal
clamps for bus posts shall be suitable for both expansion or through
(fixed/sliding) type connection of 4" IPS AL. tube as required. In both
the cases the clamp height (top of the mounting pad to centre line of
the tube) should be same.
17.8 Clamp shall be designed to carry the same current as the conductor
and the temperature rise shall be equal or less than that of the
conductor at the specified ambient temperature. The rated current for
which the clamp/connector is designed with respect to the specified
reference ambient temperature, shall also be indelibly marked on each
component of the clamp/connector, except on the hardware.
17.9 All current carrying parts shall be designed and manufactured to have
minimum contact resistance.
17.10 Clamps and connectors shall be designed to be corona controlled.
Corona extinction voltage for 220 kV class clamps shall not
be less than 156 kV and R.I.V. level shall
not be more than 1000 micro volts at the test voltage specified in
respective sections.
17.11 Tests
17.11.1 Clamps and connectors should be type tested as per IS:5561 and shall
also be subjected to routine tests as per IS:5561. Following type test
reports on three samples of similar type shall be submitted for
approval as per clause 9.2 above except for sl. no.(ii) & (iii) for which
type test once conducted shall be applicable (i.e. the requirement of
test conducted within last five years shall not be applicable).
i) Temperature rise test (maximum temperature rise allowed is
35°C over 50°C ambient)
ii) Short time current test
Page - 31
iii) Corona (dry) and RIV (dry) test (for 220 KV voltage level clamps)
iv) Resistance test and tensile test
18.0 CONTROL CABINETS, JUNCTION BOXES, TERMINAL BOXES &
MARSHALLING BOXES FOR OUTDOOR EQUIPMENT
18.1 All types of boxes, cabinets etc. shall generally conform to & be
tested in accordance with IS-5039/IS-8623, IEC-439, as applicable,
and the clauses given below:
18.2 Control cabinets, junction boxes, Marshalling boxes & terminal boxes
shall be made of sheet steel or aluminum enclosure and shall be dust,
water and vermin proof. Sheet steel used shall be at least 2.0 mm
thick cold rolled or 2.5 mm hot rolled. The box shall be properly
braced to prevent wobbling. There shall be sufficient reinforcement to
provide level surfaces, resistance to vibrations and rigidity during
transportation and installation. In case of aluminum enclosed box the
thickness of aluminum shall be such that it provides adequate rigidity
and long life as comparable with sheet steel of specified thickness.
18.3 Cabinet/boxes shall be free standing floor mounting type, wall
mounting type or pedestal mounting type as per requirements. A
canopy and sealing arrangements for operating rods shall be provided
in marshalling boxes / Control cabinets to prevent ingress of rain
water.
18.4 Cabinet/boxes shall be provided with double hinged doors with
padlocking arrangements. The distance between two hinges shall be
adequate to ensure uniform sealing pressure against atmosphere. The
quality of the gasket shall be such that it does not get
damaged/cracked during the operation of the equipment.
18.5 All doors, removable covers and plates shall be gasketed all around
with suitably profiled EPDM gaskets. The gasket shall be tested in
accordance with approved quality plan. The quality of gasket shall be
such that it does not get damaged/cracked during the ten years of
operation of the equipment or its major overhaul whichever is earlier.
All gasketed surfaces shall be smooth straight and reinforced if
necessary to minimize distortion and to make a tight seal. Ventilating
Louvers, if provided, shall have screen and filters. The screen shall be
fine wire mesh made of brass.
18.6 All boxes/cabinets shall be designed for the entry of cables from
bottom by means of weather proof and dust-proof connections.
Boxes and cabinets shall be designed with generous clearances to
avoid interference between the wiring entering from below and any
terminal blocks or accessories mounted within the box or cabinet.
Page - 32
Suitable cable gland plate projecting at least 150 mm above the base
of the marshalling kiosk/box shall be provided for this purpose along
with the proper blanking plates. Necessary number of cable glands
shall be supplied and fitted on this gland plate. The gland shall project
at least 25mm above gland plate to prevent entry of moisture in cable
crutch. Gland plate shall have provision for some future glands to be
provided later, if required. The Nickel plated glands shall be dust
proof, screw on & double compression type and made of brass. The
gland shall have provision for securing armour of the cable separately
and shall be provided with earthing tag. The glands shall conform to
BS:6121.
18.7 A 240V, single phase, 50 Hz, 15 amp AC plug and socket shall be
provided in the cabinet with ON-OFF switch for connection of hand
lamps. Plug and socket shall be of industrial grade.
18.8 For illumination of a 20 Watts fluorescent tube or 15 watts CFL shall be
provided. The switching of the fittings shall be controlled by the door
switch.
18.9 All control switches shall be of rotary switch type and Toggle/piano
switches shall not be accepted.
18.10 Positive earthing of the cabinet shall be ensured by providing two
separate earthing pads. The earth wire shall be terminated on to the
earthing pad and secured by the use of self etching washer. Earthing
of hinged door shall be done by using a separate earth wire.
18.11 The bay marshalling kiosks shall be provided with danger plate and a
diagram showing the numbering/connection/feruling by pasting the
same on the inside of the door.
18.12 a) The following routine tests alongwith the routine tests as per
IS:5039 shall also be conducted:
i) Check for wiring
ii) Visual and dimension check
b) The enclosure of bay marshalling kiosk, junction box, terminal
box shall conform to IP-55 as per IS:13947 including application
of, 2.5 KV rms for 1 (one) minute, insulation resistance and
functional test after IP-55 test.
19.0 Auxiliary Switches (Applicable for isolators and circuit
breakers)
The following type test reports on auxiliary switches shall be
submitted for approval:
(a) Electrical endurance test - A minimum of 2000 operation for 2A
D. C. with a time constant greater than or equal to 20
Page - 33
millisecond with a subsequent examination of mV drop/visual
defects/temperature rise test.
(b) Mechanical endurance test. A minimum of 1,00,000 operations
with a subsequent checking of contact pressure test/visual
examination.
(c) Heat run test on contacts.
(d) IR/HV test etc.
20.0 TERMINAL BLOCKS AND WIRING
20.1 Control and instrument leads from the switchboards or from other
equipment will be brought to terminal boxes or control cabinets in
conduits. All interphase and external connections to equipment or to
control cubicles will be made through terminal blocks.
20.2 Terminal blocks shall be 650 V grade and have continuous rating to
carry the maximum expected current on the terminals. These shall be
of moulded piece, complete with insulated barriers, stud type
terminals, washers, nuts and lock nuts. Screw clamp, overall insulated,
insertion type, rail mounted terminals can be used in place of stud
type terminals. But preferably the terminal blocks shall be non-
disconnecting stud type equivalent to Elmex type CATM4, Phoenix
cage clamp type of Wago or equivalent.
20.3 Terminal blocks for current transformer and voltage transformer
secondary leads shall be provided with test links and isolating
facilities. The current transformer secondary leads shall also be
provided with short circuiting and earthing facilities.
20.4 The terminal shall be such that maximum contact area is achieved
when a cable is terminated. The terminal shall have a locking
characteristic to prevent cable from escaping from the terminal clamp
unless it is done intentionally.
20.5 The conducting part in contact with cable shall preferably be tinned or
silver plated however Nickel plated copper or zinc plated steel shall
also be acceptable.
20.6 The terminal blocks shall be of extensible design.
20.7 The terminal blocks shall have locking arrangement to prevent its
escape from the mounting rails.
20.8 The terminal blocks shall be fully enclosed with removable covers of
transparent, non-deteriorating type plastic material. Insulating barriers
shall be provided between the terminal blocks. These barriers shall not
hinder the operator from carrying out the wiring without removing the
barriers.

Page - 34
20.9 Unless otherwise specified terminal blocks shall be suitable for
connecting the following conductors on each side.
a) All circuits except Minimum of two of 2.5 sq mm
CT circuits copper flexible.
b) All CT circuits Minimum of 4 nos. of 2.5 sq mm
copper flexible.
20.10 The arrangements shall be in such a manner so that it is possible to
safely connect or disconnect terminals on live circuits and replace fuse
links when the cabinet is live.
20.11 Atleast 20 % spare terminals shall be provided on each
panel/cubicle/box and these spare terminals shall be uniformly
distributed on all terminals rows.
20.12 There shall be a minimum clearance of 250 mm between the
First/bottom row of terminal block and the associated cable gland
plate. Also the clearance between two rows of terminal blocks shall be
a minimum of 150 mm.
20.13 The Bidder shall furnish all wire, conduits and terminals for the
necessary inter phase electrical connections (where applicable) as well
as between phases and common terminal boxes or control cabinets.

20.14 All input and output terminals of each control cubicle shall be tested
for surge withstand capability in accordance with the relevant IEC
Publications, in both longitudinal and transverse modes. The
Bidder shall also provide all necessary filtering, surge protection,
interface relays and any other measures necessary to achieve an
impulse withstand level at the cable interfaces of the equipment
21.0 LAMPS AND SOCKETS
21.1 Lamps
All incandescent lamps shall use a socket base as per IS-1258, except in
the case of signal lamps.
21.2 Sockets
All sockets (convenience outlets) shall be suitable to accept both 5
Amp & 15 Amp pin round Standard Indian plugs. They shall be
switched sockets with shutters.
21.3 Hand Lamp:

Page - 35
A 240 Volts, single Phase, 50 Hz AC plug point shall be provided in
the interior of each cubicle with ON-OFF Switch for connection of hand
lamps.
21.4 Switches and Fuses:
21.4.1 Each panel shall be provided with necessary arrangements for
receiving, distributing, isolating and fusing of DC and AC supplies for
various control, signalling, lighting and space heater circuits. The
incoming and sub-circuits shall be separately provided with switchfuse
units. Selection of the main and Sub-circuit fuse ratings shall be such as
to ensure selective clearance of sub-circuit faults. Potential circuits for
relaying and metering shall be protected by HRC fuses.
21.4.2 All fuses shall be of HRC cartridge type conforming to IS:9228
mounted on plug-in type fuse bases. Miniature circuit breakers with
thermal protection and alarm contacts will also be accepted. All
accessible live connection to fuse bases shall be adequately shrouded.
Fuses shall have operation indicators for indicating blown fuse
condition. Fuse carrier base shall have imprints of the fuse rating and
voltage.
22.0 Bushings, Hollow Column Insulators, Support Insulators:
22.1 Bushings shall be manufactured and tested in accordance with IS:
2099 & IEC: 137 while hollow column insulators shall be manufactured
and tested in accordance with IEC 233/IS 5621. The support
insulators shall be manufactured and tested as per IS 2544/IEC 168
and IEC 273. The insulators shall also conform to IEC 815 as
applicable.
The bidder may also offer composite silicon insulator, conforming to
IEC-1109.
22.2 Support insulators, bushings and hollow column insulators shall be
manufactured from high quality porcelain. Porcelain used shall be
homogeneous, free from laminations, cavities and other flaws or
imperfections that might affect the mechanical or dielectric quality and
shall be thoroughly vitrified tough and impervious to moisture.
22.3 Glazing of the porcelain shall be uniform brown in colour, free from
blisters, burrs and similar other defects.
22.4 Support insulators/bushings/hollow column insulators shall be
designed to have ample insulation, mechanical strength and rigidity
for the conditions under which they will be used.
22.5 When operating at normal rated voltage there shall be no electric
discharge between the conductors and bushing which would cause
corrsion or injury to conductors, insulators or supports by the

Page - 36
formation of substances produced by chemical action. No radio
interference shall be caused by the insulators/bushings when
operating at the normal rated voltage.
22.6 Bushing porcelain shall be robust and capable of withstanding the
internal pressures likely to occur in service. The design and location
of clamps and the shape and the strength of the porcelain flange
securing the bushing to the tank shall be such that there is no risk of
fracture. All portions of the assembled porcelain enclosures and
supports other than gaskets, which may in any way be exposed to the
atmosphere shall be composed of completely non hygroscopic material
such as metal or glazed porcelain.
22.7 All iron parts shall be hot dip galvanised and all joints shall be air
tight. Surface of joints shall be trued up porcelain parts by grinding
and metal parts by machining. Insulator/bushing design shall be such
as to ensure a uniform compressive pressure on the joints.
22.8 Tests
In bushing, hollow column insulators and support insulataors shall
conform to type tests and shall be subjected to routine tests in
accordance with IS: 2099 & IS: 2544 & IS : 5621. The type test
reports shall be submitted for approval.
23.0 MOTORS
Motors shall be “Squirrel Cage” three phase induction motors of
sufficient size capable of satisfactory operation for the application and
duty as required for the driven equipment and shall be subjected to
routine tests as per applicable standards. The motors shall be of
approved make.
23.1 Enclosures
a) Motors to be installed outdoor without enclosure shall have hose
proof enclosure equivalent to IP 55 as per IS: 4691. For motors
to be installed indoor i.e. inside a box, the motor enclosure, shall
be dust proof equivalent to IP 44 as per IS: 4691.
b) Two independent earthing points shall be provided on opposite
sides of the motor for bolted connection of earthing conductor.
c) Motors shall have drain plugs so located that they will drain
water resulting from condensation or other causes from all
pockets in the motor casing.
d) Motors weighing more than 25 Kg. shall be provided with
eyebolts, lugs or other means to facilitate lifting.
23.2 Operational Features

Page - 37
a) Continuous motor rating (name plate rating) shall be at least ten
(10) percent above the maximum load demand of the driven
equipment at design duty point and the motor shall not be over
loaded at any operating point of driven equipment that will rise in
service.
b) Motor shall be capable at giving rated output without reduction
in the expected life span when operated continuously in the
system having the particulars as given in Clause 15.0 of this
Section.
23.3 Starting Requirements:
a) All induction motors shall be suitable for full voltage direct-on-
line starting. These shall be capable of starting and accelerating to
the rated speed alongwith the driven equipment without
exceeding the acceptable winding temperature even when the
supply voltage drops down to 80% of the rated voltage.
b) Motors shall be capable of withstanding the electrodynamic
stresses and heating imposed if it is started at a voltage of 110%
of the rated value.
c) The locked rotor current shall not exceed six (6) times the rated
full load current for all motors, subject to tolerance as given in
IS: 325.
d) Motors when started with the driven equipment imposing full
starting torque under the supply voltage conditions specified
under Clause 15.0 shall be capable of withstanding atleast two
successive starts from cold condition at room temperature and
one start from hot condition without injurious heating of winding.
The motors shall also be suitable for three equally spread starts
per hour under the above referred supply condition.
e) The locked rotor withstand time under hot condition at 110% of
rated voltage shall be more than starting time with the driven
equipment of minimum permissible voltage by at least two
seconds or 15% of the accelerating time whichever is greater. In
case it is not possible to meet the above requirement, the Bidder
shall offer centrifugal type speed switch mounted on the motor
shaft which shall remain closed for speed lower than 20% and
open for speeds above 20% of the rated speed. The speed
switch shall be capable of withstanding 120% of the rated speed
in either direction of rotation.
23.4 Running Requirements:
a) The maximum permissible temperature rise over the ambient
temperature of 50 degree C shall be within the limits specified in
Page - 38
IS:325 (for 3 - phase induction motors) after adjustment due to
increased ambient temperature specified.
b) The double amplitude of motor vibration shall be within the limits
specified in IS: 4729. Vibration shall also be within the limits
specified by the relevant standard for the driven equipment
when measured at the motor bearings.
c) All the induction motors shall be capable of running at 80% of
rated voltage for a period of 5 minutes with rated load
commencing from hot condition.
23.5 TESTING AND COMMISSIONING
An indicative list of tests is given below. Bidder shall perform any
additional test based on specialties of the items as per the field
Q.P./Instructions of the equipment Bidder or HVPNL without any extra
cost to the HVPNL. The Bidder shall arrange all instruments
required for conducting these tests along with calibration
certificates and shall furnish the list of instruments to the HVPNL for
approval.
(a) Insulation resistance.
(b) Phase sequence and proper direction of rotation.
(c) Any motor operating incorrectly shall be checked to determine
the cause and the conditions corrected.
24.0 TECHNICAL REQUIREMENT OF EQUIPMENTS
24.1 Circuit Breakers
a. The manufacturer(s) whose SF6 Circuit Breaker are offered should
have designed, manufactured tested as per IEC/IS or equivalent
standard supplied the same for the specified system voltage and which
are in satisfactory operation for at least 2 (two) years as on the date of
bid opening.
Or
b. The manufacturer(s) whose SF6 Circuit Breaker are offered who have
recently established production line in India for the specified system
voltage or above class, based on technological support of a parent
company or collaborator for the respective equipment(s) can also be
considered provided the parent company (Principal) or collaborator
meets qualifying requirements stipulated under clause no 24.1.a given
above.
And
Furnishes (jointly with parent company or collaborator) a legally
enforceable undertaking to guarantee quality, timely supply,
Page - 39
performance and warranty obligations as specified for the
equipment(s)
And
Furnishes a confirmation letter from the parent company or
collaborator along with the bid stating that parent company or
collaborator shall furnish performance guarantee for an amount of
10% of the cost of such equipment(s). This performance guarantee
shall be in addition to contract performance guarantee to be submitted
by the Bidder
24.2 Isolators
The manufacturer whose isolators are offered, should have designed,
manufactured, tested as per IEC/IS or equivalent standard and
supplied the isolator for the specified system voltage and fault level
and should be in satisfactory operation for at least 2 (two) years as on
the date of bid opening.
24.3 Instrument Transformers
The manufacturer whose instrument transformers are offered, should
have designed, manufactured & tested as per IS/IEC or equivalent
standard and supplied the same for the specified system voltage for
NCT, CT & CVT, PT and fault level in case of NCT, CT. These equipment
should be in
satisfactory operation for at least 2 (two) years as on the date of bid
opening.
24.4 Surge Arresters
The manufacturer whose Surge Arresters are offered should have
designed, manufactured and tested as per IEC/IS or equivalent
standard and supplied the Surge Arrester for the specified energy
capability with rated system voltage and which are in satisfactory
operation for at least 2 (two) years as on the date of bid opening.
24.5 1.1 kV Grade Power & Control Cables
24.5.1 Applicable for PVC Control Cable
The manufacturers, whose PVC control cables are offered, should
have designed, manufactured, tested and supplied in a single contract at
least 100 Kms of 1.1 kV grade PVC insulated control cables as on the
date of bid opening . Further the manufacturer should also have
designed, manufactured, tested and supplied at least 1 km of 16C x
2.5 Sq.mm or higher size as on the date of bid opening.
24.5.2 Applicable for PVC Power Cable
The manufacturer, whose PVC Power Cables are offered, should have
designed, manufactured, tested and supplied in a single contract
Page - 40
atleast 100 Kms of 1.1 kV or higher grade PVC insulated power cables as
on the date of bid opening . Further the manufacturer should also have
designed, manufactured, tested and supplied at least 1 km of 1C x 150
Sq. mm or higher size as on the date of bid opening.
24.5.3 Applicable for XLPE Power Cables
The Manufacturer, whose XLPE Power cables are offered, should have
designed, manufactured, tested and supplied in a single contract
atleast 25 Kms of 1.1 kV or higher grade XLPE insulated power cables as
on the date of bid opening . Further the manufacturer should also have
designed, manufactured, tested and supplied at least 1 km of 1C x 630
Sq. mm or higher size as on the date of bid opening.
24.6 LT Switchgear
24.6.1 The Manufacturer whose LT Switchgear are offered, should be a
manufacturer of LT Switchboards of the type and rating being offered. He
should have designed, manufactured, tested and supplied at least 50
nos. draw out circuit breaker panels, out of which at least 5 nos.
should have been with relay and protection schemes with current
transformer. He should have also manufactured at least 50 nos. motor
control center panels of the type and rating being offered which
should be in successful operation as on date of bid opening.
24.6.2 The Switchgear items (such as circuit breakers, fuse switch units,
contactors etc.), may be of his own make or shall be procured from
reputed manufacturers and of proven design. At least one hundred
circuit breakers of the make and type being offered shall be operating
satisfactory as on date of bid opening.
24.7 Battery and Battery Charger
24.7.1 Requirements for Battery Manufacturers
The manufacturer whose Batteries are offered should have designed,
manufactured and supplied DC Batteries of the type specified and
being offered, having a capacity of at least 600 AH and these shall be
operating satisfactorily for two years in power sector and/or industrial
installations as on date of bid opening.
24.7.2 Requirements for Battery Charger Manufacturers
The manufacturer, whose Battery Chargers are offered, should have
designed, manufactured and supplied Battery Chargers generally of
the type offered, with static automatic voltage regulators and having a
continuous output of atleast ten (10) KW and these should be in
successful as on the date of bid opening.
24.8 LT Transformers

Page - 41
The manufacturer, whose transformers are offered should have
designed, manufactured, type tested including short circuit test as per
IEC/IS or equivalent standards and supplied transformers of at least
33 kV class of 800 kVA or higher. The transformer should have been
in successful operation for at least 2 years as on the date of bid
opening.
24.9 Fire Fighting System
The bidder or his sub-vendor should have designed, supplied, tested,
erected and commissioned at least one number fire protection system
of the each type described in (i), (ii) and (iii) below in installations
such as power plants, substations, refineries, fertilizer plants or other
industrial or commercial installations. Such systems must have been
designed to the recommendations of Tariff Advisory Committee of
India or any other international accredited authority like (FOC, London
or NFPA, USA etc.) executed during last ten (10) years and should
have been in successful operation for at least 2 years as on the date
of bid opening.
(i) Automatic hydrant type fire protection system
(ii) Automatic high velocity or automatic medium velocity water
spray type fire protection system
(iii) Smoke detection system.
In case bidder himself do not meet the requirement of design, he can
engage a consultant(s) who must have designed i) Automatic hydrant
type fire protection system, ii) Automatic high velocity or automatic
medium velocity water spray type fire protection system and iii)
Smoke detection system, which must be in successful operation for at
least two years as on the date of bid opening.
24.10 Control and Relay Panels

24.10.1 The C&R Panels from a manufacturer who has designed,


manufactured, tested, installed and commissioned C&R panels which
are in satisfactory operation on 220KV system for at least 2 (two)
years on the date of bid opening can be offered.
The Bidder shall arrange C&R panels along with main relays from the
same manufacturer. However, one of the distance protection schemes
on each 220 kV feeder C&R panel and busbar protection on bus coupler
cum bus bar protection panel can be of other make also.
The manufacturer own make relays includes the relays manufactured by
their Principals /Associates.

Page - 42
24.11 PLCC
24.11.1 The manufacturer whose PLCC panels are offered should
have designed, manufactured, tested, supplied and
commissioned PLCC panels for the specified voltage level and
the same should be in successful operation for atleast 2
(two) years as on the date of bid opening.
24.11.2 The manufacturer whose line traps are offered should have
designed, manufactured tested, supplied and commissioned
similar linetraps for the specified voltage and fault level and
should be successful operation for atleast 2 (two) years as on
the date of bid opening.
24.11.3 PLCC Panels/line traps manufactured by the the manufacturer
meeting the requirements at Clause No. 24.11.1 & 24.11.2
except that the PLCC Panels/line traps manufactured, tested and
supplied by them is not in operation for the stipulated period can
also be offered provided the manufacturer furnishes an
undertaking jointly executed by him and his collaborator, who in
turn fully meets the requirement specified at 24.11.1 / 24.11.2
above as per the format enclosed in the bid document for
successful performance of the equipment offered.

25 . Operating and maintenance instructions:


These instructions shall give sufficient details to enable the HVPNL to maintain,
dismantle, reassemble and adjust all parts of the equipment and shall contain the
following information.
• table of content

• list of illustration

• introduction
the instruction shall contain:
-General technical characteristics
- a brief general description of the equipment and
- a definition of the technical terms used in subsequent pharagraphs of the instruction book

Detail description: This shall contain a complete and accurate description of the equipment, its
assembly and dismantling, as well as components and accessories. An accurate list stating
clearance, tolerances, temperatures, fits, etc. is required.
Page-43
Operating principles: A brief summary of the technical operating basis of the equipment,
including diagrams, circuit diagrams and similar ones.
Operating instructions: The instructions shall be accurate and easy to understand and shall
contain the sequence of individual manipulations required for operation of the equipment, table
lists and graphic presentation, should be used as far as possible for making the description
understood more readily. The operating and maintenance instructions shall be written and
prepared in English by the Bidder. All labels, instructions on equipment shall be written in English
by the Bidder. The following information for secondary equipment (distance relays, bus bar and
breaker failure relay, differential relay, pilot wire differential relay, over current relays etc…) shall
be given in CD-ROM’s in English
1. Operating manuals

2. Maintenance and setting instructions

3. Electrical circuits

4. Soft ware required for local and remote setting, testing, tele metering and getting
information from the relays.
Bidder shall give 5 sets of CD-ROM for secondary and primary equipment.

Testing and adjustment: The entire testing and adjustment procedure for equipment after
overhauls and during operation shall be dealt with Maintenance instructions are to be divided in
to three parts.
1. Preventive maintenance indicating the inspection required at regular intervals, the
inspection procedure, the routine cleaning and lubricating operations, the regular safety check
and similar steps.

2. Repair and adjustment, describing the inspections fitting and dismantling of parts, fault
tracing as well as repair and adjustment procedure.

3. Spare parts list, containing all the necessary data for ordering spare part.

26. MONTHLY PROGRESS REPORTS


For the control of the works by the HVPNL, the Bidder shall prepared detailed monthly
progress reports in following form:

These reports show the progress of material orders and procurement, material shipments,
construction and assembly works included in the contract. It will also include but not limited to
commencement dates, percentage of completion (with regards to the affected payments vs. Total
contract amount excluding escalation and to the physical realisation of works) and expected
completion dates.

Progress reports shall show manufacture of goods and construction operations for each
item of work the time work under the contract started to the anticipated completion date, there by
indicating the periods during which was previously underway as well as estimated future periods
of manufacture and construction operations.

Page-44
Monthly progress reports which are prepared at the end of each calendar month by the
Bidder shall be submitted to the HVPNL in three (3) copies and two (2) of them shall be given to
the HVPNL after approval of the regional department not later than seven (7) days after the close
of the reporting period.

The HVPNL has the right to withhold an amount not exceeding 1000 US$ or equivalent Rs which
are calculated by using selling exchange rates of the Central Bank of India per month from the
earnings of the Bidder if proper monthly progress report are not submitted to the HVPNL in due
course

MONTHLY PROGRESS REPORT

1 st page
Bidder
Sub-Bidder
Contract No
Bidder’s Site Engineering(s) name,
telephone and fax number
1. Civil Engineer(s)

2. Electrical Engineer (s)

3. Supervisor(s)

4. Site test engineer(s)

5. Commissioning engineer(s)
HVPNL’s Control Engineer(s) name,

Telephone and fax number


1. Civil Engineer:

2. Electrical Engineer
Second and the following page
Project Report No:
Month from.......to.....
CHAPTER-I General

CHAPTER-II

a) List of letters submitted by Consortium

b) List of letters send by the HVPNL

c) Photocopies of minutes of meeting

d) list of project submitted and stage


Page-45
(indicate revision)

CHAPTER-III Work activity

Delivery of goods (shipped, arrived to port,


At customs, arrived to side in good condition not)

* Supplied by Bidder
a) Local
b) Foreign

Civil Works
Erection
Site test
Overall function test

CHAPTER-IV Problem and difficulties confronted with indicating agreements and


disagreements

CHAPTER V Work program expected to be done next month

CHAPTER VI Monetary realization of the project and monthly monetary projection up to


completion.

Page - 46
ANNEXURE-A
CORONA AND RADIO INTERFERENCE VOLTAGE (RIV) TEST

1. General
Unless otherwise stipulated, all equipment together with its
associated connectors, where
applicable, shall be tested for external corona both by observing the
voltage level for the extinction of visible corona under falling power
frequency voltage and by measurement of radio interference voltage
(RIV).
2. Test Levels:
The test voltage levels for measurement of external RIV and for
corona extinction voltage are listed under the relevant clauses of the
specification.
3. Test Methods for RIV:
3.1 RIV tests shall be made according to measuring circuit as per
International Special-Committee on Radio Interference (CISPR)
Publication 16-1(1993) Part -1. The measuring circuit shall preferably be
tuned to frequency with 10% of 0.5 Mhz but other frequencies in the
range of 0.5 MHz to 2 MHz may be used, the measuring frequency being
recorded. The results shall be in microvolts.
3.2 Alternatively, RIV tests shall be in accordance with NEMA standard
Publication No. 107-1964, except otherwise noted herein.
3.3 In measurement of, RIV, temporary additional external corona
shielding may be provided. In measurements of RIV only standard
fittings of identical type supplied with the equipment and a simulation
of the connections as used in the actual installation will be permitted
in the vicinity within 3.5 meters of terminals.
3.4 Ambient noise shall be measured before and after each series of tests
to ensure that there is no variation in ambient noise level. If variation
is present, the lowest ambient noise level will form basis for the
measurements. RIV levels shall be measured at increasing and
decreasing voltages of 85%, 100%, 115% and 130% of the specified
RIV test voltage for all equipment unless otherwise specified. The
specified RIV test voltage for 220 kV is listed in the detailed
specification together with maximum permissible RIV level in
micro volts.

Page - 47
3.5 The metering instruments shall be as per CISPR recommendation or
equivalent device so long as it has been used by other testing
authorities.
3.6 The RIV measurement may be made with a noise meter. A calibration
procedure of the frequency to which noise meter shall be tuned shall
establish the ratio of voltage at the high voltage terminal to voltage
read by noisel meter.
4. Test Methods for Visible Corona
The purpose of this test is to determine the corona extinction voltage
of apparatus, connectors etc. The test shall be carried out in the same
manner as RIV test described above with the exception that RIV
measurements are not required during test and a search technique
shall be used near the onset and extinction voltage, when the test
voltage is raised and lowered to determine their precise values. The
test voltage shall be raised to 130% of RIV test voltage and
maintained there for five minutes. In case corona inception does not
take place at 130 %, test shall be stopped, otherwise test shall be
continued and the voltage will then be decreased slowly until all
visible corona disappears. The procedure shall be repeated at least 4
times with corona inception and extinction voltage recorded each
time. The corona extinction voltage for purposes of determining
compliance with the specification shall be the lowest of the four
values at which visible corona (negative or positive polarity)
disappears. Photographs with laboratory in complete darkness shall
be taken under test conditions, at all voltage steps i.e. 85%, 100%,
115% and 130%. Additional photographs shall be taken at corona
inception and extinction voltages. At least two views shall be
photographed in each case using Panchromatic film with an ASA
daylight rating of 400 with an exposure of two minutes at a lens
aperture of f/5.6 or equivalent. The photographic process shall be
such that prints are available for inspection and comparison with
conditions as determined from direct observation. Photographs shall
be taken from above and below the level of connector so as to show
corona on bushing, insulators and all parts of energised connectors.
The photographs shall be framed such that test object essentially, fills
the frame with no cut-off.
4.1 The test shall be recorded on each photograph. Additional photograph
shall be taken from each camera position with lights on to show the
relative position of test object to facilitate precise corona location from
the photographic evidence.
4.2 In addition to photographs of the test object preferably four
photographs shall be taken of the complete test assembly showing
Page - 48
relative positions of all the test equipment and test objects. These four
photographs shall be taken from four points equally spaced around
the test arrangement to show its features from all sides. Drawings of
the laboratory and test set up locations shall be provided to indicate
camera positions and angles. The precise location of camera shall be
approved by HVPNL’s inspector, after determining the best camera
locations by trial energisation of test object at a voltage which results
in corona.
4.3 The test to determine the visible corona extinction voltage need not
be carried out simultaneously with test to determine RIV levels.
4.4 However, both test shall be carried out with the same test set up and
as little time duration between tests as possible. No modification on
treatment of the sample between tests will be allowed. Simultaneous
RIV and visible corona extinction voltage testing may be permitted at
the discretion of HVPNL’s inspector if, in his opinion, it will not
prejudice other test.
5. Test Records:
In addition to the information previously mentioned and the
requirements specified as per CISPR or NEMA 107-1964 the following
data shall be included in test report:
a) Background noise before and after test.
b) Detailed procedure of application of test voltage.
c) Measurements of RIV levels expressed in micro volts at each
level.
d) Results and observations with regard to location and type of
interference sources detected at each step.
e) Test voltage shall be recorded when measured RIV passes
through 100 microvolts in each direction.
f) Onset and extinction of visual corona for each of the four tests
required shall be recorded.

Page - 49
ANNEXURE - B
LIST OF SPECIFICATIONS
GENERAL STANDARDS AND CODES
Wherever Indian Standards have been mentioned, equivalent IEC or any other
Internationally recognized standard will also be applicable.
India Electricity Rules
Indian Electricity Act
Indian Electricity (Supply) Act
Indian Factories Act
IS-5, - Colors for Ready Mixed Paints and Enamels.
IS-335, - New Insulating Oils.
IS-617, - Aluminium and Aluminium Alloy Ingots and
Castings for General Engineering Purposes
IS-1448 (P1 to P 145) - Methods of Test for Petroleum and its
Products.
IS-2071 (P1 to P3) - Methods of High Voltage Testing.
IS-12063 - Classification of degrees of protection
provided by enclosures of electrical
equipment.
IS-2165
P1:1997 - Insulation Coordination.
P2:1983
IS-3043 - Code of Practice for Earthing
IS-6103 - Method of Test for Specific Resistance
(Resistivity) of Electrical Insulating Liquids
IS-6104 - Method of Test for Interfacial Tension of Oil
against Water by the Ring Method
IS-6262 - Method of test for Power factor & Dielectric
Constant of Electrical Insulating Liquids.
IS-6792 - Method for determination of electric strength
of insulating oils.
IS-5578 - Guide for marking of insulated conductors.
IS-11353 - Guide for uniform system of marking &
identification of conductors & apparatus
terminals.
IS-8263 - Methods for Radio Interference Test on High
voltage Insulators.

Page - 50
IS-9224 (Part 1,2&4) - Low Voltage Fuses
IEC-60060 (Part 1 to P4) - High Voltage Test Techniques
IEC 60068 - Environmental Test
IEC-60117 - Graphical Symbols
IEC-60156, - Method for the Determination of the Electrical
Strength of Insulation Oils.
IEC-60270, - Partial Discharge Measurements.
IEC-60376 - Specification and Acceptance of New Sulphur
Hexafloride
IEC-60437 - Radio Interference Test on High Voltage
Insulators.
IEC-60507 - Artificial Pollution Tests on High Voltage
Insulators to be used on AC Systems.
IEC-60694 - Common Specification for High Voltage
Switchgear & Controlgear Standards.
IEC-60815 - Guide for the Selection of Insulators in respect
of Polluted Conditions.
IEC-60865 (P1 & P2) - Short Circuit Current - Calculation of effects.
ANSI-C.1/NFPA.70 - National Electrical Code
ANSI-C37.90A - Guide for Surge Withstand Capability (SWC)
Tests
ANSI-C63.21, - Specification for Electromagnetic Noise and Field
C63.3 - Strength Instrumentation 10 KHz to 1
GHZ
C36.4ANSI-C68.1 - Techniquest for Dielectric Tests
ANSI-C76.1/EEE21 - Standard General Requirements and Test
Procedure for Outdoor Apparatus Bushings.
ANSI-SI-4 - Specification for Sound Level Metres
ANSI-Y32-2/C337.2 - Drawing Symbols
ANSI-Z55.11 - Gray Finishes for Industrial Apparatus and
Equipment No. 61 Light Gray
NEMA-107T - Methods of Measurements of RIV of High
Voltage Apparatus
NEMA-ICS-II - General Standards for Industrial Control and
Systems Part ICSI-109

Page - 51
CISPR-1 - Specification for CISPR Radio Interference
Measuring Apparatus for the frequency
range 0.15 MHz to 30 MHz
CSA-Z299.1-1978h - Quality Assurance Program Requirements
CSA-Z299.2-1979h - Quality Control Program Requirements
CSA-Z299.3-1979h - Quality Verification Program Requirements
CSA-Z299.4-1979h - Inspection Program Requirements
TRANSFORMERS
IS:10028 (Part 2 & 3) - Code of practice for selection, installation &
maintenance of Transformers (P1:1993),
(P2:1991), (P3:1991)
IS-2026 (P1 to P4) - Power Transformers
IS-3347 (part 1 to Part 8) - Dimensions for Porcelain transformer Bushings
for use in lightly polluted atmospheres.
IS-3639 - Fittings and Accessories for Power
Transformers
IS-6600 - Guide for Loading of OIl immersed
Transformers.
IEC-60076 (Part 1 to Part 5) - Power Transformers
IEC-60214 - On-Load Tap-Changers.
IEC- 60354 - Loading Guide for Oil - Immersed power trans
formers
IEC-60076-10 - Determination of Transformer Sound Levels
General requirements for Distribution, Power
ANSI-C571280 - and Regulating Transformers
Test Code for Distribution, Power and
ANSI-C571290 - Regulation Transformers
Guide for Loading Oil-Immersed Power
ANSI-C5792 - Transformers upto and including 100 MVA
with 55 deg C or 65 deg C Winding Rise

Page - 52
ANSI-CG,1EEE-4 - Standard Techniques for High Voltage Testing
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
IEC-62271-100 - High Voltage Alternating Current Circuit
Breakers
IEC-60427 - Synthetic Testing of High Voltage alternating
current circuit Breakers.
IEC-61264 - Pressurized Hollow Column Insulators

CURRENT TRANSFORMERS, VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS AND COUPLING


CAPACITOR VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS
IS-2705- (P1 to P4) - Current Transformers.
IS:3156- (P1 to P4) - Voltage Transformers.
IS-4379 - Identification of the Contents of Industrial Gas
Cylinders
IEC-60044-1 - Current transformers.
IEC-60044-2 - Voltage Transformers.
IEC-60358 - Coupling capacitors and capacitor dividers.
IEC-60044-4 - Instrument Transformes : Measurement of
Partial Discharges
IEC-60481 - Coupling Devices for power Line Carrier
Systems.
ANSI-C5713 - Requirements for Instrument transformers
ANSIC92.2 - Power Line Coupling voltage Transformers
ANSI-C93.1 - Requirements for Power Line Carrier Coupling
Capacitors
BUSHING
IS-2099 - Bushings for Alternating Voltages above
1000V
IEC-60137 - Insulated Bushings for Alternating Voltages
above 1000V
SURGE ARRESTERS
IS-3070 (PART2) - Lightning arresters for alternating current
systems : Metal oxide lightning arrestors
without gaps.
IEC-60099-4 - Metal oxide surge arrestors without gaps

Page - 53
IEC-60099-5 - Selection and application recommendation
ANSI-C62.1 - IEE Standards for S A for AC Power Circuits
NEMA-LA 1 - Surge Arresters
CUBICLES AND PANELS & OTHER RELATED EQUIPMENTS
IS-722, IS-1248, IS-3231, 3231 (P-3) - Electrical relays for power system protection
IS:5039 - Distributed pillars for Voltages not Exceeding
1000 Volts.
IEC-60068.2.2 - Basic environmental testing procedures Part
2: Test B: Dry heat
IEC-60529 - Degree of Protection provided by enclosures.
IEC-60947-4-1 - Low voltage switchgear and control gear.
IEC-61095 - Electromechanical Contactors for household
and similar purposes.
IEC-60439 (P1 & 2) - Low Voltage Swtichgear and control gear
assemblies
ANSI-C37.20 - Switchgear Assemblies, including metal
enclosed bus.
ANSI-C37.50 - Test Procedures for Low Voltage Alternating
Current Power Circuit Breakers
ANSI-C39 - Electric Measuring instrument
ANSI-C83 - Components for Electric Equipment
IS: 8623: (Part I to 3) - Specification for Switchgear & Control
Assemblies.
NEMA-AB - Moulded Case Circuit and Systems
NEMA-CS - Industrial Controls and Systems
NEMA-PB-1 - Panel Boards
NEMA-SG-5 - Low voltage Power Circuit breakers
NEMA-SG-3 - Power Switchgear Assemblies
NEMA-SG-6 - Power switching Equipment
NEMA-5E-3 - Motor Control Centers
1248 (P1 to P9) - Direct acting indicating analogue electrical
measuring instruments & their accessories.
Disconnecting switches

Page - 54
IEC-60129 - Alternating Current Disconnectors (Isolators)
and Earthing switches
IEC-1129 - Alternating Current Earthing Switches Induced
Current switching
IEC-60265 (Part 1 & Part 2) - High Voltage switches
ANSI-C37.32 - Schedule of preferred Ratings, Manufacturing
Specifications and Application Guide for high
voltage Air Switches, Bus supports and switch
accessories
ANSI-C37.34 - Test Code for high voltage air switches
NEMA-SG6 - Power switching equipment
PLCC and line traps
IS-8792 - Line traps for AC power system.
IS-8793 - Methods of tests for line traps.
IS-8997 - Coupling devices for PLC systems.
IS-8998 - Methods of test for coupling devices for PLC
systems.
IEC-60353 - Line traps for A.C. power systems.
IEC-60481 - Coupling Devices for power line carrier
systems.
IEC-60495 - Single sideboard power line carrier terminals
IEC-60683 - Planning of (single Side-Band) power line
carrier systems.
CIGRE - Teleprotection report by Committee 34 & 35.
CIGRE - Guide on power line carrier 1979.
CCIR - International Radio Consultative Committee
CCITT - International Telegraph & Telephone
Consultative Committee
EIA - Electric Industries Association
Protection and control equipment
IEC-60051 : (P1 to P9) - Recommendations for Direct Acting indicating
analogue electrical measuring instruments and
their accessories.
IEC-60255 (Part 1 to part 23) - Electrical relays.
IEC-60297

Page - 55
(P1 to P4) - Dimensions of mechanical structures of the
482.6mm (19 inches) series.
IEC-60359 - Expression of the performance of electrical &
electronic measuring equipment.
IEC-60387 - Symbols for Alternating-Current Electricity
meters.
IEC-60447 - Man machine interface (MMI) - Actuating
principles.
IEC-60521 - Class 0.5, 1 and 2 alternating current watt
hour metres
IEC-60547 - Modular plug-in Unit and standard 19-inch
rack mounting unit based on NIM Standard
(for electronic nuclear instruments)
ANSI-81 - Screw threads
ANSI-B18 - Bolts and Nuts
ANSI-C37.1 - Relays, Station Controls etc.
ANSI-C37.2 - Manual and automatic station control,
supervisory and associated telemetering
equipment
ANSI-C37.2 - Relays and relay systems associated with
electric power apparatus
ANSI-C39.1 - Requirements for electrical analog indicating
instruments
MOTORS
IS-325 - Three phase induction motors.
IS-4691 - Degree of protection provided by enclosure
for rotating electrical machinery.
IEC-60034 (P1 to P19:) - Rotating electrical machines
IEC-Document 2 - Three phase induction motors
(Central Office) NEMA-MGI Motors and Generators
Electronic equipment and components
MIL-21B, MIL-833 & MIL-2750
IEC-60068 (P1 to P5) Environmental testing
IEC-60326 (P1 to P2) : Printed boards
Material and workmanship standards

Page - 56
IS-1363 (P1 to P3) - Hexagon headbolts, screws and nuts of
product grade C.
IS-1364 (P1 to P5) - Hexagon head bolts, screws and nuts of
products grades A and B.
IS-3138 - Hexagonal Bolts and Nuts (M42 to M150)
ISO-898 - Fasteners: Bolts, screws and studs
ASTM - Specification and tests for materials
Clamps & connectors
IS-5561 - Electric power connectors.
NEMA-CC1 - Electric Power connectors for sub station
NEMA-CC 3 - Connectors for Use between aluminium or
aluminum- Copper Overhead Conductors
Bus hardware and insulators
IS: 2121 - Fittings for Aluminum and steel cored Al
conductors for overhead power lines.
IS-731 - Porcelain insulators for overhead power lines
with a nominal voltage greater than 1000 V.
IS-2486 (P1 to P4) - Insulator fittings for overhead power lines
with a nominal voltage greater than 1000 V.
IEC-60120 - Dimensions of Ball and Socket Couplings of
string insulator units.
IEC-60137 - Insulated bushings for alternating voltages
above 1000 V.
IEC-60168 - Tests on indoor and outdoor post insulators of
ceramic material or glass for Systems with
Nominal Voltages Greater than 1000 V.
IEC-60233 - Tests on Hollow Insulators for use in electrical
equipment.
IEC-60273 - Characteristices of indoor and outdoor post
insulators for systems with nominal voltages
greater than 1000V.
IEC-60305 - Insulators for overhead lines with nominal
voltage above 1000V-ceramic or glass
insulator units for a.c. systems Characteristics
of String Insulator Units of the cap and
pintype.

Page - 57
IEC-60372 (1984) - Locking devices for ball and socket couplings
of string insulator units : dimensions and
tests.
IEC-60383 (P1 and P2) - Insulators for overhead lines with a nominal
voltage above 1000 V.
IEC-60433 - Characteristics of string insulator units of the
long rod type.
IEC-60471 - Dimensions of Clevis and tongue couplings of
string insulator units.
ANSI-C29 - Wet process porcelain insulators
ANSI-C29.1 - Test methods for electrical power insulators For
ANSI-C92.2 - insulators, wet-process porcelain and
toughened glass suspension type
ANSI-C29.8 - For wet-process porcelain insulators
apparatus, post-type
ANSI-G.8 - Iron and steel hardware
CISPR-7B - Recommendations of the CISPR, tolerances of
form and of Position, Part 1
ASTM A-153 - Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on iron and steel
hardware
Strain and rigid bus-conductor
IS-2678 - Dimensions & tolerances for Wrought
Aluminum and Aluminum Alloys drawn round
tube.
IS-5082 - Wrought Aluminum and Aluminum Alloy Bars.
Rods, Tubes and Sections for Electrical
purposes.
ASTM-B 230-82 - Aluminum 1350 H19 Wire for electrical
purposes
ASTM-B 231-81 - Concentric - lay - stranded, aluminum 1350
conductors
ASTM-B 221 - Aluminum - Alloy extruded bar, road, wire,
shape
ASTM-B 236-83 - Aluminum bars for electrical purpose (Bus-
bars)

Page - 58
ASTM-B 317-83 - Aluminum-Alloy extruded bar, rod, pipe and
structural shapes for electrical purposes
(Bus Conductors)
Batteries and batteries charger
Battery
IS:1651 - Stationary Cells and Batteries, Lead-Acid Type
(with Tubular Positive Plates)
IS:1652 - Stationary Cells and Batteries, Lead-Acid Type
(with Plante Positive Plates)
IS:1146 - Rubber and Plastic Containers for Lead-Acid
Storage Batteries
IS:6071 - Synthetic Separators for Lead-Acid Batteries
IS:266 - Specification for Sulphuric Acid
IS:1069 - Specification for Water for Storage Batteries
IS:3116 - Specification for Sealing Compound for Lead-
Acid Batteries
IS:1248 - Indicating Instruments
Battery Charger
IS:3895 - Mono-crystalline Semiconductor Rectifier Cells
and Stacks
IS:4540 - Mono-crystalline Semiconductor Rectifier
Assemblies and Equipment.
IS:6619 - Safety Code for Semiconductor Rectifier
Equipment
IS:2026 - Power Transformers
IS:2959 - AC Contactors for Voltages not Exceeding
1000 Volts
IS:1248 - Indicating Instruments
IS:2208 - HRC Fuses
IS:13947 (Part-3) - Air break switches, air break disconnectors &
fuse combination units for voltage not
exceeding 1000V AC or 1200V DC
IS:2147 - Degree of protection provided by enclosures
for low voltage switchgear and controlgear.
IS:6005 - Code of practice for phosphating of Iron and
Steel

Page - 59
IS:3231 - Electrical relays for power system protection
IS:3842 - Electrical relay for AC Systems
IS:5 - Colours for ready mix paint
IEEE-484 - Recommended Design for installation design
and installation of large lead storage batteries
for generating stations and substations.
IEEE-485 - Sizing large lead storage batteries for
generating stations and substations
Wires and cables
ASTMD-2863 - Measuring the minimum oxygen concentration
to support candle like combustion of plastics
(oxygen index)
IS-694 - PVC insulated cables for working voltages
upto and including 1100 Volts.
IS-1255 - Code of practice for installation and
maintenance of power cables, upto and
including 33 kV rating
IS-1554 (P1 and P2) - PVC insulated (heavy duty) electric cables
(part 1) for working voltage upto and
including 1100 V.
- Part (2) for working voltage from 3.3 kV upto
and including 11kV.
IS:1753 - Aluminium conductor for insulated cables
IS:2982 - Copper Conductor in insulated cables.
IS-3961 (P1 to P5) - Recommended current ratings for cables.
IS-3975 - Mild steel wires, formed wires and tapes for
armouring of cables.
IS-5831 - PVC insulating and sheath of electric cables.
IS-6380 - Elastometric insulating and sheath of electric
cables.
IS-7098 - Cross linked polyethylene insulated PVC
sheathed cables for working voltage upto and
including 1100 volts.
IS-7098 - Cross-linked polyethyle insulated PVC
sheathed cables for working voltage from
3.3kV upto and including 33 kV.

Page - 60
IS-8130 - Conductors for insulated electrical cables and
flexible cords.
IS-1753 - Aluminum Conductors for insulated cables.
IS-10418 - Specification for drums for electric cables.
IEC-60096 (part 0 to p4) - Radio Frequency cables.
IEC-60183 - Guide to the Selection of High Voltage Cables.
IEC-60189 (P1 to P7) - Low frequency cables and wires with PVC
insulation and PVC sheath.
IEC-60227 (P1 to P7) - Polyvinyl Chloride insulated cables of rated
voltages up to and including 450/750V.
IEC-60228 - Conductors of insulated cables
IEC-60230 - Impulse tests on cables and their accessories.
IEC-60287 (P1 to P3) - Calculation of the continuous current rating of
cables (100% load factor).
IEC-60304 - Standard colours for insulation for low-
frequency cables and wires.
IEC-60331 - Fire resisting characteristics of Electric cables.
IEC-60332 (P1 to P3) - Tests on electric cables under fire conditions.
IEC-60502 - Extruded solid dielectric insulated power
cables for rated voltages from 1 kV upto to 30 kV
IEC-754 (P1 and P2) - Tests on gases evolved during combustion of
electric cables.
AIR conditioning and ventilation
IS-659 - Safety code for air conditioning
IS-660 - Safety code for Mechanical Refrigeration
ARI:520 - Standard for Positive Displacement
RefrigerationCompressor and Condensing
Units
IS:4503 - Shell and tube type heat exchanger
ASHRAE-24 - Method of testing for rating of liquid coolers
ANSI-B-31.5 - Refrigeration Piping
IS:2062 - Steel for general structural purposes
IS:655 - Specification for Metal Air Dust
IS:277 - Specification for Galvanised Steel Sheets

Page - 61
IS-737 - Specification for Wrought Aluminium and
Aluminium Sheet & Strip
IS-1079 - Hot rolled cast steel sheet & strip
IS-3588 - Specification for Electrical Axial Flow Fans
IS-2312 - Propeller Type AC VentilationFans
BS-848 - Methods of Performance Test for Fans
BS-6540 Part-I - Air Filters used in Air Conditioning and General
Ventilation
BS-3928 - Sodium Flame Test for Air Filters (Other than
for Air Supply to I.C. Engines and
Compressors)
US-PED-2098 - Method of cold DOP & hot DOP test
MIL-STD-282 - DOP smoke penetration method
ASHRAE-52 - Air cleaning device used in general ventilation
for removing particle matter
IS:3069 - Glossary of Terms, Symbols and Units Relating
to Thermal Insulation Materials.
IS:4671 - Expanded Polystyrene for Thermal Insulation
Purposes
IS:8183 - Bonded Mineral Wool
IS:3346 - Evaluation of Thermal Conductivity properties
by means of guarded hot plate method
ASTM-C-591-69 - Standard specification for rigid preformed
cellular urethane thermal insulation
IS:4894 - Centrifugal Fans
BS:848 - Method of Performance Test for Centrifugal
Fans
IS:325 - Induction motors, three-phase
IS:4722 - Rotating electrical machines
IS:1231 - Three phase foot mounted Induction motors,
dimensions of
IS:2233 - Designations of types of construction and
mounting arrangements of rotating electrical
machines
IS:2254 - Vertical shaft motors for pumps, dimensions
of

Page - 62
IS:7816 - Guide for testing insulation resistance of
rotating machines
IS:4029 - Guide for testing three phase induction motors
IS:4729 - Rotating electrical machines, vibration of,
Measurement and evaluation of
IS:4691 - Degree of protection provided by enclosures
for rotating electrical machinery
IS:7572 - Guide for testing single-phase a.c. motors
IS:2148 - Flame proof enclosure for electrical apparatus
BS:4999 - Noise levels
(Part-51)
Galvanizing
IS-209 - Zinc Ingot
IS-2629 - Recommended Practice for Hot-Dip
galvanizing on iron and steel.
IS-2633 - Methods for testing uniformity of coating of
zinc coated articles.
ASTM-A-123 - Specification for zinc (Hot Galvanizing)
Coatings, on products Fabricated from rolled,
pressed and forged steel shapes, plates,
bars and strips.
ASTM-A-121-77 - Zinc-coated (Galvanized) steel barbed wire
Painting
IS-6005 - Code of practice for phosphating of iron and
steel.
ANSI-Z551 - Gray finishes for industrial apparatus and
equipment
SSPEC - Steel structure painting council
Fire protection system
Fire protection manual issued by tariff advisory committee (TAC) of India
HORIZONTAL CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS
IS:1520 - Horizontal centrifugal pumps for clear, cold
and fresh water
IS:9137 - Code for acceptance test for centrifugal &
axial pumps

Page - 63
IS:5120 - Technical requirement - Rotodynamic special
purpose pumps
API-610 - Centrifugal pumps for general services
- Hydraulic Institutes Standards
BS:599 - Methods of testing pumps
PTC-8.2 - Power Test Codes - Centrifugal pumps
DIESEL ENGINES
IS:10000 - Methods of tests for internal combustion
engines
IS:10002 - Specification for performance requirements for
constant speed compression ignition
engines for general purposes (above 20 kW)
BS:5514 - The performance of reciprocating compression
ignition (Diesel) engines, utilising liquid fuel
only, for general purposes
ISO:3046 - Reciprocating internal combustion engines
performance
IS:554 - Dimensions for pipe threads where pressure
tight joints are required on threads
ASME Power Test Code - Internal combustion engine PTC-17
- Codes of Diesel Engine Manufacturer’s
Association, USA
PIPING VALVES & SPECIALITIES
IS:636 - Non percolating flexible fire fighting delivery
hose
IS:638 - Sheet rubber jointing and rubber inserting
jointing
IS:778 - Gun metal gate, globe and check valves for
general purpose
IS:780 - Sluice valves for water works purposes (50 to
300 mm)
IS:901 - Couplings, double male and double female
instantaneous pattern for fire fighting
IS:902 - Suction hose couplings for fire fighting
purposes

Page - 64
IS:903 - Fire hose delivery couplings branch pipe
nozzles and nozzle spanner
IS:1538 - Cast iron fittings for pressure pipes for water,
gas and sewage
IS:1903 - Ball valve (horizontal plunger type) including
floats for water supply purposes
IS:2062 - SP for weldable structural steel
IS:2379 - Colour Code for the identification of pipelines
IS:2643 - Dimensions of pipe threads for fastening
purposes
IS:2685 - Code of Practice for selection, installation and
maintenance of sluice valves
IS:2906 - Sluice valves for water-works purposes (350
to 1200 mm size)
IS:3582 - Basket strainers for fire fighting purposes
(cylindrical type)
IS:3589 - Electrically welded steel pipes for water, gas
and sewage (150 to 2000 mm nominal
diameter)
IS:4038 - Foot valves for water works purposes
IS:4927 - Unlined flax canvas hose for fire fighting
IS:5290 - Landing valves (internal hydrant)
IS:5312 - Swing check type reflex (non-return) valves
(Part-I)
IS:5306 - Code of practice for fire extinguishing
installations and equipment on premises
Part-I - Hydrant systems, hose reels and foam inlets
Part-II - Sprinkler systems
BS:5150 - Specification for cast iron gate valves
MOTORS & ANNUNCIATION PANELS
IS:325 - Three phase induction motors
IS:900 - Code of practice for installation and
maintenance of induction motors
IS:996 - Single phase small AC and universal electric
motors

Page - 65
IS:1231 - Dimensions of three phase foot mounted
induction motors
IS:2148 - Flame proof enclosure of electrical apparatus
IS:2223 - Dimensions of flange mounted AC induction
motors
IS:2253 - Designations for types of construction and
mounting arrangements of rotating electrical
machines
IS:2254 - Dimensions of vertical shaft motors for pumps
IS:3202 - Code of practice for climate proofing of
electrical equipment
IS:4029 - Guide for testing three phase induction motors
IS:4691 - Degree of protection provided by enclosure
for rotating electrical machinery
IS:4722 - Rotating electrical machines
IS:4729 - Measurement and evaluation of vibration of
rotating electrical machines
IS:5572 - Classification of hazardous areas for electrical
(Part-I) installations (Areas having gases and
vapours)
IS:6362 - Designation of methods of cooling for rotating
electrical machines
IS:6381 - Construction and testing of electrical
apparatus with type of protection ‘e’
IS:7816 - Guide for testing insulation for rotating
machine
IS:4064 - Air break switches
IEC DOCUMENT 2 - Three Phase Induction Motor
(Control Office) 432
VDE 0530 Part I/66 - Three Phase Induction Motor
IS:9224 - HRC Fuses
(Part-II)
IS:6875 - Push Button and Control Switches
IS:694 - PVC Insulated cables
IS:1248 - Indicating instruments

Page - 66
IS:375 - Auxiliary wiring & busbar markings
IS:2147 - Degree of protection
IS:5 - Colour Relay and timers
IS:2959 - Contactors
PG Test Procedures
NFPA-13 - Standard for the installation of sprinkler
system
NFPA-15 - Standard for water spray fixed system for the
fire protection
NFPA-12A - Standard for Halong 1301 Fire Extinguishing
System
NFPA-72E - Standard on Antomatic Fire Detectors
Fire Protection Manual by TAC (Latest Edition)
NFPA-12 - Standard on Carbon dioxide extinguisher
systems
IS:3034 - Fire of industrial building:
Electrical generating and distributing stations code of practice
IS:2878 - CO2 (Carbon dioxide) Type Extinguisher
IS:2171 - DC (Dry Chemical Powder) type
IS:940 - Pressurised Water Type
D.G. SET
IS:10002 - Specification for performance requirements for
constant speed compression ignition
(diesel engine) for general purposes
IS:10000 - Method of tests for internal combustion
engines
IS:4722 - Rotating electrical machines-specification
IS:12063 - Degree of protection provided by enclosures
IS:12065 - Permissible limit of noise levels for rotating
electrical machines.
- Indian Explosive Act 1932
Steel structures
IS-228 (1992) - Method of Chemical Analysis of pig iron, cast
iron and plain carbon and low alloy steels.

Page - 67
Code of practice for use of structural steel in
overhead transmission line towers.
Code of practice for use of steel tubes in
general building construction
IS-802 (P1 to 3:) -
Dimensions for hot rolled steel beam, column
channel and angle sections.
IS-806 -
Covered electrodes for manual arc welding of
IS-808 - carbon of carbon manganese steel.
Code of Practice for use of metal arc welding
for general construction in Mild steel
IS-814 -
Code of practice for training and testing of
metal arc welders. Part 1 : Manual Metal arc
IS-816 -
welding.
Code of practice for design loads (other than
IS-817 -
earthquake) for buildings and structures.
Steel tubes for structural purposes.
IS-875 (P1 to P4) - Recommended practice for radiographic
examination of fusion welded butt joints in
steel plates.
IS-1161 -
Hexagonal head bolts, screws & nuts of
IS-1182 -
products grade C.
Hexagon headbolts, screws and nuts of
product grades A and B.
IS-1363 (P1 to P3) -
Technical supply condition for threaded steel
fasteners.
IS-1364 -
Methods for bend test.
IS-1367 (P1 to P18) - Method for tensile testing of steel products.
Criteria for earthquake resistant design of
IS-1599 - structures.
IS-1608 - Line Pipe.
IS-1893 - Steel for general structural purposes.
Code of practice for Radiographic testing. Single
IS-1978 - coil rectagular section spring washers for
IS-2062 - bolts, nuts and screws.
IS-2595 - Code of practice for ultrasonic pulse echo
testing by contact and immersion methods.
IS-3063 -

IS-3664 - Page - 68
Safety code for erection of structural steel
work.
Recommendations for metal arc welding of
IS-7205 - carbon and carbon manganese steels.
Inch series square and Hexagonal bolts and
screws
IS-9595 -
Square and hexagonal nuts
ANSI-B18.2.1 - Round head bolts
Specification for General Requirements for
ANSI-B18.2.2 - rolled steel plates, shapes, sheet piling and
bars of structural use
ANSI-G8.14 -
Specifications of structural steel
ASTM-A6 -
Specification for malleable iron castings
Practice for safeguarding against embilement
ASTM-A36 - of Hot Galvanized structural steel products
ASTM-A47 - and procedure for detaching embrilement
Specification for high strength low alloy
ASTM-A143 -
structural steel
Specification for low and intermediate tensile
strength carbon steel plates of structural
ASTM-A242 -
quality
Specification for Galvanized steel transmission
ASTM-A283 -
tower bolts and nuts
Specification for High strength low alloy
ASTM-A394 - structural manganese vanadium steel.
Specification for High strength low alloy
colombium- Vanadium steel of structural
ASTM-441 -
quality
Code for welding in building construction
ASTM-A572 -
welding inspection
Structural welding code
AWS D1-0 - American institute of steel construction
Manufactured graphite electrodes
AWS D1-1 -
AISC - Mild steel tubes, tubulars and other wrought
NEMA-CG1 - steel fittings
Piping and pressure vessels
IS-1239 (Part 1 and 2) - Page - 69
IS-3589 - Seamless Electrically welded steel pipes for
water, gas and sewage.
IS-6392 - Steel pipe flanges
ASME - Boiler and pressure vessel code
ASTM-A120 - Specification for pipe steel, black and hot
dipped, zinc-coated (Galvanized) welded and
seamless steel pipe for ordinary use
ASTM-A53 - Specification for pipe, steel, black, and hot-
dipped, zinc coated welded and seamless
ASTM-A106 - Seamless carbon steel pipe for high
temperature service
ASTM-A284 - Low and intermediate tensile strength carbon-
silicon steel plates for machine parts and
general construction.
ASTM-A234 - Pipe fittings of wrought carbon steel and alloy
steel for moderate and elevated temperatures
ASTM-S181 - Specification for forgings, carbon steel for
general purpose piping
ASTM-A105 - Forgings, carbon steel for piping components
ASTM-A307 - Carbon steel externally threated standard
fasteners
ASTM-A193 - Alloy steel and stainless steel bolting materials
for high temperature service
ASTM-A345 - Flat rolled electrical steel for magnetic
applications
ASTM-A197 - Cupola malleable iron
ANSI-B2.1 - Pipe threads (Except dry seal)
ANSI-B16.1 - Cast iron pipe flangesand glanged fitting.
Class 25, 125, 250 and 800
ANSI-B16.1 - Malleable iron threaded fittings, class 150 and
300
ANSI-B16.5 - Pipe flanges and flanged fittings, steel nickel
alloy and other special alloys
ANSI-B16.9 - Factory-made wrought steel butt welding
fittings
ANSI-B16.11 - Forged steel fittings, socket-welding and
threaded

Page - 70
ANSI-B16.14 - Ferrous pipe plug, bushings and locknuts with
piple threads
ANSI-B16.25 - Butt welding ends
ANSI-B18.1.1 - Fire hose couplings screw thread.
ANSI-B18.2.1 - Inch series square and hexagonal bolts and
screws
ANSI-B18.2.2 - Square and hexagonal nuts
NSI-B18.21.1 - Lock washers
ANSI-B18.21.2 - Plain washers
ANSI-B31.1 - Power piping
ANSI-B36.10 - Welded and seamless wrought steel pipe
ANSI-B36.9 - Stainless steel pipe
Other civil works standards
IS-269 - 43 grade ordinary port-land cement.
IS2721 - Galvanized steel chain link fence fabric
IS-278 - Galvanized steel barbed wire for fencing.
IS-383 - Coarse and fine aggregates from natural
sources for concrete.
IS-432 (P1 and P2) - Mild steel and medium tensile steel bars and
hard-dawn steel wire for concrete
reinforcement.
IS-456 - Code of practice for plain and reinforced
concrete.
IS-516 - Method of test for strength of concrete.
IS-800 - Code of practice for general construction in
steel.
IS-806 - Steel tubes for structural purposes.
IS-1172 - Basic requirements for water supply, drainage
and sanitation.
IS-1199 - Methods of sampling and analysis of concrete.
IS-1566 - Hard-dawn steel wire fabric for concrete
reinforcement.
IS-1742 - Code of Practice for Building drainage.
IS-1785 - Plain hard-drawn steel wire for pre stressed
concrete.

Page - 71
IS-1786 - High strength deformed Steel Bars and wires
for concrete reinforcement.
IS-1811 - Methods of sampling Foundry sands.
IS-1893 - Criteria for earthquake resistant design of
structures.
IS-2062 - Steel for general structural purposes.
IS-2064 - Selection, installation and maintenance of
sanitary appliances-code of practices.
IS-2065 - Code of practice for water supply in buildings.
IS-2090 - High tension steel bars used in prestressed
concrete.
IS-2140 - Standard Galvanized steel wire for fencing.
IS-2470 (P1 & P2) - Code of practice for installation of septic
tanks.
IS-2514 - Concrete vibrating tables.
IS-2645 - Integral cement waterproofing compounds.
IS-3025 (Part 1 to
Part 48) - Methods of sampling and test (Physical and
chemical) for water and waste water.
IS-4091 - Code of practice for design and construction
of foundations for transmission line towers
and poles.
IS-4111
(Part 1 to P5) - Code of practice for ancillary structures in
sewerage system.
IS-4990 - Plywood for concrete shuttering work.
IS-5600 - Sewage and drainage pumps.
National buiding code of India 1970
USBR E12 - Earth Manual by United States Department of
the interior Bureau of Reclamation
ASTM-A392-81 - Zinc/Coated steel chain link fence fabric
ASTM-D1557-80 - test for moisture-density relation of soils using
10-lb (4.5 kg) rame land 18-in. (457 mm)
Drop.
ASTM-D1586 - Penetration Test and Split-Barrel

Page - 72
(1967) - Sampling of Soils
ASTM-D2049-69 - Test Method for Relative Density of
Cohesionless Soils
ASTM-D2435 - Test method for Unconsolidated, (1982)
- Undrained Strengths of Cohesive Soils in
Triaxial Compression.
BS-5075 - Specification for accelerating Part I
Admixtures, Retarding Admixtures and Water
Reducing Admixtures.
CPWD - Latest CPWD specifications
ACSR MOOSE/AAC TARANTULLA
CONDUCTOR
Methods for Determination of BS:443-1969
IS:6745 Mass of zinc coating on zinc
coated Iron and Steel Articles
IS:8263 Methods for Radio Interference IEC:437-
1973 Test on High Voltage Insulators
NEMA:107-1964
CISPR
IS:209 Zinc Ingot BS:3436-1961
IS:398 Aluminum Conductors for IEC:209-1966
Part – V Overhead Transmission Purposes
IS: 5484 EC grade Aluminium rod produced by continuous casting rod
and rolling.
Reels and Drums forBS:1559-1949
IS:1778 Bare Conductors
Method for Tensile Testing ISO/R89-
IS:1521 1959 of steel wire
Recommended practice for
IS:2629 Hot dip Galvanising on Iron
and Steel.
Method for Testing Uniformity
IS:2633
of coating of zinc Coated Articles.
Hot dip galvanised coatings
IS:4826 on round steel wires ASTMA-472-729
IS:1841 EC grade Aluminium rod produced by rolling.
GALVANISED STEEL EARTHWIRE

Page - 73
IS:1521 Method for Tensile Testing ISO/R:89-1959
of Steel Wire
IS:1778 Reels and Drums for Bare Conductors
IS:2629 Recommended practice forHot Dip Galvanising
on Ironand Steel.
IS:2633 Methods for testing Uniformityof Coating of
Zinc Coated
Articles.
IS:4826 Hot dip Galvanised Coatings ASTM:A 475-
72a on Round Steel Wires BS:443-1969
IS:6745 Method for Determination BS:443-1969of mass
of Zinc Coating on Zinc coated Iron and Steel
Articles.
IS:209 Zinc ingot BS:3463-1961
IS:398 (Pt. I to Aluminum Conductors for BS:215 (Part-II)
P5:1992) overhead transmission purposes.
Lighting Fixtures and Accessories
(i) IS:1913 General and safety requirements for electric
lighting fittings.
(ii) IS:3528 Water proof electric lighting fittings.
(iii) IS:4012 Dust proof electric lighting fittings.
(iv) IS:4013 Dust tight proof electric lighting fittings.
(v) IS:10322 Industrial lighting fittings with metal
reflectors.
(vi) IS:10322 Industrial lighting fittings with plastic
reflectors.
(vii) IS:2206 Well glass lighting fittings for use under
ground in mines (non-flameproof type).
(viii) IS:10322 Specification for flood light.
(ix) IS:10322 Specification for decorative lighting outfits.
(x) IS:10322 Lumanaries for street lighting
(xi) IS:2418 Tubular flourescent lamps
(xii) IS:9900 High pressure mercury vapour lamps.
(xiii) IS:1258 Specification for Bayonet lamp flourescent
lamp.

Page - 74
(xiv) IS:3323 Bi-pin lamp holder tubular flourescent lamps.
(xv) IS:1534 Ballasts for use in flourescent lighting fittings.
(Part-I)
(xvi) IS:1569 Capacitors for use in flourescent lighting fittings.
(xvii)IS:2215 Starters for flourescent lamps.
(xviii)IS:3324 Holders for starters for tubular flourescent lamps
(xix) IS:418 GLS lamps
(xx) IS:3553 Water tight electric fittings
(xxi) IS:2713 Tubular steel poles
(xxii)IS:280 MS wire for general engg. purposes
Conduits, Accessories and Junction Boxes
(1) IS:9537 Rigid steel conduits for electrical wiring
(2) IS:3480 Flexible steel conduits for electrical wiring
(3) IS:2667 Fittings for rigid steel conduits for electrical wiring
(4) IS:3837 Accessories for rigid steel conduits for electrical wiring
(5) IS:4649 Adaptors for flexible steel conduits.
(6) IS:5133 Steel and Cast Iron Boxes
(7) IS:2629 Hot dip galvanising of Iron & Steel.
Lighting Panels
(1) IS:13947 LV Switchgear and Control gear(Part 1 to 5)

(2) IS:8828 Circuit breakers for over current protection for house
hold and similar installations.
(3) IS:5 Ready mix paints
(4) IS:2551 Danger notice plates
(5) IS:2705 Current transformers
(6) IS:9224 HRC Cartridge fuse links for voltage above 650V(Part-2)

(7)IS:5082 Wrought aluminium and Al. alloys, bars, rods, tubes


and sections for electrical purposes.
(8)IS:8623 Factory built Assemblies of Switchgear and Control
Gear for voltages upto and including 1000V AC and
1200V DC.
(9)IS:1248 Direct Acting electrical indicating instruments
Page - 75
Electrical Installation
(1) IS:1293 3 pin plug
(2) IS:371 Two to three ceiling roses
(3) IS:3854 Switches for domestic and similar purposes
(4) IS:5216 Guide for safety procedures and practices in electrical
work.
(5) IS:732 Code of practice for electrical wiring installation
(system voltage not exceeding 650 Volts.)
(6) IS:3043 Code of practice for earthing.
(7) IS:3646 Code of practice of interior illumination part II & III.
(8) IS:1944 Code of practice for lighting of public through fares.
(9) IS:5571 Guide for selection of electrical equipment for
hazardous areas.
(10) IS:800 Code of practice for use of structural steel in general
building construction.
(11) IS:2633 Methods of Testing uniformity of coating on zinc
coated articles.
(12) IS:6005 Code of practice for phosphating iron and steel.
(13) INDIAN ELECTRICITY ACT
(14) INDIAN ELECTRICITY RULES
LT SWITCHGEAR
IS:8623 (Part-I) Specification for low voltage switchgear and control
gear assemblies
IS:13947 (Part-I) Specification for low voltage switchgear and control
gear, Part 1 General Rules
IS:13947 (part-2) Specification for low voltage switchgear and control
gear, Part 2 circuit breakers.
IS:13947 (part-3) Specification for low voltage switchgear and control
gear.
Part 3 Switches, Disconnectors, Switch-disconnectors
and fuse combination units
IS:13947 (part-4) Specification for low voltage switchgear and control
gear.
Part 4 Contactors and motors starters.

Page - 76
IS:13947 (part-5) Specification for low voltage switchgear and control
gear.
Part 5 Control-circuit devices and switching elements
IS:13947 (part-6) Specification for low voltage switchgear and control
gear.
Part 6 Multiple function switching devices.
IS:13947 (part-7) Specification for low voltage switchgear and control
gear.
Part 7 Ancillary equipments
IS:12063 Degree of protection provided by enclosures
IS:2705 Current Transformers
IS:3156 Voltage Transformers
IS:3231 Electrical relays for power system protection
IS:1248 Electrical indicating instruments
IS:722 AC Electricity meters
IS:5578 Guide for Marking of insulated conductors
of apparatus terminals
IS:13703 (part 1) Low voltage fuses for voltage not exceeding 1000V
AC or 1500V DC Part 1 General Requirements
IS:13703 (part 2) Low voltage fuses for voltage not exceeding 1000V
AC or 1500V DC Part 2 Fuses for use of authorized
persons
IS:6005 Code of practice of phosphating iron and steel
IS:5082 Wrought Aluminum and Aluminum alloys for electrical
purposes
IS:2633 Hot dip galvanizing

Page - 77
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR SF6 GAS INSULATED SWITCHGEAR RATED 245 KV

1 General

1.1 Scope of supply

This specification applies to the design, fabrication, inspection, testing, delivery and installation of a
single phase, 245 kV, 50 Hertz, indoor gas insulated switchgear (GIS) as specified in the GELO.

The assembled equipment shall be capable of withstanding electrical, mechanical and thermal
ratings of the specified system. All joints and connections shall be able to withstand the forces of
expansion, vibration, contraction and specified seismic requirements without deformation,
malfunction and leakage.

The Vendor shall carefully check this specification and submit an itemized list of all exceptions,
deviations or comments for clarification with the proposal.

1.2 Information about power supply


1.2.1 AC supplies
AC power for heaters and other auxiliary loads will be provided on the base of 230 V, 50 Hz., 3-
phase circuits. The normal maximum and minimum voltages that will occur in the supply are
as specified. All equipment supplied shall be capable of running continuously or switching the
AC within the range of the normal maximum and minimum voltages specified.

1.2.2 DC supplies
DC supplies will be provided for all control, interlocking, alarm, indication and power supply
circuits. The normal maximum and minimum voltage levels that will occur on the supply are
specified. At least one single fused outlet from the substation DC distribution board will be
provided for each local control cabinet.

1.3 Information about the building provided


The building and all civil works will be supplied. Special attention will be given to an optimized
design with small space requirements and therefore the bidders input is essential. An overhead
crane will be supplied for installation and maintenance work. The bidder shall specify the lifting
capacity necessary for lifting of the heaviest piece during installation or maintenance.

2. Standards and codes

All electrical switchgear, the components of the control system, the protection scheme shall be
conform to the relevant IEC standards and publications of the latest issue.

The following standards are applicable in the relevant parts to the individual components of the gas
insulated switchgear:

IEC 62271-203 High-voltage metal enclosed switchgear for rated voltage of 72.5 kV
and above
IEC 62271-100 High-voltage alternating-current circuit breakers
IEC 62271-102 Alternating current disconnector and earthing switches
IEC 60694 Common clauses for high-voltage switchgear and control gear standards
IEC 60044 Current and voltage transformers
IEC 60060 High voltage test techniques
1
IEC 60071 Insulation coordination
IEC 60099 Surge arresters
IEC 60137 Bushings for alternating voltage above 1000V
IEC 60255 Electrical Relays
IEC 60265 High voltage switches
IEC 60270 Partial discharge measurement
IEC 60376 Specification and acceptance of new sulfur hexa-fluoride
IEC 60480 Guide to checking of sulphur hexafluoride (SF6)
IEC 60529 Degrees of protection
IEC 60815 Pollution levels
IEC 60859 Cable connections for GIS
IEC 61000 Electromagnetical compatibility (EMC)
IEC 61634 Use and handling of SF6
IEC 61639 Direct connections Transformer - GIS
IEC 60364/60479/60621/IEEE std. 80 Standards for station grounding.
CENELEC/SVDB Pressure vessel codes

3. Electrical ratings
The GIS equipment shall provide one enclosure per phase for all gas compartments. Three
phase enclosure or mixed design shall not be acceptable. The apparatus shall have the
following basic electrical and design characteristics:

i) Phase design Single Phase


ii) Rated system voltage kV 220
Maximum Rated system voltage kV 245
iii) Rated withstand voltages, phase to ground
a Rated lightning impulse withstand voltage (peak) kV 1050
b Rated switching impulse voltage (peak) kV 850
c Power frequency 1 minute (r.m.s.) KV 460
iv) Rated frequency Hz 50
v) Rated current A 3150
vi) Rated short-time current (r.m.s) (1s) KA 40
vii) Rated momentary current (peak) KA 100
viii) Rated short circuit breaking current kA 40
ix) Partial discharge level, complete bay 1.5 x U/√3 pC < 10
x) SF6 gas pressure at 68 ºF / 20 ºC , for reference, shall kPa
be submitted by the manufacturer.
xi) Material
a Enclosures Aluminum
b Conductors Aluminum

2
4. Equipment specification

4.1 Requirements of the gas insulated switchgear

It is understood that each manufacturer has his own particular GIS design concept and it is not
the purpose of this specification to impose unreasonable restrictions. However, in the interest of
safety, reliability and maintainability, the switchgear offered shall meet the following minimum
requirements stipulated herein.

4.1.1 General
The GIS switchgear shall be made of tubular Aluminum enclosures and filled with SF6 gas for
insulation. Enclosures shall be of single phase encapsulation for both the busbars and the
feeder section bays.

The switchgear shall be modular in design. Future extensions shall be easily accomplished by
adding extra feeders without dismantling any major parts of the equipment. As much as
possible parts shall be of standard manufacture with similar parts and assemblies being
interchangeable. The bidder is encouraged to offer an optimized physical layout regarding
minimized space requirements and maintainability.

Shipping sections which are tested in the factory shall be joint in the field by using bolted and
sealed flange connections only. Field welding of enclosures is not acceptable. The size of the
pre-assembled shipping sections shall be as big as practical for transportation. Complete
station assembly in the factory for testing purpose and disassembly for shipping is not
preferred.

The flanged connections shall have gas seals between the flange surfaces. For outdoor
application, suitable means shall be used to protect the gas seal from the external environment.
Connections including bolts and nuts shall be adequately protected from corrosion and easy
accessible with the proper tools.

4.1.2 Sectionalization
The switchgear must be sectionalized, with gas tight barriers between sections or
compartments. The sections shall be designed

i) to minimize operational shut down when the gas pressure is reduced due to leakage
or for maintenance purposes.

ii) to minimize the quantity of gas that has to be evacuated and recharged before and
after maintaining any item of equipment.

Each breaker bay shall consist as minimum of the following gas tight individual monitored
zones:
i) Circuit breaker
ii) Bus section
iii) Feeder section
iv) Potential trafo

Sectionalisation shall ensure that Circuit breaker enclosure will not include any other
equipment in its gas compartment. Continuous bus lengths with out gas segregation shall not be
acceptable.

In case of double bus-bar or one and half configurations, equipment redundancy shall be
maintained by way of selective mechanical arrangement of the gas compartments.

Each section shall be provided with necessary valves to allow evacuation and refill of gas
without evacuation of any other section. To reduce the probability of leaks, connections with
pipes between gas compartments are not acceptable.
3
The gas system proposed shall be submitted with the proposal. External fixtures shall be of
non-corrosive material and be capped where required.

For the purpose of gas monitoring and maintenance, the GIS is provided with a gas density
switch in each gas compartment.

4.1.3 Conductor Type and contacts


Conductors shall be made of extruded aluminum suitable for the specified voltage and current
ratings. The electrical connections between the various gas sections shall be made by means
of multiple contact connectors (plug-in type) so that electrical connection is automatically
achieved when bolting one section to an other. Field welding of the conductor is not acceptable.
The surface of the connector fingers and conductor tubes on such connections shall be silver
plated.

4.1.4 Support insulators and section barriers


Support insulators shall be used to maintain the conductors and enclosure in proper relation.
Barrier insulators which are employed to isolate gas compartments and non-barrier insulators
which allow the gas pressure to equalize.

The insulators shall be manufactured from high quality epoxy resin, free of all voids and be
designed to reduce the electrical stress on the insulators to a minimum.

Insulator cones shall be embedded in full return current carrying metal fixing rings in order to
avoid mechanical stresses to the cast resin part and to impart full conductivity across the flange
connection.

The mechanical strength must be sufficient to ensure the conductor’s space requirements and
clearances when short circuit faults occur. In addition, the gas barrier insulators sealing to the
conductors and the enclosure wall shall be designed to withstand the maximum pressure
differential that could occur across the barrier, i.e. maximum operating pressure at one side and
vacuum on the other side.

Tests shall be carried out during the manufacturing of the switchgear to ensure that all
insulators are free of partial discharge at a voltage which is at least 10% higher than the rated
voltage.

4.1.5 Gas system


The GIS shall be furnished with sufficient sulfur hexa-fluoride (SF6 ) gas to pressurize the
complete system in a sequential approach, one zone or compartment at a time to the rated
nominal density. An additional quantity of gas equal to 10% of the system requirements shall be
furnished.

Maximum water content of SF6 -gas in GIS, within guarantee period:


CB ≤ 50 PPM (weight)
Others ≤ 75 PPM (weight)

During commissioning the dew point of SF6 gas shall be measured and documented.

The Gas loss of the switchgear shall be in no case higher than 0.5% per year. Clear
instructions shall be provided by the vendor about handling, recycling and treatment of new and
used SF6 gas. Components may be filled with N2 for transportation and refilled with SF6 on site.

4.1.5.1 Gas seals

All gas seals shall be designed to ensure that leakage rates are kept to an absolute minimum
under all normal pressure, temperature, electrical load and fault conditions. All gas seals
located in the flanges of the equipment enclosures shall be of the O-ring type. The material and
method of sealing used shall be stated in the tender.
4
4.1.5.2 SF6 gas density and pressure

The rated pressure of the SF6 insulating gas in the GIS equipment shall be as low as possible
while still meeting the requirements for electrical insulation and space limitations to reduce the
effects of leaks and to ensure that there is no chance of the gas liquefying at the lowest
ambient temperature. The initial gas pressure or density at the time of charging the equipment
shall provide a 10% margin above the minimum allowable operating pressure for the plant to be
safely operated for a reasonably long period before recharging is necessary.

4.1.5.3 SF6 gas quality

The GIS shall be designed for use with SF6. All SF6 gas supplied as part of the contract shall
comply with the requirements of IEC 60376 at a minimum. Certificate of poison inspection shall be
appended to wholesale gas.

4.1.5.4 Gas monitoring devices

Temperature-compensated gas density monitoring devices shall be provided for each gas
compartment. Any pipe-work connection between the various gas compartments and a
centralised measuring device shall be strictly avoided. The devices shall provide continuous
and automatic monitoring of the density of the gas. The monitoring device shall have two alarm
settings. These shall be set so that:

a) advanced warning can be given that the gas density is approaching an unacceptably low
level

b) after an urgent alarm, measures can be taken to immediately isolate the particular
compartment electrically by tripping circuit breakers and opening disconnect switches.

4.1.5.5 SF6 Gas treatment


Under normal operating conditions it shall not be necessary to treat the insulating SF6 gas
between major overhauls. Self sealing vacuum couplings shall be provided on all gas
compartments to facilitate filling and recharging. In all gas compartments permanent efficient
filters and drying agent shall be at least effective for the duration of time between major
overhauls.

4.1.5.6 Supply of SF6 gas

The contract shall include the supply of all SF6 gas necessary for filling and putting in
commercial operation the complete switchgear installation.

4.1.5.7 Gas filling - evacuation plant

All apparatus necessary for filling and evacuating the SF6 gas into and from the switchgear
equipment shall be supplied by the Bidder to enable any maintenance work to be carried
out.

The apparatus for filling or evacuating all gases to be used shall be provided with all necessary
hoses, couplings, flexible tubes and valves for coupling with the switchgear equipment. Details of
the proposed gas handling apparatus shall be provided.

4.1.6 Pressure relief


Automatic external pressure relief devices shall be incorporated in the basic design as a
precaution against bursting of enclosure. Internal pressure relief devices shall be not
acceptable.

The bursting pressure of the relief device shall be effectively coordinated with the rated gas
5
pressure and the pressure rise due to arcing to avoid any mal-operation in normal operating
conditions. Deflection devices shall be installed to ensure that personnel will not be
endangered. Pressure relief shall be by means of a metallic bursting disc system with a preset
opening pressure. For better gas tightness, bursting discs made of graphite or non-metallic
material shall be avoided.

4.1.7 Switchgear enclosures


The metal enclosures for the GIS equipment modules shall be made from Aluminum alloy and
tubular in construction. The vendor shall state the material used for his particular design. All
flanges shall be directly bolted together with good metallic contact to make enclosures
equipotential. Insulators or insulating material between flanges shall be avoided in order to get the
best electrical connection between the different enclosure modules. Flange connections via
external cross-bonding are not allowed.

Enclosures shall withstand normal and transient pressure in operation. They shall be designed
and manufactured according to the related standards to guarantee safety and reliability of
material, construction, welding technology and testing.

The material and thickness of enclosure shall be such as to withstand an internal flashover without
burn through for a period of 500 ms till the back-up relay protection clears the fault. The material
shall be such that it has no effect of environment as well as from the by-products of SF6
breakdown under arcing condition.

The gas-filled enclosures shall comply to the pressure vessel code applied in the country of
manufacturer.

4.1.8 Expansion joints and flexible connection


Expansion and installation alignment shall be considered in the design of the bus and
enclosure. The continuity of service during thermal expansion / contraction and vibrations shall be
ensured. If required, expansion joints shall be provided with compensators for the enclosure and
sliding plug-in contacts for the conductors. The number and position of expansion joints or flexible
connections are to be determined by the manufacturer to ensure that the complete installation
will not be subject to expansion stresses which could lead to distortion or failure of any piece of
the SF6 equipment, support structures or foundations.

Also, expansion joints, flexible connections and adjustable mountings shall be provided to
compensate for reasonable manufacturing and construction tolerances in the associated
equipment to which the GIS may be connected. This is to ensure that unreasonably excessive
accuracy is not required when installing such equipment and constructing the associated
foundations or support structures, e.g. transformers or the interconnection of isolated sections of
switchgear by means of long GIS busbar or duct installations. Flexible joints may also be
provided to allow more efficient maintenance and future extensions of the GIS.

4.1.9 Finish of surface and cleaning


The finish of interior surfaces of the GIS enclosures shall facilitate cleaning and inspection. Any
paints or other coatings that may be used shall not deteriorate when exposed to the SF6 gas
and arc products, etc., that may be present in the enclosures. They shall not contain any
substances which could contaminate the enclosed SF6 gas or affect its insulating properties
over a period of time.

The equipment shall be manufactured and assembled at the manufacturer©s works under
conditions of the utmost cleanliness. Before factory tests and packing for shipment, interior
surfaces, insulators, barriers etc., must be thoroughly cleaned.

6
4.1.10 Supporting structures
All supporting structures necessary for the support of the GIS equipment including associated
parts as anchor bolts, beams etc. shall be supplied. Access has to be considered in the design
of the structures to all equipment of the GIS. It has to be possible to surround the GIS with the
gas cart.

The specified stresses for outdoor equipment like wind, earthquake, snow, ice and thermal
expansion due to current and sun radiation have to be considered. Proper surface treatment for all
parts especially in outdoor situation have to be considered. All steel members have to be hot-
dipped galvanized according to DIN

4.1.11 Future extension


Where a double busbar system is specified it shall be possible to extend the switchgear by
adding future feeders with at least one of the busbar systems and the existing feeders
remaining in service continuously. The Vendor is required to demonstrate clearly in his
submitted documents the suitability of the switchgear design in this respect.

In case of extension, the interface shall incorporate facilities for installation and testing of
extension to limit the part of the existing GIS to be re-tested and to allow for connection to the
existing GIS without further dielectric testing.

4.1.12 Repair
Where double busbar is specified, in case of any internal fault in the busbar or busbar
disconector, circuit breaker, repair works must be possible with at least one bus bar in service.
Any failure shall be immediately signaled by the systems inherent self-supervision with clear
description of the nature and the location of this failure. Generally any failure shall have impact
only on the direct related devices and the rest of the substation shall remain in normal
operation.

4.1.13 Removal of components


The GIS shall be designed so that any component of the GIS can be easily removed. As
minimum flexibility in the layout arrangement it shall be possible to remove the circuit breaker with
both busbar remaining in service and it shall be possible to remove the disconnector of the
busbars, with one busbar remaining in service

4.1.14 Earthing of the switchgear


The Bidder shall supply the connection between the GIS and the station earthing system. The
station earthing itself will be provided. Nevertheless the Bidder shall propose the earthing net
under the GIS. The earthing system shall be based on a multi-point design ensuring the
protection in case of indirect contact (Touch or step voltages, in case of system fault) and
transient phenomena in case of lightning or switching operations.

Earthing conductors shall allow fault with short circuit current. Conductors with copper bars are
preferred over copper wires. Separate ground strips to short circuit flanges and earthing
switches are not allowed. Grounding switches shall be connected to ground through the
enclosure. Individual ground leads for the ground switches are not allowed. The inductive
voltage against ground in each part of the enclosure shall be not more than 65 V.

4.1.15 Auxiliary contacts


Each equipment shall be furnished with adequate number of electrically independent contacts at
user©s disposal. They shall be wired to terminals located in the local control cabinet of the circuit
breaker bay. Installation of auxiliary relays (contact multiplication) may be used to meet the overall
7
control and protection requirements.

4.1.16 Special tools


Any special tools needed for installation, operation and inspection shall be included in the
quotation. For gas handling purpose following tools shall be quoted as a minimum:

i) Dew point meter


ii) Leakage detector
iii) Precision pressure gauge

4.1.17 Spare parts


As an option the bidder is requested to supply a list of recommended spare parts for at least five
years operation.

Requirements of the high voltage components

4.1.18 Circuit Breaker

4.1.18.1 General

The GIS circuit breakers shall comply with the following general requirements for circuit
breakers and the latest revisions of the relevant IEC specifications.

Circuit-breakers shall be the SF6 gas insulated type of single phase design with the specified
ratings. The breaker shall be Self-Blast / Puffer type principle and consist of one interrupting
arcing chambers.

Each circuit-breaker including the drive mechanism shall be completely factory assembled,
adjusted and tested. The breaker shall include a suitable operating mechanism to assure
proper opening and closing, and shall permit checking adjustments and opening characteristics.
Each mechanism shall include dual trip coils in redundant design. The mechanism shall be
capable of reclosing within the range specified in the applicable standards. The breakers are to
be re-strike-free.

The breaker layout arrangement shall be either horizontal or vertical to provide higher mechanical
stability and ease in maintenance. The operating principle of the breaker shall ensure minimized
dynamic floor loading. Low reaction forces on foundations especially dynamically, are favorable
and considered in the evaluation.

4.1.18.2 Required Technical Data

Maximum operating Voltage kV 245


Rated withstand voltage across open contacts
- Lightning kV 1050 + 245
- Switching kV 850 + 245
- Power frequency kV 530
Rated short-circuit breaking current (r.m.s.), 1s: kA 40
Rated making current (peak): kA 100
Rated break time ms < 40
Rated opening time ms ≤ 20
Rated closing time ms ≤ 55
Close-open time ms ≤ 30
Rated cable and line charging breaking current A 500
Number of breaks per pole: Nos. 1
SF6 gas pressure at 68 °F/20 °C: (Actual values shall be submitted by manufacturer)
Filling pressure kPa
Alarm pressure kPa
8
Blocking pressure kPa

Operating mechanism :

Number per single phase circuit breaker 1


Rated operating sequence O-0.3s-CO-3 min-CO /

Time for recharging CO cycle


Type Spring / Hydraulic-spring
Number of trip coils 2
Number of closing coils 1/2
Rated control voltage (DC) V 220
Number of operations permissible without
maintenance
At no load Nos. 2000
At rated current Nos. 2000
At 40 / 50 kA Nos. 20

4.1.18.2.1 Breaking capacity

The total breaking time from energizing of the trip coil at rated control voltage to final arc
extinction shall be as short as possible.

The circuit breaker shall be capable of breaking all currents from zero up to the specified
maximum fault current in accordance with the relevant IEC publications. Official test reports
shall be submitted with the tender as evidence that the offered circuit breaker meets the
specific rating.

4.1.18.3 Auto-reclosing

If auto-reclosing is required, the circuit-breakers shall be capable of tripping and reclosing


according to the specified duty cycle.

4.1.18.4 Closing devices

All electrically operated closing devices and any mechanism charging motors or devices shall be
suitable for operation at any voltage between 110% and 85% of the nominal control voltage
measured at the device terminals.

The breaker shall close correctly when an electrical closing pulse of 50 ms duration is applied to the
closing coil.

4.1.18.5 Tripping devices

All electrical tripping devices shall be suitable for operation at any voltage between 110% and
85% of the nominal voltage, measured at the device terminals. The tripping devices of a circuit
breaker, when the circuit breaker is not carrying current, shall be capable of operating
satisfactory down to 70% of the nominal control voltage, measured at the device terminals.

An emergency hand tripping (mechanical) device shall be provided in the operating mechanism.

4.1.18.6 Operating mechanism


One operating mechanism shall be supplied for each single phase circuit-breaker. Electric
motor for the driving mechanism shall be DC operated to allow operation in case of AC failure
and thus of highest reliability. In case of failure of Aux. supply the mechanism shall have
sufficient energy stored to perform O-CO cycle.

In order to reduce maintenance work and outage time pneumatic operating mechanisms will not be
accepted.

9
Circuit breaker shall be operated by spring charge mechanism or electro hydraulic mechamism
or a combination of these shall be complete with all control equipment. The only external
requirement for operation shall be electrical supply. Hydraulic pipe working on site or common
system for substation shall not be acceptable.

Low stored operating energy shall be detected by some suitable method and dependent on the
position of the spring shall initiate one or more of the following operations:

1. start pump motor


2. block auto-reclosing if stored operating energy is insufficient to complete a break-
make-break operation
3. block closing if stored operating energy is insufficient to complete a make-break
operation
4. block tripping if stored operating energy is insufficient to complete a break operation

Charging of the operating mechanism shall be possible in the event of failure of the motor drive.
This be possible by connecting an external mobile pump with an electrically operated motor. The
mechanism shall be in a dust and vermin proof box for indoor installation or in a
weatherproof box for outdoor installation.

Each breaker shall have sufficient auxiliary switches all wired to terminals located in the local
control cubicle.

4.1.18.7 Anti pumping

All circuit-breaker mechanisms shall be provided with means to prevent pumping while the
closing circuit remains energized, should the circuit breaker either fail to latch, or be tripped
during closing due to the operation of the protective relays.

4.1.18.8 Position indicating devices

Position indicators shall be provided to clearly indicate whether a circuit-breaker is open or


closed. Each circuit-breaker shall be provided with an operation counter per mechanism to
record the number of tripping operations performed. The counter may be located at the local
control cabinet.

4.1.19 Disconnect switch

4.1.19.1 General

The GIS disconnect switches shall comply with the following general and the latest revision of the
relevant IEC standards.

Disconnect switches shall be three pole, group operated, no-load break, with one motor
operated mechanism per three-pole. They shall also have facilities for emergency manual
operation and the necessary operating handles or hand cranks shall be supplied.
Disconnect switches shall be interlocked to prevent the earthing switch from closing on a
energized bus section.
All main contacts shall either be silver plated or shall have silver inserts. Each disconnect switch
shall open or close only due to motor-driven or manual operation. The switch contact shall not
move due to gravity or other means, even if a part fails. Once initiated, the motor mechanism
shall complete an open or close operation without requiring the initiating contact to be held
closed.

4.1.19.2 Technical Data Requirement::

10
Rated Voltage kV 245
Rated withstand voltage across open contacts:
- Lightning kV 1050 + 245
- Switching kV 850 + 245
- Power frequency kV 530
Rated current A 3150
Rated short-circuit withstand current (r.m.s.), 1s kA 40
Capacitive current breaking capacity A 0.25
Bus Transfer current switching A, 1600,
V 20
Type of operating mechanism Motor
Number of drives per 3 phase 1
Control voltage (DC) V 220
Number of CO permissible without maintenance No. 2000

Electric motor for the driving mechanism shall be DC operated. Mechanisms shall be arranged
either mechanically or electrically so that all three phases of any particular disconnect switch
operate simultaneously. All mechanisms shall be suitable for electrical motor operation to
achieve a fully automatic operation in an unmanned substation.

For emergency situations manual operation shall be possible. Handles or hand cranks shall be
provided. Manual operation shall be prevented if the interlocking conditions have not been
satisfied. The auxiliary energy shall be electrically uncoupled from the motor when the switch is
operated manually.

The mechanisms shall be arranged for locking in the open and in the closed position. Facilities
shall be available to allow the switch to be padlocked in any position.

11
4.1.19.3 Position indicating and view ports

View ports shall be provided for each pole of the switch to permit visual inspection of each
switch contact position of each pole. External mechanically connected position indicators shall
also be provided showing either open or close position.

4.1.20 Maintenance earthing switch

4.1.20.1 General
The GIS earthing switches shall comply with the following general requirements and the latest
revision of the relevant IEC standards.

Maintenance grounding switches shall be three pole, group operated, no-load break, with one
motor operated mechanism per three-pole. They shall also have facilities for emergency
manual operation and the necessary operating handles or hand cranks shall be supplied.
Maintenance earthing switches shall be electrically interlocked to prevent the earthing switch
from closing on a energized bus section.

All main contacts shall either be silver plated or shall have silver inserts. Each earthing switch
shall open or close only due to motor-driven or manual operation. The switch contact shall not
move due to gravity or other means, even if a part fails. Once initiated, the motor mechanism
shall complete an open or close operation without requiring the initiating contact to be held
closed.

4.1.20.2 Technical Data Requirement:

Rated Voltage KV 245


Rated withstand voltage across open contacts:
- Lightning kV 1050 + 245
- Switching kV 850 + 245
- Power frequency kV 530
Rated current A 3150
Rated short-circuit withstand current (r.m.s.), 1s: kA 40
Type of operating mechanism Motor
Number of drives per 3 phase Nos. 1
Control voltage (DC) V 220
Number of CO permissible without maintenance Nos. 2000

4.1.20.3 Operating mechanism

Electric motor for the driving mechanism shall be DC operated. Mechanisms shall be arranged
either mechanically or electrically so that all three phases of any particular earthing switch
operate simultaneously.

All mechanisms shall be suitable for electrical motor operation to achieve a fully automatic
operation in an unmanned substation. For emergency situations manual operation shall be

12
possible. Handles or hand cranks shall be provided. Manual operation shall be prevented if the
interlocking system does not allow the operation of the switch.

The auxiliary energy shall be electrically uncoupled from the motor when the switch is operated
manually.

The mechanisms shall be arranged for locking in the open and in the closed position. Facilities
shall be available to allow the switch to be padlocked in any position.

4.1.20.4 Position indicating devices and view ports

View ports shall be provided for each pole of the switch to permit visual inspection of each
switch contact position of each pole. External mechanically connected position indicators shall
also be provided showing either open or close position.

4.1.21 Disconnector / earthing switch

4.1.21.1 General

Bidder is encouraged to offer combination of disconnector and earthing switch having common
drive system. The arrangement would ensure best mechanical interlocking between
disconnector and an earthing switch, compact design, reduced hardware and thus an overall
improved performance.

Other technical and functional requirements shall remain same as those mentioned for
disconnector and maintenance earthing switch at serial no. 6.1.19 and 6.1.20 respectively.

4.1.22 Fast acting earthing switch

4.1.22.1 General

Fast acting earthing switches can be located at the busbar and at all external HV connections of
feeders (like HV cable or overhead line or transformer connections). The switching capability shall
be 160 A inductive at 15 kV and 10A capacitive at 15 kV. Furthermore it shall withstand the full
making capability.

The fast acting earthing switches shall comply with the following general requirements of fast
acting earthing switches and the latest revision of the relevant IEC specifications.

Fast acting earthing switches shall be single pole or three pole operated, with one motor
operated mechanism per single pole position. They shall also have facilities for emergency
manual operation and the necessary operating handles or hand cranks shall be supplied.
Fast acting earthing switches shall be electrically interlocked to prevent the fast acting earthing
switch from closing on a energized bus section.

All main contacts, male and female, shall either be silver plated or shall have silver inserts.
Each fast acting earthing switch shall open or close only due to motor-driven or manual
operation. The switch contact shall not move due to gravity or other means, even if a part fails.
Once initiated, the motor mechanism shall complete an open or close operation without
requiring the initiating contact to be held closed.

13
4.1.22.2 Technical Data Requirement:

Rated Voltage kV 245


Rated withstand voltage across open contacts:
- Lightning kV 1050 + 245
- Switching kV 850 + 245
- Power frequency kV 530
Rated current A 3150
Rated short-circuit withstand current 1s, (r.m.s.): kA 40
Inductive current switching capability A 160
kV, 15
Capacitive current switching capability A , 10
kV 15
Type of Mechanism Motor
No. of drives per three phase Nos. 3
Closing time ms 50
Control voltage V 220
Number of permissible CO without maintenance Nos. 2000
Number of short-circuit making 40 / 50 kA Nos. 2

4.1.22.3 Operating mechanism

Each phase of the earthing switch shall be equipped with a separate and single phase
operating mechanism. Electric motor for the driving mechanism shall be DC operated.
Mechanisms shall be arranged either mechanically or electrically that all three phases of any
particular fast acting earthing switch operate simultaneously.

All mechanisms shall be equipped with a motor suitable for operation from the auxiliary supply,
and a set of springs for energy storage and closing. Motors shall be suitable for operation at
any voltage between 85% and 110% of the rated auxiliary voltage.

For emergency situations manual operation shall be possible. Handles or hand cranks shall be
provided, together with all necessary operation rods and rod guides.

The auxiliary energy shall be electrically uncoupled from the motor when the switch is operated
manually. The mechanisms shall be arranged for locking in the open and in the closed position.

4.1.22.4 Auxiliary switches

Each fast acting earthing switch shall be furnished with 8 (4 NO and 4 NC) electrically
independent contacts at user©s disposal. The auxiliary switches shall indicate the position of the
switch contacts, and shall be independent of the motor operation.

4.1.22.5 Position Indicating devices and view ports

View ports shall be provided for each fast acting earthing switch to ensure visual inspection of
each switch contact position. Inspection of the main contacts shall be possible using an optical
device which shall also provide lighting of the contact zone to be verified. External mechanically
connected position indicators shall also be provided.

14
4.1.23 Current transformers

4.1.23.1 General

The current transformers shall be supplied in accordance with the following


general requirements and the latest revisions of the relevant IEC or ANSI specifications.
All current transformer cores shall be located outside the enclosure separated from the
primary core. Each current transformer shall be arranged so that the enclosure current
does not affect the accuracy or the ratio of the device or the conductor current being
measured.

They shall be ring type multi ratio with fully distributed secondary windings with relay
accuracy per IEC 185 (1987), incl. IEC 44-6 (1992) or ANSI / IEEE C57.13-1978.

Current transformer secondary cores shall be terminated to shorting terminal blocks.


It shall be possible to test each current transformer without the removal of gas through
the insulated grounding switches. The Principal Parameters shall be as per Annexure-A

4.1.23.2 Position of the Current Transformers and Cores, Ratios and Characteristics

The number and position of the current transformers relative to the circuit-
breakers, disconnecting switches and ground switches shall be as detailed in the
attached single line diagram.

The rating, ratio, accuracy class etc. for the individual current transformer secondary cores
shall be as specified in Annexure-B(i) & B(ii). Where multi-ratio current transformers are
required, the various ratios shall be obtained by changing the effective number of turns on the
secondary winding.

4.1.24 Voltage transformers

4.1.24.1 General

The voltage transformers shall be supplied in accordance with the following


general requirements and the latest revisions of the relevant IEC and ANSI standards.

Each voltage transformer shall be an electromagnetic, dry type SF6 -enclosed single phase
unit with the specified ratings. The Principal Parameters shall be as per Annexure-C

The voltage transformers are to be connected as shown in the attached single line diagram.
Voltage transformers shall be attached to the gas-insulated system in such a manner that
they can be readily disconnected from the system if required for dielectric testing. The metal
housing of the voltage transformer shall be connected to the metal enclosure of the GIS with
a flanged, bolted and gasketed joint so that the transformer housing is thoroughly
grounded to the GIS enclosure. Adequate measures shall be provided to prevent any
unacceptable impact on the secondary control and protection circuits which might result
from very fast transients (VFT) or ferro-resonance.

4.1.24.2 Ratios and Characteristics


15
The rating, ratio, accuracy class, connection, etc. for the voltage
transformers shall be as specified in Annexure-D(i).

4.1.24.3 Secondary terminals, Grounding and Fuses

The beginning and end of each secondary winding and all secondary
taps shall be wired to suitable terminals accommodated in the local
control cabinet for the feeder bay. Fuses shall be also located in the local
control cabinet.

Secondary terminals shall have permanent markings for identification of


polarity, in accordance with IEC. Provisions shall be made for
grounding of the secondary windings inside the local control cabinet.

4.1.24.4 Test conditions for tests at site

Power frequency tests for the completed GIS at site shall be possible
without removing the voltage transformers. The power frequency test
voltage for at site tests shal be 80% of the factory test voltage, for 1
min., and at 100 Hz.

4.1.25 Gas insulated bus duct

The components of the GIS shall be connected by a single phase bus


ducts. The enclosure shall be connected by use of bolted and gasketed
joints. The bus conductor shall be connected with plug in contacts with
silver plated contact surface. The bus system shall be capable of
withstand the mechanical and thermal stresses due to short circuit
currents, as well as thermal expansion and contraction created by
temperature cycling.

4.1.26 SF6/Air bushings

4.1.26.1 General

Outdoor SF6 to air bushings, for the connection between the GIS
and overhead lines or conventional air insulated equipment shall be
furnished where specified.
Bushings shall comply with the relevant IEC standards.
The bushings can be with composite insulators (Silicone rubber) or
with porcelain insulators with all surfaces free from imperfections. The
internal insulation of the bushings can be a resin impregnated paper
winding (RIP body) or compressed SF6-gas. The internal and
external electrical field of the bushings can be controlled by a capacitive
grading body /grading shields.
16
The RIP body must consists of resin impregnated paper insulation
with concentric aluminium layers. The space between the RIP body
and the insulator must be filled with insulating foam compound or
compressed SF6-gas.
Bushings with porcelain insulators must designed to cause
negligible damages in case of porcelain rupture, having either a low
pressure volume or a small SF6-gas volume next to the porcelain.

4.1.26.2 Insulation levels and creepage distances:


The insulation levels are applicable to normal sea level atmospheric conditions.
The creepage
distance over the external surface of outdoor bushings shall not be less than 25
mm/kV.

4.1.26.3 Mechanical forces on bushing terminals:


Outdoor bushings must be capable of withstanding a cantilever force
applied to the terminal of at least 2500 N.

4.1.26.4 Interface definition

The flange and conductor connection between bushing and GIS


component shall be the standard of the GIS supplier.

4.2 Local Control and Operation Circuit


Note: The technical requirements in this specification apply to a
conventional LCC only. A specification for numerical control would
be added.

4.2.1 General

One local control cabinet (LCC) shall be supplied for the local control
and operation of each circuit breaker bay. Each LCC shall contain
the local control, interlocking, operation and indication devices for the
associated GIS feeder bay.

The LCCs shall be free-standing / integrated with the GIS switchgear. A


general arrangement drawing showing the installation position shall be
submitted with the quotation.

The LCCs shall be installed indoors but care must be taken with the
design to ensure that all LCCs are drip and splash proof. The LCCs
shall also be dust and vermin proof. For outdoor installations the LCCs
shall be weather proof.

The control and operation circuits shall be well shielded and with
safety measures to protect operator from touching energized parts.
Power frequency withstand of control circuits shall be 2 kV for 1 minute.
17
4.2.2 Required features for conventional local control cabinets

The LCCs shall be provided with the following features:

a) A mimic diagram showing the single line diagram. Position indicators,


on/off switches for
the HV devices and local / off / remote switches shall be installed on or
adjacent to the
various symbols of the mimic diagram. The following devices shall be
supplied as a
minimum:
- Circuit breaker control switch with two indicating lights.
- Circuit breaker "local-remote" selector switch.
- Disconnect switch control switch with two indicating lights.
- Grounding switch control switch with two indicating lights.
- Mimic bus including symbols according to. the single line diagram.
- Annunciator panel.

b) Any interposing relays and control switches associated with the


circuit breakers,
disconnect switches, grounding switches etc.

c) The alarm and indication devices specified.

d) Fuses and links. These shall be installed in the interior of the LCCs.

e) Terminal blocks for the terminating and marshaling of auxiliary supply


circuits, control,
interlocking, indication and alarm circuits from the GIS and for
cable connections to the remote control room or the owners
control system.

f) Each LCC shall be furnished with a guarded resistance heater


to prevent the internal
equipment from humidity deposit. The heater shall be rated 230
VAC and fed through a two pole fused disconnect switch.

g) A fluorescent lamp and a duplex convenience outlet rated


230 VAC, 15 amps with ground fault interrupter shall be installed in
each LCC.

4.2.3 Wiring Requirements

Each circuit breaker shall have control suitable for operation on 220 V
DC with two electrically independent trip circuits.

The control voltage for the close circuit and the primary and
backup trip circuits shall be supplied through separate miniature
circuit-breakers (MCB).
18
Each disconnect switch shall have control suitable for operation on
220 V DC. The control
voltage for open and close circuits shall be supplied through a separate
MCB.
Alarm contacts shall be provided for monitoring all vital systems of each
circuit breaker and gas
system.

The alarm contacts for the circuit breakers shall be wired to terminals in the LCCs.
All current transformer tap leads shall be terminated on shorting type
terminal blocks in the local control cabinets and shall be accessible at all
times.
All potential transformer leads shall be terminated and fused in the LCCs.

All other devices shall be wired to heavy duty terminal blocks


provided in the local control
cabinet. The terminal blocks shall have no less than 20% spare terminals
per cabinet.
Wiring shall use copper conductors, 1.5 mm2 minimum. For CTs and
PTs the wire size shall
be 4 mm2.

4.2.4 DC Supplies and Circuits

DC supplies as specified will be provided by the owner for all


control, interlocking, alarm, indication and power supply circuits. The
normal maximum and minimum voltage levels that will occur on the
supply are specified.

At least one single fused outlet from the substation DC distribution


board will be provided for each local control cabinet.

The design of all circuits must be such that separately fused or


subfused circuits are always kept electrically separate.

4.2.5 A.C. Supplies and Circuits

A.C. power for heaters and other auxiliary loads will be provided by the
owner by two 220 V, 50 Hz., 3-phase circuits.
The normal maximum and minimum voltages that will occur in the
supply are as specified. All equipment supplied shall be capable of
running continuously or switching the a.c. current within the range of the
normal maximum and minimum voltages specified.

4.2.6 Cable connections within the GIS and their LCC's

All cable connections between the various GIS modules and the
LCCs shall be made by prefabricated multi-core cables with multi-
point plug-in connections on both ends. PTs and CTs shall be hard
19
wired.

All cables shall be shielded and adequate for their application (indoor
/ outdoor). The cables shall be fire retardant and PVC-free.

5.0 TYPE TESTS

The GIS equipment offered should be type tested. Test reports of all the following
tests as per provision in relevant IEC should not be more than seven years old
reckoned from date of bid opening in respect of all the tests carried out in
accredited laboratories (based on ISO/IEC) by a reputed accreditatic body or
witnessed by HVPN or another electric power utility and be submitted by the
successful bidder to HVPNL for approval as per schedule given in Bar Chart:-

1. Tests to verify the insulation level of the equipment and dielectric tests on
auxiliary circuits.
2. Tests to prove the radio interference voltage (RIV) level (if applicable)
3. Tests to prove the temperature rise of any part of the equipment and
measurement of the resistance of the main circuit
4. Tests to prove the ability of the main and earthing circuits to carry the rated peak
and rated short-time withstand current
5. Tests to verify the making and breaking capacity of the included switching
devices
6. Tests to prove the satisfactory operation of the included switching devices
7. Tests to prove the strength of enclosures
8. verification of the degree of protection of the enclosure
9. Gas tightness tests
10. Electromagnetic compatibility tests (EMC)
11. Additional tests on auxiliary and control circuits
12. Tests on partitions
13. Tests to prove the satisfactory operation at limit temperatures
14. Tests to prove performance under thermal cycling and gas tightness tests on
insulators
15. Corrosion test on earthing connections (if applicable)
16. Tests to assess the effects of arcing due to an internal fault

5.1 ROUTINE TESTS:


As per quality assurance program (QAP).

20
5.2 ACCEPTANCE TESTS:

All the acceptance tests as stipulated in the relevant IEC listed below shall be
carried out by the Supplier in presence of HVPNL representative, unless
dispensed with in writing by the HVPNL.
1. Dielectric test on main circuit
2. Tests on auxiliary and control circuits
3. Measurement of the resistance of the main circuit
4. Tightness tests
5. Design and visual checks
6. Pressure tests of enclosures
7. Mechanical operation tests
8. Tests on auxiliary circuits, equipment and interlocks in the control mechanism
9. Pressure test on partitions.

21
6 Switchgear installation

7 Requirements for inspection and maintenance

The operational integrity of the fully enclosed SF6 insulated switchgear is


not subject to external influences, such as pollution, moisture, dust,
etc. As a consequence of this, the shall be practically maintenance-
free.
During inspection, it shall be not necessary to open the GIS
enclosures, thus avoiding interruption of operation.

The number of operations before maintenance is required shall be not less than:

i) for circuit breakers:


2000 mechanical operations
20 interruptions at max. rated fault current.

ii) for disconnect switch and


maintenance earthing switches:
2000 mechanical operations

iii) fast acting earthing switch:


2000 mechanical operations
2 operations at making current capability

8. Tools

The Vendor shall include in his proposal the recommended tools


required for installation, commissioning, operation and maintenance.
The following tools shall be supplied as a minimum:

Tools for gas handling 1 set


Leakage detector 1 piece
SF6 filling and evacuating device 1 set

22
ANNEXURE-A

PRINCIPAL PARAMETERA OF CTs:-


Sr. Item 245 kV
No.

1. Type of CT/installation Single phase, SF6 insulated


2.
3. Suitable for system frequency 50 Hz
4. Highest system voltage (kV rms) 245
5. Current ratio A/A
a. Transformer CT 300-150/0.577-1-1-1-1A
b. Line / Bus Coupler CT 1200-800-400/1-1-1-1-1A
6. Method of earthing Solidly earthed
7. Rated continuous Thermal current 125 % for all taps
8. Ratio taps The tapings shall be only on
secondary winding.
9. Acceptable limit of temperature rise aboveAs per IS:2705 or equivalent IEC
the specified ambient temperature for
continuous operation at rated current.
10. Acceptance partial discharge level at 1.1 As per IS:11322-1985 or equivalent
times the rated voltage IEC
11. 1.2/50 microsecond lightning impulse withstand voltage (kVp)
a. CT 1050

12. 1 minute dry & wet power frequency withstand voltage primary (kV rms)
a. CT 460
13. Power frequency over voltage withstand 3
requirement for secondary winding (kV
rms) (for 1 minute)
14. Rated short time withstand current (kA 40
rms) for 1 second. 23
15. Rated dynamic withstand current (kAp) 100
ANNEXURE B(i)

COREWISE DETAILS OF 245kV Transformer CTs

(300-150/0.577-1-1-1-1A)

NUMBER OF CORES - 5

Core Application Current Output Accuracy Formula for minimum Maximum I.S.F./
No. Ratio (A) burden class knee-point voltage Exciting A.L.F
(VA) as per At CT Secondary Current
IEC 185 resistance at 750C at (mA)
300A tap (Volt)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 DIFFERENTIAL 300-150/0.577 - PS 40 (RCT+2) 30ATVk/4 -
PROTECTION
2 REF PROTECTION 300-150/1 - PS 14 (RCT+2) 30ATVk/2 -
3 OVER CURRENT 300-150/1 25 5P - - 10
PROTECTION
4 BUSBAR PROTECTION 300-150/1 - PS 40 (RCT+4) 30ATVk/2 -
(FOR LOW IMPEDANCE
SCHEME)

5 METERING 300-150/1 25 1.0 - - <5

NOTE : 4th core for bus bar protection has been kept in view of general design
being followed in HVPNL. In case this CT is used on a sub station having high
impedance bus bar protection scheme or no bus bar protection scheme then this core
shall be short-circuited at site.

24
ANNEXURE B(ii)

COREWISE DETAILS OF 245kV LINE/BUS COUPLER CTs

(1200-800-400/1-1-1-1-1 A)

NUMBER OF CORES – 5
Core Application Current Output Accuracy Formula for minimum Maximum Instrument
No. Ratio (A) burden class knee point voltage At CT Exciting Security
(VA) as per Secondary resistance at Current factor
IEC 185 750C at 800Atap (Volt) (mA)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1. MAIN–I 1200-800- - PS 80(RCT+9) 80AT Vk -
DISTANCE 400/1
PROTECTION
2. MAIN–II 1200-800- - PS 80(RCT+9) 80AT Vk -
DISTANCE 400/1
PROTECTION
3. BUS 1200-800- - PS 100(RCT+4) 30AT Vk/2 -
DIFFERENTIAL 400/1
MAIN
4. BUS 1200-800- - PS 100(RCT+4) 30AT Vk/2 -
DIFFERENTIAL 400/1
CHECK
5. METERING 1200-800- 40 1.0 - - ISF<5
400/1

NOTE :
1. 5 cores of 245kV line CT have been kept in view of general design being followed in
HVPNL.

2. In case this CT is used exclusively for bus bar protection purpose on a transformer
circuit at sub station having high impedance bus bar protection scheme then core no 1,2
& 5 shall be short circuited at site.

3. In case this CT is used for feeder circuit on a sub station having low impedance bus bar
protection scheme then core no. 4 shall be short circuited at site and where there is no
bus bar protection scheme core no. 3 & 4 shall be short circuited at site .

25
ANNEXURE-C

PRINCIPAL PARAMETERS of PTs:-

Sr. Item Specification


No. 245kV
1. Type/Installation Single Phase, SF6 insulated
2. Highest system voltage (kV rms) 245
3. Suitable for system frequency 50Hz
4. Voltage ratio
a) Rated primary voltage (kV rms). 220/√3
b) Secondary voltage (volts). 110/√3
5. PT Core I,II

6. Method of earthing the system Solidly Earthed


7. 1.2/50 microsecond lightning 1050
impulse withstand voltage (kVp)
8. 1 Minute dry & wet power 460
frequency withstand voltage
primary (kV rms)
9. Rated voltage factor 1.2 continuous and 1.5 for 30 seconds
10. One minute power frequency
withstand voltage for secondary 3.0
winding (kV rms)
11. Max. temperature rise over As per IS:3156 or equivalent IEC
ambient of 50°C

26
ANNEXURE D(i)

COREWISE DETAILS OF 245kV POTENTIAL TRANSFORMER (PT)

Sl. Particulars Requirement


No.
1. Rated Primary voltage 220/√3kV
2. Type Single phase
3. No. of Secondaries 2
4. Rated voltage factor 1.2 continuous & 1.5 for 30 seconds
5. Rated voltage (volts) Secondary-I Secondary-II
110/√3 110/√3
6. Application Protection & Protection
Measurement
7. Accuracy 1/3P 3P
8. Output burden (VA) 150 50
9. Percentage voltage error & As per ISS/IEC
phase displacement
(minutes) for respective
specified accuracy classes.

Note:- Each winding shall fulfil its respective specified accuracy requirement within its
specified output range whilst at the same time the other winding has an output of any
value form zero to 100% of the output range specified for the other winding in line
with clause 6.2.1 of IS 3156 (Part-2 & Part-3) 1992 or its equivalent IEC.

27
SECTION-3
CHAPTER-1
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR
100 MVA, 220/66 kV POWER TRANSFORMER
1.00 SCOPE:
a) This specification covers the design, manufacture, assembly testing at
manufacturer’s works before despatch, supply and delivery at site as per
schedule of Requirement of 100 MVA, 220/66 kV Power Transformer.
b) All drawings, schedules and annexures appended to this specification shall
form part of the specification and supplement the requirements specified. The
equipment/materials offered by the Bidder shall be complete in all respects
and, whether called for specifically or not, all accessories, hardware and
services required for normal satisfactory operation of the system shall be
deemed to be included in unit rates quoted. Design and manufacture shall
also be such that equipment/ accessories of the same type and rating would
be interchangeable.
Specific reference in this specification and documents to any material by
trade name, make or catalogue number shall be construed as establishing
standard of quality and performance and not as limiting competition. All
equipment/ accessories offered shall also be of proven design and
manufacture. The make of all accessories and hardware shall be subject to
HVPNL’s approval.
2.00 Codes & Standards:
All standards, specifications and codes of practice referred to herein shall be the
latest editions including all applicable official amendments and revisions as on date
of opening of bid.
IS:5 Colour for ready mix paints.
IS:325 Three phase induction motors.
IS:335 New insulating oils for transformer.
IS:375 Marking & arrangement of Switch-gear Bus-bars main
connections and auxiliary wiring.
IS:1866 Code of practice for maintenance of insulation oil
IS:2026 Specification for Power Transformers.
&IEC:76
IS:2099 Bushing for alternating voltages above 1000 volts
& 3347
IS:2147 Degree of protection provided by enclosures for low voltage
switchgear & control gear.
IS:2705 Current transformer
IS:3637 Gas operated relay.
IS:3639 Fittings and accessories for Power Transformers.
IS:6600 Guide for loading of oil immersed transformers.
&IEC-354
IS:8468 On load tap changer.
&IEC:214
IS:5561 Electricity power connectors.
IS:617 Aluminium Alloy grade.
IS:2629 Recommended practice for hot-dip Galvanising.
IS:8478 On load tap changer application guide.
IS:8603 : Dimensions for porcelain transformer bushings for use in heavily
polluted atmosphere (36 kV Class). Dimensions for oil filled porcelain
transformer bushings for use in medium polluted atmosphere.

-1-
IS:9434 Guide for sampling and analysis of free and dissolved gas in oil filled
equipment.
IS:10028 Code of practice for selection, installation and maintenance of
transformers.
IS:12676 Dimensions for OIP insulated condenser bushings.
CBIP Manual on transformer.
Equipment complying with other internationally accepted standards would also be
considered if these ensure performance and constructional features equivalent or
superior to standards listed above. In such a case the Bidder shall clearly indicate
the standards adopted, furnish a copy in English of the latest revision of standard
alongwith copies of all official amendments and revisions in force as on date of
opening of bid and clearly bring out the salient features for comparison.
3.00 CLIMATIC CONDITIONS:
3.1 Max. Temprature 50 C
3.2 Min. Temprature -2.5 C
3.3 Max. relative humidity 100%
3.4 Min. relative humidity 26%
3.5 Average number of rainy days per annum Nearly120 Days.
3.6 Average annual rain fall 900mm
3.7 Average number of dust strom days per annum 35
3.8 Isoceraunic level 45
3.9 Max Wind pressures. 195kg/sqmt.
3.10 Altitude above mean sea level. Less than 1000 mt.
4.00 TYPE AND RATING:
4.1 The transformer shall be of 3 phase oil immersed three legged core type with
ONAN/ONAF/OFAF cooling suitable for outdoor service as step down
transformer.
4.2 The ratings and other characteristics which are not covered elsewhere shall
be, as detailed in following clauses:
4.2.1 Max. Continuous capacity:
a) ONAN 50 MVA
b) ONAF 75 MVA
c) OFAF 100 MVA
4.2.2 Number of phases 3

4.2.3 Frequency 50 Hz(±5%)


4.2.4 Rated Voltage:
a) HV side 220 Kv
b) LV sid 66 kV

4.2.5 Max. System Voltage


a) HV Side 245kV
b) LV Side 72.5kV
4.2.6 Connections:
a) HV side Star with neutral solidly earthed
b) LV side ----------------do----------------
4.2.7 Vector group YYO

-2-
4.2.8 Tapping On load tappings at neutral end
of 220 kV side for variation +10
% to -10% in steps of 1.25%
each .

4.2.9 Rated short duration Power frequency withstand Voltage


a) HV Side 395kV rms
b) LV Side 140kV rms
c) Neutral 70kV rms

4.2.10 Rated lightning impulse withstand Voltage


a) HV Side 950kV Peak
b) LV Side 325kV Peak
c) Neutral 170 kV Peak
4.2.11 %age Impedance 12.5% at 100MVA base

4.2.12 B.I.L for Bushings


a) HV Side 1050kV Peak/460kV rms
b) LV Side 325kV Peak/140kV rms
c) Neutral 170 kV Peal/ 70 kV rms

4.2.13 Creepage:
a) Total 25mm per kV corresponding to
highest system voltage
b) Protected 50% of the total creepage distance

5.00 GENERAL DESIGN OF TRANSFORMER:


5.1 The transformer and accessories shall be so designed as to facilitate
inspection, cleaning and repairs. The requirement of Indian Electricity Rules
shall be kept in view.
5.2 The design shall ensure satisfactory operation under severe working
conditions due to fluctuating load of steel furnaces and voltage variations in
the system including those, due to short circuits. The transformer shall be
designed as to minimize the risk of accidental short circuits caused by
animals, birds or vermins.
The design shall incorporate every reasonable precaution and provision for
the safety of all those concerned in the operation and maintenance of the
equipment keeping in view the requirements of Indian Electricity Rules.
5.3 All material used shall be of the best quality and of class most suitable for
working under specified conditions and shall withstand the atmospheric
conditions and temperature variations without undue deterioration or
distortion or setting up of undue stress in any part thereof.
5.4 Cast iron shall not be used for any parts other than the radiator valve bodies.
5.5 Corresponding parts liable to replace shall be interchangeable.
5.6 All taper pins to be used in the mechanism shall be split types as per latest
edition of IS: 2393.

-3-
5.7 All mechanism should be rust and corrosion proof. Means shall be provided
for lubrication of moving parts not immersed in oil.
5.8 The construction shall be such as to avoid air or water pockets. Special care
shall be exercised to reduce noise and vibration to the minimum level.
5.9 Steel bolts of suitable finish will be used for diameters above 6mm. Brass
bolts or studs used for electrical connections shall not be of less than 6mm
diameter. On outdoor equipment, all bolts, nuts & washers in contact with
current carrying non-ferrous parts shall be phosphor bronze.
5.10 All nuts, bolts and pins shall be locked except those, which are external to the
transformer. If bolts and nuts are so placed as to be inaccessible by means of
ordinary spanners, the Bidder shall provide suitable special spanners.
5.11 Labels shall be provided for all apparatus like relays, switches, fuses, etc.
housed in any cubicle or marshalling kiosks. These shall be of incredible
material with matt/satin finish and permanent lettering. Labels mounted on
black surface shall have white letters and danger notices shall have red
lettering on a white background. The labels shall be secured by means of
brass screws or rust protected steel screws.
5.12 Surface in contact with oil shall not be galvanized or cadmium plated.
5.13 Before painting, all ungalvanised parts shall be cleaned, made free from rust,
scale and grease and external rough surfaces smoothened (filled with metal
deposition). The interior of the tank and other oil filled chambers shall be
cleaned by shot blasting or any other suitable method.
5.14 All external surfaces shall be given three coats of paints except for nuts, bolts
and washers which may be given one coat after assembling of transformer at
works. The final coat shall be a glossy oil and weather proof, non-fading paint
of shade 631 of IS: 5
5.15 The interior of mechanism chambers and kiosks shall be given 3 coats of
paint, the final coat being of a light coloured anti-condensation mixture.
5.16 The outer most radial spacers of the winding shall be locked in position by
means of vertical strips so that the same cannot fall off/get displaced.
5.17 The manufacturers must ensure proper & complete tightening of the nuts of
the coil clamping bolts. The nuts of all the coil clamping bolts will be tightened
to designed value & the job be carried out with torque spanners.
The devices used for locking the nuts of coil clamping bolts must be of such a
quality and such care should be taken first in tightening. The nuts and next in
locking them in position that the arrangement does not become loose due to
stresses caused by short circuits and fluctuating loads etc.
5.18 The noise level shall not be more than 80 db.
5.19 The transformers shall be designed to have short circuit rating of five
seconds as per IS: 2026. The thermal ability to withstand short circuit shall
be judged by calculation to be supplied above in the tender. The dynamic
ability to with stand short circuit shall be demon started by test in case facility
available in India other-wise calculations will be supplied day with contract
drawing.
5.20 Foundation bolts and nuts shall be supplied along with the transformer
(Preferably at the time of call for inspection) so that transformer plinth is ready
by the time transformer is received by the consignee.

-4-
6.00 INSULATING OIL:
Sufficient insulating oil conforming to IS-335/93 (latest edition) shall be supplied for
first filling of each transformer plus 10% extra oil of the total quantity of oil. Particular
attention shall be paid to deliver the oil at site free from moisture and of uniform
quality through out in non-returnable steel drums. The quantity of oil for first filling of
each transformer shall be stated in tender, alongwith trademark of the oil to be
supplied. Use of inhibitors in oil shall not be resorted to.
7.00 LIMIT OF TEMPERATURE RISE
7.1 With the above climatic conditions, given in clause-3 each transformer shall
be capable of operating continuously on any tap at their normal rating without
exceeding following temperature rises:
i) 50o C in oil by thermometer.
ii) 55o C in winding by resistance.
iii) Temperature of hot spot in winding not to exceed 98oC when calculated
over max. annual weighted average temperature of 32o C.
7.2 The limits of temperature rise mentioned above will have to be satisfied by the
manufacturer by carrying out the heat run test at the lowest negative tap.
This test shall be carried out by feeding 1.1 times the total losses at 75o C at
highest current tap.
7.3 OVERLOAD CAPACITY & CONTINUOUS RATING.
The safe over load capacity of the transformer and the duration of overload
under maximum temperature conditions without any damage to the winding or
harmful effects on the insulation shall be clearly stated in the tender which
must be as per IEC-354/IS: 6600, guide for loading of oil immersed
transformer.
8.00 IMPEDANCE:
The transformer shall have 12.5% impedance on 100 MVA base with tolerance as
per IS: 2026/Part-1 (1983). Impedance shall include positive and zero sequence and
shall be expressed in terms of the branches of the star connected equivalent
diagram, all on the same KVA base and range shall be given for each branch of the
equivalent circuit in turn. Percentage tolerance allowed at extreme tap should be as
applicable to normal tap.
9.00 FREQUENCY:
The transformer shall be suitable for continuous operation with a +/- 5% frequency
variation from a normal of 50 Hz without exceeding the temperature rise as specified
in Clause 7.1 above.
10.00 FLUX DENSITY:

10.1 The primary voltage variation, which may effect the flux density at every tap,
shall be kept in view while designing the transformer.
10.2 The transformer should be so designed that the working flux density should
not exceed 1.6 Tesla (16000 Lines per sq. cm) at normal voltage, frequency
& ratio. Tenders with higher flux density than specified shall not be
considered.

-5-
The Bidders should indicate the continuous allowable maximum flux density
as well as for time interval of one minute and five seconds. The limit of flux
density at which core material used by them saturates will also be stated in
the tender. The name of core material must be mentioned in the tender. The
successful Bidder shall be required to furnish magentisation curve of the core
material, design calculations and such other data/documents deemed fit by
the HVPNL for being satisfied that flux density is as desired.
NOTE: The above flux density has been specified to meet with the over fluxing of the
core due to temporary over voltage of the orders of 25% for one minute and
40% for five seconds that may appear in abnormal conditions such as the one
obtained following sudden loss of large loads.
11.00 CORE:
11.1 The core shall be constructed from the laminations of high grade cold rolled non-
aging, grain oriented silicon steel known as M4 High B Grade or superior grad CRGO
steels of maximum 0.27mm or less lamination thickness especially suitable for
transformer core.
11.2 The design shall be such as to avoid static discharge short circuit paths within itself
or to earthed clamping devices and production of flux component at right angle to the
plane of the lamination, which may cause local heating.
11.3 Adequate oil ducts shall be provided in the core for cooling. Tinned copper strip
bridging pieces shall be used for maintaining electrical continuity wherever the
magnetic circuit is provided into pockets by such ducts or insulating material thicker
than 0.25mm.
11.4 There should be no movement of the core assembly relative to the tank during
transport as well as in service due to sudden jerks caused by short circuits and
fluctuating loads.
11.5 Adequate lifting lugs shall be provided to enable core and winding to be lifted.
11.6 The insulation structure for the core to bolts and core to clamp plate shall be such as
to withstand a voltage of 2000V AC for one minute

12.00 SUPPRESSION OF HARMONICS:


The transformer shall be so designed as to suppress the harmonics voltage specially
the 3rd & 5th, to eliminate wave form distortion and interference with communication
circuits due to high frequency disturbances. Limiting percentage of harmonics at
normal voltage and at maximum system voltage shall be stated in the tender.
The transformer shall be so designed as to withstand thermal and electro-magnetic
stress under severe short-circuits where the fault level on 220 KV, 66 KV V bus are
of the order of 20,000, 5,000 MVA respectively.
13.00 WINDING:
13.1 The 220/66 kV windings shall have graded insulation whereas the neutral points shall
be insulated as amended in IS:2026.
13.2 The transformers shall be capable of operation without danger on any particular
tapping at the rated KVA when the voltage may vary by ± 10% of the voltage
corresponding to the tapping.
13.3 The windings and connections as well as the insulating material shall not soften ooz,
shrink or collapse during service.
13.4 No strip conductor wound on edge shall have a width exceeding six times its
thickness. The conductors shall be transposed at sufficient intervals to minimize eddy
currents and equalize the current and temperature distribution along the windings.

-6-
13.5 The windings and connections shall be properly brazed to withstand shocks during
transportation or transient conditions during service.
13.6 Adequate pre-shrinkage of the coil assembly using pre-compressed press board
material having low moisture content for the radial spacer blocks shall be ensured by
the manufacturers so that there is no displacement of the radial spacer blocks due to
frequent short circuits on the transformers.
13.7 All windings after being wound and all fibrous hygroscopic materials used in the
construction of the transformer shall be dried under vacuum and impregnated with
hot oil.
In addition to this the drying process be sufficiently extended for proper stabilization
of the coil assembly. More than one cycle of soaking in oil followed by retightening of
the coil assembly should be adopted.
13.8 The coil clamping rings wherever used shall preferably be of flat insulated steel
laminations. Axial laminated material except bakelised paper shall not be used.
13.9 The clamping arrangement shall exert equal pressure on all columns of spacers of
the transformer windings built of sections or disc-coils separated by spacers. In no
case, spiral winding will be used either for HV or LV windings.
13.10 The radial spacer blocks must be made of pre-compressed pressboard material,
which will not soften while in contact with oil or fray out into fibers or edges. The
slots should be so dimensioned that the blocks will not come out of the slots.
Uniform distribution of coil clamping force shall be designed by using an adequately
large number of coil clamping bolts and by transferring the clamping force from
clamping bolts to the clamping plates through intermediate members which can
spread the clamping force over a large area.
13.11 All joints shall be brazed/crimped considering the vibrations due to short circuits and
load fluctuations.
14.00 CURRENT DENSITY:
The HVPNL shall be at liberty to inspect built-up winding for its quality, weight of
copper, insulation and overall weight of coil assembly. The size of conductor used
for different windings shall also be checked during stage inspection to check the
current density . The transformer shall be so designed that the current density of all
the windings and the regulating winding at the lowest tap should not exceed 250
A/cm.Sq.
15.00 INTERNAL EARTHING ARRANGEMENTS:
15.1 All metal parts of the transformer except individual core laminations, core bolts and
individual clamping plates, shall be maintained at a fixed potential
15.2 The earthing connections shall have a minimum area of cross-section of 0.8 sq. cm.
except connections inserted between the laminations and in close terminal
connection with them which may have area of cross section of 0.2 sq. cm.
15.3 The top main core clamping structure shall be connected to the tank body by a
copper strip. One or more of the following methods shall earth the bottom clamping
structure.
(a) By connection through vertical tie-rods to the top structure.
(b) BY direct metal-to-metal contact with the tank base maintained by the weight
of the core and windings.
(c) By a connection to the top structure on the same side of the core as the main
earth connection to the tank.

-7-
15.4 The magnetic circuit shall be earthed to clamping structure by a link connection from
the top yoke near the bridging pieces referred to in Cl.11.3 in the side of main earth.
An inspection hatch shall be provided over the link in the tank cover.
15.5 For the individual insulated section of the magnetic circuit separate links shall be
provided. The bridged construction as per Cl.11.3 shall not be taken as being of
sectional construction.
16.1 TANK CONSTRUCTION
16.1.1 The tank shall be fabricated of a suitable grade steel and strong enough to allow
the lifting of complete transformer with oil by means of a crane or jacks and
transported to site without over-straining the joints etc.
16.1.2 The main tank body shall be capable of withstanding a vacuum of 100.64 kN/m2
(760mm of Hg.)
16.1.3 The base shall be so designed as to allow the transformer to be moved by skidding
without any injury.
16.1.4 All channeled constructions and stiffeners shall be designed to avoid retention of
water.
16.1.5 The transformer shall preferably be of bell type tank with the joint 500 mm above
the bottom of tank.
16.1.6 The tank construction shall be free of air pockets. Where such pockets cannot be
avoided, vent pipes of 15 mm internal diameter shall be provided to vent gases into
the main expansion pipes. In case of short branch pipes, however, minimum
diameter may be taken as 6mm.
16.1.7 All joints other than those, which may have to be broken, shall be welded. When
required they shall be double welded. All bolted joints to the tank shall be fitted with
suitable oil tight gaskets, which shall give satisfactory service under the operating
conditions and guaranteed temperature rise conditions. Special attention shall be
given to the methods of making hot oil tight joints between the tank and the cover
and also, between the cover and the bushings and all other out-lets to ensure that
the joints can be remade satisfactorily at site and with ease by semi-skilled labour.
16.1.8 Suitable lifting lugs for lifting the transformer filled with oil shall be provided on the
tank.
16.1.9 Four jacking lugs shall be provided to enable the transformer complete with oil to
be lifted or lowered by means of jacks. The lugs shall be fitted at a minimum height
(excluding under base if detachable) of 300mm for transformer upto 10 tons weight
and of 500mm for transformer above 10 tons weights.
16.1.10 The transformer shall be provided with detachable steel flanged wheels of 380mm
diameter and suitable for moving transformer complete with oil. These shall be
suitable for 2 rails of 1676 mm gauge alongwith longer axis and 2 rails of 3353 mm
along with shorter axis.
16.2 TANK COVER
16.2.1 The tank cover shall be of bolted type and of adequate strength so as not to distort,
when lifted. Suitable inspection cover shall be provided with lifting arrangements to
give access to bushings, winding connections or testing the earth connections. The
weight of each inspection cover shall not exceed 25 Kg.
16.2.2 Pockets shall be provided in the position of Max. oil temperature at CMR for fitting
a thermometer and for bolts of oil and winding temperature indicators. The
thermometer pockets shall be fitted with a captive screwed cap to prevent ingress
of water.
16.2.3 Suitable No. of jacking bolts shall be provided on tank cover, inspection
covers/windows including OLTC.

-8-
16.3 CONSERVATOR TANK, OIL GAUGE AND BREATHER
16.3.1 An adequate conservator tank complete with sump and drain valves shall be
provided in such a position as not to obstruct the electrical connections to the
transformer.
16.3.2 If the sump is formed by extending the feed pipe inside the conservator, this
extension shall be atleast 25mm.
16.3.3 One end of the conservator shall be bolted type to facilitate cleaning.
16.3.4 The conservator shall be provided with a magnetic oil level gauge.
16.3.5 The oil connections from the transformer tank to the conservator shall be at rising
angle of 3 to 9 degrees to the horizontal upto Buchholz relay. The inside diameter
of the pipe shall be 80mm. The Buchholz relay will have suitable valves on its both
side so as to facilitate its testing at site as well as cut off oil supply to the
transformer.
16.3.6 The conservator shall be provided with oil preservation system, which should be
suitable either to remove moisture continuously from air entering the air space with
which they are connected or may not allow direct contact of atmospheric air with oil
during operation, in addition to silicagel-breather.
16.4 VALVES:
16.4.1 The transformers shall be provided with 2 No. filter valve each of 50 mm size one
mounted close to the top of the main tank & the other close to bottom of the tank
oil circulation and one drain valve of 80mm size with plug. The conservator shall
have drain plug of 25mm size.
16.4.2 Two robust sampling valves with spouts suitable for taking samples of top, and
bottom oil. The top sampling valves shall be brought down by internal pipe
connections. Suitable name plates shall be affixed to the sampling valves. The
sampling device shall not be fitted on the filter valve.
16.4.3 Two air release plug of 15mm shall be provided.
16.4.4 Plugs shall be supplied for all valves opening to atmosphere.
16.4.5 All valves shall be of gun metal and comply with the latest edition of IS: 3639.

16.5 PRESSURE RELIEF DEVICES:


A suitable pressure relief device shall be provided for rapid release of any pressure
in transformer which may endanger the equipment. The device (s) shall operate at
static pressure less than hydraulic test pressure for transformer tank of OLTC
chamber. If the device is mounted on tank cover, it shall be fitted with a skirt
projecting 25mm inside the tank and of such construction as to avoid gas
accumulation.
In addition to pressure relief device(s) the provision of explosion vent should also
be made and the diaphragm shall be situated above max. oil level or second PRD
on the opposite side of first PRD be provided.
16.6 EARTHING TERMINALS:
16.6.1 Two earthing pads suitable for connecting 50x8mm mild steel flat shall be provided
at positions close to the two diagonally opposite bottom corners of tank. These
grounding terminals shall be suitable for bolted connection. Two earthing terminals
shall also be provided each on marshalling box and any other equipment mounted
separately. The earthing terminal should be capable of carrying full low voltage
short circuit current of transformer for four seconds.

-9-
16.7 JOINTS AND GASKETS: -
16.7.1 All gaskets used for making oil tight joints shall be of granulated cork bonded with
synthetic rubber. Metal tops shall be provided for preventing over compression
wherever compressible gaskets are provided.
16.8 RATING AND DIAGRAM PLATES:
16.8.1 Each transformer shall carry a diagram plate showing internal connections, voltage
vector relationship of different windings, plan view of the transformer showing
physical relationship of the terminals and no load voltage and corresponding current
for each tap.
16.8.2 Each transformer shall be provided with a rating plate data as specified in IS: 2026
or equivalent international standard.
16.8.3 The transformer shall carry a valve schedule plate shorting the location and
function of all values and air release cock on plugs. This plate shall warn operators
to refer to the maintenance instructions before applying the vacuum treatment for
drying.
16.8.4 I.R. values alongwith oil temperature at the time of testing at manufacturer's works
shall be indicated on rating plate or separate plate, to be provided on transformer.
16.9 THERMOSYPHON FILTER ARRANGEMENT

Thermosyphon filter arrangement shall be provided on the transformer for preserving


the quality of Transformer Oil. The filter assembly shall be mounted on the
Transformer as well as ground supported and connected with pipes and shut off
valves. Suitable instructions required to be followed for commissioning,
dismantlement & maintenance of the filter arrangement, re-generation and storage of
the adsorbent etc. must be included in the instruction manual. A detailed drawing
showing internal arrangement, shall also be required to be submitted. Suitable
capacity pump (along with motor) shall also be provided to boost circulation of oil.
The pump and motor should not be in main pipe line. It should be in bypass pipe line
having suitable valve to isolate from main pipe line. The main pipe line should have
two shut off valves at the bottom.

NOTE : - The pump and motor should be weather proof(Flow well Type).

The oil & absorbent capacity required in the Thermosyphon Filter is as under : -

(i) Quantity of oil 2.0% of total oil by weight.


(ii) Quantity of absorbent 1.25% of total oil by weight.
NITROGEN INJECTION FIRE PROTECTION CUM EXTINGUISHING SYSTEM
FOR 100 MVA TRANSFORMER
The Bidder shall provide the nitrogen injection fire protection cum extinguishing
system. The fire protection system using nitrogen as fire quenching medium is
required for the 100 MVA 220/132 kV T/F NIFPES shall act as fire preventer by
preventing transformer oil tank explosion and possible fire in case of internal faults. In
the event of fire by external causes such as busing fire, OLTC fires, fire from
surrounding equipment etc, it shall act as a fast and effective fire fighter. NIFPES
shall accomplish its role as fire preventer and extinguisher without employing water
and/or carbon dioxide. Fire shall be put out within max. 3 minutes of system
activation and within max. 30 seconds of commencement of nitrogen injection.
17.1 Activation of NIFPES
Mal-functioning of fire prevention/extinguishing systems is their major shortcoming
which leads to interruption in power supply. The Bidder shall ensure that the chances
of malfunctioning of NIFPES are practically nil. To achieve this objective, the Bidder
shall work out his scheme of activating signals which, while preventing mal-

- 10 -
operation, should not be too rigorous to make the operation of NIFPES impracticable
in case of actual need. Transformer isolation shall be the mandatory pre-requisite for
activation of the system in automatic mode or remote mode in the control room. In
addition, at least following electrical-signals shall be provided in series for activating
NIFPES.

17.1.1 Auto Mode


a) For prevention of fire: i) Differential relay operation
ii) Buchholz relay paralleled with
pressure relief valve
iii) Tripping of all connected breakers is
a pre-requisite for initiation of system
activation.
b) For extinguishing fire i) Fire detector
ii) Buchholz relay paralleled with
pressure relief valve
iii) Tripping of all connected breakers is
a pre-requisite for initiation of
system activation.
17.1.2 Manual Mode (Local/Remote) : Tripping of all connected breakers is
pre- requisite for initiation of system
activation.

17.1.3 Manual Mode (Mechanical) : Tripping of all connected breakers is a


pre- requisite for initiation of system
activation.
17.2 General description of NIFPES

17.2.1 Schematic of the system


NIFPES should be a stand alone dedicated system for oil filled transformer. It
should have a fire extinguishing (F.E.) cubicle placed on a plinth at a distance of 6-10
mtrs. from the transformer. The F.E. cubicle may be connected to the transformer oil
tank (near its top) and to the oil pit (of capacity approx. equal to 10% of transformer
oil tank) from its bottom through oil pipes with gate valves. The F.E. cubicle should
house a pressurised nitrogen cylinder connected to the transformer oil tank (near its
bottom). Cable connections are to be provided from signal box placed on the
transformer to the control box in the control room and from control box to F.E.
cubicle. Fire detectors placed at the top of transformer are to be connected in parallel
to the signal box. The signal box may be connected to a pre-stressed non-return
valve fitted between the conservator tank and Buchholz relay. Control box is also to
be connected to relay panel in control room for system activation signals.

17.2.2 Operation
On receipt of all activating signals, drain of pre-determined quantity of oil commences
thus removing high temp. top oil layer. Simultaneously nitrogen is injected under high
pressure at a pre-fixed rate, stirring the oil thus bringing the temperature of top oil
layer down. Nitrogen occupies the space created by oil drained out and acts as an
insulating layer between the tank oil and fire on top cover. Pre-stressed non-return
valve blocks oil flow from conservator tank, thus isolating it & preventing aggravation
of fire.

17.2.3 System components


Broadly, NIFPES shall consist of the following components. It is emphasized that all
components, irrespective of their exclusion in the details given below, necessary for
fast reliable and effective working of NIFPES shall be considered within the scope of
supply.

- 11 -
17.2.4 Fire Extinguishing cubicle

It shall be made of 3 mm thick steel sheet, painted dark red from inside and outside
with hinged split doors fitted with high quality tamper proof lock. It shall be complete
with the base frame and the following:-

• Nitrogen gas cylinder with regulator and falling pressure electrical contact
manometer.
• Oil drain pipe with mechanical quick drain valve.
• Electro mechanical control equipment for oil drain and pre-determined
regulated nitrogen release.
• Pressure monitoring switch for back-up protection for nitrogen release.
• Limit switches for monitoring of the system.
• Flanges on top panel for connecting oil drain and nitrogen injection pipes for
transformer.
• Panel lighting (CFL type)
• Oil drain pipe extension of suitable sizes for connecting pipes to oil pit.

17.2.5 Control box

Control box for monitoring system operation, automatic control and remote operation,
with following alarms indication, light switches, push buttons, audio signal, line fault
detection suitable for tripping and signaling on 110V DC/220V DC supply.

• System on*
• PNRV open*
• Oil drain valve closed*
• Gas inlet valve closed*
• PNRV closed^
• Fire detector trip^
• Buchholz relay trip^
• Oil drain valve open^
• Extinction in progress^
• Cylinder pressure low^
• Differential relay trip^
• PRV operated^
• Transformer trip^
• System out of service
• Line fault fire detector
• Line fault differential relay
• Line fault buchholz relay
• Line fault PRV
• Line fault transformer trip
• Line fault PNRV
• Auto / Manual/Off
• Extinction release on
• Extinction release off
• Lamp test
• Visual/Audio alarm
• Visual/Audio alarm
• Visual/audio alarm for DC supply fail

The signals marked (*) shall be in the top most row of control box panel. The
signals marked (^) shall follow next.

- 12 -
17.2.6 Pre-stressed non return valve (PNRV)

PNRV is to be fitted in the conservator pipe line between conservator and Buchholz
relay. It shall have the proximity switch for remote alarm, indication and with visual
position indicator. The PNRV should be of the best quality because malfunction of
PNRV shall be of serious consequence as its closing leads to stoppage of breathing
of transformer.

17.2.7 Fire detectors


The system shall be complete with adequate number of fire detectors fitted on the top
of oil tank, OLTC/OFF ckt. tap changer rated for 141 degree C for heat sensing each
fitted with two no. cable glands (water proof/weather proof).

17.2.8 Signal box


It shall be fitted on the transformer for terminating cable connections form PNRV and
fire detectors and for further connection to the control box.

17.2.9 Cables
Fire survival cables, able to withstand 750 degree C, 4 core x 1.5 mm sq. for
connection of fire detectors in parallel shall be used.

Fire retardant low smoke (FRLS) cable 12 core x 1.5 mm sq. for connection between
transformer signal box/marshalling box to control box and control box to fire
extinguishing cubicle shall be used.

Fire retardant low smoke cable 4 core x 1.5mm sq. for connection between control
box to DC supply source and fire extinguishing cubicle to AC supply source, signal
box/marshalling box to pre-stressed non return valve connection on transformer shall
be used.

17.2.10 Pipes
Pipes, complete with connections, flanges, bends tees etc. shall be supplied along
with the system.

17.3 Other items

a. oil drain and nitrogen injection openings with gate valves on transformer tank at
suitable locations.
b. Flanges with dummy piece in conservator pipe between Buchholz relay and
conservator tank for fixing PNRV.
c. Fire detector brackets on transformer top cover.
d. Spare potential free contacts for system activating signals i.e. differential relay
buchholz relay, pressure relief valve, transformer isolation (master trip relay).
e. Pipe connections between transformer to fire extinguishing cubicle and fire
extinguishing cubicle to oil pit.
f. Cabling on transformer top cover for fire detectors to be connected in parallel and
inter cabling between signal box to control box and control box to fire extinguishing
cubicle.
g. Mild steel oil tank with moisture proof coating and sheet thickness of minimum 5 mm,
with watertight cover, to be placed in the oil pit. This tank shall be provided with the
manhole, air vent pipe through silica gel breather, drain valve and a spare gate valve
at the top.
The capacity of tank shall be 10,000 ltrs. and shall be provided as each S/Stn. The
location of the tank shall be approved by the HVPNL. All the Transformers to be fitted
with NISPEF at that S/Stn. shall be connected through suitable piping arrangement to
this common tank.
h. DC-DC converter 220-110V DC (optional, incase 110V, supply is not available.)

- 13 -
i. Gate valves on oil drain pipe and nitrogen injection pipe should be able to withstand
full vacuum. A non-return valve shall also be fitted on nitrogen injection pipe between
transformer and gate valve.
j. The F.E. cubicle shall be painted with post office red colour (shade 538 of IS-5). All
the exposed parts i.e. pipes, supports, signal box etc shall be painted with enameled
paint.
k. Civil works of F.E. cubicle and oil pit are in the scope of bidder.

17.4 Interlocks

It shall be ensured that once the NIFPES gets activated manually or in auto mode, all
the connected breakers shall not close until the system is actually put in OFF mode.
Also PNRV shall get closed only if all the connected breakers are open.

17.5 Technical particulars

17.5.1 Fire extinction period

On commencement of nitrogen injection : Max. 30 secs.


From the moment of system activation to : Max. 3 mins.
Complete cooling.
Fire detectors heat sensing temperature : 1410C
Heat sensing area : 800mm radius
Pre-stressed non return valve setting for : minimum 60 ltr. Per operation.min.
Capacity of nitrogen cylinder : minimum 68 ltr. water cap.
and shall hold minimum 10 cubic mete
gas to 150 bar pressure.
Power Source :
Control Box : 110V DC/220V DC
Fire extinguishing cubicle for lighting : 230V AC

18.00 COOLING PLANT:


18.1 The cooling equipment shall consist of the following:
a. 2-50 percent tank
b. 2-100% pumps one of these being stand by
c. 2-stand by fans one in each 50% Bank
18.2 In case separate cooler banks are used, they shall be suitable for mounting on a
flat concrete base. These shall be provided with a valve (25 mm) at each point of
connection to the transformer tank, removable blanking plates to blank off main oil
connections to each cooler. Thermometer pockets with captive screwed cap at
inlet and outlet of each separate cooler, filter valve at top and bottom and air
release plug of 15mm.
18.3 The motor blowers shall be direct driven suitable for continuous out door operation
and complete with necessary air dusting. These shall be mounted independently
from the radiator and in the case, these are radiator mounting type, use shall be
made of some anti-vibration means. Care shall be taken that the blower unit is
capable of being removed without disturbing the radiator structure. The blades
shall be suitably painted and shall not be of hollow sections. Suitably painted wire
mesh guards with mesh not greater than 25mm shall be provided to prevent
accidental contact with the blades.

- 14 -
18.4 MOTORS:
18.4.1 The motor shall be squirrel cage totally enclosed weatherproof type suitable for
direct starting and for continuous running from 415/240 volts, three-phase/single
phase 50 HZ supply. The motors shall comply with IS as applicable for continuous
rated machine.
18.4.2 All motors shall be capable of continuous operation at frequency 50Hz with
variation of ±5% and 415/240 V AC ±10% variation of the normal voltage without
injurious over heating.
18.4.3 All motors shall have ball or roller bearing with hexagonal nipples for greasing. In
case of vertical spindle, motor shall have bearing capable of withstanding thrust,
due to weight of the moving parts.
18.4.4 Varnished cambric or glass insulator shall be used for connections from stator
winding to the terminal suitable for external wiring. The motor terminals shall be of
stud type and totally enclosed.
18.5 COOLER CONTROL:
18.5.1 Each motor or group of motors shall be provided with a 3 pole electrically operated
connector with control gear for motor operation by hand and automatically through
winding temperature indicator. Provision shall be made for over load protection but
no volt release shall not be provided.
18.5.2 All connection shall be so arranged as to allow either individual or collective
operation of the motors. Alarm indication (audio and visual) for failure of fans and to
indicate failure of power supply shall be provided.
18.5.3 The control equipment shall be installed in the marshaling box as specified in Cl.23
in a readily accessible position.
18.5.4 The alarm indication for failure of power supply and failure of individual fans be
provided through independent non trip alarm scheme to be wired on the remote tap
charger control cubicle conforming to the following. : -
i) The closing of an initiating contact shall actuate a buzzer and will be
accompanied by a flag indication on the concerned auxiliary relay.
ii) The closing of an initiating contact shall glow a lamp, which will not reset
until the fault has been cleared.
iii) It shall be possible to silence the buzzer by pressing 'Accept' push button.
If, after canceling the alarm but before resetting the visual signal, the same
fault persists the buzzer shall be suppressed.
iv) If after canceling the alarm but before resetting the visual signal, some other
fault takes place, the alarm accompanied by flag indication on appropriate
auxiliary relay shall take place.
v) If after canceling the alarm and after resetting the visual signal, the same
fault appears or some other fault takes place, the alarm, flag indication and
non-trip lamp indication shall reappear as usual.
vi) The non-trip alarm acceptance shall be by means of push button and
resetting of visual signal may also preferably be done through a push
button.
vii) Means shall be provided for test checking the lamp and alarm circuit at
frequent intervals.
viii) The equipment shall be suitable for 220 Volts DC operation.
Static facia aunnuciator conforming to the foregoing requirements of non-
trip alarm scheme too would be acceptable.

- 15 -
19.00 VOLTAGE CONTROL (ON LOAD TYPE):
19.1 The transformer shall by provided with OLTC which apart from being suitable for
local manual/electrical operation & remote electrical operation, shall be suitable for
operation by means of automatic voltage regulating relay. The AVR relay will be
fed by a single phase CVT (66000/110)/110/√3 volts installed on the secondary
side of transformer the variation in the transformation ratio is to be brought about
with out any phase displacement. 132 kV CVT is not included in the scope of
supply of the specification.
19.2 Equipment for 'local' and 'remote' electrical and 'local' manual operation shall be
provided and shall comply with the following conditions. Local/ remote switch may
be housed in remote control panel or in tap changer drive mechanism.
19.2.1 It shall not be possible to operate the electric drive when the manual operating gear
is in use.
19.2.2 It shall not be possible for any two electric controls to be in operation at the same
time.
19.2.3 The equipment suitable for supervisory control and indication on a multi way
switch, make-before break, having one fixed contact for each tap position, shall be
provided and wired to the tap changer drive gear. This switch shall be provided in
addition to any, which may be required for remote tap change position indication
purpose. Supervisory indication shall also be provided in the form of contacts to
close on. "Tap change incomplete" condition. All other components of the
supervisory gear if required be specified separately.
19.2.4 Operation from the local or remote control switch shall cause one tap movement
only. The control switch shall be returned to the 'neutral' position between
successive operations.
19.2.5 All Electrical control switch on the local operation gear shall be clearly labeled in a
suitable manner to indicate the direction of tap changing.
19.2.6 The local control switches shall be mounted, in the drive gear housing.
19.3 The equipment shall be so arranged as to ensure that when a tap change has
commenced, it shall be completed independent of the operation of the control
relays or switches. In case of failure of the auxiliary supply while tap change is in
progress or any other contingency such as stuck tap changer, adequate means
shall be provided to safe guard the transformers and its auxiliary equipment.
19.4 Suitable apparatus shall be provided for each transformer to give indications as
follows: -
19.4.1 To give indication, mechanically at the transformer and electrically at the remote
control cubicle of the position of tap in use.
19.4.2 To give an indication at the remote control cubicle that a tap change is in-progress,
by means of an illuminated lamp.
19.5 For remote control, the switches, tap position indicator, etc. shall be supplied duly
mounted on remote control cubicle.
19.6 All relays and operating devices shall be operated correctly at any voltage between
the limits specified in the relevant ISS.
19.7 The tap changing mechanism and mechanism shall be mounted in the oil tank or
compartment mounted in an accessible position on the transformer.
19.8 Any non oil filled enclosed compartment shall be adequately ventilated,
Thermostatically controlled heaters shall be provided in the driving mechanism
chamber and in the marshaling box. All contactor & auxiliary relay coils or other
parts shall be suitably protected against corrosion or deterioration due to
condensation, fungi etc.

- 16 -
19.9 The tap changer contacts which are not used for making or breaking current like
separate selector switch contacts can be located inside main transformer tank
where tap changer construction permits such an arrangement. The oil in case of on
load tap changer having separate compartment for selector contacts shall be
maintained under conservator head by means of pipe connection from the highest
point of the chamber to the conservator. Such connection shall be controlled by
suitable valve and shall be arranged so that any gas leaving the chamber will pass
into the gas and oil actuated relay. A separate buchholz relay may be provided for
this compartment.
19.10 It shall not be possible for the oil in these compartments of the tap change
equipment which contain contacts used for making or breaking current, to mix with
the oil in the compartments containing contacts and not used for making or
breaking current.
19.11 Any 'DROP DOWN' tanks associated with the tap changing apparatus shall be
fitted with guide rods to control the movement during lifting or lowering operations.
The guide rods shall be so designed as to take support of the associated tank
when in the fully lowered position with oil. Lifting gear fitted to 'Drop Down' tanks
shall include suitable device to prevent run-away during lifting and lowering
operations. They shall be provided with adequate breathing arrangement. The tap
changer shall be mounted in such a way that the cover of the transformer can be
lifted without removing connections between windings and tap changer.
19.12 Each compartment in which the oil is not maintained under conservator head shall
be provided with a suitable direct reading oil gauge.
19.13 The alternating supply for electrical operation of the control and indicating gear
shall be standard 415 Volts, three-phase, 3 wire, 50 Hz. along with 240 Volts single
phase, 2 wire 50 Hz, subject to a variation of ±5 percent so that the equipment
offered can withstand variation in AC
19.14 Limit switches shall be provided to prevent over-running of the mechanism and
except where modified in clause 18.15 shall be directly connected in the circuit of
the operating motor. In addition a mechanical stopper or other approved device
shall be provided to prevent over-running of the mechanism under any condition.
19.15 Limit switches may be connected in the control circuit of the operating motor
provided that a mechanical declutching mechanism is incorporated.
19.16 Thermal devices or other means like motor circuit breakers with shunt trip coil shall
be provided to protect the motor and control circuits. All relays, switches fuses, etc.
shall be mounted in the marshaling box or driving gear housing. These shall be
clearly marked for purpose of identification. They shall withstand the vibration
associated with tap changer gear operation.
19.17 The control circuits shall operate at 110V single phase to be supplied from a
transformer having a ratio of 415 or 240/55-0-55 V with the center point earthed
through a removable link mounted in tap changer drive.
19.18 The whole of the apparatus shall be of robust design and capable of giving
satisfactory service under conditions to be met in service including frequent
operation.
19.19 A five-digit counter shall be fitted to the tap changing mechanism to indicate the
number of operations completed by the equipment.
19.20 A permanently legible lubrication chart shall be fitted within the driving mechanism
chamber, where applicable.
19.21 The indigenous make OLTC having voltage rating as 132 kV & current rating 300
Amp. should be duly type tested from CPRI or other Govt. test house or reputed
lab from abroad to the extent the facilities of type test available with CPRI.

- 17 -
20.0 PARALLEL OPERATION:
20. 1 In addition to individual control of tap changer, provision shall be made to enable
parallel operation of the tap changer when one unit is running in parallel with
another similar unit of same rating.
20.2 Suitable selector switch and controls shall be provided so that any transformer of
the group can at a time be selected as master, follower or independent.
Arrangement shall be made that only one of the transformers can be selected as
master at a time.
20.3 An out of step device shall be provided for each transformer indicating out of step
condition by an indicating lamp and buzzer. It shall be arranged to prevent further
tap changing when transformers in a group operating in parallel control are one tap
out of step.
21.0 BUSHING INSULATORS AND TERMINALS:
21.1 Transformer shall be fitted with bushing insulators as follows: -
HV bushing: 245 kV class, condenser bushing of 800 Amp. rating without arcing
horns.
L.V. Bushing: 72.5/36 kV class condenser bushing of 1000/2000 Amp. rating
without arcing horns.
Neutral Bushing: 36 kV class oil communicating type porcelain bushing of
1000/2000 Amp. rating without arcing horns.
• The characteristics of the bushings shall be in accordance with IS: 2099 and IS:
3347.
• A continuous flexible pull through lead suitably sweated to the end of winding
copper shall be connected to the connector in the helmet of the 220/66 kV
Bushing. The bushings may be filled with oil, which may not be in
communication with the oil in transformer.
• All porcelain shall be free from defects and thoroughly vitrified with a smooth,
hard and uniform brown glaze. It should be capable of satisfactory use under
the climatic conditions as specified in clause-3.0.
• In case of paper insulation care shall be taken to prevent ingress of moisture
and a final coat of non-hygroscopic varnish shall be given to them.
• All clamps and fittings made of malleable iron or steel shall be galvanized as
per IS: 2629. The bushings flanges shall not be of re-entrant shape which may
trap air.
• Bi-metallic terminal connectors shall be supplied suitable for single/twin AAC
Tarantulla conductor for HV & LV side and neutral side. The take off for H.V. &
L.V. connectors will be Vertical and for Neutral it should be suitable for
horizontal take off.
• The connectors shall have six number bolts provided with check nuts &
washers. The connectors shall have rating corresponding to those of equipment
or higher and shall be designed most liberally with a higher factor of safety to
comply in all respects with temperatures rise, resistance, tensile strength
short-circuit withstand capability tests as specified in IS: 5561-1970 or
amendment thereof (Latest edition). Aluminum alloy used in the manufacture of
Bi-metallic connectors shall conform to designation Grade 4600 of IS:
617-1975. The steel bolts, nuts washers and check nuts shall be hot dip
galvanized marked with ISI certification mark or of GKW make.
22.00 TEMPERATURE INDICATING DEVICES:
22.1 All transformers shall be provided with a dial type thermometer for indicating oil
temperature. The indicator shall be fitted with a pointer to register maximum temp
recorded and adjustable set of mercury contact for alarm and trip.

- 18 -
22.2 In addition, all the transformers shall be provided with a dial type Hot Spot winding
temperature indicator in HV & LV winding. The indicator shall have a pointer to
register maximum temperature reached and four sets of adjustable mercury
contacts for alarm, trip, automatic control of fans & remote indication. The static
remote repeater (for winding temperature indicator) suitable for flush mounting shall
be installed on remote tap charge control cubicle.
22.3 The temperature indicators shall be housed in marshaling box.
22.4 The alarm (mercury) contact of WTI & OTI shall be adjustable between 50oC to
100oC where as their trip (mercury) contacts shall be adjustable between 60oC and
120oC. The temperature difference between opening & closing of these mercury
contacts shall not be more than 10oC.
22.5 The mercury contacts used for controlling cooling plant motors shall be adjustable
to close between 50oC and 100oC. The temperature differential between opening &
closing of this mercury contract shall be between 10oC to 15oC.
22.6 All contacts should be accessible on removal of the cover adjustable to scale. It
shall also be possible to move the pointers by hand for checking the operation of
contacts and associated equipment.
22.7 In addition each transformer shall be provided with a dial type thermometer for
indicating the ambient temperature.

23.00 GAS AND OIL ACTUATED RELAYS: -


23.1 The transformer shall be provided with a gas and oil actuated relay fitted with alarm
and trip contacts for main tank & oil surge relay for its OLTC as per IS:3637.
23.2 Each such relay shall be provided with a test cock to take a flexible connection for
checking relay operation
23.3 A machined surface shall be provided on top of relay for checking mounting angles
in the pipe cross level of relay and its setting.
23.4 The pipe work shall be such as to allow any gas formed in the tank to pass through
the relay. The oil circuit through the relay shall not form a parallel delivery path
with any circulating oil pipe, nor shall it be tied into or connected through the
pressure relief vent.
23.5 Adequate clearance between oil pipe work and live metal parts shall be provided.

24.00 MARSHALING BOX: -


24.1 A sheet steel (of 10 SWG size) vermin proof well ventilated and weather proof
marshaling box of suitable construction shall be provided for the transformer
auxiliary apparatus. The box shall have domed or sloping roofs. Ventilation
louvers, suitably padded with felt, shall also be provided. It shall be painted as per
Cl.5.14.
24.2 The marshaling box shall accommodate temperature indicators. Local electrical
control of tap changer (if same cannot be housed in motor drive housing.), Control
& protection equipment for cooling plant, terminal boards and gland plates for cable
etc. The equipment shall be mounted on panels and panels wiring shall be done at
the back for interconnections.
24.3 The temperature indicators shall be mounted at about 1600mm from ground level.
24.4 A metal clad heater with thermostat, controlled by a waterproof rotary switch on the
outside of the box, shall be provided.

- 19 -
24.5 The incoming cables shall enter from the bottom with gland plate not less than
450mm from the base of the box. Care shall be taken to avoid ingress of water
from the cable trench.
25.00 CONTROL CONNECTIONS, INSTRUMENTS WIRING, TERMINAL BOARD AND
FUSES: -
25.1 All cables and wiring shall be suitable for use under the conditions as specified in
Section -I. Any wiring liable to come in contact with oil shall be of oil resisting
insulation. The bare ends of stranded wire shall be sweated together to prevent oil
from creeping along the wire.
25.2 The instrument and panel wiring shall be run in PVC or non rusting metal cleats of
limited compression type.
25.3 The box wiring shall be as per relevant ISS. All wiring shall be of stranded copper
of 660V grade and size not less than 4 Sq. mm. for CT leads and not less than 2.5
Sq. mm for other connections. The panel wires and multi core cable shall bear
ferrules of white insulation material with indelible marking in black and as per
relevant ISS. Same ferrule number shall not be used on wires in different circuits.
Double ferrule may be provided where a change in number is required.
25.4 Stranded wires shall be terminated with tinned Ross Courtney terminals, washers
or crimped tubular lugs. Separate washers shall be used for each wire. Wire shall
not be jointed/tied between terminal points.
25.5 Where apparatus is mounted on panels all metal cases shall be separately earthed
by copper wire or strip not less than 2.5 sq. mm. The screens of screened pairs of
multi core cables shall be earthed at one end of the cable only.
25.6 All terminal boards shall be of stud-type & mounted obliquely towards the rear door
and these boards shall be spaced not less than 100mm apart. Suitable insulation
barriers shall be provided between adjacent connections. No live metal shall be
exposed at the back of terminal boards.
25.7 All fuses shall be of cartridge type and fuses and links shall be properly labeled.

26.00 Losses:-

The losses of each transformer shall be stated in the tender for OFAF rating (at full
load at 75 deg. C ) which shall be less than:-

Sr. No. Type of Losses 100 MVA 220/66 KV T/F


1 No load losses 54 KW (Max)
2 Load Losses 295 KW (Max)
3 Auxiliary Losses 8 KW (Max)

27.0 Noise level : Max. 80 dB

Transformer offers shall be rejected if audible sound level is higher than max. 80 dB.

- 20 -
28.00 TESTS:
28.1 ROUTINE TESTS:
All routine test shall be carried out on each transformer as per IS-2026 in the
presence of HVPNL's representative.
28.2 TYPE TESTS :
The following type tests shall be carried out on one transformer as per ISS:2026 in
the presence of HVPNL's representative.
i) Temperature rise test (along with DGA)
ii) Impulse voltage withstand test as per clause 13 of ISS-2026/1981 Part-III on
one limb.
There will not be any separate schedule for type test charges. The charges if any
may be included in bid price.
28.3 In addition, the following tests shall be carried out on the Transformer Tank:
28.3.1 OIL LEAKAGE TEST:
All tanks and oil filled compartments shall be tested for oil tightness by being
completely filled with oil of viscosity not greater than that of insulating oil to IS: 335
at ambient temperature and subjected to a pressure equal to normal pressure
plus 35KN/M2 (5 lbs sq. inch) measured at the base of the tank. This pressure
shall be maintained for a period not less than 12 hours, during which period no
leakage shall occur.
28.3.2 Following tests shall be carried out on each transformer as reference test:
i) Measurement of tan delta and capacitor of T/F Winding and bushings at 5
kV & 10 kV.
ii) Magnetic balance test.
iii) Magnetising current at low voltage
iv) Measurement of percentage impedance at all taps at low voltage.
v) Partial discharge test.
vi) Noise level test.
28.3.3 TRANSFORMER OIL:
The bidder shall indicate in detail facility available at his works for carrying out
various tests on transformer oil as per ISS: 335 (Latest) and oxidation stability test
as per ASTM:D-1934. It is contemplated that the oil test shall be carried out on the
transformer oil at the works of the transformer manufacturer before and after
pouring of oil. New transformer oil before pouring in tanks, should conform to
values Specified in ISS-335/93 and after pouring in the tank but before energisation
the transformer oil should conform ISS: 1866/83 Amendment No. I issued in
Dec.1987.

28.4 The HVPNL reserves the right to have any other, reasonable test carried out at his
expense either before shipment or at site to ensure that the transformer complies
with the requirement of this specification.

- 21 -
28.5 STAGE INSPECTION:
The HVPNL reserves the right for stage inspection of one or all the transformers at
following stages, to ensure that the internal details are in accordance with the
data/information supplied, for which the Bidder would give 30 days prior notice and
the Bidder would not go ahead with further production schedule without obtaining
concurrence from the HVPNL..
a. CORE:
Bidders will offer the core for inspection and approval by the HVPNL during
the manufacturing stage. Bidders call notice for the purpose should be
accompanied with the following documents.
a) Invoice of Bidder.
b) Mills test certificate.
c) Bill of landing.
d) Bill of entry certificate to customs.
Core material shall be directly procured either from the manufacturer or
through their accredited marketing organisation of repute only.
Following tests shall be carried out.
i. Measurement of flux density.
ii. No load loss measurement by providing dummy coils at 90%, 100%
and 110% rated voltage and frequency.
iii. Tests on CRGO sample taken from the core shall be carried out for
Carlit test (Resistance Measurement) watt loss test, lamination
thickness and aging tests.
iv. Physical inspection for quality of workmanship.
b. WINDINGS:
i. Measurement of cross-sectional area for current density.
ii. Measurement of weight of bare copper/ cover by resistance methods.
iii. Test may be carried out on sample of copper for assessing its quality.
c. TANK:
i) Vacuum Test:
One transformer tank out of the lot shall be subjected to vacuum pressure of
100.64 kN (760 mm of hg). The tanks to be designed for full vacuum shall be
tested at an internal pressure of 3.33 KN/M2 (25mm of Hg.) for one hour.
The permanent deflection of flat plates after the vacuum has been released
shall not exceed the values given below without affecting the performance of
the Transformer.
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Horizontal length of flat plate(mm). Permanent deflection(mm).
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Upto & including 750 5.0
751-1250 6.5
1251-1750 8.0
1751-2000 9.5
2001-2250 11.0
2251-2500 12.5
2501-3000 16.0
above 3000 19.0
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

- 22 -
ii) PRESSURE TEST:
One transformer tank out of the lot shall be subject to the pressure corresponding
to twice the normal head of oil or normal pressure plus 35KN/M2 (which ever is
lower) measured at the base of the tank and maintained for one hour. The
permanent deflection of flat plates after removal of excess pressure shall not
exceed the figures specified as above.
d. RADIATORS:
Radiator shall be routine and type tested at sub Bidders' work as per relevant
standard. Test reports are required to be supplied at the time of final inspection.
NOTE:
a. The insulation resistance values of the transformer windings will be
recorded at the time of carrying out routine tests, for 20 seconds, one
minute, two minutes with the help of 5000V motorized meggar. (Preferably
EVERSHED/ AVO & VIGNOLE MAKE). The polarisation index values (ratio
of 120/20 sec. value) will be accordingly calculated and recorded in the test
certificates and it should not be less than 1.5.
b. Dissolved gas analysis test shall be got carried-out before and after heat
run test at CPRI.
c. Capacitance and Tan Delta values for each transformer and condenser
bushings will be taken and recorded in the test certificates at 5 kV & 10 kV.
Insulation resistance value of condenser bushings shall also be recorded.
d. Lightening impulse test with the chopped wave applications as per clause
13 of IS: 2026/ 1981 (Part-III) amended upto date. This test will be carried
out on one of the limbs of HV and LV winding with positive polarity.
e. The tender should clearly indicate the testing facilities available with them
and tests which are to be arranged outside.
Bidder shall submit in-house test certificate at least 15 days in advance for final
testing of transformer. For testing T/F, all measuring instruments shall be of
highest efficiency and best quality. These shall be got calibrated from NPL/ Govt.
Agency and be got sealed by calibrating agency. HVPN reserves the right to
calibrate the instruments in the manner it desires.
Losses shall be measured with 3-wattmeter method only. Resistance shall be
taken with Double-Kelvin Bridge. Losses can be measured directly from CTs and
PTs and not through the panel. Ratio of the measuring instrument shall be such
that the multiplying factor is the minimum.
All tests shall be carried out in the presence of the HVPNL before dispatching the
material. Test certificates in quadruplicate will be submitted to the HVPNL for
approval. No material shall be despatched without prior inspection and approval
of test certificates unless otherwise agreed to. Type and routine test certificates of
all bought out items from recognised testing agency shall be submitted for
approval before commencing supplies. OLTC scheme including the master
follower functioning shall also be checked. Only fully assembled transformer
including mounting of radiators shall be put-up for inspection.

29.00 DRAWINGS:
29.1 The following drawings shall be supplied as part of the tender.
29.1.1 Outline dimensional drawing of transformer and accessories.
29.1.2 Bushing and terminal connectors drawing.

- 23 -
29.2 The bidder shall submit four sets of final version of all the above drawings for
HVPNL's approval along with the tender in a separate seal cover. These
drawings will be opened in the event of order. The HVPNL shall communicate his
comments/approval on the drawings to the Bidder within four weeks of the issue
of LOI. The manufacturer shall, if necessary, modify the drawings and resubmit
the same for HVPNL's approval within two weeks of receipt of comments. Such
duly revised drawings will be approved by the HVPNL within two weeks of their
receipt.
After receipt of HVPNL's approval to drawings, the manufacturer will submit a set
of reproducible of all the approved drawings and will also supply five sets of all
approved drawings and five sets of manual of instructions per transformer to
Substation Design Directorate HVPNL Panchkula.
ONE SET OF ALL THE APPROVED DRAWINGS AND MANUAL OF INSTRUCTIONS WILL
BE SUPPLIED ALONGWITH EACH TRANSFORMER WITHOUT WHICH THE SUPPLY
WILL NOT BE CONSIDERED AS COMPLETE SUPPLY.
29.2.1 Outline general arrangement drawings showing plan, front elevation & side
elevation with all fittings and accessories etc. The following information must be
specifically included on the drawings.
a. Make of transformer oil.
b. Electrical clearances, minimum as well as actual.
c. No. of radiator headers, number of radiator element in each header.
d. Small sketch showing un-tanking details.
e. Thickness of transformer tank bottom, side & top plates.
f. Type, shade, shade No. and thickness of transformer paint.
g. Roller, rail gauge sketch.
h. Weight of oil, bare copper weight windings, core, un-tanking mass,
transportation mass and dimensions etc.
29.2.2 Detailed of bushings showing plan, elevation, terminal details, mounting details
make and type number incorporating electrical characteristics, description of
various parts, total creepage/ & protected creepage distance, weight of oil, total
weight of bushing , dimensions, short time current rating etc.
29.2.3 Drawing showing HV & LV windings with arrangement of insulation and terminal
connections.
29.2.4 Schematic control and wiring diagram for auxiliary equipment like OLTC control
gear, cooler control gear, Marshaling Kiosk. Detailed write-up for schematic shall
also be supplied
29.2.5 Combined Rating & Diagram Plate.
29.2.6 Valve schedule plate.
29.2.7 Core assembly drawing with flux density calculations.
29.2.8 Interconnection diagram between OLTC panel, Drive mechanism and
marshalling kiosk.
29.2.9 Detailed calculations showing short circuit with stand capability due to radial and
axial forces during short circuit. Also calculation for thermal withstand capability
during short circuit.
29.2.10 Cable arrangement on the transformers.
29.2.11 Drawing showing connection of HV, LV lead with the respective bushing and their
place of storage during transportation.
29.2.12 Detailed drawing of NIFPES system along with its detailed write up.

- 24 -
SECTION-4
CHAPTER-1

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR


SURGE ARRESTORS (LIGHTNING ARRESTORS)

1.0 SCOPE:

1.1 This specification provides for the design, engineering, manufacture, assembly, stage
testing, inspection and testing before despatch, packing, forwarding and delivery at
site of Metal Oxide (gapless) 198 kV & 60 kV Surge Arrestors complete with discharge
counter, insulating base and other accessories for all rating arrester.

1.2 It is not the intent to specify completely herein all the details of design and construction of
Surge Arrestors. However, Surge Arrestors shall conform in all respects to the high
Standard of design and workmanship and be capable of performing in continuous
commercial operation upto Bidder's guarantee in a manner acceptable to HVPNL. The
Arrestors offered shall be complete with all parts, necessary for their effective and
trouble free operation. Such components shall be deemed to be within the scope of
supply, irrespective of whether they are specifically brought out in the commercial
order or not.

2. STANDARDS:

2.0 The Surge Arrestors shall conform to the latest editions and amendments available at
the time of supply, of the standards listed hereunder.
______________________________________________________________
Sl. Standard Title
No. Ref. No.
______________________________________________________________
1. IEC:99-4 Specification Part-4 for Surge Arrestors without gap for AC
system.

2. IS:3070 Specification for Lightning Arrestors


(Part-III) for alternating current system

3. IS: 2629 Recommended practice for hot dip galvanizing of iron


and steel.

4. IS: 2633 Method for testing uniformity of coating on zinc coated


articles.

5. IS:5621 Specification for large hollow porcelain for use in electrical


installation.

6. IS:2147 Degree of protection provided by enclosures for low voltage


switchgear and control.

7. Indian Electricity Rules, 1956.

______________________________________________________________________________

-1-
Note:

i) For the purpose of this specification all technical terms used hereinafter shall have
the meaning as per IEC/ISS specification.

ii) For the parameters of the Arrestor which are not specified in IEC specification for
Surge Arrestors, the provisions of IS: 3070 (Part-I) shall be applicable.

2.1 Surge Arrestors meeting with the requirements of other authoritative standards, which
ensure equal or better quality than the standards mentioned above shall also be
acceptable. Where the equipment offered by the Bidder conforms to other standards,
salient points of difference between the standards adopted and the specified standards
shall be clearly brought out in the offer. Four (4) copies of the reference standards in
English language shall be furnished alongwith the offer.

3.0 SERVICE CONDITIONS:

As per section-1 Vol-II

3.1 AUXILIARY POWER SUPPLY:

The equipment offered under this specification shall be suitable for the following auxiliary
power supplies.

a) Power Devices (like drive motors) 415V, 3 Phase, 4 wire 50 Hz,


neutral grounded AC supply

b) AC Control and protective 240V, single space, 2 wire 50


devices, lighting fixtures, space Hz, neutral grounded AC
heaters supply

c) DC alarm,control and protective 220V, DC 2-Wire


devices

Each of the foregoing supplies shall be made available by the HVPNL at the terminal
point for each equipment for operation of accessories and auxiliary equipment. Bidder’s
scope shall include supply of interconnecting cables, terminal boxes, etc., The above
supply voltages may vary as below and all devices shall be suitable for continuous
operation over entire range of voltages.

i) AC Supply-voltage+10%&-15% frequency + 5%

ii) DC Supply-15% to +10%

4.0 SYSTEM PARAMETERS:

The Surge Arrestors offered under this specification shall conform to the parameters
given below:

-2-
___________________________________________________________________
Sl. Particulars System Voltage (KV rms)
No. 220 66
___________________________________________________________________
1. Nominal system voltage 220 66
(kV rms)

2. Highest system voltage 245 72.5


(kV rms)

3. 1.2/50 microsecond
impulse voltage withstand
level

a. Transformers and 900 325


Reactors (kVp)
b. Other equipment 1050 325
and lines (kVp)

4. Minimum prospective 40 31.5


symmetrical fault current
for 1 second at Arrestor
location (kA rms)
5. Anticipated levels of
temporary overvoltage
and its duration

a) Voltage (p.u.) 1.5/1.2 1.5/1.2

b) Duration (Seconds) 1/10 1/10

6. System frequency(Hz) --------------------- 50 ± 2.5 C/S ----------------------

7. Neutral Grounding E.E* E.E*

8. Number of Phases ----------------------- Three --------------------


*E/E = Effectively earth
__________________________________________________________________

5.0 GENERAL TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS:


5.1 The Surge Arrestors shall conform to the technical requirements as per Annexure-II

5.2 The energy handling capability of each rating of Arrestor offered, supported by
calculations, shall be furnished in the offer.

5.3 The Surge Arrestors shall be fitted with pressure relief devices and arc diverting ports and
shall be tested as per the requirements of IEC specification for minimum prospective
symmetrical fault current as specified in Clause 4.0 (4).

5.4 The grading ring on each complete Arrestor for proper stress distribution shall be provided if
required for attaining all the relevant technical parameters.

-3-
5.5 PROTECTIVE LEVELS:
The basic insulation levels and switching impulse withstand levels of the lines and
equipment to be protected, have been specified in clause 4.0, "Principal Parameters".
The protective characteristics of the Arrestors offered shall be clearly specified in the
schedule of guaranteed technical particulars.

5.6 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS:

5.6.1 The materials and components not specifically stated in this specification but which are
necessary for satisfactory operation of the equipment are deemed to be included in the
scope of supply unless specifically excluded.

5.6.2 Unless otherwise brought out separately by the Bidder in the schedule of deviations the
Surge Arrestors offered shall conform to the specification scrupulously. All deviations
from the specification shall be brought out in the schedule of deviations. The
discrepancies between the specification and the catalogues or literature submitted as
part of the offer shall not be considered as valid deviations unless specifically brought
out in the schedule of deviations.

5.6.3 Any deviation which has not been specifically brought out in the schedule of deviations
of the Bid Proposal Sheets, shall not be given effect to. The deviations brought out in
the schedule shall be supported by authentic documents, standards and other
references.

5.6.4 Each individual unit of Surge Arrestor shall be hermetically sealed and fully protected
against ingress of moisture. The hermetic seal shall be effective for the entire life time of
the Arrestor and under the service conditions as specified. The Bidder shall furnish
sectional view of the Arrestor, showing details of sealing employed.

5.6.5 The Bidder shall furnish in the offer, a sectional view of pressure relief device employed
in the Surge Arrestors offered.

5.6.6 The Surge Arrestors shall be suitable for hot line washing.

5.7 CONSTRUCTION:

5.7.1 All the units of Arrestors of same rating shall be inter changeable without adversely
affecting the performance.

5.7.2 The Surge Arrestors shall be suitable for pedestal type mounting.

5.7.3 All the necessary flanges, bolts, nuts, clamps etc., required for assembly of complete
Arrestor with accessories and mounting on support structure to be supplied by the
HVPNL, shall be included in Bidder's scope of supply.

5.7.4 The drilling details for mounting the Arrestor on HVPNL's support shall be supplied by the
Bidder.

5.7.5 The minimum permissible separation between the Surge Arrestor and any earthed object
shall be indicated by the Bidder in his offer.

5.8 PORCELAIN HOUSING:

-4-
5.8.1 All porcelain housings shall be free from lamination cavities or other flaws affecting the
maximum level of mechanical and electrical strengths.

5.8.2 The porcelain shall be well vitrified and nonporous.

5.8.3 The Creepage distance of the Arrestor housing shall be as per Annexure-I.

5.8.4 The porcelain petticoat shall be preferably of self-cleaning type (Aerofoil design). The
details of the porcelain housing such as height, angle of inclination, shape of petticoats,
gap between the petticoats, diameter (ID and OD) etc., shall be indicated by the Bidder
in his offer in the form of a detailed drawing.

5.8.5 The Arrestor housing shall conform to the requirements of IEC/ISS specification.

5.9 GALVANISATION, NICKEL PLATING ETC.:

5.9.1 All ferrous parts exposed to atmosphere shall be hot dip galvanised as per IS:2629 as
amended from time to time., Tinned copper/brass lugs shall be used for internal wiring
of discharge counter. Screws used for electrical connections shall be either made of
brass or nickel plated.

5.9.2 Ground terminal pads and name plate brackets shall be hot dip galvanised.

5.9.3 The material shall be galvanised only after completing all shop operations.

5.10 ACCESSORIES AND FITTINGS:

5.10.1 Discharge counters shall be provided for the Arrestors. The discharge counter shall be
provided with milli-ammeter for measuring the leakage current and shall not require any
DC or AC Aux. supply. It shall be suitable for outdoor use. The installation of discharge
counter shall not adversely affect the Arrestor performance.

5.10.2 The discharge counter shall register operation whenever lightning or any other
type of surge strikes the Surge Arrestor.

5.10.3 All necessary accessories and Earthing connection leads between the bottom of
the Arrestor and the discharge counter shall be in the Bidder's scope of supply. The
connecting lead between discharge counter and Surge Arrestor shall be of copper
flexible tape of size 25x4 mm and minimum of 1.5 meter length. The discharge counter
shall be so designed that the readings of discharges recorded by the counter and
the readings of milli-ammeter shall be clearly visible through an inspection window to a
person standing on ground. The minimum height of HVPNL's support shall be 2.5 Mts.
Terminal connector conforming to IS:5561 shall be supplied alongwith the arrester.

5.11 Each Surge Counter shall have terminals of robust construction for connection to
Earthing lead and these shall be suitably arranged so as to enable the incoming and
outgoing connections to be made with minimum bends.

5.11.1 Suitable grounding terminal shall be provided for earthing of surge arrestors up to water
level. Proper functioning of the Surge counter with Surge Arrestor shall be ensured by the
Bidder.

-5-
5.12 NAME PLATE:

The arrestor shall be provided with non-corrosive legible name plate indelibly marked with
the following information:

1. Haryana Vidyut Prasaran Nigam Ltd.

2. Order No.

3. Manufacturer's name or trade mark and identification no. of the Arrestor being
supplied.

4. Rated voltage.

5. Maximum continuous operating voltage.

6. Type.

7. Rated Frequency.

8. Nominal discharge current.

9. Long duration discharge class.

10. Pressure relief current in kA rms.

11. Year of manufacture.


6.0 TESTS:

6.1 TYPE TESTS:

The equipment should be offered type test. Test reports should not more then seven years
old reckoned from date of bid opening in respect of all the tests carried out in accredited
laboratories (based on ISO/IEC) by a reputed accreditatic body or witnessed by HVPN or
another electric power utility and be submitted by the successful bidder to HVPNL for
approval as schedule given in Bar Chart.
i) Insulation withstand test
ii) Residual voltage test
iii) Long duration current impulse withstand test
iv) Operating duty test
v) Pressure relief test
vi) Test of arrestor dis-connector
vii) Artificial pollution test on porcelain housed arrestors
viii) Temperature cycle test on porcelain housed arrestors)
ix) Porosity test on porcelain house arrestors
x) Galvanising test on exposed ferrous metal parts

-6-
6.2 ROUTINE TESTS:
As per quality assurance program (QAP).
6.3 ACCEPTANCE TESTS:
The following acceptance tests as stipulated in the relevant IS:3070 (PART-III) 1993 shall
be carried out by the Supplier in presence of HVPNL representative, unless dispensed
with in writing by the HVPNL.
i) Measurement of power frequency reference voltage
ii) Lightening impulse residual voltage test
ii) Partial discharge test

6.4 SURGE MONITOR

The following routine test shall be performed in the presence of HVPNL’s representative:

i) Tests for satisfactory operation of surge counter while discharging surges.


ii) Test for correctness of leakage current meter before and after the passage of
surges.
iii) Visual examination tests.

7.0 DOCUMENTATION:

7.1 The successful bidder shall submit four sets of following drawings for HVPNL approval.

List of drawings:-

i) General outline drawings of the complete Arrestors with technical parameters.

ii) Drawing showing clearance from grounded and other live objects and between
adjacent poles of Surge Arrestors, required at various heights of Surge Arrestors.

iii) Drawings showing details of pressure relief devices.

iv) Detailed drawing of discharge counters along with the wiring and schematic
drawing of discharge counter and meter.

v) Outline drawing of insulating base.

vi) Details of grading rings, if used.

vii) Mounting details of Surge Arrestors.

viii) Details of line terminal and ground terminals.

ix) Volt-time characteristics of Surge Arrestors.

x) Details of galvanising being provided on different ferrous parts.

-7-
xi) The detailed dimensional drawing of porcelain housing such as ID, OD, thickness
and insulator details such height, profile of petticoats, angle of inclination and gap
between successive petticoats, total Creepage distance etc.,

NOTE: All above drawings should bear a minimum space (14x10cm) for stamping the
approval of drawings by HVPNL.

-8-
ANNEXURE - I
(Surge Arrestors)
SHEET 1 OF 3

TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS FOR METAL OXIDE


(GAPLESS) SURGE ARRESTORS

______________________________________________________________________
Sl. Particulars System voltage wise requirement of parameters
No. 220 kV 66 kV
______________________________________________________________________
1. Rated Arrestor 198 60
Voltage

2. M.C.O.V. (kV rms) 168 49

3. Installation ----------------------- Outdoor -----------------------

4. Class --------- ------------------ Station Class ---------------------

5. Type of cons- ------------------ ---------- Single Column, Single Phase----------


truction for
10 kA rated Arrestor.

6. Nominal discharge 10KA 10KA


current corres-
ponding to 8/20
microsec wave
shape (kA rms)

7. Min. discharge 5 KJ/kV (Referred to rated arrester voltage


capability. corresponding to Min. discharge characteristics)

8. Type of mounting ------------------------------------------ Pedestal -------------------------

9. Connection
(Between phase P/E P/E
to earth P/E)
(Between phase
to phase P/P)

-9-
ANNEXURE - I
(Surge Arrestors)
SHEET 2 OF 3

TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS FOR METAL OXIDE


(GAPLESS) SURGE ARRESTORS

______________________________________________________________________
Sl. Particulars System voltagewise requirement of parameters
No. 220 kV 66 kV
______________________________________________________________________

10. Long duration 3 3


discharge class

11. Max. Switching Surge 455 140


kV(P) Protective level
voltage at 1000 Amp.

12. Max. residual voltage 550 170


kV(P) for nominal
discharge current
10 KA with 8/20
micro second wave

13. Max.residual voltage 600 186


kV(P) steep fronted
current impulse of
10 KA.

14. Minimum pros- 40 31.5


symmetrical fault
current for pressure
relief test (kA rms)

15. a) Terminal Connector -------------------Single Zebra------------------------


suitable for ACSR
conductor size
b) Take off Vertical vertical

16. Voltage (kV rms) Rated voltage of the Arrestor


(corona extinction)

- 10 -
ANNEXURE - I
(Surge Arrestors)
SHEET 3 OF 3

TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS FOR METAL OXIDE


(GAPLESS) SURGE ARRESTORS

_____________________________________________________________________
Sl. Particulars System voltagewise requirement of parameters
No. 220kV 66 kV

17. Maximum radio -------------------------- 500 ----------------------------


interference
voltage (Microvolt)
when energised
at MCOV
18. Whether insulating Yes Yes
base and discharge
counter with
milli-ammeter are
required.
19. Minimum creepage 6125 1813
distance of Arrestor
housing (mm)
______________________________________________________________________

- 11 -
SECTION-4
CHAPTER-2
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR 72.5 kV ISOLATORS & LINE - CUM - EARTH SWITCHES

1.0 SCOPE:

This specification provides for design, engineering, manufacture, stage testing, inspection
and testing before dispatch, packing, forwarding and delivery at site of 72.5 kV class
Isolators and line-cum-earth switch complete with all fittings, accessories and associated
auxiliary equipment mandatory spares which are required for efficient and trouble free
operation as specified hereunder.

It is not the intent to specify completely herein all details of the design and construction of
equipments. However, the equipment shall conform in all respects to high standards of
engineering, design and workmanship and shall be capable of performing in continuous
commercial operation up to the Bidder's guarantee acceptable to the HVPNL. The
equipment offered shall be complete with all components necessary for its effective and
trouble free operation along with associated equipment, interlocks, protection schemes etc.,
Such components shall be deemed to be within the scope of supply, irrespective of whether
those are specially brought out in this specification and/or commercially ordered or not. All
similar parts particularly movable ones shall be interchangeable.

2.0 STANDARDS:
Unless otherwise specified elsewhere in this specification, the rating as well as
performance and testing of the isolators shall conform to the latest revisions and
amendments of the following standards available at the time of placement of order.
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Sl. No. Standard No. Title
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. IS:9921 Alternating current isolators(dis-connectors) and earthing
switches.

2. IEC:129 -do-

3. IS:2544 Insulators.

4. IS:2147 Degree of protection provided by enclosure.

5. IS:4691 -do-

6. IS:325 Three phase induction motors.

7. IS:4722 Rotating electrical machines.

8. IS:2629 Recommended practice for hot dip galvanising of


iron & steel.

9. IS:4759 Hot dip galvanisation coating on structural steel.

10 . IS:2633 Method of testing weight, thickness and uniformity

11. IS:1573 Electroplated coating of zinc on iron and steel.

-1-
12. IS:6735 Spring washers.

13. IS:2016 Plain washers.

14. __ Indian Electricity Rules, 1956


--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Equipment meeting with the requirements of other authoritative National or International Standards,
which ensure equal or better performance than the standards mentioned above, shall also be
considered. When the equipment offered by the bidder conforms to other standards salient points of
difference between standards adopted and the standards specified in this specification shall be
clearly brought out in the relevant schedule. Four copies of such standards with authentic
translation in English shall be furnished along with the offer.

3.0 SERVICE CONDITIONS:

As per section -1 Vol -lI

3.1 AUXILIARY POWER SUPPLY:

The equipment offered under this specification shall be suitable for the following auxiliary
power supplies.

a) Power Devices 415 V, 3 phase, 4 wire


(like drive motors) 50 Hz, neutral grounded
AC supply.

b) AC control and protective 240 V, single phase, 2 wire


devices, lighting 50 HZ, neutral grounded
fixtures, space heaters. AC supply.

c) DC alarm, control and 220 V, DC 2-wire


protective devices

Each of the foregoing supplies shall be made available by the HVPNL at the terminal point for each
equipment for operation of accessories and auxiliary equipment. Bidder's scope shall include
supply of interconnecting cables, terminal boxes, etc., The above supply voltages may vary as
below and all devices shall be suitable for continuous operation over entire range of voltages.

i) AC supply - voltage + 10%& -15% frequency ± 5%

ii) DC supply - 15% to + 10%

-2-
4.0 PRINCIPAL PARAMETERS:

The equipment covered in this specification shall meet the technical requirements listed below:
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Sl.No Technical Parameter 72.5 kV
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

1. Rated Frequency (Hz) ------------ 50 ------------

2. System Neutral Earthing ------ Effectively Earthed --------

3. No. of Phases (Poles) -------------- 3 -----------------

4. Temperature Rise ------- As per relevant IS/IEC ---

5. Safe Duration of overload

a) 150% of rated current ---------- 5 minutes --------------

b) 120% of rated current ---------- 30 minutes --------------

6. Rated voltage /Highest 66/72.5


system voltage (kV rms)

7. Type of disconnect (AB) DB

8. Rated normal current


(Amp rms) 1600

9. Rated short time withstand 31.5


current (kA rms) of MS
& EB for 1 sec duration

10. Rated dynamic withstand 78.75


current (kA)

11. Rated short circuit making 78.75


current of EB (kA peak)

12. Basic insulation level:


i) 1.2/50 micro-sec lightning
impulse withstand voltage
(+ ve or - ve polarity)
a) To earth (kVp) 325

b) Across isolating 375


distance One terminal subjected
to lightning impulse (kVp)
and opposite terminal
subjected to power
frequency (kV rms) voltage
(as per IS)

-3-
ii) Rated 1 minute power
frequency withstand voltage ( kV rms )

a) Across isolating distance 160

b) To earth and between 140


poles

13. Min. creepage distance of 1813


support and rotating
insulator (mm)

14. Phase to Phase spacing for 1830


installation (mm)

15. Minimum clearances:


a) Phase to earth 630

b) Phase to Phase 1300


(Across the same pole) ( Bidders offering lesser clearance must substantiate the
same with adequate information on impulse withstand capability of the equipment, However
the height of Post Insulator should not be less than 770 mm in case of 72.5 KV Isolator )

16. Height of center line of 3000


terminal pad above ground
level (mm)
17. Rating of auxiliary 10 A at 220V DC with breaking capacity
contacts of 2 A DC with time constant not less
than 20 ms.

18. Seismic acceleration .................... 0.3 g horizontal ................

19. Operating time ---------------- 12 sec or less ---------------

20. Rated mechanical As per relevant standards


terminal load
21. Rated magnetizing/ 0.7
capacitive current
make/break (Amps/rms)

22. RIV at 1 MHz & 1.1


X rated phase to earth -
voltage (micro volts)
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

5.0 GENERAL TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS:

5.1 The 72.5 kV Isolator with & without earth blade shall be triple pole, single throw, double
break , three post per phase, central pole rotating type.
5.2 The blade shall open and close in a horizontal plane.

5.3 Complete isolators with all the necessary items for successful operation shall be supplied
including but not limited to the following:

-4-
5.3.1 Isolators assembled with isolator blades (main and earth), complete base frame, linkages,
operating mechanism complete etc.

5.3.2 The three poles of the 72.5 kV Isolators covered by this specification will be gang operated
with one central cabinet for the required electrical devices mounted therein.

5.4 Material of earthing blades and contacts shall be same as those of main blades and
contacts. Cross sectional area of Earthing blades and contacts shall not be less than 50%
of cross sectional area of main blades and contacts. The Earthing blades shall have
the same short time current rating (thermal and dynamic) as that of main blades.

5.5 Support insulators for all types of isolators shall be of solid core type.

5.5.1 The insulator shall be made of homogeneous and vitreous porcelain of high mechanical
and di-electric strength. It shall have sufficient mechanical strength to sustain electrical and
mechanical loading on account of wind load, short circuit forces etc., Glazing of the
porcelain shall be of uniform brown or dark brown colour with a smooth surface arranged
to shed away rain water. The porcelain shall be free from lamination and other
flaws or imperfections that might affect the mechanical or dielectric quality. It shall be
thoroughly vitrified, tough and impervious to moisture. The porcelain and metal parts shall
be assembled in such a manner and with such material that any thermal differential
expansion between the metal and porcelain parts throughout the range of temperature
specified in this specification shall not loosen the parts or create undue internal stresses
which may affect the mechanical or electrical strength or rigidity. The assembly shall not
have excessive concentration of electrical stresses in any section or across leakage
surfaces. The cement used shall not give rise to chemical reaction with metal fittings. The
insulator shall be suitable for water washing by rain or artificial means in service
condition. Profile of the insulator shall also conform to IEC-815. Insulator shall have a
minimum cantilever strength of 6 KN.

5.5.2 Cap to be provided on top of the insulator shall be of high grade cast iron or malleable steel
casting. It shall be machine faced and hot dip galvanized. The cap shall have four numbers
of tapped holes spaced on a pitch circle diameter of 127 mm for 72.5 kV Isolators & Line-
cum-Earth Switches.The holes shall be suitable for bolts with threads having anti corrosive
protection. The effective depth of threads shall not be less than the nominal diameter of the
bolt. The cap shall be so designed that it shall be free from visible corona.

5.5.3 The casting shall be free from blow holes, cracks and such other defects.

5.5.4 All the ferrous metal parts shall be hot dip galvanised smoothly as per IS: 3638 (as amended
upto date), IS: 2633 or any other equivalent authoritative standard. The material shall be
galvanised only after shop operations have been completed upon it. The metal parts before
galvanising should be thoroughly cleaned of any paint, grease, rust, scales or alkali or any
foreign deposit which are likely to come in the way of galvanising process. The coating on
the metal parts shall withstand minimum four one minute dips in copper sulphate solution as
per IEC-168.

5.5.5 The insulator unit shall be assembled in a suitable jig to ensure correct positioning of the top
and bottom metal fittings relative to one another. The faces of the metal fittings shall be
parallel and at right angles to the axis of the insulator and the corresponding holes in the
top and the bottom metal fittings shall be in a vertical plane containing the axis of the
insulator.

-5-
5.5.6 It shall be the sole responsibility of the Bidder to carry out thorough inspection and quality
checks on the insulators at the insulator Bidder's works, before offering the insulators for
HVPNL's inspection.

5.6 OPERATING MECHANISM:

a) Each 72.5 kV isolators shall be remote controlled from the control room. Provision shall be
made for local motor control also. Operating mechanism shall also be equipped with local
manual operating device intended for emergency operation when motor operating
mechanism becomes inoperative. Additional electromagnetic type interlock shall be provided
so as to prevent the operation of isolator manually or electrically when the corresponding
circuit breaker is ON.

b) Manual operating mechanism through crank and reduction gear shall be provided for the
earth switch which too will be gang operated. The operation of earth switch which too will be
gang operated. The operation of earth switch shall also be electrically inter-locked by
providing a 63.5V rated Bidder and 220 kV DC rated electro magnet. The Bidder will be fed
from single phase (132 kV/√3/110 kV/√3) CVT/ PT provided at the entry of a transmission
line in the sub-station. The normally closed contact of said contactor will form part of series
chain with other contacts of line isolator/ earth switch to prevent closing of earth switch when
the contactor is in picked up position (which means that when the concerned transmission
line is live).

5.6.2 The operating mechanism shall provide quick, simple and effective operation. The motor
operated type operating mechanism shall be suitable for remote operation of all three poles
simultaneously as well as local manual operation through crank and reduction gear. The
design of manual operation shall be such that one man shall be able to operate the isolator
without undue effort with about 20 (twenty) revolutions of the crank. The operating
mechanism shall be suitable to hold the dis-connector in CLOSE OR OPEN position and
prevent operation by gravity, wind, short circuit forces, seismic forces, vibration, shock,
accidental touching etc.,
5.6.3 Limit switches for control shall be fitted on the isolator shaft within the cabinet to sense the
open and close positions of the isolators and earth switches.
5.6.4 It shall not be possible, after final adjustment has been made, for any part of the mechanism
to be displaced at any point in the travel sufficient enough to cause improper functioning
of the isolator when the isolator is opened or closed at any speed. All holes in cranks,
linkage etc., having moving pins, shall be drilled to fit accurately so as to maintain the
minimum amount of slack and lost-motion in the entire mechanism.
5.6.5 A "local/remote" selector switch and a set of open/close push buttons shall be provided on
the control cabinet of the isolator to permit its operation through local or remote push
buttons. The remote push buttons shall be arranged by the HVPNL.

5.6.6 Provision shall be made in the control cabinet to disconnect power supply to prevent
local/remote power operation.

5.6.7 Each motor operated mechanism shall be subjected to blocked rotor test.

-6-
5.7 CONTROL CABINET:
The control cabinet of the operating mechanism shall be made out of 12 SWG (2.64 mm
thick) sheet steel duly hot dip galvanised or 10 mm thick aluminium plate or casting. Hinged
door shall be provided with pad locking arrangement. Sloping rain hood shall be provided to
cover all sides. 15 mm thick neoprene or better type of gaskets shall be provided to ensure
degree of protection of at least IP:55 as per IS:2147. The cabinet shall be suitable for
mounting on support structure with adjustment for vertical alignment. Details of these
arrangements shall be furnished along with the tender.

5.8 MOTOR:

The motor shall be suitable for three phase, 415 V, A.C. with variations as specified in this
specification. It shall be totally enclosed type if mounted outside the control cabinet. The
motor shall withstand without damage stalled torque for at least three times the duration of
tripping device. The motor shall, in all other respects, conform to the requirement of IS-325.

5.9 GEAR:

The disconnector may be required to operate occasionally, with considerably long idle
intervals. Special care shall be taken for selection of material for gear and lubrication of
gears to meet this requirement. The gears shall be made out of aluminium bronze or any
other better material and lubricated for life with graphite or better quality non draining and
non hardening type grease. Wherever necessary automatic relieving mechanism shall be
provided. Complete details of components, material, grade, self lubricating arrangement,
grade of lubricants, details of jig, fixtures and devices used for quality check, shall be
furnished by the Bidder in his offer.

5.10 GLAND PLATE AND GLANDS:


A removable gland plate with double compression type brass cable glands shall be
provided with each operating mechanism for terminating all cables. Exact quantity of glands
to be provided, shall be intimated to the Bidder.

5.11 CONTROL CIRCUITS:

Control device shall store OPEN and CLOSE command even if the corresponding switch is
momentarily pressed until the command is fully executed and the components get de-
energised after execution. Failure of auxiliary power supply or loose contact shall not cause
faulty operation.

5.12 SUPPORTING STRUCTURE :

The Isolators and isolator - cum - earth switches shall be mounted rigidly in an upright
position on their own supporting structure and not on the line or bus bar structure. The
supporting structures will be arranged by the HVPNL. The isolator and isolator-cum-earth
switch will be suitable for mounting on HVPNL's standard supporting structure HTD/ST-87R
for 72.5 kV. One print of detailed structure drawing is enclosed with the specification which
may be perused & its suitability for the offered equipment be confirmed by the bidders. Any
additional member of structure required for mounting the M O M box of isolators as well as
line-cum-earth switch will be in scope of bidder's supply.

-7-
5.13 LIMIT SWITCH:

Limit switches shall be of reputed make. Auxiliary switch shall not be used as limit switch.
Details of make, rating and type of limit switch shall be furnished in the offer.

5.14 OVERLOAD AND SINGLE PHASING PREVENTER:

Suitable relay/device shall be provided to prevent overloading of the motor. Single phase
preventer shall be provided to operate on open circuiting of any phase and shall trip off the
motor. Complete details of the devices shall be furnished in the offer.

5.15 CONTACTOR:
The Bidder shall be suitable for making and breaking stalled motor current. The Bidder coil
shall be suitable for 220 V D.C. Two nos. of Bidders shall be provided for each motor for
OPEN and CLOSE operation respectively. Make, type, rating and details of the Bidder shall
be furnished in the offer.

5.16 AUXILIARY SWITCH:

5.16.1 Each operating mechanism box shall be equipped with ten nos. of NC and ten nos. of NO
auxiliary switches exclusively for HVPNL's use. In addition, two pairs of make-before-break
NO/NC contacts shall be provided in the operating mechanism box. 3 pairs of NC and 3
pairs of NO contacts shall be provided in the auxiliary switch box for earth mechanism.

5.16.2 The auxiliary switches and auxiliary circuits shall be capable of carrying the current of atleast
10 Amps continuously
5.16.3 Auxiliary switches shall be capable of breaking atleast 2A in a 220 V D.C. circuit with a time
constant of not less than 20 milli seconds.

5.16.4 Quick Make and Break (QMB) type auxiliary switch shall have snap action built-in within the
switch.
5.16.5 The auxiliary switches shall be actuated by a cam or similar arrangement directly mounted
on the isolator and shall be without any intermediate levels, linkages etc., to ensure fool
proof operation.

5.17 SPACE HEATERS:


Space heater, thermostatically controlled, suitable for single phase 240 V AC supply shall
be provided for motor operated operating mechanism to prevent condensation. A switch
and fuse/link shall be provided in the operating mechanism.
5.18 TERMINAL BLOCK AND WIRING:
Each operating mechanism shall be provided with 1100 V grade stud type terminal block
having washers, nuts & check nuts. All auxiliary switches, interlocks and other terminals
shall be wired upto terminal block. The terminal block shall have at least 20% extra
terminals. All wiring shall be carried out with 1100 V grade insulated 2.5 mm2 copper
wires.

5.19 DUTY REQUIREMENTS:


5.19.1 Isolators and earth switches shall be capable of withstanding the dynamic and thermal
effects of the maximum possible short circuit current of the systems in their closed position.
They shall be constructed such that they do not open under influence of short circuit
current.

-8-
5.19.2 The earth switches, wherever provided, shall be constructionally interlocked so that the
earth switch can be operated only when the isolator is open and not vice-versa. The
constructional interlocks shall be built-in construction of isolator and shall be in addition to
the electrical and mechanical interlocks provided in the operating mechanism.
5.19.3 In addition to the constructional interlock, isolator and earth switches shall have provision
to prevent their electrical and manual operation unless the associated and other
interlocking conditions are met. All these interlocks shall be of fail safe type. Suitable
individual interlocking coil arrangements shall be provided. The interlocking coil shall be
suitable for continuous operation from DC supply and within a variation range stipulated in
this volume.

5.19.4 The isolator shall be capable of making/breaking normal currents when no voltage occurs
across the terminals of each pole of isolator on account of make/break operation.

5.19.5 The isolator shall be capable of making/ breaking magnetising current of 0.7 A at 0.15
power factor and capacitive current of 0.7 A at 0.15 power factor.

5.19.6 Isolator and earth switches shall be able to bear on the terminals the total forces including
wind loading and electrodynamic forces on the attached conductor without impairing
reliability or current carrying capacity.

5.20 INTERIOR ILLUMINATION:

A switch, HRC fuse and holder suitable for a 240 V lamp shall be provided in one of the
motor operated mechanism box of isolator and manually operated mechanism box of earth
switch.
5.21 POWER SOCKET:

A single phase 240 V 15A power socket and switch shall be provided in the motor operated
operating mechanisms of the Isolators poles.

5.22 CONTROL AND AUXILIARY SUPPLY:

A three phase switch with HRC fuses for phases and link for neutral shall be provided for
power supply and a 2 way switch with HRC fuses shall be provided for control supply in the
motor operated mechanisms of the Isolators.

5.23 ACCESSORIES:

The accessories to be provided on the isolator shall include but not limited to the following:

5.23.1 POSITION INDICATOR:

A position indicator to show whether the isolator is in ON or OFF position.

5.23.2 COUNTER BALANCE SPRINGS:


Counter balance springs, cushions etc., shall be provided to prevent impact at the end of
travel both on opening and closing of the isolator. The springs shall be made of durable and
non-rusting type alloy.

5.24 NAME PLATES:

Isolator and Earthing switches and their operating devices shall be provided with a name

-9-
plate. The name plate shall be weather proof and corrosion proof. It shall be mounted in
such a position that it shall be visible in the position of normal service and installation. It
shall carry the following information duly engraved or punched on it.

5.24.1 Isolator Base:


Name of utility (i.e. HVPNL) :
Name of Manufacturer :
P.O. No. :
Type Designation :
Manufacturer's serial number :
Rated voltage :
Rated normal current :
Rated short time current (rms) :
and duration :
Rated short time peak current (kAp):
Weight :

5.24.2 Earthing Switch:


Name of utility (i.e. HVPNL) :
Name of Manufacturer :
P.O. No. :
Type Designation :
Manufacturer's serial number :
Rated voltage :
Rated short time current (rms) :
and duration :
Rated short time peak current (kAp) :
Weight :

5.24.3 Operating Device:


Name of utility (i.e. HVPNL) :
Name of Manufacturer :
P.O. No. :
Type Designation :
Reduction gear ratio :
AC Motor :
i) Rated auxiliary voltage :
ii) Starting current :
iii) Designation of AC motor as per
per IS:4722 :
iv) Starting torque at 80%
of supply voltage :
v) Over travel in degrees after
cutting off supply :
Total operating time in seconds :
i) CLOSE operation - electrical :
ii) OPEN Operation - electrical :
-do- - manual :
Space Heater :
Rated voltage and power Auxiliary contacts
i) Rated current (Amps) :
ii) Time constant (ms) :
iii) No. of contacts used (NC & NO) :
iv) No. of free contacts (NC & NO) :

- 10 -
Terminal blocks and wiring
i) Rated current :
ii) Voltage grade and type :

5.25 PADLOCKING DEVICE:

All Isolator and Earthing switches shall be provided with padlocking device to permit
locking of the isolator and Earthing switch in both fully open and fully closed
positions. Power driven isolator and Earthing switch shall be arranged to be
interlocked electrically also.

5.26 SIGNALLING:

5.26.1 Signalling of the close position shall not take place unless the movable contact has
set in a position in which the rated normal current, the peak withstand current and
the short time withstand current can be carried safely.

5.26.2 Signalling of the open position shall not take place unless the movable contact has
reached the position such that the clearance between the moveable and fixed
contacts is at least 80% of the isolating distance.

5.27 EARTHING:

5.27.1 Flexible copper connections shall be provided between rotating earth blades and the
frame which shall have a cross-section of atleast 50 mm2 and shall be tinned or
suitably treated against corrosion.

5.27.2 The frame of each disconnector and Earthing switch shall be provided with two
reliable Earthing terminals for connection to the HVPNL's Earthing conductor/flat and
also clamping screws suitable for carrying specified short time current. Flexible
ground connections shall be provided for connecting operating handle to the
Earthing flat. The diameter of clamping screw shall be atleast 12 mm. The
connecting point shall be marked with earth symbol.

5.28 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION:

5.28.1 Full particulars of design, manufacture, jig template and quality control devices
developed for manufacture of the equipment offered in respect of but not limited to
the following, shall be furnished with drawings and descriptions alongwith the
tender.

i) Contacts, material, current density etc.,


ii) Design of contact pressure.
iii) Contact support and fixing arrangement on isolators.
iv) Turn and twist mechanism, clamps, locks etc.,
v) Bearings, housing of bearings, bushes etc.,
vi) Balancing of heights,
vii) Coupling pipes, joints, connection adjustments.
viii) Base plates.
ix) Down pipe guides and joints.
x) Brass bushes and bearings at various joints.
xi) Operating mechanism, type of gear motor, limit switch, aux.
switch, timers, size and thickness of box, degree of

- 11 -
protection, gland plate, gland etc.,
xii) Nuts, bolts and fasteners.
xiii) Interlocking devices.

Offers without the above information or with incomplete information shall not be
considered.

5.28.2 FASTENERS:

Nuts, bolts and washers of 5/8" and higher size shall be hot dip galvanised. The
bolts used on tapped holes of insulator cap shall be galvanised by centrifuge
process to avoid excess deposition of zinc on threads. Nuts, bolts and washers of
less than 5/8" size shall be of stainless steel when used on live parts and nickel
plated brass in other parts.
5.28.3 CONTACTS:

Contacts shall be made out of hard drawn electrolytic grade copper. Arcing
contacts wherever provided shall close first and open last. The contacts surface
shall be silver plated. Fabrication of contact shall be made with suitable jig to
avoid deviations during production. Details of size and shape of contacts, springs,
back plate, fixing arrangements design of contact pressure, life of contacts, limit of
temperature rise etc., shall be furnished along with the tender. The moving
contacts of tubular section shall be so dimensioned as to carry the rated current.

5.28.4 MOUNTING OF CONTACTS:

The contacts shall rest on a brass block and with initial tension. Suitable device
shall be provided to prevent dashing. Fabrication, welding etc., shall be done in
suitable jig to avoid deviations during production.

5.28.5 TERMINAL PAD:

The terminal pad shall be suitable for connection to aluminium terminal connector
through bimetallic plate wherever necessary. It shall be made out of electrolytic
copper heavily silver plated. Dimensions of the terminal pad shall be furnished with
the tender.

5.28.6 MOVING BLADE:

Moving blade shall be made out of hard drawn Electrolytic grade copper. Contact
surface of moving blade shall be heavily silver plated. The surface shall be wiped
during closing and opening operations to remove any film, oxide coating etc., Wiping
action shall not cause scouring or abrasion of surfaces.

5.28.7 The rotating insulator shall be mounted on housing with bearing housing. The
housing shall be made of gravity di-cast aluminium with smooth surfaces suitably
machined for seating the bearings. Two nos. of bearings with adequate shaft
diameter and distance between the bearings shall be provided to avoid wobbling
during operations. The bearings shall be of atleast 50 mm shaft diameter. The
bearings shall be of reputed make eg. SKF, HMT, NBC, TATA, and lubricated for
life. All other friction locations shall be provided with bearings, bushes, joints,
springs etc., shall be so designed that no lubrication shall be required during
service. Complete details of bearings, bushes, housing, greasing etc., shall be

- 12 -
furnished with the tender. The Earthing switch shaft shall also be provided with
necessary bearings.

5.28.8 Tandem pipes shall be of adequately dimensioned for the given duty and shall be
class B. Base plate of insulators for connection of tandem pipe shall be made out of
one piece 10 mm thick MS plate. Bolt and shackle device shall be used to connect
tandem pipe to the base plate.

5.28.9 The operating pipe too shall be of class B and adequately dimensioned for the given
duty. The pipe shall be terminated into a suitable swivel or universal type joint
between the insulator bottom bearing and the operating mechanism to take care of
marginal angular misalignment at site.

5.28.10 Each phase of isolator shall be provided with a rigid base fabricated from steel
sections. The base shall be suitable for mounting on support structures.
Fabrication, welding etc., shall be done by suitable jig, power press and templates
to avoid deviations during production. Details of dimensions sections, jig templates
and device used for production of the base shall be furnished with the tender.
5.29 TERMINAL CONNECTORS:

5.29.1 All Isolators shall be provided with universal type terminal connectors suitable for
0.4 Sq. inch ACSR conductor. The unit rate for types of terminal connector shall be
quoted in the relevant schedule.

5.29.2 The terminal connectors shall meet the following requirements:


i) Terminal connectors shall be manufactured and tested as per IS:5561.
ii) All castings shall be free from blow holes, surface blisters, cracks and
cavities. All sharp edges and corners shall be blurred and rounded off.
iii) No part of a clamp shall be less than 10 mm thick.
iv) All ferrous parts shall be hot dip galvanised conforming to IS:2629.
v) For bimetallic connectors, copper alloy liner of minimum thickness of 2
mm shall be cast integral with aluminium body.
vi) Flexible connectors shall be made from tinned copper / aluminium
sheets.
vii) All current carrying parts shall be designed and manufactured to
have minimum contact resistance.
viii) Connectors shall be designed to be corona free in accordance with
the requirements stipulated in IS:5561.

5.29.3 Wherever necessary bimetallic strip of standard quality shall be used to avoid
galvanic corrosion.

5.30 ASSEMBLY:
The disconnector shall be fully assembled at the works of the Bidder and
operations shall be carried out on it to ascertain that all parts fit correctly and
function satisfactorily.

5.31 PAINTING, GALVANISING AND CLIMATE PROOFING:


All interiors and exteriors of enclosures, cabinets and other metal parts shall be
thoroughly cleaned to remove all rust, scales, corrosion, grease and other
adhering foreign matter and the surfaces treated by recognised phosphating (e.g.
seven tank phosphating sequence). After such preparation of surfaces, two coats

- 13 -
of zinc oxide primer shall be given by suitable staving and air drying before final
painting. Colour of the final paints shall be of shade no. 631 of IS:5 i.e. epoxy light
grey. The finally painted cubicle shall present aesthetically pleasing appearance
free from any dent or uneven surface.

5.31.1 Paint inside the metallic housing shall be of anti-condensation type and the paint on
outside surfaces shall be suitable for outdoor installation.

5.31.2 All components shall be given adequate treatment of climate proofing as per
IS:3202 so as to withstand corrosive and severe service conditions.

5.31.3 All metal parts not suitable for painting such as structural steel, pipes, rods, levers,
linkages, nuts and bolts used in other than current path etc., shall be hot dip
galvanised and shall be capable to prevent corrosion in view of the severe climatic
conditions.

5.31.4 Complete details of painting, galvanising and climate proofing of the equipment shall
be furnished in the tender.

6.0 TESTS:

6.1 TYPE TESTS:


The equipment should be offered type test. Test reports should not more then seven
years old reckoned from date of bid opening in respect of all the tests carried out in
accredited laboratories (based on ISO/IEC) by a reputed accreditatic body or
witnessed by HVPN or another electric power utility and be submitted by the
successful bidder to HVPNL for approval as schedule given in Bar Chart.
i) Insulation level test
ii) Temperature rise test
iii) Rated peak withstand current and rated short time withstand current test
iv) Short circuit making capacity test of earthing switch
v) Operation and mechanical endurance test
6.2 ROUTINE TESTS:
As per quality assurance program (QAP).
63 ACCEPTANCE TESTS:
The following acceptance tests as stipulated in the relevant IS:9921 (PART-IV) 1985
shall be carried out by the Supplier in presence of HVPNL representative, unless
dispensed with in writing by the HVPNL.
i) Power Frequency withstand voltage dry test of main circuit
ii) Voltage test on control auxiliary circuits
iii) Measurement of resistance of main circuit
iv) Mechanical operating test

7.0 INSPECTION:

i) The HVPNL shall have access at all times to the works and all other places
of manufacture, where the dis-connectors, earth switches and associated
equipment are being manufactured and the Bidder shall provide all facilities

- 14 -
with out extra cost for unrestricted inspection of the works, raw materials
manufacture of all the accessories and for conducting necessary tests as
detailed herein.

ii) The Bidder shall keep the HVPNL informed in advance of the time of
starting and of the progress of manufacture of equipment in its various
stages so that arrangements could be made for inspection

iii) No material shall be despatched from its point of manufacture unless the
material has been satisfactorily inspected and tested.

iv) The acceptance of any quantity of the equipment shall in no way relieve the
Bidder of his responsibility for meeting all the requirements of this
specification and shall not prevent subsequent rejection if such equipment
are later found to be defective.

8.0 DOCUMENTATION:
The successful bidder shall submit four sets of following drawings for HVPNL
approval.

LIST OF DRAWINGS AND DOCUMENTS:

The Bidder shall furnish four sets of following drawings alongwith his offer:
a) General outline and assembly drawings of the dis-connector operating
mechanism, structure, insulator and terminal connector.

b) Sectional views and descriptive details of items such as moving blades,


contacts, arms contact pressure, contact support bearing housing of
bearings, balancing of heights, phase coupling pipes, base plate,
operating shaft, guides.

c) Name plate.

d) Schematic drawing along with detailed write-up.

e) Wiring diagram
NOTE: All above drawings should be a minimum space (14x10cm) for stamping
the approval of drawings by HVPNL.

8.5 Instruction Manuals:

Twenty copies of the erection, operation and maintenance manuals in English


be supplied for each type of dis-connector one month prior to despatch of the
equipment. The manual shall be bound volumes and shall contain all drawings and
information required for erection, operation and maintenance of the dis-connector
including but not limited to the following particulars:

a) Marked erection prints identifying the component parts of the dis-connector


as shipped with assembly drawings.
b) Detailed dimensions and description of all auxiliaries.
c) Detailed views of the insulator stacks, metallic, operating mechanism,
structure, interlocks, spare parts etc.,

- 15 -
ANNEXURE-I
(Isolators)

LIST OF SPECIAL TESTS TO BE CARRIED OUT

---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Sl. Name of the Test Standard to which it
No. Conforms
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

1. Tests on insulators IS:2544


IEC:168

2. Tests on terminal connectors IS:5561

3. Tests on galvanised components IS:2633

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

- 16 -
SECTION - 4
CHAPTER - 3
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR 72.5 kV SF6 GAS CIRCUIT BREAKERS
1.0 SCOPE:
1.1 This specification provides for design, engineering, manufacture, stage testing, inspection and
testing before supply, packing, forwarding and delivery at site of 72.5 kV, 3 pole SF6 gas filled
outdoor circuit breakers along with terminal connectors, structures, all the accessories and
auxiliary equipment and mandatory spares and maintenance equipment for the satisfactory
operation in various substations of the state as specified here in.
1.2 It is not the intent to specify completely all the details of design and construction of the circuit
breakers. However, the breakers shall conform in all respects to the high standard of
engineering design and workmanship and shall be capable of performing in continuous
commercial operation up to the Bidder’s guarantee in a manner acceptable to the HVPNL.
The circuit breakers equipment shall conform in all respects to high standards of engineering
design and workmanship and shall be capable of performing in continuous commercial
operation up to the bidders guarantee acceptable to the HVPNL. The equipment offered shall
be complete in all respect necessary for its effective and trouble free operation. Such
components shall be deemed to be within the scope of supply irrespective of whether those
are specially brought out in this specification and or the commercial order or not. All similar
parts particularly movable ones shall be interchangeable.
2.0 STANDARDS:
2.1 The circuit breakers shall conform to the latest revisions with amendments available at the
time of testing of relevant standards, rules and codes, some of which are listed herein for
ready reference.
Sl. No. Standard No. Title
1. IEC-56 Specification for alternating current circuit breakers.
2. IEC-376 Specification and acceptance of new supply of sulphur
hexafluoride.
3. IS-5578& 11353 Making and arrangement for switchgear bus-bar, main
connections and auxiliary wiring.
4. IS-2147 Degree of protection provided for enclosures for low
voltage switchgear and control gear.
5 IS-325 Specification for three phase induction motors.
6. IS-13118 Specification for circuit breakers.
7. IS-2629 Recommended practice for hot dip galvanising
of iron and steel.
8. IEC-137 Bushings for AC Voltages.
9. IS-2099 High voltage porcelain bushings.
10. IS-4379 Identification of the contents of Industrial Gas Cylinders.
11. IS-7285 Seamless high carbon steel cylinders for permanent and
high pressure liquefiable gases
12. IS-802 Code of practice for use of structural steel in (PART-1)
overhead transmission line towers.

-1-
2.2 Equipment meeting with the requirement of other authoritative Standards, which ensure equal
or better performance than the standards mentioned above, shall also be considered. When
the equipment offered by the Bidder conforms to other standards salient points of difference
between standards adopted and the standards specified in this specification shall be clearly
brought out in the relevant schedule. Four copies of such standards with authentic translation
in English shall be furnished alongwith the offer.
3.0 SERVICE CONDITIONS:
3.1 As per section - I Vol. – II

3.2 AUXILIARY POWER SUPPLY:


Auxiliary electrical equipment shall be suitable for operation on the following supply system.
a. Power Devices 415 V, 3 phase 4 wire 50 Hz,
(like drive motors) Neutral grounded AC supply.
b. D.C. Alarm, control Two independent sources of 220 V DC, ungrounded 2 wire
Protective Device Substation wise exact details shall be furnished to the
Successful bidder
c. Lighting 240 V, single phase, 50 Hz AC supply.
Each of the foregoing supplies shall be made available by the HVPNL at the terminal point for
each circuit breaker for operation of accessories and auxiliary equipment. Bidder's scope
include supply of interconnecting cables, terminal boxes etc., The above supply voltage may
vary as below and all devices shall be suitable for continuous operation over the entire
range of voltages.
i) AC supply : voltage + 10% & -15%, frequency ± 5%
ii) D.C. Supply : ±10%.

4.0 PRINCIPAL PARAMETERS:


The SF-6 gas Circuit Breakers covered in this specification shall meet the technical
requirements listed hereunder.
PRINCIPAL TECHNICAL PARAMETERS:
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Sl. Item Specification
No. 72.5 kV
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. Rated voltage (kV rms), 72.5
frequency (Hz.) 50
2. Continuous current 1600
rating (A rms)
3. Type 3 pole outdoor SF6
4. Mounting Hot dip galvanised lattice steel support structure, bolted
type to be supplied by the Bidder.
5. Number of Poles 3

-2-
6. Type of Operation 3 pole gang
Operated

7. Phase to phase spacing 1400


in the switchyard i.e.
Interpole spacing for
breaker (mm)
8. Required ground 3000
clearance from the lowest
live terminal if both the
terminals are not in
the same horizontal plane. (mm)
9. Phase to earth 800
clearance (mm)
10. Height of concrete plinth 150
(to be provided by the
HVPNL) (mm)
11. Minimum height of the 2550
lowest part of the ( Bidders offering lesser clearances must
support insulator from substantiate the same with adequate
ground level (mm). Information on impulse test withstand
capability of equipment)
12. Operating mechanism Spring / Pneumatic Spring / Pneumatic
(with unit compressor) (with unit compressor)
13 Auto reclosing duty Three Single and
phase three phase
14. Rated operating duty 0-0.3 sec. -CO- 3 min -CO cycle
15. "First pole to clear" As per IS-13118
factor (Type of tripping) (Trip free)
16. Max. closing time (ms) ------------- 150 ------------
17. Max. total break time (ms) Less than 3 cycles or 60 ms

-3-
18. 1.2/50 microsecond 325
impulse withstand
voltage (kV peak)

19. 1 minute power 170


frequency withstand
voltage (kV rms)
20. Rated breaking current capacity:-
i) Line charging at 10
rated voltage at 90 deg.
leading power factor
(A) rms
ii) Small inductive ----------------- 0.5 to 10 -------------------
current (A) rms without exceeding switching o/v 2.0 p.u
iii) Cable charging 125
breaking current (A)
iv) Short circuit current
a) AC component (kA rms) 31.5
b) % DC component Corresponding to minimum opening time as per
IEC-56.
c) Duration of short circuit 1 sec

22. Rated short circuit 78.75


making current capacity (kA)
23. Permissible limit of As per clause 5.27
temperature rise
24. Max. acceptable difference in
the instants of closing/opening
of contacts
i. Within a pole (ms) 5
ii. Between poles (ms) 10
25. Min. creepage distance of 1813
support insulator (mm)
26. Short time current carrying 31.5
capability for one second (kA)

-4-
27. i) Rating of auxiliary
contacts ----- 10 A at 220 V D.C. -------
ii) No. of auxiliary 10 NO and 10 NC as spare with due
contacts provision to add more if required

28. Breaking capacity of 2 A DC with the circuit time


auxiliary contacts constant not less than 20 ms
29 . Noise level at base ------- 140 db (max.) -----------
and upto 50 meters
30 Seismic acceleration ------ 0.3g (horizontal) --------
31. Min. Corona extinction - - -
voltage kv (rms)
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
5.0 GENERAL TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS:
5.1 Circuit breakers offered shall be sulphur hexaflouride (SF6) type only.
5.2 Any part of the breakers, especially the removable ones, shall be freely interchangeable
without the necessity of any modification at site.
5.3 Circuit breaker shall comprise of three identical single pole units. The 72.5 kV circuit breaker
is not meant for single pole re-closure. The units for these breakers shall be linked together
mechanically. Complete circuit breaker with all the items necessary for successful operation
shall be supplied, including but not limited to the following:
5.3.1 Breaker assemblies with bases, support structure for circuit breaker as well as for control
cabinet, central control cabinet and foundation bolts for main structure as well as control
cabinet and central control cabinet (except concrete foundations), terminals and operating
mechanisms are included in the scope of supply.
5.3.2 Compressed SF6 gas, pneumatic systems complete including compressors, tanks, piping,
fittings, valves and controls and necessary supports for interpole piping for pneumatic
systems.
5.3.3 Instruments, gauges and other devices for SF6 gas pressure, pneumatic pressure
supervision.
5.3.4 All necessary parts to provide a complete and operable circuit breaker installation such as
main equipment, terminal, control parts, connectors and other devices, whether specifically
called for herein or not.
5.4 The support structure of circuit breaker as well as that of control cabinet shall be hot dip
galvanised. All other parts can be grey colour painted as per shade 631 of IS-5.
5.5 Circuit breaker shall be suitable for hot line washing.
5.6 All breakers shall be supplied with universal type terminal connectors.
5.7 The current density adopted for the design of the terminal pads shall in no case exceed the
following values.
5.8 For copper pads - 1.6 A/sq.mm. and others - 1.0 A/sq.mm.

-5-
5.9 CONTACTS:
5.9.1 All making and breaking contacts shall be sealed free from atmospheric effects. Contacts
shall be designed to have adequate thermal and current carrying capacity for the duty
specified and to have a life expectancy so that frequent replacements due to excessive
burning will not be necessary. Provision shall be made for rapid dissipation of heat generated
by the arc on opening.
5.9.2 Main contacts shall be the first to open and the last to close so that there will be little contact
burning and wear.
5.9.3 If arcing contacts are used they shall be the first to close and the last to open. These shall be
easily accessible for inspection and replacement. If there are no separately mounted arcing
contacts the main contacts shall be easily accessible for inspection and replacements. Tips
of arcing contacts and main contacts shall be silver plated or have tungsten alloy tipping.
5.9.4 Any device provided for voltage grading to damp oscillations or to prevent restrike prior to
the complete interruption of the circuit or to limit over-voltages on closing shall have a life
expectancy comparable to that of the breaker as a whole.
5.9.5 Breakers shall be so designed that when operated within their specified rating, the
temperature of each part will be limited to values consistent with a long life of the material
used. The temperature shall not exceed that indicated in IEC-56 under specified ambient
conditions.
5.9.6 Contacts shall be kept permanently under pressure of SF6 gas. The poles shall be partially
filled with SF6 gas at the time of despatch and only topping upto required pressure shall be
permitted at site. The gap between the open contacts shall be such that it can withstand
atleast the rated phase to ground voltage continuously at zero gauge pressure of SF6 gas due
to its leakage.
5.10 PORCELAIN HOUSING:
5.10.1 The porcelain housing shall be of single piece construction without any joint or coupling. It
shall be made of homogeneous, vitreous porcelain of high mechanical and dielectric
strength. Glazing of porcelain shall be uniform brown or dark brown colour with a smooth
surface arranged to shed away rain water or condensed water particles (fog), free from
blisters, burns and similar other defects.
5.11 ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS:
a) The circuit breakers shall be single pressure type and single break, the design and
construction of the circuit breaker shall be such that there is minimum possibility of gas
leakage and entry of moisture. There should not be any condensation of SF6 gas on the
internal insulating surface of the circuit breaker.
b) All gasketed surfaces shall be smooth, straight and reinforced, if necessary to minimise
distortion and to make a tight seal. Where the operating rod of the operating mechanism
connected to the arc chamber (SF6 media) adequate suitable Oring seals shall be provided.
The test holes for leakage test of the internal seals shall also be provided.
c) In the interrupter assembly there shall be a absorbing product box to eliminate SF6
decomposition products and moisture. The material used in the construction of the circuit
breakers shall be fully compatible with SF6 gas.
d) Each pole shall form an enclosure filled with SF6 gas independent of the other two poles. The
SF6 gas density of each pole shall be monitored and regulated by individual pressure
switches
e) The SF6 gas density monitor shall be adequately temp. compensated. The density monitor
shall meet the following requirements:

-6-
i) It shall be possible to dismantle the density monitor for checking/ replacement without
draining the SF6 gas by using suitable interlocked non-return couplings.
ii) It shall damp the pressure pulsation while filling the gas in service so that the flickering
of the pressure switch contacts does not take place.
iii) A pressure indicator shall also be supplied.
iv) The alarm and trip setting shall be such that:
a) Advance warning can be given for the low pressure below an unacceptable level.
b) After alarm, the breaker shall open if the pressure falls below pre- determined value.
f) Means for pressure relief shall be provided in the gas chamber of circuit breaker to avoid
damages or distortion during occurrence of abnormal pressure increase or shock waves
generated by internal electric faults. The position of vents, diaphragms and pressure relief
devices shall be so arranged as to minimise danger to the operators in the event of gas or
vapour escaping under pressure.
g) Facility shall also be provided to reduce the gas pressure within the breaker to a value not
exceeding 6 millibar for 72.5 kV within 4 hours or less. Each circuit breaker shall be capable of
withstanding this degree of vacuum without distortion or failure of any part.
h) Sufficient SF6 gas shall be provided to fill all the circuit breakers installed. In addition to this
20% of the total gas requirement shall be supplied in separate cylinders as spare requirement.
The pressure loss in the breaker shall not be more than 1% per year under normal operating
conditions.
i) Provisions shall be made for attaching an operation analyzer after installation at site to record
contact travel, speed and making measurement of operation timings and synchronization of
contacts in one pole.
5.12 SULPHUR HEXAFLUORIDE GAS (SF6 GAS):
a) The SF6 gas shall comply with IEC-376, 376A and 376B and be suitable in all respects for
use in the switchgear under the worst operating conditions.
b) The high pressure cylinders in which the SF6 gas is shipped and stored at site shall comply
with requirements of the following standards and regulations:
IS:4379 Identification of the contents of industrial gas cylinders.
IS:7285 Seamless high carbon steel cylinders for permanent and high pressure
liquefiable gases.
The cylinders shall also meet Indian Boiler regulations.
c) Test: SF6 gas shall be tested for purity, dew point, breakdown voltage, water contents as per
IEC-376, 376A and 376B and test certificates shall be furnished to HVPNL indicating all the
tests as per IEC-376 for each lot of SF6 gas.
5.13 DUTY REQUIREMENTS:
5.13.1 The circuit breakers shall be totally re-strike free under all duty conditions and shall
be capable of performing specified duties without opening resistors.
5.13.2 The circuit breakers shall meet the duty requirements for any type of fault or fault
location, for line charging and roping when used on an effectively grounded
system and perform make and break operations as per stipulated duty cycles
satisfactorily.
5.13.3 The Circuit Breakers shall be capable of:

-7-
i) Clearing short line faults (Kilo metric faults) with source impedance behind
the bus equivalent to symmetrical fault current specified.
ii) Breaking inductive currents of 0.5 to 10A without switching over-voltage
exceeding 2.3 p.u.
iii) Breaking 25% of the rated fault current at twice rated voltage under phase
opposition condition.
5.13.4 The critical current which gives the longest arc duration at lockout pressure of
extinguishing medium and the arc duration shall be indicated.
5.13.5 The breakers shall satisfactorily withstand the high stresses imposed on them
during fault clearing, load rejection and re-energisation of lines with trapped charges.
The breakers shall also withstand the voltage specified in clause 4.0 "Principal
Parameters" of this specification.
5.14 TOTAL BREAK TIME:
5.14.1 The "Total Break Time" as specified in clause 4.0, "Principal Parameters" of this
section shall not be exceeded under any of the following duties:
i) Test duties 1,2,3,4,5 (with TRV as per IEC-56).
ii) Short line fault L90, L75 (with TRV as per IEC-56).
5.14.2 The Bidder may please note that there is only one specified break time of the breaker
which shall not be exceeded under any duty conditions specified such as with
the combined variation of the trip coil voltage, (85-110%) pneumatic pressure and
arc extinguishing medium pressure etc., While furnishing the proof for the total
break time of complete circuit breaker, the Bidder may specifically bring out the
effect of non-simultaneity between contacts within a pole or between poles and show
how it is covered in the guaranteed total break time.
5.14.3 The values guaranteed shall be supported with the type test reports.
5.15 OPERATING MECHANISM AND ASSOCIATED EQUIPMENTS:
5.15.1 The circuit breakers shall be designed for electrical local as well as remote control
5.15.2 (i) The mechanism shall be adequately designed for specified tripping and re-closing
duty. The entire operating mechanism control circuitry, individual breaker compressor
unit etc. as required shall be housed in an out-door type,CRCA steel enclosure. This
enclosure shall conform to degree of protection IP-55 of ISS-2147. The enclosure shall
be invariable mounted on a separate concrete plinth of 150 mm height.
5.15.2 (ii) The operating mechanism shall be spring closing and spring tripping through electric
motor for 72.5kV SF-6 Circuit Breaker. The mechanism shall be adequately designed
for specified tripping and re-closing duty. The entire operating mechanism control
circuitry as required shall be housed in an out-door type,CRCA steel enclosure. The
enclosure shall be invariable mounted on a separate concrete plinth of 150 mm height.
5.15.3 All working parts in the mechanism shall be of corrosion resistant material. All bearings
which require greasing, shall be equipped with pressure grease fittings.
5.15.4 The design of the operating mechanism shall be such that it shall be practically
maintenance free. The guaranteed years of maintenance- free operation, the number
of full load and full rated short circuit current breaking/operation without enquiring any
maintenance or overhauling, shall be clearly stated in the bid. As far as possible the
need for lubricating the operating mechanism shall be kept to the minimum and
eliminated altogether if possible.

-8-
5.15.5 The operating mechanism shall be non-pumping (and trip free) electrically
pneumatically under every method of closing. There shall be no rebounds in the
mechanism and it shall not require any critical adjustments at site. Operation of the
power operated closing device, when the circuit breaker is already closed, shall not
cause damage to the circuit breaker or endanger the operator. Provision shall be
made for attaching an operation analyser to facilitate testing of breaker at site.
5.15.6 A mechanical indicator shall be provided to show open and close position of the
breaker. It shall be located in a position where it will be visible to a man standing on
the ground level with the mechanism housing closed. An operation counter shall also
be provided in the central control cabinet.
5.15.7 The Bidder shall furnish detailed operation and maintenance manual of the mechanism
along with the operation manual for the circuit breakers.
5.16 CONTROL:
5.16.1 The close and trip circuits shall be designed to permit use of momentary contact
switches and push buttons.
5.16.2 Each breaker pole shall be provided with two (2) independent tripping circuits, valves
and coils each connected to a different set of protective relays.
5.16.3 The breaker shall normally be operated by remote electrical control. Electrical tripping
shall be performed by shunt trip coils. However, provisions shall be made for local
electrical control. For this purpose a local/remote selector switch and close and trip
push buttons shall be provided in the breaker central control cabinet. Remote located
push buttons and indicating lamps shall be provided by the HVPNL.
5.16.4 The trip coils shall be suitable for trip circuit supervision. The trip circuit supervision
relay would be provided by the HVPNL. Necessary terminals shall be provided in the
central control cabinet of the circuit breaker by the Bidder.
5.16.5 Closing coil shall operate correctly at all values of voltage between 85% and 110% of
the rated voltage. Shunt trip shall operate correctly under all operating conditions of
the circuit breaker upto the rated breaking capacity of the circuit breaker and at all
values of supply voltage between 85% and 110% of rated voltage. If additional
elements are introduced in the trip coil circuit their successful operation and reliability
for similar applications on outdoor circuit breakers shall be clearly brought out in
the additional information schedules. In the absence of adequate details the offer is
likely to be rejected.
5.16.6 Suitable relay for monitoring of DC supply voltage to the control cabinet shall be
provided. The pressure switches used for interlock purposes shall have adequate
contact ratings to be directly used in the closing and tripping circuits. In case the
contacts are not adequately rated and multiplying relays are used then the interlock
for closing/opening operation of breaker shall be with No logic of the relay i.e. if the
DC supply to the interlock circuit fails then it is essential that breaker trips in
order to protect the switchgear and connected equipment like transformers etc., for
any possible faults at that time. Provision for automatic tripping of the breaker shall
be made alongwith the flag indication for non-availability of DC supply. The
connection must be such that capacitor provided for this purpose gets charged from
the DC source provided by the Board only and the capacitor supply is released for the
tripping circuit as soon as DC supply fails. It must be possible to close the breaker
only after restoration of DC supply. The entire arrangement of CTD must be
accommodated in a separate box and it shall be mounted to control cubicle
5.16.7 For pneumatically and spring operated mechanisms a local manual closing device
which can be easily operated by one man standing on the ground shall also be

-9-
provided for maintenance purposes and direction of motion of handle shall be clearly
marked.
5.16.8 The auxiliary switch of the breaker shall be preferably positively driven by the breaker
operating rod and where due to construction features, same is not possible a plug-in
device shall be provided to simulate the opening and closing operations of circuit
breaker for the purpose of testing control circuits.
5.17 MOTOR COMPRESSED SPRING CHARGING MECHANISM:
Spring operated mechanism shall be complete with motor, opening spring, closing
spring and all other necessary accessories to make the mechanism a complete
unit. Breaker operation shall be independent of motor which shall be used solely for
the purpose of charging the closing spring. Motor rating shall be such that it requires
only 15 seconds for fully charging the closing spring. Closing operation shall
compress the opening spring and keep ready for tripping. The mechanism shall be
provided with means for charging the spring by hand. This operation shall be carried
out with the doors of the cubicle open. During this process no electrical or
mechanical operation of the mechanism shall endanger the operator or damage
the equipment. A mechanical indicating device shall be provided to indicate the state
of the charge spring and shall be visible with the door of the cubicle closed. An
alarm shall be provided for spring failing to be charged by a pre-set time after circuit
breaker closing. The spring mechanism shall be fitted with a local manual release,
preferably by a push button to avoid in advertent operation. Means shall be
provided for discharging the spring when the circuit breaker is in the open position
without circuit breaker attempting to close.
5.18 PNEUMATICALLY OPERATED MECHANISM:
a) Individual compressor units (ICU) shall be provided for pneumatically operated
circuit breakers.
b) The ICU shall be complete with air piping and accessories, all stop valves,
tees, pressure reducers etc., required for normal operation of the breaker.
c) The breaker local receivers shall comply with the requirements in clause 5.29
and shall have sufficient capacity for two CO operations of the breakers at the
lowest pressure for auto reclosing duty without refilling. The Bidder shall ensure
that rated pressure. is available at all the breaker locations.
d) Independently adjustable pressure switches with potential free, ungrounded
contacts to actuate a lockout device shall be provided. This lockout device with
provision of remote alarm indication shall be incorporated in each circuit
breaker to prevent operation whenever the pressure of the operating
mechanism is below that of parameter required for satisfactory operation of the
circuit breakers. The scheme should permit operation of all blocking and
alarm relays as soon as the pressure transient present during the rapid
pressure dip has been damped and a reliable pressure measurement can be
made. Such facilities shall be provided for following conditions:
i) Close lockout pressure.
ii) Auto reclose lockout pressure.
iii) Extreme low pressure.
e) The compressed air mechanism shall be capable of operating the circuit
breaker under all duty conditions with the air pressure immediately before
operation between 85% and 110% of the rated supply pressure. The

- 10 -
make/break time at this supply pressure shall not exceed the specified
make/break time within any value of trip coil supply voltage as specified.
f) The compressed air piping shall comply to requirements given in clause 5.28.8.
5.19 OPERATING MECHANISM HOUSING:
The operating mechanism housing/control cabinet shall conform to the requirement
specified in clause 5.30.
5.20 INTERLOCKS:
It is proposed to electrically interlock the circuit breaker with HVPNL's associated air
break isolating switches in accordance with switchyard safety interlocking scheme.
The details of the scheme will be furnished to the successful Bidder. All accessories
required on breaker side for satisfactory operation of the scheme shall be deemed to
be included in the scope of supply of this specification.
5.21 SUPPORTING STRUCTURE:
The Bidder shall indicate the price of support structure alongwith the foundation
bolts required separately in the bid proposal sheets and these shall be considered in
evaluation. However, in case the equipment offered have integral support structure or
the specialities of the breaker are such that support structures have to be provided by
the successful Bidder, the prices of these support structures shall be included in the
price of the equipment and same shall be indicated clearly in the bid proposal sheet.
The support structure shall meet the following requirements:
1) The minimum vertical clearance from any energised metal part to the bottom of
the circuit breaker (structure) base, where it rests on the foundation pad,
shall be 2.85meters for 72.5kV.
2) The minimum vertical distance from the bottom of the lowest porcelain part of
the bushings, porcelain enclosures or supporting insulators to the bottom of the
circuit breaker base, (from the ground level) shall be 2.55 meters for all
voltages.
3) The minimum clearance between the live parts and earth shall be 0.8 meters
for 72.5kV.
5.22 FITTINGS AND ACCESSORIES:
5.22.1 Following is a partial list of some of the major fittings and accessories to be furnished
by Bidder in the central control cabinet. Number and exact location of these parts shall
be indicated in the bid.
a) Central control cabinet in accordance with clause no. 5.30 complete with
i) Cable glands for control cables off sizes will be intimated to the successful
bidders .
ii) Local/remote changeover switch.
iii) Four digit operation counter.
iv) Pneumatic pressure gauges SF6 gas pressure gauge.
v) Control switches to cut off control power supply.
vi) Fuses and links as required.
vii) The number of terminals provided shall be adequate enough to wire out all
contacts and control circuits plus 24 terminals spare for HVPNL's use.
viii) Operation hour meter for motor.

- 11 -
ix) Three pin plug with socket.
x) Illuminating lamp with door switch.
xi) Lock and key for mechanism box.
xii) Capacitor tripping device.
xiii) Thermostatically controlled space tubular heater.
b) Anti-pumping relay.
c) Rating plate in accordance with IEC incorporating year of manufacture.
Note :- Such components, required for satisfactory operation of breaker, shall be deemed to
be within the scope of supply irrespective of whether these are specifically mentioned
or not above.
5.22.2 Additional fittings for pneumatically operated circuit breaker.
a) Unit compressed air system in accordance with clause No.5.28.
b) Breaker local air receivers.
c) Pressure gauge spring loaded safety valve, pressure switch with
adjustable contacts and explosion vents in case provision is not in-
built.
d) Pressure switch to initiate an alarm if the pressure in the aux.
reservoir remains below a preset level for longer than it is normally
necessary to refill the reservoir
e) Stop, non-return and other control valves, piping and all accessories
upto breaker mechanism housing.
5.23 SURFACE FINISH:
5.23.1 All interiors and exteriors of tanks and other metal parts shall be thoroughly cleaned
to remove all rust, scales, corrosion, greases or other adhering foreign matter. All
steel surfaces in contact with insulating oil, as far as accessible, shall be painted
with not less than two coats of heat resistant, oil insoluble, insulating paint.
5.23.2 All metal surfaces exposed to atmosphere shall be given two primer coats of zinc
chromate and two coats of epoxy paint with epoxy base thinner. All metal parts not
accessible for painting shall be made of corrosion resisting material. All machine
finished or bright surfaces shall be coated with a suitable preventive compound and
suitably wrapped or otherwise protected. All paints shall be carefully selected to
withstand tropical heat and extremes of weather within the limits specified. The
paint shall not scale off or wrinkle or be removed by abrasion due to normal handling.
All external paintings shall be as per shade no. 631 of IS:5.
5.23.3 All ferrous hardware, exposed to atmosphere, shall be hot dip galvanised.
5.24 GALVANISING:
All ferrous parts including all sizes of nuts, bolts, plain and spring washers, support
channels, structures, etc., shall be hot dip galvanised to conform to latest version of
IS:2629 or any other equivalent authoritative standard.
5.25 EARTHING:
The operating mechanism housing, control cabinets, dead tanks, support structure
etc., shall be provided with two separate Earthing terminals suitable for bolted
connection to 50x8mm MS flat to be provided by the HVPNL for connection to station
earth mat.

- 12 -
5.26 NAME AND RATING PLATES:
Circuit breaker and its operating device shall be provided with a rating plate or
plates marked with but not limited to following data:
a) Manufacturer's name or trade mark.
b) Serial number or type designation making it possible to get all the relevant
information from the manufacturer.
c) Year of manufacture.
d) Rated voltage.
e) Rated insulation level.
f) Rated frequency.
g) Rated normal current.
h) Rated short circuit breaking current.
i) First pole to clear factor.
j) Rated duration of short circuit.
k) Rated auxiliary DC supply voltage of closing and opening devices.
l) Rated pressure of compressed air gas for operation and interruption.
m) Rated out of phase breaking current
n) Rated supply voltage of auxiliary circuits.
o) Rated supply frequency of auxiliary circuits.
p) Purchase order number and customer's name.
The coils of operating devices shall have a reference mark permitting the data to be
obtained from the manufacturer.
The rating plate shall be visible in position of normal service and installation. The
rating plate shall be weather proof and corrosion proof.
5.27 LIMITS OF TEMPERATURE RISE:
The temperature rise on any part of equipment shall not exceed the maximum
temperature rise specified below under the conditions specified in test clauses. The
permissible temperature rise indicated is for a maximum ambient temperature of 50 C.
If the maximum ambient temperature rises, permissible values shall be reduced
accordingly.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Sl. Nature of the part or Maximum value of
No. of the liquid ---------------------------------------
Temp. at a Temp. rise ambient
max air temp not exceeding 50 C
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. Contacts in air. silver-faced 105 55
copper, copper alloy or alumi-
nium alloy {see notes (i) & (ii)}

- 13 -
Bare copper or tinned alumi- 75 25
nium alloy.
2. Contacts in oil:
i) Silver-faced copper, copper 90 40
alloy or aluminium alloy
(see note ii)
ii) Bare copper or tinned alumi- 80 30
nium alloy.
3. Terminals to be connected to 105 55
external conductors by screws
or bolts silver faced
(see note iii)
4. Metal parts acting as springs (See note iv) (See note iv)
5. Metal parts in contact with
insulation of the following
classes:
Class Y : (for non-impreg- 90 40
nated materials)
Class A : (for materials
immersed in oil 100 50
or impregnated)
Class E : in air 120 70
in oil 100 50

Class B : in air 130 80


in oil 100 50
Class F : in air 155 105
in oil 100 50

Enamel : oil base 100 50


synthetic : in air 120 70
synthetic : in oil 100 50
6. Any part of metal or of insul- 100 50
ating material in contact
with oil except contacts.
7. Oil 90 40
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

- 14 -
Notes: i) When applying the temperature rise of 55 C, care should be taken to ensure
that no damage is caused to the surrounding insulating materials.
ii) The quality of the silver facing shall be such that a layer of silver remains at the
points of contact after the mechanical endurance tests. Otherwise, the contacts
shall be regarded as "bare".
iii) The values of temperature and temperature rise are valid whether or not the
conductor connected to the terminals is silver-faced.
iv) The temperature shall not reach a value where the elasticity of the material is
impaired. For pure copper, this implies a temperature limit of 75 C.
5.28 COMPRESSED AIR SYSTEM:
5.28.1 Each circuit breaker shall be supplied with individual compressor unit. Each ICU shall
be provided with compressor, piping, piping accessories, local air receivers, control
valves, filters, coolers of adequate capacity, reducing valves, isolating valves, drain
ports etc.,
5.28.2 The capacity of local air receivers shall be sufficient for two operations of the
circuit breaker, at the lowest pressure for auto reclosing duty without refilling.
5.28.3 Air Compressor:
a) The air compressor shall be oil-less and of air cooled type complete with
cylinder, lubrication, drive motor and slide rails. Each compressor shall be
rated for the following duty:
i) Total running time Not exceeding
of compressor per day 20 minutes.
ii) Normal running air charging Not exceeding
15 minutes.
iii) Air charging time after one Not exceeding
close-open operation of all breakers 60 minutes.
b) Compressor shall be driven by automatically controlled motors conforming to
this specification.
c) The compressor shall be provided with automatic adjustable unloading
device during starting.
d) Each compressor shall be equipped with a starting operation counter and a
running barometer.
5.28.4.1 Inter-cooler and After Cooler:
Inter-cooler between compressor stages and after-cooler at discharge of HP cylinder
shall be included in Bidder's scope. These shall be of air cooled type and shall be
designed as per ASME Code of IEMA Standards. The design pressure on the air side
of cooler shall be 25 times the working pressure. A corrosion allowance of 3 mm
shall be included for all steel parts.
5.28.5 Air Receivers:
a) Air receiver shall be designed in accordance with the latest edition of the
ASME Code for Pressure Vessel-Section VIII of BS:5197. A corrosion
allowance of 3.0 mm shall be provided for shell and dished ends in case the air
receiver are not hot dip galvanised . Receivers shall be coated on the inside
face with anti-rust medium.

- 15 -
b) Air receivers shall have a manhole with cover for inspection and cleaning.
Connections for air inlet and outlet, drain and relief valves shall be flanged
type. Pressure gauge and pressure switch connections shall be of screwed
type.
c) Accessories such as suitable sized safety valve to relieve full compressor
discharge at a set pressure equal to 1.1 times the maximum operating
pressure, blow off valve, auto drain tap with isolating and bypass valve, dial
type pressure gauge with isolating and drain valve and test connection shall be
provided.
d) The receiver shall be rated such that the compressor will not start within
less than hour hours for supplying the leakage of air from the compressed air
system. This condition shall be met with only one compressor in operation at a
time.
5.28.6 Quality of Air:
Compressed air used shall be dry and free of dust particles. Arrangement for
conditioning the compressed air shall be provided as an integral part of air compressor
system. Air shall not condensate at working pressure at a temperature of minus 10 C.
Measures of achieving this shall be brought out clearly in the bid. All instruments
required for checking the quality of air shall be furnished as special tools alongwith the
breakers.
5.28.7 Controls and Control Equipment:
a) The compressor control shall be of automatic start/stop type initiated by
pressure switches on the main receiver. Supplementary manual control shall
also be provided.
b) Duplicate incoming supply of 415 V, AC shall be provided by the HVPNL at
switchyard motor control center. The compressor MCC which is in Bidder's
scope shall be as per para of this section. Manual change over scheme from
the source to other shall be arranged. Facility to annunciate failure of power
supply to the compressor motor control center shall be provided.
c) All control equipment shall be housed in a totally enclosed sheet steel
cabinet conforming to relevant standards. Pressure gauges, other indicating
devices and control switches shall be mounted on the control cabinet.
5.28.8 Compressed Air Piping, Valves and Fittings:
a) The flow capacity of all valves shall be at least 20% greater than the total
compressor capacity.
b) The high pressure pipe and air system shall be such that after one O-0.3
sec -CO- operation the breaker shall be capable of performing one
CO-operation within 3 minutes.
c) All compressed air piping shall be bright annealed, seamless phosphorous
Deoxidized Non-Arsenical Copper alloy or stainless steel pipe (C-106 of
BS:2871-1957).
d) Compressor air piping in the switchyard trenches shall be laid with a slope of
1 in 1000. All necessary fittings required for this purpose including the drain
valves at all the low points shall be included in the proposal. The piping shall
be laid horizontally on steel supports in RCC trenches having a slope of 1 in
500.

- 16 -
e) All joints and connections in the piping system shall be brazed or flared as
necessary.
f) All compressed air piping shall be carried out in accordance with BS:162.
g) Compressed air piping system shall be complete with saddle clamps to
support the piping system at every one meter interval and expansion joint at
every 40 meters interval.
5.28.9 Motor Control Center:
The 415 Volt motor control centers conforming to requirements for control cabinets
stipulated in clause 5.3 of this specification shall be fixed type and fully
sectionalised and shall be equipped with load break switches. Motor feeders shall
be provided with isolating switch fuse unit and Bidder with thermal overload
relay and open phase protection. The motor Bidder shall have one normally open
auxiliary contact for alarm purposes. An ammeter shall be provided on the motor
feeders. The motor control circuit shall be independent from all other control circuits.

5.28.10 Fuses:
All fuses shall be of the HRC cartridge type, conforming to IS:2208 and suitable for
mounting on plug-in type of fuse bases. Fuses shall be provided with visible operation
indicators to show that they have operated. All accessible live connections shall be
adequately shrouded, and it shall be possible to change fuses with the circuit live,
without danger of contact with live conductor. Insulated fuses pulling handle shall be
supplied with each control cabinet.
5.29 TERMINAL CONNECTORS:
5.29.1 All the circuit breakers shall be provided with terminal connectors suitable for 0.4
Sq.inch ACSR Zebra Conductor.
The terminal connectors shall meet the following requirements:
a) Terminal connectors shall be manufactured and tested as per IS:5561.
b) All castings shall be free from blow holes, surface blisters, cracks and activities.
All sharp edges & corners shall be blurred and rounded off.
c) No part of a clamp shall be less than 10 mm thick.
d) All ferrous parts shall be hot dip galvanised conforming to IS:2633.
e) For bimetallic connectors, copper alloy liner of minimum thickness of 2 mm
shall be cast integral with aluminium body.
f) Flexible connectors shall be made from tinned copper/ aluminium sheets.
g) All current carrying parts shall be designed and manufactured to have minimum
contact resistance.
h) Connectors shall be designed to be corona free in accordance with the
requirements stipulated in IS:5561.
5.30 SPECIFICATION FOR CONTROL CABINETS:
1. Control cabinets shall be sheet steel enclosed and shall be dust, weather and
vermin proof. Sheet steel shall be at least 2.6mm thick (2 mm if CRCA) sheet
used. Control cabinets shall be provided with a hinged door and padlocking
arrangement. The door hinges shall be of union joint type to facilitate easy

- 17 -
removal. Door shall be properly braced to prevent wobbling. There shall be
provision in the bottom sheet for entrance of cables from below.
2. Equipment and devices shall be suitable for operation on a 415 V, 3 phase 3/4
wire 50 Hz AC system. The wiring shall be of stranded copper with minimum
cross section of 2.5 Sq.mm with 1100 V PVC insulation.
3. Bus bars shall be of tinned copper of adequate cross-section to carry the
normal current, without exceeding the permissible temperature rise over an
ambient temperature of 50 C outside the cubicle. The buses shall be braced
to withstand forces corresponding to short circuit current of 25 kA.
4. Motors rated 1 KW and above being controlled from the control cabinet shall
be suitable for operation on a 415 V, 3 phase 50 Hz system. Fractional KW
motors shall be suitable for operation on a 240 V, 1-phase, 50 Hz supply
system.
5. Isolating switches shall be group operated units 3-pole for use on 3-phase
supply systems and 2 pole for single phase supply systems) quick make
quick break type, capable of breaking safely and without deterioration, the
rated current of the associated circuit. Control cabinet door shall be
interlocked with the operating handle of the switch so as to prevent opening of
the door when the switch is closed. A device for bypassing the door interlock
shall also be provided. Switch handle shall have provision for locking in both
fully open and fully closed positions.
6. Fuses shall be HRC cartridge link type having prospective current rating of not
less than 46 kA (rms). They shall be provided with visible operation indicators
to show when they have operated. One fuse pulling handle shall be supplied
for every ten fuses or a part thereof.
7. Push button shall be rated for not less than 6 Amps, 415 V AC or 2 Amps,
220V DC and shall be flush mounted on the cabinet door and provided with
appropriate name plates. Red, Green and Amber indicating lamps shall be
flush mounted and provided with series resistors to eliminate the possibility of
short circuiting of control supply in the event of fusing of lamps.
8. For motors upto 5 KW, contactors shall be direct-on-line, air break, single throw
type and shall be suitable for making and breaking the starting current of
the associated motor which shall be assumed equal to 6.5 times the full load
current of the motor at 0.2 p.f. For motors above 5 KW, automatic star delta
type starters shall be provided. 3 pole contactors shall be furnished for 3 phase
motors and 2-pole contactors for single phase motors. Reversing contactors
shall be provided with electrical interlocks between forward and reverse
contactors. If possible, mechanical interlocks shall also be provided.
Contactors shall be suitable for uninterrupted duty and shall be of duty
category class AC4 as defined in IS:2959. The main contacts of the
contactors shall be silver plated and the insulation class for the coils shall be
class E or better. The dropout voltage of the contactors shall not exceed 70%
of the rated voltage.
9. Contactors shall be provided with a three element, positive acting, ambient
temperature compensated, time lagged, hand reset type thermal overload relay
with adjustable setting. Hand reset button shall be flush with the front door of
the cabinet and suitable for resetting with starter compartment door closed.
Relays shall be either direct connected or CT operated depending on the rated
motor current.

- 18 -
10. Single phasing preventer relay shall be provided for 3 phase motors to provide
positive protection against single phasing.
11. Mini starters shall be provided with no volt coils whenever required.
12. All necessary cable terminating accessories such as glands, crimp type
tinned copper lugs etc., for control cables shall be included in Bidder's scope of
supply. Suitable brass cable glands shall be provided for cable entry.
13. Wiring for all control circuits shall be carried out with 1100/650 volts grade PVC
insulated tinned copper stranded conductors of sizes not smaller than 2.5 sq.
mm atleast 10% spare terminal blocks for control wire terminations shall be
provided on each panel. The terminal blocks shall be ELMEK type or
equivalent. All terminals shall be provided with ferrules Visibly marked or
numbered and these identifications shall correspond to the designations on the
relevant wiring diagrams. The terminals shall be rated for adequate capacity
which shall not be less than 10 Amps.
14. Control cabinet shall be provided with 240 V, 1-phase 50 Hz, 20 W
fluorescent light fixture and 5 amps, 3 pin socket for handlamp.
15. Space heaters shall be provided inside each cabinet complete with thermostat
(preferably differential type) to prevent moisture condensation. Heaters shall
be controlled by suitably rated double-pole miniature Circuit Breakers.
16. Signal lamps provided shall be of neon screw type with series resistors,
enclosed in bakelite body. Each signal lamp shall be provided with a fuse
integrally mounted in the lamp body.
17. All AC control equipment shall be suitable for operation on 240 V, 1 phase
50 Hz system.
18. Items inside the cabinet made of organic material shall be coated with a fungus
resistant varnish.
19. All doors, panels, removable covers and breaker openings shall be gasketed all
around. All louvers shall have screens and filters. Cabinets shall be dust,
moisture and vermin proof.
5.31 MOTORS:
5.31.1 Motors shall be "Squirrel Cage" three phase induction motors of sufficient size
capable of satisfactory operation for the application and duty as required for the driven
equipment.
5.31.2 Stator:
a) Stator Frame:
The stator frame and all external parts of the motors shall be rigid fabricated
steel or of casting. They shall be suitably annealed to eliminate any residual
stresses introduced during the process of fabrication and machining.
b) Stator Core:
The stator lamination shall be made from suitable grade magnetic sheet steel
varnished on both sides. They shall be pressed and clamped adequately to
reduce the core and teeth vibrations to minimum.
c) Insulation and Winding:
i) All insulated winding conductor shall be of copper. The overall motor
winding insulation shall be conventional class B type. The winding

- 19 -
shall be suitable for successful operation in hot, humid and tropical
climate with the ambient temperature of 50 C. The insulation shall
be given fungicidal and tropical treatment as per IS:3202.
ii) Any joints in the motor insulation such as at coil connections or between
slot and winding section shall have strength equivalent to that of slot
section of the coil.
iii) For 415 Volt motors, after the coils are placed in slots and all
connections are made, entire motor assembly shall be impregnated by
completely submerging core and winding in suitable insulating
compound or varnish allowed by proper baking. At least two additional
submersions and bakes shall be applied either making a total of at least
three submersions and bake treatment.
5.31.3 Rotor:
a) Rotors shall be adequately designed to avoid overheating during the starting
and running conditions.
b) Rotors shall be properly balanced so as to keep the vibration under running
condition within the limits.
c) Rotors of induction motors shall be of rigid core construction with bars firmly
secured and solidly bonded to the end rings. The end rings assembly shall be
such that it is free to move with expansion of the bars without distortion. The
connection of the bars to the end ring shall be made by brazing or fusion
welding.
d) Rotors shall be so designed as to keep the combined critical speed with the
driven equipment away from the running speed by at least 20%.
e) Rotors shall also be designed to withstand 120% of the rated speed for 2
minutes in either direction of rotation.
f) All high speed rotors shall be constructed with provision of re-balancing the
rotor on its site position without major disassembly.
5.31.4 Bearings:
a) Depending upon the capacity and loading conditions Bidder shall design
suitable grease lubricated or oil lubricated bearings.
b) Greased ball and roller bearings when used shall be of reputed make subject to
HVPNL's approval. The minimum standard life of the bearings shall not be less
than 30,000 working hours taking all motor and driven loads into account.
These shall be pressure grease gun lubricated type fitted with grease nipple
and shall have grease relief devices.
c) Bearing shall be so constructed that the loss of grease and its creeping
alongwith shaft into motor housing is prevented. It shall also prevent dirt and
water from getting into the motor.
d) Unless otherwise approved, bearing lubrication system shall be such that no
external forced oil or water is necessary to maintain
the required oil supply or to keep bearing temperature within permissible
limits.
e) For oil lubricated bearings, drain plugs shall be provided for draining any
residual oil when required.

- 20 -
5.31.5 Enclosures:
a) Motors to be installed outdoor shall have hose proof enclosure equivalent to
IP-55 as per IS:4691. For motors to be installed indoor, the enclosure shall
be dust proof equivalent to IP-54 as per IS:4691.
b) Two independent Earthing points shall be provided on opposite sides of the
motor for bolted connection of Earthing conductor.
c) Motors shall have drain plugs so located that they will drain water resulting
from condensation or other causes from all pockets in the motor casing.
d) Motors weighing more than 25 kg shall be provided with eyebolts, lugs or other
means to facilitate lifting.
5.31.6 Cooling Method:
Motors shall be of self ventilated type having TEFC (totally enclosed fan cooled)
enclosure.
5.31.7 Rating Plate:
The rating plate shall conform to the requirements of IEC incorporating the year of
manufacture.
5.31.8 Operational Features:
a) Continuous motor rating (name plate rating) shall be at least ten (10) percent
above the maximum load demand of the driven equipment at design duty
point and the motor shall not be overloaded at any operating point of driven
equipment that will arise in service.
b) Motors shall be capable of giving rated output without reduction in expected life
span when operated continuously in the system having the particulars as given
in Annexure-II.
5.31.9 Starting Requirements:
a) All induction motors shall be suitable for full voltage direct-on -line starting.
These shall be capable of starting and accelerating to the rated speed
alongwith the driven equipment without exceeding the acceptable winding
temperature even when the supply voltage drops down to 85% of the rated
voltage.
b) Motors shall be capable of withstanding the electro dynamic stresses and
heating imposed if it is started at a voltage of 110% of the rated value.
c) The locked rotor current shall not exceed six (6) times the rated full load
current for all motors, subject to tolerance as given in IS:325.
d) Motors, when started with the driven equipment imposing full starting torque
under the supply voltage conditions specified under clause 5.32.9(a) above
shall be capable of withstanding at least two successive starts from cold
condition at room temperature and one start from hot condition without
injurious heating of winding. The motors shall also be suitable for three equally
spread starts per hour under the above referred supply condition.
e) The locked rotor withstand time under hot condition at 110% of rated voltage
shall be more than starting time with the driven equipment at minimum
permissible voltage by at least two seconds or 15% of the accelerating time
whichever is greater. In case it is not possible to meet the above requirement,
the Bidder shall offer centrifugal type speed switch mounted on the motor shaft

- 21 -
which shall remain closed for speeds lower than 20% and open for speeds
above 20% of the rated speed. The speed switch shall be capable of
withstanding 120% of the rated speed in either direction of rotation.
6.0 TESTS:
6.1 TYPE TESTS:
The equipment should be offered type test. Test reports should not more then seven
years old reckoned from date of bid opening in respect of all the tests carried out in
accredited laboratories (based on ISO/IEC) by a reputed accreditatic body or
witnessed by HVPN or another electric power utility and be submitted by the
successful bidder to HVPNL for approval as schedule given in Bar Chart.
i) Impulse withstand voltage test
ii) Power frequency voltage withstand dry test on main circuit
iii) Short circuit withstand capability test
iv) Mechanical endurance test
v) Temperature rise test
vi) Radio interference voltage (RIV)
vii) Measurement of the resistance of main circuit
viii) Short time withstand current and peak withstand current test
ix) Out of phase making & breaking test
x) Shunt reactor current switching test
xi) Dielectric test
xii) IP-55 test on operating mechanism
xiii) Seismic test
6.2 ROUTINE TESTS:
As per quality assurance program (QAP).
63 ACCEPTANCE TESTS:
The following acceptance tests as stipulated in the relevant ISS-13118 shall be carried
out by the Supplier in presence of HVPNL representative, unless dispensed with in
writing by the HVPNL.
i) Power frequency voltage withstand dry test on main circuit
ii) Voltage withstand test on control and auxiliary circuits
iii) Measurement of resistance of the main circuit
iv) Mechanical operating test
v) Design and visual test
vi) Tightness Test
7.0 INSPECTION:
7.1 The HVPNL shall have access at all times to the works and all other all other places of
manufacture, where the circuit breaker are being manufactured and the Bidder shall
provide all facilities without extra charges, for unrestricted inspection of the Bidder's
works, raw materials, manufacture of the equipment., all the accessories and for
conducting necessary test as detailed herein.
7.2 The Bidder shall keep the HVPNL informed in advance, about the manufacturing
program so that arrangement can be made for inspection.
7.3 No material shall be despatched from its point of manufacture unless the material has
been satisfactorily inspected and tested.

- 22 -
7.4 The Bidder shall submit their internal inspection report containing manufacturer's test
certificates before offering the material for inspection.
7.5 The acceptance of any quantity of equipment shall in no way relieve the Bidder of his
responsibility for meeting all the requirements of this specification and shall not prevent
subsequent rejection if such equipment are later found to be defective.
8.0 DOCUMENTATION
8.1 The successful bidder shall submit four sets of following drawings for HVPNL approval.
List of Drawings and Documents:
The Bidder shall furnish four sets of relevant descriptive and illustrative published
literature pamphlets and the following drawings for preliminary study alongwith the
offer.
a) General outline drawings showing dimensions and shipping weights, quantity of
insulating media, air receiver capacity etc.,
b) Sectional views showing the general constructional features of the circuit
breakers including operating mechanism, arcing chambers, contacts etc., with
lifting dimensions for maintenance.
c) Schematic diagrams of breakers offered for control supervision and reclosing.
d) Structural drawing, design calculations and loading data for support structures.
e) Foundation drilling plan and loading data for foundation design.
f) Terminal Connector
NOTE: All above drawings should be a minimum space (14x10cm) for stamping
the approval of drawings by HVPNL.

8.2 TEST REPORTS:


i) Four copies of acceptance test reports shall be furnished to the HVPNL.
One copy will be returned, duly certified by the HVPNL and only there
afterwards shall the material be despatched.
ii) All records of routine test reports shall be maintained by the Bidder at his
works for periodic inspection by the HVPNL.
iii) All test reports of tests conducted during manufacture shall be maintained by
the Bidder. These shall be produced for verification as and when requested for
by the HVPNL.

- 23 -
SECTION-5

CHAPTER-1

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR

72.5kV CURRENT TRANSFORMERS


AND
245kV &72.5kV NEUTRAL CURRENT TRANSFORMERS

1
CONTENTS

CLAUSE NO. TITLE PAGE NO.

1.0 SCOPE 3
2.0 STANDARDS 3
3.0 PRINCIPAL PARAMETERS 4
4.0 GENERAL TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS 5
5.0 TESTS 8
6.0 DOCUMENTATION 9

ANNEXURE
1. CORE-WISE DETAILS FOR
A-(i) 245kV NCTs (300-150/1A) 10
B-(i) 72.5kV TRANSFORMER INCOMER CTs 10
(1000-500/0.577-1-1-1A)
B-(ii) 72.5kV NCT (1000-500/1A) 10

2
1.0 SCOPE :
1.1 This specification provides for design, engineering, manufacture, stage testing
inspection and testing before despatch, packing, forwarding and delivery at site for
72.5kV CTs and 245kV & 72.5kV NCTs complete with all fittings.
1.2 It is not the intent to specify complete herein all details of the design and
construction of equipments. However the equipment shall conform in all respects to
high standards of engineering design and workmanship and shall be acceptable of
performing in continuous commercial operation up-to the bidders guarantee
acceptable to the purchaser. The equipment offered shall be complete with all
components necessary for its effective and trouble free operation. Such
components shall deemed to be within the scope of supply irrespective of whether
those are specially brought out in this specification and or the commercial order or
not. All similar parts shall be interchangeable.

2.0 STANDARDS
The equipment offered shall conform to latest relevant IS/IEC listed hereunder or
their equivalent IEC/IS.

2.1 INSTRUMENT TRANSFORMERS:


Sr. No. Standard No. Title
1. IS:2165 Insulation Co-ordination for equipment of 100kV and above.
2. IS:2705 Current Transformers.
(I to IV)
3. IS:2099 Bushings for alternating voltages above 1000Volts.
4. IS:3347 Dimensions of porcelain transformer bushings.
5. IS:2071 Method of High Voltage Testing.
6. IS:335 Insulating oil for transformers Switchgears.
7. IS:2147 Degree of protection provided by enclosures for low voltage
switchgear and control.
8. IS:2633 Method of testing hot dipped galvanized articles.
9. IS:4800 Enameled round winding wires.
10. IS:5561 Terminal connectors.
11. IS:11065 Drawings.
12. IEC 44-1 Current Transformers.
13. IEC-270 Partial Discharge Measurement
(or IS:11322)
14. IEC-44(4) Instrument Transformer measurement of PDs.
15. IEC-171 Insulation co-ordination.
16. IEC-60 High voltage testing techniques.
17. IEC-8263 Method for RIV test on high voltage insulators.
18. Indian Electricity Rules 1956.
19. IS:5621 Hollow porcelain insulators.

3
2.2 The bidder shall also note that list of standards presented in this specification is not
complete. Whenever necessary the list of standards shall be considered in
conjunction with specific IS/IEC. When the specific requirements stipulated in the
specifications exceed or differ than those required by the applicable standards, the
stipulation of the specification shall take precedence.

2.3 Equipment meeting with the requirements of other authoritative standards, which
ensure equal or better performance than the standards mentioned above, shall also
be considered. When the equipment offered by the supplier conforms to other
standards salient points of difference between standards adopted and the standards
specified in this specification shall be clearly brought out in the relevant schedule.
Four copies of such standards with authentic translation in English shall be
furnished alongwith the offer.

3.0 PRINCIPAL PARAMETERS:


The current transformers covered in this specification shall meet the technical
requirements listed hereunder.
PRINCIPAL TECHNICAL PARAMETERS :-

Sr.No. Item 245kV 72.5kV


1. Type of C.T./ installation. Single phase, oil filled, single phase, oil filled,
dead tank, hermetically hermetically sealed,
sealed, outdoor type outdoor type,
2. Type of mounting Steel structures
3. Suitable for system 50Hz
frequency
4. Highest system Voltage (kV 245 72.5
rms)
5. Minimum Neutral CT 33 15
Insulating Voltage
6. Current ratio A/A
a) Line - -
b) Transformer - -
c) Transformer Incomer - 1000-500/0.577-1-1-1
d) Bus Coupler CT - -
e) NCT 300-150/1 1000-500/1
7. Method of earthing the Solidly earthed
system
8. Rated Continuous Thermal 125% for all taps
current
9. Ratio taps The tapings shall be only on secondary winding
10. Acceptable limit of As per IS:2705 or equivalent IEC
temperature rise above the
specified ambient
temperature for continuous
operation at rated current.
11. Acceptance partial discharge As per IS:11322-1985 or equivalent IEC
level at 1.1 times the rated
voltage

4
Sr.No. Item 245kV 72.5kV
12. 1.2/50 microsecond lightning impulse withstand voltage (kVp)
a) CTs - 325
b) NCTs 170 95
13. 1 minute dry & wet power frequency withstand Voltage primary (kV rms)
a) CTs - 140
b) NCTs 70 38
14. Power frequency over 3.0
voltage withstand
requirement for secondary
winding (kV rms) (for 1
minute)
15. Min. creepage distance of porcelain housing (mm)
a) CTs - 1815
b) NCTs 900 440
16. Rated short time withstand 40 31.5
current (kArms) for 1 second
17. Rated dynamic withstand 100 78.75
current (kAp)
18. Maximum Creepage factor 4.0

4.0 GENERAL TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS:


4.1 The insulation of the instrument transformer shall be so designed that the internal
insulation shall have higher electrical withstand capability than the external
insulation. The designed dielectric withstands values of external and internal
insulation's shall be clearly brought out in the guaranteed technical particulars. The
dielectric withstand values specified in this specification are meant for fully
assembled instrument transformers.
4.2 PORCELAIN HOUSING:
4.2.1. The details of location and type of joint, if provided on the porcelain, shall be
furnished by the Supplier alongwith the offer. The housing shall be made of
homogeneous, vitreous porcelain of high mechanical and dielectric strength, glazing
of porcelain shall be uniform brown or dark brown colour with a smooth surface
arranged to shed away rain water or condensed water particles (fog).
4.2.2 Details of attachment of metallic flanges to the porcelain shall be brought out in the
offer.
4.3 The metal tanks shall have bare minimum number of welded joints so as to minimize
possible locations of oil leakage. The metal tanks shall be made out of mild
steel/stainless steel/aluminum alloy, depending on the requirement. Welding in
horizontal plane is to be avoided as welding at this location may give way due to
vibrations during transport resulting in oil leakage. Supplier has to obtain specific
approval from purchaser for any horizontal welding used in the bottom tank.
4.4 SURFACE FINISH:
The ferrous parts exposed to atmosphere shall be hot dip galvanized or shall be

5
coated with atleast two coats of Zinc Rich Epoxy painting. All nuts, Bolts and
washers shall be of stainless steel.
4.5 INSULATING OIL:
Insulating oil required for first filling of the instrument transformer shall be covered in
Supplier's scope of supply. The oil shall meet the requirements of latest edition IS:
335 or equivalent IEC.
4.6 PREVENTION OF OIL LEAKAGE & ENTRY OF MOISTURE:
4.6.1 The supplier shall ensure that the sealing of instrument transformer is properly
achieved. In this connection the arrangement provided by the Supplier at various
locations including the following ones shall be described, supported by sectional
drawings.
i) Locations of emergence of primary and secondary terminals.
ii) Interface between porcelain housing and metal tank/s.
iii) Cover of the secondary terminal box.
4.6.2 Nuts and bolts or screws used for fixation of the interfacing porcelain bushings for
taking out terminals shall be provided on flanges cemented to the bushings and not
on the porcelain.
4.6.3 For gasketed joints, wherever used nitrile butyl rubber gaskets shall be used. The
gasket shall be fitted in properly machined groove with adequate space for
accommodating the gasket under compression.
4.7 OIL LEVEL INDICATORS:
Instrument transformers shall be provided with oil sight window (Prismatic Type) at
suitable location so that the oil level is clearly visible with naked eye to an observer
standing at ground level.

4.8 EARTHING:
Metal tank of instrument transformer shall be provided with two separate earthing
terminals for bolted connection to 50x8mm MS flat to be provided by the Purchaser
for connection to station earth mat.
4.9 Instrument transformer shall be provided with suitable lifting arrangement to lift the
entire unit. The lifting arrangement shall be clearly shown in the general
arrangement drawing. Lifting arrangement (lifting eye) shall be positioned in such a
way as to avoid any damage to the porcelain housing or the tanks during lifting for
installation/transport. Necessary string guides, if required shall be offered which
shall be removable type.

4.10 NAME PLATE:


The instrument transformer shall be provided with non-corrosive, legible name plate
with the information specified in relevant standards, duly engraved/punched on it. In
addition to these the following specific points shall also be marked on the name
plate.
i) P.O. No. with date and (item No, if any)
ii) Connection diagram.
iii) Rated continuous thermal current.
iv) General knee point voltage formula.
The size of nameplate and its location on the equipment should be such that it is

6
clearly readable with naked eyes while standing on ground.

4.11 Suitable terminal connectors for connecting conductor shall be supplied. Suitable
terminal earth connectors for earthing connections shall also be provided.
4.11.1. The terminal connectors shall meet the following requirements:
1) Terminal connectors shall be manufactured and tested as per IS: 5561 or equivalent
IEC.
2) All castings shall be free from blowholes, surface blisters, cracks and cavities. All
sharp edges and corners shall be blurred and rounded off.
3) No part of a clamp shall be less than 10mm thick.
4) All ferrous parts shall be hot dip galvanized conforming to IS: 2633 or equivalent
IEC.
5) For bimetallic connectors, copper alloy liner of minimum 2mm thickness shall be
cast integral with aluminium body.
6) Flexible connectors shall be made from tinned copper/ aluminium sheets.
7) All current carrying parts shall be designed and manufactured to have minimum
contact resistance.
8) Connectors shall be designed to be corona free in accordance with the requirements
stipulated in IS:5561 or equivalent IEC.
4.12 Enamel, if used for conductor insulation, shall be polyvinyl acetate type and shall
meet the requirements of IS: 4800 or equivalent IEC. Polyester enamel shall not be
used. Double cotton cover, if used, shall be suitably covered to ensure that it does
not come in contact with oil.
4.13 The temperature rise on any part of equipment shall not exceed maximum
temperature rise specified in IS: 2705 or equivalent IEC. However, the permissible
temperature rise is for a maximum ambient temperature of 50o C.
4.14 The CT/NCT shall be so constructed that it can be easily transported to site within
the allowable transport limitation and in horizontal position, if the transport limitations
so demand.
4.15 Suitable arrangement shall be made for compensation of variation in the oil volume
due to ambient variation and to take care of internal abnormal pressures. The
pressure variation shall be kept within limits, which do not impair the tightness of the
instrument transformer. A pressure relief device capable of releasing abnormal
internal pressure shall be provided.
4.16 The CT secondary terminals shall be brought out in a weather proof terminal box.
The terminal box shall be provided with removable gland plate.
The terminal box/boxes shall be dust and vermin proof. The dimensions of the
terminal box/boxes and its/their openings shall be adequate to enable easy access
and working space with use of normal tools.
4.17 Polarity shall be indelibly marked on each primary and secondary terminal. Facility
shall be provided for short-circuiting and grounding of the secondary terminals inside
the terminal box.
4.18 The instrument transformers shall be vacuum filled with oil after processing and
thereafter hermetically sealed to eliminate breathing and to prevent air and moisture
from entering the tanks. Sealing type oil filling and/or oil sampling cocks shall be
provided with facility to reseal the same. The method adopted for hermetic sealing

7
shall be described in the offer.
4.19 The castings of base, collar etc shall be diecast and tested before assembly to
detect cracks and voids if any.
4.20 The instrument security factor of metering core shall be low enough and less than 5.
This shall be demonstrated on all the ratios of the metering core, in accordance with
procedure specified in IS: 2705 or equivalent IEC. In case the instrument security
factor of less than 5 is not possible to be achieved on higher ratios, auxiliary CTs of
ratio 1/1 shall be deemed to be included in the supplier's scope of supply. This shall
also be specifically brought out by the supplier in his offer.
4.21 PRIMARY WINDING:
The design density for short circuit current as well as conductivity of the metal used
for primary winding shall meet the requirement of IS: 2705 or equivalent IEC. The
supplier shall in his offer furnish detailed calculations for selection of winding
cross-sections.
4.22 SECONDARY WINDING:
Suitably insulated wire of electrolytic grade shall be used for secondary windings.
Type of insulation used shall be described in the offer. For multi ratio design, suitable
tapping shall be provided on secondary winding only. Ratio tap selection through
primary side shall not be acceptable.
4.23 The exciting current of the CT shall be as low as possible. The supplier shall furnish
alongwith his offer the magnetization curve/s for all the core/s. The cores shall be of
high grade, non-ageing electrical silicon laminated steel of low hysterisis loss and
high permeability to ensure high accuracy at both normal and over current.

4.24 PRIMARY TERMINALS:


Each primary terminal shall be made out of rods of not less than 30mm dia copper or
equivalent as per IS/IEC.
4.25 Any deviation from the specification shall be clearly brought out separately. In the
absence of any specific mention, it shall be implied that the equipment offered is
entirely according to this specification.
4.26. The 72.5 kV and above voltage level instrument transformers shall be provided with
suitable test tap for measurement of tests such as partial discharges etc. in factory
as well as at site. Provision shall be made of a screw on cap for solid and secured
earthing of the test tap connection, when not in use. A suitable caution plate shall be
provided duly fixed on the cover of the secondary terminal box indicating the
purpose of the test tap and necessity of its solid earthing as per prescribed method
before energising the equipment.
5.0 TESTS :
5.1 TYPE TESTS
The equipment should be offered type test. Test reports should not more then seven
years old reckoned from date of bid opening in respect of all the tests carried out in
accredited laboratories (based on ISO/IEC) by a reputed accredittic body or
witnessed by HVPN or another electric power utility and be submitted by the
successful bidder to HVPNL for approval as schedule given in Bar Chart.
Temperature-rise Test.
i) Short time current tests.

8
ii) Lighting impulse test.
iii) High voltage power frequency wet withstand voltage test.
iv) Determination of errors or other characteristic according to the requirement so of the
appropriate designation or accuracy class.
5.2 ROUTINE TESTS :
As per quality assurance program (QAP).
5.3 ACCEPTANCE TESTS:
The following acceptance tests as stipulated in the relevant ISS-2705 shall be
carried out by the Supplier in presence of HVPNL representative, unless dispensed
with in writing by the HVPNL.
i) Verification of terminal marking and polarity.
ii) High voltage power frequency dry withstand voltage test for primary winding.
iii) High voltage power frequency dry withstand voltage test for secondary winding.
iv) Over voltage inter-turn test.
v) Partial discharge tests
vi) Determination of errors or other characteristic according to the requirement so of the
appropriate designation or accuracy class.
6.0 DOCUMENTATION:
6.1 The successful bidder shall submit four sets of following drawings except 6.1(b)
below (actual of which shall be supplied at the time of inspection) for HVPNL
approval.
List of drawings:
a) General outline and assembly drawings of the equipment.
b) Graphs showing the performance of equipments in regard to magnetisation
characteristics; ratio & phase angle curves, ratio correction factor curves.
c) Sectional views showing:
i) General Constructional Features.
ii) Materials/Gaskets/Sealing used.
iii) The insulation & the winding arrangements, method of connection of the
primary / secondary winding to the primary / secondary terminals etc.
iv) Porcelain used and its dimensions.
d) Arrangement of terminals and details of connection studs provided.
e) Name plate.
f) Schematic drawing.
g) Detailed drawing of pressure release device with detailed literature
h) Terminal connector drawing.

NOTE:- All above drawings should bear a minimum space (14X10cm) for stamping the
approval of drawings by HVPNL.

9
ANNEXURE I-A(i)
COREWISE DETAILS OF 245 kV NEUTRAL CTs
(300-150/1A)
NUMBER OF CORE - 1
Application Current Accuracy Formula for minimum knee- Maximum Minimum
Ratio (A) class point voltage at CT Exciting Insulation
as per Secondary resistance Current Voltage
IEC 185 at 750C at (mA) (kV)
300Atap(Volt)
1 2 3 4 5 6
REF 300-150/1 PS 14(RCT+2) 30AT VK/2 33
PROTECTION

ANNEXURE-I-B(i)
COREWISE DETAILS OF 72.5kV TRANSFORMER INCOMER CT
(1000-500/.577-1-1-1A)
NUMBER OF CORES - 4
Core Application Current Output Accuracy Formula for minimum Maximum A.L.F./
No. Ratio (A) burden class knee-point voltage Exciting I.S.F.
(VA) as per At CT Secondary Current
IEC 185 resistance at 750C at (mA)
1000A tap (Volt)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 DIFFERENTIAL 1000-500/0.577 - PS 40 (RCT+2) 30AT VK/4 -
PROTECTION
2 REF 1000-500/1 - PS 14 (RCT+2) 30AT VK/2
PROTECTION
3 OVER 1000-500/1 15 5P - - ALF 10
CURRENT &
EARTH FAULT
PROTECTION

4 METERING 1000-500/1 15 1.0 - - ISF <5

ANNEXURE-I-B(ii)
COREWISE DETAILS OF 72.5kV TRANSFORMER INCOMER NCT
(1000-500/1A)
No. OF CORES= 1
Core Application Current Output Accuracy Formula for minimum Maximum Minimum
No. Ratio (A) burden class knee point voltage Exciting Insulatio
(VA) as per At CT Secondary Current n Voltage
IEC 185 resistance at 750C at (mA) (kV)
1000A tap (Volt)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 REF 1000-500/1 - PS 14 (RCT+2) 30AT VK/2 15
PROTECTION

10
11
SECTION -5

CHAPTER-2

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR

245 kV & 72.5 kV

CAPACITIVE VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS (CVTs)

1
CONTENTS

CLAUSE NO. TITLE PAGE NO.


------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1.0 SCOPE 3

2.0 STANDARDS 3

3.0 PRINCIPAL PARAMETERS 4

4.0 GENERAL TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS 6

5.0 TESTS 10

6.0 DOCUMENTATION 11

ANNEXURES
I. COREWISE DETAILS FOR

A-(i) 245 kV CVTs 12

B -(i) 72.5 kV CVTs 13

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

2
1.0 SCOPE :

1.1 This specification provides for design, engineering, manufacture,


stage testing, inspection and testing before dispatch, packing,
forwarding and delivery at site of 245kV & 72.5kV CVTs complete with
all fittings.

1.2 It is not the intent to specify completely herein all details of the design
and construction of equipments. However the equipment shall
conform in all respects to high standards of engineering design and
workmanship and shall be capable of performing in continuous
commercial operation upto the bidders guarantee acceptable to the
purchaser. The equipment offered shall be complete in all
components necessary for its effective and trouble free operation.
Such components shall be deemed to be within the scope of supply
irrespective of whether those are specially brought out in this
specification and or the commercial order or not. All similar parts
particularly movable ones shall be interchangeable.

2.0 STANDARDS:

The equipment offered shall conform to latest relevant IS/IEC listed


hereunder or their equivalent IEC/IS.

Sr. No. Standard No. Title.


1. IS : 3156 Voltage transformer
(Part-I to Part-III)
2. IS : 3156 (Part-IV) Capacitor Voltage Transformer
3. IS : 2099 High Voltage porcelain bushing.
4. IS : 3347 Dimensions of porcelain transformer
bushings
5. IS : 2071 Method of High Voltage Testing
6. IS : 335 Insulating oil for transformers and
switchgears
7. IS : 2165 Insulation Co-ordination for
equipments of 100 kV and above.
8. IS : 2147 Degree of protection provided by
enclosures for low voltage switchgear
and control.
9. IEC- 186 Voltage Transformers
10. IEC - 186A First supplement to IEC publication
186
11. IEC - 270 Partial discharge Measurement

3
12. IS - 5561 Terminal Connectors
13. IS -4800 Enameled round winding wires
14. IEC- 44 (4) Instrument Transformer
measurement of PDs
15. IEC-171 Insulation Co-ordination
16. IEC - 358 Coupling capacitor divider.
17. IEC-60 High Voltage testing techniques.
18. IEC-8263 Method for RIV test on high voltage
insulators.
19. IS: 9348 Coupling capacitors and capacitor
dividers
20. IS: 2633 Methods of testing hot dipped
galvanized articles
21. IS: 11065 Drawings.
22. Indian Electricity Rules 1956
23. IS: 5621 Hollow porcelain insulators.

2.2 The bidder shall also note that list of standards presented in this
specification is not complete. Whenever necessary the list of standards
shall be considered in conjunction with specific IS/IEC. When the
specific requirements stipulated in these specifications exceed or differ
than those required by the applicable standards, the stipulation of the
specification shall take precedence.

2.3 Equipment meeting with the requirements of other authoritative


standards, which ensure equal or better performance than the
standards mentioned above, shall also be considered. When the
equipment offered by the supplier conforms to other standards salient
points of difference between standards adopted and the standards
specified in this specification shall be clearly brought out in the relevant
schedule. Four copies of such standards with authentic translation in
English shall be furnished alongwith the offer.

3.0 PRINCIPAL PARAMETERS :

The capacitor voltage transformers and potential transformers covered in this


specification shall meet the technical requirements listed hereunder.

4
3.1 PRINCIPAL PARAMETERS:-

Sr. Item Specification


No. 245kV 72.5kV
1. Type/Installation …….…..
Single Phase Oil filled Self cooled,
Hermetically sealed Outdoor type ………..
2. Type of mounting …………………… Steel structure ……………………
3. Highest system 245 72.5
voltage (kV rms)
4. Suitable for system ……………………………. 50Hz …………………….
frequency
5. Voltage ratio
a) Rated primary 220/√3 66/√3
voltage (kV rms).
b) Secondary voltage Core I,II Core I
(volts) 110/√3 110/√3

6. Method of earthing ………………… Solidly Earthed ………………………


the system
7. 1.2/50 microsecond 1050 325
lightning impulse
withstand voltage
(kVp)
8. 1 Minute dry & wet 460 140
power frequency
withstand voltage
primary (kV rms)
9. Min. creepage 6125 1815
distance of porcelain
housing (mm)
10. Creepage factor …………………. …. 4.0 ………………………….
(max.)
11. Rated voltage factor ……. 1.2 continuous and 1.5 for 30 seconds ……….
12. Equivalent ……………….. 8800+10% ……………………
capacitance at - 5%
power frequency for
carrier coupling for
CVT (PF)
13. Resultant high 8800 in carrier frequency range of 40 KHz N.A to 500
frequency KHz with variation in capacitance as contained in IEC-
capacitance for CVT 358 (i.e- 20% & +50%)
(PF)

5
14. One minute power
frequency withstand …………………… 3.0 …………………………
voltage for
secondary winding
(kV rms)
15. Max. temperature …… As per IS:3156 or equivalent IEC ………
rise over ambient of
50°C

4.0 GENERAL TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS:


4.1 CAPACITOR VOLTAGE TRANSFORMER (CVT):
4.1.1 The insulation of the instrument transformers shall be so designed that the
internal insulation shall have higher electrical withstand capability than the
external insulation. The designed dielectric withstand values of external and
internal insulations shall be clearly withstand values specified in this
guaranteed technical particulars. The dielectric withstand values specified in
this specification are meant for fully assembled instrument transformers.

4.1.2 Porcelain Housing :


4.1.2.1 The details of location and type of joint, if provided on the porcelain, shall be
furnished by the supplier alongwith the offer. The housing shall be made of
homogeneous, vitreous porcelain of high mechanical and dielectric strength,
blazing of porcelain shall be of uniform brown or dark brown colour with a
smooth surface arranged to shed away rain water or condensed water
particles (fog).

4.1.2.2 Details of attachment of metallic flanges to the porcelain shall be brought out
in the offer.

4.1.3 The metal tanks shall have bare minimum number of welded joints so as to
minimize possible locations of oil leakage. The metal tanks shall be made
out of mild steel/Stainless steel/aluminium alloy, depending on the
requirement. Welding in horizontal plane is to be avoided as welding at this
location may give way due to vibrations during transport resulting in oil
leakage. Supplier has to obtain specific approval from purchaser for any
horizontal welding used in the bottom tank.
4.1.4 Surface Finish:
The ferrous parts exposed to atmosphere shall be hot dip galvanised or shall
be coated with atleast two coats of zinc rich epoxy painting. All nuts, bolts
and washers shall be made out of stainless steel.

4.1.5 Insulating Oil:


Insulating oil required for first filling of the instrument transformer shall be
covered in supplier's scope of supply. The oil shall meet the requirements of
latest edition IS:335 or equivalent IEC.
6
4.1.6 Prevention of Oil leakages and Entry of Moisture:

4.1.6.1 The supplier shall ensure that the sealing of instrument transformer is
properly achieved. In this connection the arrangement provided by the
supplier at various locations including the following ones shall be described,
supported by sectional drawings.
i) Locations of emergence of primary and secondary terminals.
ii) Interface between porcelain housing and metal tanks.
iii) Cover of the secondary terminal box.

4.1.6.2 Nuts and bolts or screws used for fixation of the interfacing porcelain
bushings for taking out terminals, shall be provided on flanges cemented to
the bushings and not on the porcelain.
4.1.6.3 For gasketed joints, wherever used nitrile butyl rubber gaskets shall be used.
The gasket shall be fitted in properly machined groove with adequate space
for accommodating the gasket under compression.
4.1.7 Oil level indicators:
Instrument transformers shall be provided with oil sight window at suitable
location so that the oil level is clearly visible with naked eye to an observer
standing at ground level.

4.1.8. Earthing:
Metal tank of the instrument transformer shall be provided with two separate
earthing terminal for bolted connection to 50X8mm MS flat to be provided by
the Purchaser for connection to station earth-mate.

4.1.9 Instrument transformer shall be provided with suitable lifting arrangement, to


lift the entire unit. The lifting arrangement shall be clearly shown in the
general arrangement drawings. Lifting arrangement (lifting eye) shall be
positioned in such a way so as to avoid any damage to the porcelain housing
or the tanks during lifting for installation/transport. If necessary, string guides
shall be offered which shall be of removable type.

4.1.10 NAME PLATE:

The instrument transformer shall be provided with non-corrosive, legible


name plate with the information specified in relevant standards, duly
engraved/punched on it. In addition to these P.O. with the date, Item No.
P.O. & Connection diagram shall also be marked in rating plate.

4.1.11 Suitable terminal connectors for connecting conductor shall be supplied.


Suitable terminal earth connectors for earthing connections shall also be
provided.
4.1.12 The terminal connectors shall meet the following requirements:
1) Terminal connectors shall be manufactured and tested as per IS:5561 or

7
equivalent IEC.
2) All castings shall be free from blow holes, surface blisters, cracks and
cavities. All sharp edges and corners shall be blurred and rounded off.
3) No part of a clamp shall be less than 10mm thick.
4) All ferrous parts shall be hot dip galvanized conforming to IS:2633 or
equivalent IEC.
5) For bimetallic connectors, copper alloy liner of minimum 2mm thickness shall
be cast integral with aluminium body.
6) Flexible connectors shall be made from tinned copper/ aluminium body.
7) All currents carrying parts shall be designed and manufactured to have
minimum contact resistance.
8) Connectors shall be designed to be corona free in accordance with the
requirements stipulated in IS: 5561 or equivalent IEC.
4.1.13 Enamel, if used for conductor insulation, shall be either polyvinyl acetate type
or amide emide type and shall meet the requirements of IS:4800 or
equivalent IEC. Polyester enamel shall not be used. Double cotton cover, if
used, shall be suitably covered to ensure that it does not come in contact
with oil.
4.1.14 The temperature rise on any part of equipment shall not exceed maximum
temperature rise specified in IS:3156 o or equivalent IEC. However, the
permissible temperature rise indicated is for a maximum ambient
temperature of 50°C.
4.1.15 The instrument transformers shall be so constructed that it can be easily
transported to site within the allowable transport limitation and in horizontal
position, if the transport limitations so demand.
4.1.16 The instrument transformers shall be vacuum filled with oil after processing
and thereafter hermetically sealed to eliminate breathing and to prevent air
and moisture from entering the tanks, sealing type oil filling and/or oil
sampling cocks shall be provided with facility to reseal the same. The method
adopted for hermetic sealing shall be described in the offer.
4.1.17 Suitable arrangement shall be made to accommodate the expansion and
contraction of oil due to temperature variation. The pressure variation shall
be kept within limits which do not impair the tightness of the instrument
transformer. A pressure relief device capable of releasing abnormal internal
pressure shall be provided.
4.2 CAPACITOR VOLTAGE TRANSFORMER (CVT):
4.2.1 The CVTs comprising of a capacitor divider unit and electromagnetic unit shall
be single phase, oil filled hermetically sealed, self cooled, outdoor type and
suitable for direct line connection without any fuse and isolating switches,
These CVTs are required to be used on interlinking substations in Haryana
power system for the purpose of protection, synchronising, interlocking, carrier
coupling and metering. CVTs shall be suitable for connecting the carrier
terminals to single circuit and double circuit transmission lines for phase to
phase coupling for power line carrier, voice communication, telemetering &
teleprinting services.
8
4.2.2 The secondary terminals of potential unit, high frequency coupling terminal and
the earthing terminals shall be brought out separately and housed in a water
proof cabinet outside the main steel chamber.
4.2.3 The capacitor voltage transformer shall be suitable for simultaneous use as
measuring unit, for feeding voltage supply to protective relays and as coupling
capacitor for carrier transmission i.e. for voice communication, carrier
protective relays, telemetering, teleprinting services over one or more carrier
channels in the frequency range of 40 to 500KHz.
4.2.4 The capacitors shall be designed for wide frequency band and low dielectric
loss. Their natural frequency shall be considerably higher than the carrier
frequency range of 40 KHz to 500 KHz.
4.2.5 The unit capacitors shall be so designed that no damage to internal elements
or change in electrostatic capacitance is resulted by the application of impulse
voltage.
4.2.6 Each CVT including its emvt unit shall be filled with insulating oil conforming to
IS:335 or equivalent IEC. And shall be hermetically sealed against moisture
and dust.
4.2.7 The electromagnetic voltage transformer unit of CVT intended for out-door
installation whose primary is to be fed by the inter-mediate tapping of capacitor
divider shall be of oil immersed, self cooled design and shall be suitable for
metering, relaying & synchronising services. The core of this transformer shall
be of high grade, nonageing, cold rolled, laminated electrical silicon steel of low
hysteresls loss & of high permeability so as to ensure high accuracy at normat
& high voltages. The primary winding shall be connected through a
compensating reactor to compensate the voltage increase at inter-mediate
tapping, whatever is the load within range of rated burden.

4.2.8 The design shall be free from corona effect to keep noise level of carrier
frequency link very low. Use may be made of grading rings or Electrostatic
screen for this purpose if required.
4.2.9 The design shall be suitable for rapid reclosing of the circuit and shall be
capable of accurate and proportionate transmission of sudden variation in the
primary voltage.

4.2.10 Each CVT shall be provided with a suitable damping device so that ferro
resonance oscillation due to saturation of iron core of transformer or any
inductance connected in parallel with it and initiated by either over voltages on
the net work side or by opening of the short circuited primary or secondaries,
shall be practically zero. Oscillations of the secondary voltages which may
arise as a result of breakdown of primary voltages due to short circuts shall not
affect the proper working of protective relays. This shall confirm to provisions of
clause:42 of IEC recommendations 186-A.
4.2.11 Design of the potential units of the CVT shall be based on the following
requirements in connection with protective relaying.

9
i) They must transmit accurately sudden drops of primary voltage.
ii) The CVTs must not enter into sub-harmonic resonance and transient
oscillations during energisation. They must be damped out with
sufficient rapidness.
iii) They must have sufficiently low short circuit impedance as seen from
secondary.
4.2.12 A device shall be incorporated in a capacitor voltage transformer for the
purpose of limiting over voltages which may appear across one or more of its
components and/or to prevent sustained ferro resonance.
The device may include a spark gap and may be located in several different
ways according to its nature. *(Clause 2.12 of IS:3156 (Part-IV)-1978 or IEC-
186A Clause 37.12)
4.2.13 Suitable terminal boxes with removable gland plate for facilitating the entry of
H.F. Cable & VT control cables shall be provided at an accessible position.

5.0 TESTS:
5.1 TYPE TEST
5.1.1 TYPE TESTS OF CAPACITIVE VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS (CVT's):
The equipment should be offered type test. Test reports should not more
then seven years old reckoned from date of bid opening in respect of all the
tests carried out in accredited laboratories (based on ISO/IEC) by a reputed
accreditatic body or witnessed by HVPN or another electric power utility and
be submitted by the successful bidder to HVPNL for approval as schedule
given in Bar Chart.
i) Temperature Rise Test.
ii) Impulse test.
iii) Ferro-resonance test.
iv) Transient response test.
v) High voltage power frequency wet withstand voltage test.
vi) Determination of errors or other characteristics according to the
requirements of the appropriate designation or accuracy class.
vii) Capacitance measurement before voltage test.
viii) Voltage test between terminals.
ix) Measurement of capacitance and tangent of the loss angle after
voltage test.
x) Voltage test between the low-voltage terminal and the earth terminal.
xi) Oil leakage test.
xii) High frequency test.
xiii) Determination of temperature co-efficient.
5.2 ROUTINE TESTS :
As per quality assurance program (QAP).

5.3 ACCEPTANCE TESTS:

10
The following acceptance tests as stipulated in the relevant ISS-3156 shall be
carried out by the Supplier in presence of HVPNL representative, unless
dispensed with in writing by the HVPNL.
i) Verification of terminal marking and polarity.
ii) High voltage power frequency dry withstand voltage test for Primary winding.
iii) High voltage power frequency dry withstand voltage test for Secondary
winding.
iv) Partial discharge tests
v) Determination of errors or other characteristics according to the requirements
the appropriate designation or accuracy class.

6.0 DOCUMENTATION:
6.1 The successful bidder shall submit four sets of following drawings except
6.1(b) below (actual of which shall be supplied at the time of inspection) for
HVPNL approval.
List of drawings:
a) General outline and assembly drawings of the equipment.
b) Graphs showing the performance of equipments in regard to
magnetization characteristics; ratio & phase angle curves, ratio correction
factor curves.
c) Sectional views showing:
i) General Constructional Features.
ii) Materials/Gaskets/Sealing used.
iii) The insulation & the winding arrangements, method of connection of the
primary / secondary winding to the primary/secondary terminals etc.
iv) Porcelain used and its dimensions.
d) Arrangement of terminals and details of connection studs provided.
e) Name plate.
f) Schematic drawing.
g) Detailed drawing of pressure release device with detailed literature
h) Terminal connector drawing.
NOTE:- All above drawings should bear a minimum space (14X10cm) for stamping the
approval of drawings by HVPNL.

11
ANNEXURE- IA(i)

COREWISE DETAILS OF 245kV CAPACITOR VOLTAGE TRANSFORMER


(CVT)

Sl. Requirement Particulars


No.
1. Rated Primary voltage 220/√3kV
2. Type Single phase
3. No. of Secondaries 2
4. Rated voltage factor 1.2 continuous & 1.5 for 30 seconds
5. Capacitance (minimum) 8800 (+10%, -5%) pico farads
6. Rated voltage (volts) Secondary-I Secondary-II
110/√3 110/√3
7. Application Protection & Protection
Measurement
8. Accuracy 1/3P 3P
9. Output burden (VA) 100 50
10. Percentage voltage error & As per ISS/IEC
phase displacement
(minutes) for respective
specified accuracy classes.

Note:- Each winding shall fulfil its respective specified accuracy requirement
within its specified output range whilst at the same time the other
winding has an output of any value form zero to 100% of the output
range specified for the other winding in line with clause 6.2.1 of IS
3156 (Part-2 & Part-3) 1992 or its equivalent IEC.

12
ANNEXURE- IB(i)

COREWISE DETAILS OF 72.5kV CAPACITOR VOLTAGE


TRANSFORMER (CVT).

Sl. Requirement Particulars


No.
1. Rated Primary voltage 66/√3kV
2. Type Single phase
3. No. of Secondaries 1
4. Rated voltage factor 1.2 continuous & 1.5 for 30 seconds
5. Capacitance (minimum) 8800 (+10%, -5%) pico farads
6. Rated voltage (volts) 110/√3
7. Application Protection metering, carrier coupling &
interlocking of line cum earthswitch
8. Accuracy 1/3P
9. Output burden (VA) 50
10. Percentage voltage error & As per ISS/IEC
phase displacement
(minutes) for respective
specified accuracy classes.

13
SECTION-5

CHAPTER-3

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR

220 kV & 66kV

CONTROL AND RELAY PANELS

FOR SUBSTATIONS WITHOUT SUBSTATION AUTOMATION

SYSTEM

1
CONTENTS

CLAUSE NO. TITLE PAGE NO.


-------------------------------------
1.0 SCOPE 3

2.0 STANDARDS 3

3.0 SERVICE CONDITIONS 4

4.0 PRINCIPAL PARAMETERS 5

5.0 GENERAL TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS 6

6.0 TESTS 33

7.0 DOCUMENTATION 34

ANNEXURES

A. TRANSMISSION LINE DATA 35

B. LINE PARAMETERS 36

C. DETAILS OF CARRIER EQUIPMENT 37

2
1.0 SCOPE:
1.1 This specification covers the design, engineering, manufacture, inspection &
testing at manufacturer’s work before despatch, packing, forwarding and delivery
at site of 220 kV & 66 kV control & relay panels for S/Stns. without substation
automation system.
1.2 Unless specifically excluded from the offer, all fittings and accessories, not
specifically stated in this specification but which are necessary for satisfactory
operation of the scheme or to complete the work in a good workman like manner
shall be deemed to have been included in the scope of supply of the Bidder.
1.3 CO-ORDINATION :
Circuit Breakers, CT's, PT's/CVT's & Isolating Switches etc. are being purchased
against separate specification. The Bidder of control & relay panels shall be
responsible for preparing complete wiring diagram of 66kV & 220 kV C&R panel
boards and shall also undertake to mount & wire any equipment received from
other supplier. The schematic of breakers & isolators are required to be
incorporated in the panel schematic.
1.4 EXPERIENCE:
The Bidder shall arrange C&R panels along with main relays from the same
manufacturer. However, one of the distance protection schemes on each 220 kV
feeder C&R panel and busbar protection on bus coupler cum bus bar protection
panel can be of other make also.
The manufacturer own make relays includes the relays manufactured by their
Principals /Associates.

2.0 STANDARDS :
2.1 The equipment offered shall conform to latest relevant Indian Standards listed
hereunder or equivalent IEC :-
Sr. Standard Title
No.
1. IS: 5 Colour for ready mix paints.
2. IS: 375 Marking & arrangements for switchgear, bus bars, main
connections & auxiliary wiring.
3. IS: 694 PVC insulated cable for working voltage upto and
including 1100 V.
4. IS: 722 AC Electricity meters.
5. IS: 1248 Direct acting indicating analogue electrical measuring
Part-I& IV instruments & their accessories.
6. IS: 2419 Dimensions for panel mounted indicating & recording
electrical instruments.
7. IS :3231 Electrical relays for power system protection.
8. IS :8686 Static protective relays.
9. IS :2147 Degree of protection provided by enclosures for low
voltage switchgear & control gear.

3
2.2 The works covered by the specification shall be designed, engineered,
manufactured, built, tested and commissioned in accordance with the Acts, Rules,
Laws and Regulations of India.
2.3 The equipment to be furnished under this specification shall conform to latest
issue with all amendments of standard specified above.
2.4 In addition to meeting the specific requirement called for in the Technical
Specification, the equipment shall also conform to the general requirement of the
relevant standards and shall form an integral part of Specification.
2.5 The Bidder shall note that standards mentioned in the specification are not
mutually exclusive or complete in themselves, but intended to compliment each
other.
2.6 The Bidder shall also note that list of standards presented in this specification is
not complete. Whenever necessary the list of standards shall be considered in
conjunction with specific IS/IEC.
2.7 When the specific requirements stipulated in the specification exceed or differ than
those required by the applicable standards, the stipulation of the specification shall
take precedence.
2.8 Other internationally accepted standards which ensure equivalent or better
performance than that specified in the standard referred shall also be accepted.
2.9 In case governing standards for the equipment is different from IS or IEC, the
salient points of difference shall be clearly brought out alongwith English language
version of standard or relevant extract of the same. The equipment conforming to
standards other than IS/IEC shall be subject to HVPNL's approval.
2.10 The bidder shall clearly indicate in his bid the specific standards in accordance
with which the works will be conformed.

3.0 SERVICE CONDITIONS:


3.1 Equipment to be supplied against this specification shall be suitable for
satisfactory continuous operation under the following tropical conditions:-
i) Location IN THE STATE OF HARYANA
ii) Max. ambient air temp (°C) 50
iii) Min. ambient air temp (°C) -2.5
iv) Maximum Relative humidity (%) 100
v) Minimum Relative humidity (%) 26
vi) Average annual rainfall (mm) 900
vii) Max. wind pressure (kg/sq. m.) 195
viii) Max. altitude above mean sea level (meters). 1000
ix) Isoceraunic level (days/Year) 50
x) Seismic level (horizontal acceleration) 0.3 g
xi) Average number of dust storm 35
(days per annum)
Note:-i) Moderately hot and humid tropical climate conducive to rust and fungus
growth. The climatic conditions are also prone to wide variations in
ambient conditions.
ii) Air conditioning or any special arrangement for making the control room
dust proof shall not be provided in any of the S/Stn.
3.2 All control wiring, equipment & accessories shall be protected against fungus
growth, condensation, vermin & other harmful effects due to tropical environments.

4
3.3 AUX. POWER SUPPLY :
i) A.C. Supply : 415/240 Volts, 3-phase, 4-wire, 50 Hz
Voltage variation : ± 10%
Frequency variation : ± 3%
ii) D C Supply : 220 Volts, 2 wire available from S/Stn.
battery(insulated)
Variation : ±10%.
3.4.1.1 220 kV & 66 kV voltages will be three phase having normal frequency of 50 Hz
subject to a variation of ± 3%. Neutrals of the Power Transformers at the S/Stn.
covered in this specification are solidly earthed.

4.0 PRINCIPAL PARAMETERS :

4.1 The panels shall have the principal dimensions as detailed below:-
i). Depth of panels = 610 mm
ii). a) Height of switchboard above base frame = 2210 mm
b) Height of base frame = 102 mm
iii). Width of corridor in case of duplex panels = 762 mm
iv). TYPE OF PANEL :
a) Simplex control & relay panels for all 66kV circuits.
b) Duplex control & Relay panels for all 220 kV circuits.
Note:- The offer of the bidder not conforming to above requirement shall be out
rightly rejected.

4.2.1 MIMIC DISPOSITION :


The mimic disposition on control panel should be matching to our standard
drawings; the details of which will be supplied to successful bidder.

4.2.2 MIMIC SCHEME :


Suitably painted mimic diagram will be reproduced on the panels/boards covered
by the specification. Automatic semaphores for indicating 'open' and 'close'
position of circuit breakers, isolators & earth switches shall be suitable
incorporated in the mimic diagram. The colour scheme for all the S/Stn. specified
herein shall, however, be as under;-
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Voltage Level Colour Shade No. (according to IS:5 or Equivalent IEC)
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
220 kV Dark brown 412
66 kV Golden brown 414
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

4.2 ARRANGEMENT OF PANELS:


The panels shall be fabricated so that even if the serial of panels is changed no
difficulty will be faced in the placement of panels and cabling etc. The sequence of
various panels in a panel board at a S/Stn. shall be supplied to successful bidder.

5
5.0 GENERAL TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS:

5.1 MATERIAL & WORKMANSHIP :


All material used in the construction of the panels/relays shall be of the best
quality obtainable of their respective kind and whole of the work shall be of the
highest class, well finished and of approved design and make.
Castings shall be free from blow-holes, flaws, cracks or other defects and shall be
smooth grained and of true dimensions and forms.
The draw out mechanism in respect of draw out relays should be smooth and
convenient so as to give adequate service during their use.

5.2 DEPARTURE FROM THE SPECIFICATION:


Should the bidder wish to depart from the provisions of this specification either on
account of manufacturing practice or for any other reasons, he will draw specific
attention to the proposed points of departure on the prescribed Performa in his
tender and submit such full information, drawings and specifications as will enable
the merit of his proposal to be appreciated.
In the event of Bidder drawings, specification and tables etc. disagreeing with this
specification during the execution of the contract this specification shall be held
binding unless the departures have been fully recorded as required above.

5.3 PAINTING:
All unfinished surfaces of steel panels and frame works shall be sand blasted to
remove rust scale, foreign adhering matter & grease. A suitable rust resistance
primer shall be applied on the interior & exterior of steel which will be followed by
application of an under coat suitable to serve as base for finishing coat. The
finishing coat shall be as under :-
Exterior - Stove enameled light grey as per shade No.631 of IS:5.
Interior - stove enameled white.
Base frame - Stove enameled glossy black.

5.4. TESTING EQUIPMENT AND TESTING FACILITIES ON THE RELAYS :


The bidder shall recommend suitable testing equipment (alongwith quantity)
required for field testing of protective schemes and other relays offered against
this specification. The actual quantity to be ordered shall be determined by the
HVPNL.
Also adequate testing facilities should be provided on the relay so as to test them
without the necessity of their removal or making any extra connections. The
Bidder will clearly indicate the testing procedure to be followed in respect of relays
offered.
5.5 The transmission lines shall be either in form of overhead conductor or
combination of overhead conductor & underground cable. The tentative
transmission line data in respect of 220kV & 66kV lines covered in this
specification is given at Annexure-A.
The standard chart providing the details of per unit values of Z1, Z2 & Z0 on 100
MVA base per 100 km of overhead line for calculating these values for full lengths
of lines are enclosed at Annexure-B.
The tentative details of carrier equipment are enclosed at Annexure-C.
The suitability of distance scheme offered with reference to the above parameters
may be seen.

6
Guaranteed test sheets shall be submitted by the bidder. Relevant literature shall
be supplied along with the bid for proper appreciation of the offered equipment.

5.6 TRANINING OF PERSONNEL : as per clause 12 of section I General.

5.7 GENERAL DESCRIPTION :

5.7.1. DUPLEX C&R PANEL BOARDS :


The panel shall comprise of cubicles placed in juxtaposition to form continuous
board. At each Substation the relay boards shall be mounted back to back with
the control board and so arranged as to have a corridor carrier in between to
provide access to internal wiring. Hinged lockable access doors shall be fitted at
both ends of the corridor and switch boards interior shall be automatically lit by the
opening of these doors.
The C&R panels tendered for sr. no. 4.1. (iv)(b) above may match in the following
respects :-
i) Heightwise and depthwise matching including the matching in respect of
corridor width.
ii) Size & disposition of mimic diagram matching.
The offered C&R panels shall be complete with side covers for each circuit, end
access doors with concealed hinges having a swing of not less than 105 in fully
open position of the doors.
The control and relay cubicles shall be made of sheet steel of thickness not less
than 10 SWG for the base frame, door frame, front and rear portions of cubicle
and not less than 14 SWG for doors, side, top & bottom portions.
The bottom of the cubicle frame shall be suitable for erection on flush concrete
floor. The trench, carrying the control cables, shall run at the back of erected C&R
panel boards in the switch house building. Evenly spaced grout bolts projecting
through the base channel forming members of the frame shall be used for
securing cubicles to the floor.
The front panels of all cubicles shall be detachable and all inter-connections from
the control panel to the relay panel & vice -versa shall be through terminal
connectors. The inter-connections shall preferably run underneath the top cover.
The control & relay boards shall be completely dust & vermin proof. The enclosure
shall provide degree of protection not less than IP-31 in accordance with IS:2147
and shall be suitable for tropical use. All holes and extension windows in the
panels shall be blanked and access doors shall be lined with compressible liners
at the edges.
5.7.2 SIMPLEX C&R PANEL BOARDS :
The panel board for the substations mentioned at sr. no. 4.1. (iv)(a) above shall
be of `simplex' type & consisting of separate cubicles (for each circuit complete
with side covers) made of sheet steel of thickness not less than 10 SWG for the
base frame, door frame and front portions of the cubicles and not less than 14
SWG for door, side, top & bottom portion having provision for extension at both
ends with internal wiring, illumination with door operated off & on switch. The
cubicle shall be suitable for floor mounting with its bottom open. Each cubicle shall
be fitted with flush mounted steel hinged door & lock at the back & all the
equipments will be mounted in front. The supply shall include suitable grouting
bolts and nuts etc. All holes and extension windows shall be blanked and access
doors shall be provided with compressible liners at the edges.

7
These simplex panels offered may, therefore, match in following respects :-
i) Height-wise and depthwise matching.
ii) Size & disposition of mimic diagram matching.
The control & relay boards shall be completely dust & vermin proof. The enclosure
shall provide degree of protection not less than IP-31 in accordance with IS:2147
and shall be suitable for tropical use.

5.8 SUPERVISION SCHEME :

5.8.1 INDICATING LAMPS :


5.8.1.1. 220 kV control panel of all 220 kV circuits covered by this specification shall be
fitted with the following supervision lamps:-
Circuit breaker `Open' : Green.
Circuit breaker `Close' : Red.
Auto trip : White.
Spring charge lamp : Blue
5.8.1.2 66 kV control & relay panel boards of all respective concerned S/Stations covered
by this specification shall be provided with the following supervision lamps :-
Circuit breaker `close' : Red.
Circuit breaker `Open' : Green.
Auto trip : White.
Spring charge lamp : Blue
5.8.1.3 Auto trip lamp shall be wired on 220 V DC whereas circuit breaker `open', circuit
breaker `close' and spring charge lamps shall be wired so as to be on 220 V AC
under normal conditions with an automatic changeover relay to change them over
to 220V DC supply in the event of failure of AC supply.
5.8.1.4 Glass/Plastic lens of appropriate colour shall be screwed into the front of the lamp
body. The design of indication lamps shall be such as to facilitate replacement of
fused lamps.
5.8.1.5 An engraved label indicating the purpose of the lamp shall also be provided with
each lamp.

5.8.2. SEMAPHORE INDICATORS :


Automatic semaphore relays of the under-mentioned types shall be provided to
mimic the position of circuit breakers, isolators and earth switches in the mimic
diagram painted on the control and relay boards.
5.8.2.1. The control & relay panels of all the S/Stns. covered by this specification shall be
provided with supply failure type semaphores to show on/off position of the circuit
breakers/isolators/earth switches. When the supply failure to the semaphore
occurs the pointer shall take up an intermediate position to indicate the supply
failure. For distinction purposes, the disc diameter of the semaphore relays used
to mimic the circuit breaker position will be bigger than those for isolator/earth
switch.
5.8.2.2. The operating coil of the semaphore relays shall be continuously rated & shall be
suitable for use with 220 V DC. The semaphore relays shall work satisfactorily
between 80 % -120 % of rated DC voltage.

5.8.3 ANNUNCIATOR :
5.8.3.1. Each of the control and relay panels shall have independent annunciation
scheme. The scheme shall generally conform to the followings:-

8
i) The closing of an initiating contact shall sound an alarm and light an
annunciator indicating lamp. It shall be possible to silence the alarm by pressing
`accept' push button.
ii) By pressing the `reset' push button the individual indicating lamp shall be
extinguished provided that the troubled contact has opened. The resetting
shall be possible only after the alarm is accepted.
iii) Lighting of an annunciator lamp shall not interfere with or cause false
operation of any other annunciator lamp whether lighted simultaneously or in
sequence. Operation of `reset' push button shall not cause the alarm to
sound whether or not the trouble contact is closed.
iv) With the help of `lamp test' push button it shall be possible to test all the
lamps in the group.
v) The lamps for visual annunciation system shall have separate
compartments behind inscribed translucent windows. These shall be so
arranged that illumination from one compartment shall not light adjacent
windows.
vi) The equipment shall operate on 220 V DC and shall be complete with
`alarm accept', `alarm reset' and `lamp test' push buttons.
vii) Only static facia alarm scheme is acceptable .
5.8.3.2. The minimum annunciation ways for various 220 kV & 66 kV C&R panels shall be
provided as under:-
Description Annunciation Ways (Nos.)

Transformer Feeder Bus Transformer Capacitor


panel panel Coupler incomer panel
panel for panel
double
bus
24 24 24 - -
220 kV
66 kV 16 12 10 10 10
All the 66kV & 220 kV panels have trip as well as non trip annunciations, as such
the facia must have two buses; one for trip alarm and another for non trip alarm.
All trip facia shall have red colour and all non trip facia shall have white colour.

5.8.4 ALARMS :
5.8.4.1 Alarm scheme for trip alarms :
Trip commands due to operation of protective relays will trip the breaker and light
the relevant annunciation window. Auxiliary contact of circuit breaker and trip bus
of annunciator will actuate bell (common to a panel board at a S/Stn.) & will be
cancelled by the circuit breaker control handle & ‘Accept’ button of annunciator in
case of all the panels against this specification. Auto trip lamp will glow on the
concerned panel & there will be flag indication on the concerned protective
relays/auxiliary relay of the panel.
5.8.4.2 Alarm scheme for non-trip alarms :
Non-trip commands will light the relevant annunciation window. Non- trip bus of
annunciator will actuate hooter (common to a panel board at a S/Stn.) & will be

9
cancelled by the ‘Accept’ button of annunciator in case of all the panels against
this specification.

5.8.4.3 D.C. Fail alarm scheme;


A relay for monitoring the Trip Circuit D.C. wiring of the control and relay panels
shall be provided. The operation of the DC fail scheme shall be accompanied by
visual (indicating lamp of amber colour on the concerned panel) and audio (ringing
of common buzzer) annunciation. It shall be possible to silence the buzzer by
pressing the 'accept' push button while the lamp shall continue to glow fill the fault
has been attended to & D.C. supply restored. A 'DC fail test' push button will be
provided to test the lamp circuit of the scheme.

5.9 METERING SCHEME :


5.9.1. All indicating and integrating instruments shall be of switch-board type back
connected suitable for flush mounting and provided with dust and vermin proof
cases and finished in egg shell bright black colour and shall be calibrated to read
directly the primary quantities. All fixing screws, nuts and threaded parts shall be
designed to relevant Indian Standards. All the instruments (i.e. Voltmeters,
frequency meters & Wattmeters) shall be in square pattern case and shall conform
to the provisions of the latest edition of IS:1248 & IS:2419 or relevant B.S., I.E.C.
standards. The nominal sizes of these indicating instruments shall be 144 mm2.
Energy meters shall conform to provisions of IS:13779 amended upto date or
relevant I.E.C. standards.

5.9.2 AMMETERS :
Ammeter shall be suitably scaled (additional dials, if any, required to cover all the
taps of the CT's shall be included at the time of tendering ) and provided with a
selector switch facilitating the measurements of phase currents as well as the
unbalance current. The coil of the ammeter shall be rated for 1 Amp. for 66 kV &
220 kV levels . The instruments shall be of moving iron spring controlled type of
industrial grade `A' classification with accuracy class 1.

5.9.3 VOLTMETERS :
Voltmeter shall be suitably scaled and provided with selector switch (wherever
asked for ) to facilitate the measurement of phase-to-phase and phase- to-neutral
voltage of all the three phases one by one. The coil of the voltmeter shall be rated
for 110 volts ( phase-to-phase ) wherever asked with selector switch and 110/√3
volts if asked without selector switch. The instrument shall be of moving iron
spring controlled type of industrial grade `A' classification with accuracy class of 1
and shall conform to IS:1248 or relevant I.E.C. standard.

5.9.4 DIGITAL BUS VOLTAGE AND FREQUENCY METERS :


Digital bus voltage and frequency meters shall be of class 0.5 and shall have
digital display of four & a half(4½) and four (4) digits respectively, with display size
not less than 25 mm (height).

5.9.5 KILO WATT HOUR METERS :


All the 220 kV & 66 kV feeder C & R panels against this specification shall be
provided with Kilo Watt hour meter. The Kilo Watt hour meter shall be of 3

10
element type suitable for use on three phase four wire unbalanced system.
Calibration shall correspond to CT ratio 400/1 A for 220 kV feeder & 300/1A for all
the 66 kV feeder panels. For other C.T. ratios, multiplying factors shall be used
which may be inscribed on the dial plate. The current coil of the instrument shall
be suitable for 1 Amp. CT secondary and voltage coil shall be suitable for 110
Volts (phase to phase).The instrument shall be static type. The accuracy class
should be 1.0 .

5.9.6 MEGAWATT METERS & MEGAVAR METERS:


The 220 kV feeder C&R panels against this specification shall be provided with
export/import type megawatt-meter & mega VAR-meter.The instrument shall be of
two element type suitable for use on three phase & three wire unbalanced system
and shall be scaled with Zero center MW and zero center MVAR (i.e. suitable for
indicating flow of active & reactive power in both the directions) corresponding to
line CT particulars. The current coil of these instruments shall be suitable for 1
Amp. CT secondary & voltage coil shall be rated 110 volts (phase to phase). The
instruments shall be iron cored dynamometer type and calibrated corresponding to
a CT ratio, spare dials shall be provided for remaining ratios of CT's.

5.9.7 FREQUENCY METERS:


Frequency meter shall have a range of 45 to 55 Hz. The instrument shall be of
moving iron spring controlled type of Industrial grade 'A' classification conforming
to relevant IS.

5.10 CONTROL SCHEME:

5.10.1 CONTROL SWITCH FOR CIRCUIT BREAKER :


5.10.1.1 It shall be possible to close various circuit breakers from the control room. For
this purpose control switches having pistol grip type and of the spring return to
neutral position type non lockable handles with alarm cancellation contacts shall
be provided for `OP' of ckt. breakers. These shall be so designed that after
being operated to `close' a circuit breaker, the operation cannot be repeated
until the switch has been turned to a `trip' position making it impossible to
perform two `closing' operations consecutively.
5.10.1.2 The rating of the control switch contacts shall be suitable for the duty imposed
by the closing & opening mechanism of circuit breakers and shall conform to the
recommendations which may be made by the suppliers of circuit breakers. The
moving & fixed contacts shall be of such a form & material as will ensure good
contact and long service under severe operation duty. All contacts shall be
readily renewable.
5.10.1.3 The number of contacts in the control switches shall be decided by the
tenderer in view of various requirements of this specification. Two pairs of
contacts one normally open and one normally closed shall be kept spare. The
total number of contacts proposed to be provided shall be stated in the tender.
5.10.1.4 Safety against inadvertent operation due to light touch in the control switches
shall be ensured.
5.10.2 CONTROL SWITCH FOR ISOLATOR :
It shall be possible to close the 220 kV Isolators from the control room. For this
purpose control switches with pistol grip handles & having no provision for locks
shall be mounted on the 220 kV C&R panels specified herein. The size/colour of

11
the control switch handle meant for isolator will be different so as to be easily
distinguishable from those meant for circuit breaker controls.

5.10.3 MANUAL SYNCHRONIZING ARRANGEMENT :


5.10.3.1 Synchronizing switches shall be provided on each of the 220 kV feeder & bus
coupler panels to facilitate checking of various parameters with the instruments
mounted on the synchronising panel.
5.10.3.2 Suitable interlock shall be provided in the closing circuits of C.B. so that the C.B.
could be closed only after the synchronizing (of the supplies) has been checked.

5.11 COMMUNICATION COMPATIBILTY OF RELAYS

All relays shall conform to the requirements of IS:3231/IEC-60255/IEC 61000 or


other applicable standards. Relays shall be suitable for flush or semi-flush
mounting on the front with connections from the rear. All protective relays shall be
in draw out or plug-in type modular cases with proper testing facilities. Necessary
test plugs/test handles shall be supplied loose and shall be included in Bidder’s
scope of supply.
All main protective relays shall be numerical type and communication protocol
shall be as per IEC 61850. Further, the test levels of EMI as indicated in IEC
61850 shall be applicable to these.
For numerical relays, the scope shall include the following :
a) Necessary software and hardware to up/down load the data to/from the relay
from/to personal computer installed in the substation. However, the supply of PC
is not covered under this clause.
b) The relay shall have suitable communication facility for future connectivity to
SCADA. The relay shall be capable of supporting IEC 61850 protocol (with optical
port).

5.12 TRIP CIRCUIT SUPERVISION RELAY:


The relay shall be capable of monitoring the healthiness of each trip coil and
associated circuit of circuit breaker during "on & off" conditions. The relay shall
have time delay on drop-off of min. 200 milli seconds and shall be provided with
operation indicator.
220 kV circuit breakers being procured are generally equipped with 2 trip coils in
each phase/pole of the breaker. For monitoring of trip circuits, both in `open' &
`close' position of the circuit breaker, 6 Nos. automatic trip circuit supervision
relays (one for each pole and each trip coil) are proposed.
For monitoring of entire trip circuit (from control & relay panel terminal to the trip
coil of circuit breaker) both in `open' & `close' position of the circuit, 2 No.
automatic trip circuit supervision relays are proposed for 66 kV panels.
5.13 D.C. FAIL ALARM RELAY:
A suitable relay for monitoring the Trip Circuit D.C. wiring of the control and relay
panels shall be provided. The relay shall have time delay on drop-off of min. 100
milli seconds and shall be provided with operation indicator.
5.14 VOLTAGE SELECTION SCHEME:
The 220 kV & 66 kV bus PTs exist on all the phases of both the 220 kV & 66 kV
buses at substations having double bus arrangement. Proper voltage selection
scheme shall be provided on panels.

12
5.15 AUTO RECLOSING SCHEME:
5.15.1 The protective scheme shall incorporate the necessary equipment to impart
auto-reclosing impulse to the circuit breaker when it has tripped either due to the
operation of the line protection scheme in the first zone or the accelerated
operation of it with the help of carrier equipment. No auto-reclosing impulse shall
be transmitted in the event of a fault cleared by the IInd & IIIrd zone of line
protection scheme. Auto-reclosing will also be blocked in case the circuit breaker
is tripped manually.
5.15.2 The provision of single & three phase auto-reclosing is to be made on 220 kV
feeder C&R panels.
5.15.3 CHECK SYNCHRONIZING & DEAD LINE CHARGING SCHEME :
Check synchronizing relay and dead line charging equipment shall be provided for
220 kV feeder C&R panels. The check synchronizing relay shall compare the
phase angle & frequency of the `incoming' and `running' supplies and allow the
auto-reclose to take place only if the said parameters are within the permissible
limits. The dead line charging equipment shall ensure auto-reclosing a circuit
breaker on to a `dead' line leaving the checking of synchronism of two supplies to
the other end of it.
Synchronising check relay with necessary auxiliary equipments shall be provided
which shall permit breakers to close after checking the requirements of
synchronising of incoming and running supply. The phase angle setting shall not
exceed 35 degree and have voltage difference setting not exceeding 10%. This
relay shall have a response time of less than 200 milliseconds when the two
system conditions are met within preset limits and with the timer disconnected.
The relay shall have a continuously adjustable time setting range of 0.5-3 secs.
5.15.4 A four position stay-put non-locking type of auto-reclose selector-switch shall be
provided on each of the 220 kV feeder C&R panels and shall have the following
four positions:
a) `Single phase auto' :
In this position, the relay shall allow single shot single pole auto reclosing for
single line to ground fault. For any other fault, the scheme shall allow all the three
poles of the circuit breaker to trip & lock them out.
b) `Single & three phase auto' :
In this position the relay shall allow single shot single pole auto-reclosing for single
line to ground fault and three pole auto-reclosing for other faults such as line to
line, double line to ground and three phase faults.

c) `Three phase auto' :


In this position, the relay shall impart three pole, single shot-reclosing impulse
irrespective of the type of fault.
d) `Non - auto' :
By putting the switch in this position it shall be possible to make the reclosing
scheme totally inactive and all the three poles of the circuit breaker shall trip
irrespective of the nature of a fault.
5.15.5 The reclosing scheme shall automatically reset after any successful reclosure and
shall lock out in case the circuit breaker trips immediately after reclosure. Also the

13
(reclosing) scheme shall not initiate reclosing upon an unsuccessful attempt to
manually close circuit breaker.
5.15.6 There shall be clear target indications for successful & un-successful operation.
5.15.7 The autoreclosing scheme shall have continuously variable dead time setting
range of 0.1-2 secs for single phase reclosing as well as for three phase reclosing.
The scheme shall have continuously variable reclaim time setting range of 5-300
secs.
Note:- The auto reclosing scheme in built with numerical distance protection relays is
acceptable provided it is available in both Main -I and Main-II distance protection
schemes and meets the above specification.

5.16 PROTECTION SCHEME :

5.16.1 PROTECTION SCHEME FOR POWER TRANSFORMERS .

A) TRANSFORMER DIFFERENTIAL PROTECTION :


The relay shall
i) Be triple pole numerical type.
ii) Have 3 instantaneous high set over-current units.
iii) Have second harmonic restraint or other inrush proof feature and be stable
under normal over fluxing condition.
iv) Have fifth harmonic by pass filter or similar other arrangement to prevent
maloperation of the relay under operating conditions.
v) Be suitable for rated current of 1A and include necessary ICTs for ratio &
phase angle correction.
vi) Have operating current setting sufficiently low (15% or less) so as to cover
practically the whole of the transformer against all types of faults.
vii) Have adjustable bias setting range of 20- 50%.
viii) Have maximum operating time of 30 milli seconds at 5 times the rated
current.
ix) Be provided with necessary terminals & links to measure current in
restraining circuits & in the operating circuits of all the phases under load
without making any wiring changes.
x) Cover the lightning arrestors (proposed to be provided very close to the
transformer) in the zone of protection.
xi) The Scheme shall have in-built features of disturbance recorder and event
logger. The scope of the relay shall include necessary software and
hardware to down load the DR & EL data from relay to the PC installed in
S/Stn. However, the supply of PC is not covered under this clause.
For disturbance recorder and event logger features, it shall have 8 analog
and 16 digital channels (out of which at least 8 shall be external digital
inputs). It shall have its own time generator and the clock of the time
generator shall be such that the drift is limited to +0.5 seconds/day, if
allowed to run without synchronization. Further, it shall have facility to
synchronize its time generator from Time Synchronization Equipment
having output of following types.

• Voltage signal: (0-5V continuously settable, with 50m Sec. minimum pulse
duration)

14
• Potential free contact (Minimum pulse duration of 50 m Sec.)
• IRIG-B
• RS232C
The recorder shall give alarm in case of absence of synchronising pulse
within specified time.
a) The disturbance recorder shall meet the following requirements:
• The frequency response shall be 5 Hz on lower side and 250 Hz or better
on upper side.
• Scan rate shall be 1000 Hz/Channel or better.
• Pre–fault time shall not be less than 100 milliseconds and the post fault
time shall not be less than 2 seconds (adjustable). If another system
disturbance occurs during one post-fault run time, the recorder shall also
be able to record the same. However, the total memory of acquisition unit
shall not be less than 5.0 seconds.
b) The event logger shall meet the following requirements:
• The time resolution shall be 1 milli second.
• Cope with up to 40 changes in any one 10 milli seconds interval.
• The date and time should be printed to the nearest 1 milli second followed
by a message describing the point which has operated.
• Events occurring whilst a previous event is in process of being printed are
to be stored to await printing.

B) NON DIRECTIONAL THREE OVER CURRENT+ ONE EARTH FAULT


PROTECTION WITH HIGH SET:
The 3 O/C & 1 E/F elements shall be either independent or composite units. The
relay shall be single pole inverse definite minimum time lag having definite min.
time of 3 secs. at 10 times settings. Over current relay with a setting range of
50%-200% of 1 Amp. supplemented with high set units having a setting range of
500% to 2000% of 1 Amp. shall be provided. Earth fault relay with a setting range
of 20%-80% of 1 Amp. supplemented with high set units having a setting range of
200% to 800% of 1 Amp. shall be provided.
C) RESTRICTED EARTH FAULT PROTECTION :
It shall be single pole type for the clearance of earth faults in the protected zone.
The relay shall be of high impedance type with a suitable setting to cover at least
90% of the winding & shall have a setting range of 10% to 40% of 1 Amp. or
suitable voltage setting. The relay shall be complete with tuned 50 Hz circuit &
stabilizing resistance. The tuned circuit will help reject harmonics produced by CT
saturation and thus make the relay operative for fundamental frequency only. The
stabilizing resistance may appropriately be set to avoid mal-operation under
through fault conditions. The relay shall be numerical type.
D) 8 No. auxiliary relays for various transformer trip functions (Main Buch. Trip,
OLTC Oil Temp. Trip, Winding Temperature Trip, Oil Temp Trip, Pressure Relief
Trip, Surge Relay Trip and two no. spare) shall be provided.
E) OVER FLUXING PROTECTION:
An over fluxing detecting relay for the protection of the transformer against over-
fluxing conditions is proposed to be provided on each of the 220 kV transformer
C&R panels covered by this specification. The relay shall be numerical in design
with adjustable setting so as to avoid its operation on momentary system
disturbances. The relay shall be suitable for 110 Volts. The relay shall have

15
inverse time characteristics, matching with transformer overfluxing withstand
capability curve. The relay shall provide an alarm with v/f setting range of 100% to
130% of rated values and time delay continuously settable from 0.1 to 6 seconds
to draw the operator's attention about the existence of over-fluxing conditions. The
tripping time shall be governed by v/f versus time characteristics to cause tripping
of transformer controlling circuit breaker if the over-fluxing conditions continue to
exist.
Note:- The over fluxing relay in built with the numerical differential protection relay is
acceptable provided it meets the above specification.
F) OVER LOAD ALARM RELAY:
It is proposed to provide an over current (i.e. single phase) relay for initiating an
alarm during transformer overload condition on the T/F C&R panels. The relay
shall have CONTINUOUS VARIABLE setting range of 50-120% of 1Amp. and
shall be supplemented by a continuously variable timer of 1 to 10 seconds. The
relay shall be arranged to sound an alarm when the transformer exceeds the
setting for a given period of time to draw the operator's attention.
Note:- The over load alarm relay in built with the numerical differential protection relay is
acceptable provided it meets the above specification.

5.16.2 PROTECTION SCHEME FOR LINES:

A) MAIN- I NON-SWITCHED DISTANCE PROTECTION [FOR 220 kV LINES] :


The scheme shall :-
i) be numerical & modular in construction. Relay shall have continuous self
monitoring & diagnostic feature.
ii) have high speed non-switched distance relays for three phase systems to
clear all type of line faults within the set reach of the relay.
iii) It should cover at least line sections completely with 20% in hand margin.
iv) measure all type of faults without the need to switch the measuring
elements to the faulty phase or phases. Zone switching to extend the
reach of the measuring elements is not allowed. The reach of each zone
shall be independently & individually adjustable and shall have setting in
steps of 1%. Memory circuits with defined characteristics shall be provided
in all three phases to ensure correct operation during close-up 3 phase
faults and other adverse conditions.
v) have a max. operating time upto trip impulse to circuit breaker (complete
protn. time including applicable carrier & trip relay time) under source to line
impedance ratios (SIR) under all possible combinations of fault with PT
being used on the line (with all filters included) at 50% of zone-1 reach :
for SIR 0.01-4:as 40 ms at nearest end & 60 ms at other end of line.
for SIR 4-15 :as 45 ms at nearest end & 65 ms at other end of line.
(carrier transmission time is taken as 20 ms provided that any reduction in
carrier time shall be directly reflected as reduction in maximum operating
time).
vi) have stepped time-distance characteristics and shall have at least two
directional and one non-directional independently variable time graded
distance protection zones to cover two adjacent line sections.
vii) The relay shall have mho or quadrilateral or other suitably shaped
characteristics for zone-1,2,3. The relay shall have an adjustable

16
characteristics angle setting range of 30 - 85 degree or shall have
independent resistance(R) & reactance(X) setting..
viii) ensure that this long coverage is consistent with limitations imposed by
heavy loading and sound phase component of fault current. If the
characteristics of starting relays are such that it cannot pick-up because of
very low infeed, under-voltage relays may also be used as supplementary
relays.
ix) have two independent continuously variable time setting range of 0-3
seconds for zone-2 and 0-5 seconds for zone-3.
x) have a maximum resetting time of less than 35 milli-seconds.
xi) have facilities for offset features with adjustable 10-20% of Zone-3 setting.
xii) have residual compensation variable from 30-150%.
xiii) operate instantaneously when circuit breaker is closed to zero-volt 3 phase
fault.
xiv) be suitable for single & three phase tripping.
xv) have a continuous current rating of two times of rated current. The voltage
circuit shall be capable of operation at 1.2 times rated voltage. The relay
shall also be capable of carrying a high short time current of 80 times rated
current without damage for a period of 1 sec.
xvi) be selective between internal and external faults.
xvii) have adequate contacts to meet the complete scheme requirements & if
required incorporate three separate high speed self reset trip relays for
single phase faults and a fourth high speed trip relay for multi-phase faults.
xviii) have suitable number of potential free contacts. Multiplication relays, if
required, shall be provided for Carrier aided features, Auto reclosing, Event
Logger, Disturbance recorder & Data acquisition system.
xix) include power swing blocking protection which shall
a1) be of triple pole type
a2) have suitable setting range to encircle the distance protection described
above.
a3) have a continuously adjustable time delay on pick up of setting range 0-2
seconds.
a4) block tripping during power swing conditions.
a5) be of numerical type
xx) include fuse failure protection which shall
a1) monitor all the three fuses of PTs/CVTs and associated cable against
open circuit.
a2) inhibit trip circuits on operation and initiate annunciation.
a3) remain inoperative for system earth faults.
a4) be of numerical type.
xxi) be wired for carrier inter-tripping (PUR/POR) & carrier blocking features
selectable at site.
xxii) be suitable for 1 Amp. rated CT secondary, 110V (phase to phase ) VT
supply and 220 V DC supply. Mode of conversation of DC supply from 220
V DC to the voltage level required for their scheme may be mentioned in
detail. Requirement of CTs & VTs for the satisfactory working of the
scheme may also be indicated in the tender.
xxiii) The relay shall be suitable for series compensated line and must have a
current reversal guard feature.

17
xxiv) The Scheme shall have in-built features of broken conductor detection,
distance to fault locator, disturbance recorder and event logger. The scope
of the relay shall include necessary software and hardware to down load
the DR & EL data from relay to the PC installed in S/Stn. However, the
supply of PC is not covered under this clause.
For disturbance recorder and event logger features, it shall have 8 analog
and 32 digital channels (out of which at least 16 shall be external digital
inputs). It shall have its own time generator and the clock of the time
generator shall be such that the drift is limited to +0.5 seconds/day, if
allowed to run without synchronization. Further, it shall have facility to
synchronize its time generator from Time Synchronization Equipment
having output of following types.

• Voltage signal: (0-5V continuously settable, with 50m Sec. minimum pulse
duration)
• Potential free contact (Minimum pulse duration of 50 m Sec.)
• IRIG-B
• RS232C
The recorder shall give alarm in case of absence of synchronising pulse
within specified time.
a) The disturbance recorder shall meet the following requirements:
• The frequency response shall be 5 Hz on lower side and 250 Hz or better
on upper side.
• Scan rate shall be 1000 Hz/Channel or better.
• Pre–fault time shall not be less than 100 milliseconds and the post fault
time shall not be less than 2 seconds (adjustable). If another system
disturbance occurs during one post-fault run time, the recorder shall also
be able to record the same. However, the total memory of acquisition unit
shall not be less than 5.0 seconds.
b) The event logger shall meet the following requirements:
• The time resolution shall be 1 milli second.
• Cope with up to 40 changes in any one 10 milli seconds interval.
• The date and time should be printed to the nearest 1 milli second followed
by a message describing the point which has operated.
• Events occurring whilst a previous event is in process of being printed are
to be stored to await printing. Over 100 such events must be stored.
c) The distance to fault locator shall meet the following requirements:
• Be On-Line type and suitable for breaker operating time of 2 cycles.
• The display shall be directly in percent of line length or kilometers without
requiring any further calculations.
• Shall have an accuracy of 3% or better for the typical conditions defined for
operating timings measurement of distance relays. The above accuracy
should not be impaired by presence of remote end infeed, predominant
D.C. component in fault current, high fault arc resistance, severe CVT
transients.
• Shall have parallel line mutual zero sequence compensation feature.

18
B) MAIN -II NON-SWITCHED DISTANCE PROTECTION [FOR 220 kV LINES] :
For Main-II distance protection, scheme shall be numerical and shall have same
features as that of Main-I protection against sub para 5.14.2.(A) above but with
different measuring technique.

C) NON-SWITCHED DISTANCE PROTECTION SCHEME [FOR 66 kV LINES] :


The main protection scheme for these lines will be distance scheme working
on definite distance measuring principle both for phase & earth faults. The scheme
shall :-
i) be numerical & modular in construction. Relay shall have continuous self
monitoring & diagnostic feature.
ii) have high speed non-switched distance relays for three phase systems to
clear all type of line faults within the set reach of the relay.
iii) It should cover at least line sections completely with 20% in hand margin.
iv) measure all type of faults without the need to switch the measuring
elements to the faulty phase or phases. Zone switching to extend the
reach of the measuring elements is not allowed. The reach of each zone
shall be independently & individually adjustable and shall have setting in
steps of 1%. Memory circuits with defined characteristics shall be provided
in all three phases to ensure correct operation during close-up 3 phase
faults and other adverse conditions.
v) have a max. operating time upto trip impulse to circuit breaker (complete
protn. time including trip relay time) under source to line impedance ratios
(SIR) :0.01-4 as 50ms under all possible combinations of fault at 50% of
zone-1 reach.
vi) have stepped time-distance characteristics and shall have at least two
directional and one non-directional independently variable time graded
distance protection zones to cover two adjacent line sections.
vii) The relay shall have mho or quadrilateral or other suitably shaped
characteristics for zone-1,2,3. The relay shall have an adjustable
characteristics angle setting range of 30 - 85 degree or shall have
independent resistance(R) & reactance(X) setting..
viii) ensure that this long coverage is consistent with limitations imposed by
heavy loading and sound phase component of fault current. If the
characteristics of starting relays are such that it cannot pick-up because of
very low infeed, under-voltage relays may also be used as supplementary
relays.
ix) have two independent continuously variable time setting range of 0-3
seconds for zone-2 and 0-5 seconds for zone-3.
x) have a maximum resetting time of less than 55 milli-seconds (including the
resetting time of trip relays).
xi) have facilities for offset features with adjustable 10-20% of Zone-3 setting.
xii) For correct measurement of earth faults necessary equipment for residual
compensation shall be included. It shall have residual compensation
variable from 30-150%.
xiii) operate instantaneously when circuit breaker is closed to zero-volt 3 phase
fault.
xiv) be suitable for three phase tripping.
xv) have a continuous current rating of two times of rated current. The voltage
circuit shall be capable of operation at 1.2 times rated voltage. The relay

19
shall also be capable of carrying a high short time current of 80 times rated
current without damage for a period of 1 sec.
xvi) have adequate contacts to meet the complete scheme requirements & if
required incorporate separate high speed self reset trip relays.
xvii) have suitable number of potential free contacts. Multiplication relays, if
required, shall be provided for Event Logger, Disturbance recorder & Data
acquisition system.
xviii) include power swing blocking protection which shall
a1) be of triple pole type
a2) have suitable setting range to encircle the distance protection described
above.
a3) have a continuously adjustable time delay on pick up of setting range 0-2
seconds.
a4) block tripping during power swing conditions.
a5) be of numerical type
xix) include fuse failure protection which shall
a1) monitor all the three fuses of PTs/CVTs and associated cable against
open circuit.
a2) inhibit trip circuits on operation and initiate annunciation.
a3) remain inoperative for system earth faults.
a4) be of numerical type.
xx) be suitable for 1 Amp. rated CT secondary, 110V (phase to phase ) VT
supply and 220 V DC supply. Mode of conversation of DC supply from 220
V DC to the voltage level required for their scheme may be mentioned in
detail. Requirement of CTs & VTs for the satisfactory working of the
scheme may also be indicated in the tender.
xxi) The Scheme shall have in-built features of broken conductor detection,
distance to fault locator, disturbance recorder and event logger. The scope
of the relay shall include necessary software and hardware to down load
the DR & EL data from relay to the PC installed in S/Stn. However, the
supply of PC is not covered under this clause.
D) THREE OVER CURRENT+ ONE EARTH FAULT PROTECTION:
The 3 O/C & 1 E/F elements shall be either independent or composite units. It
shall include VT fuse failure relays for alarm purposes.
DIRECTIONAL OVER CURRENT RELAY :
The relay shall
i) have IDMTL characteristic with a definite minimum time of 3.0 seconds at
10 times setting.
ii) have a variable setting range of 50-200% of 1 Amp.
iii) have a characteristic angle of 45 degree lead.
iv) include operatio indicator.
v) be suitable for 110V VT secondary.
DIRECTIONAL EARTH FAULT RELAY:
The relay shall
i) have IDMTL characteristic with a definite minimum time of 3.0 seconds at
10 times setting.
ii) have a variable setting range of 20-80% of 1 Amp.
iii) have a characteristic angle of 45 degree lag.
iv) include operation indicator.

20
v) be suitable for connection across open delta formed by 110/√3 volt rated
secondary of VT.
E) FEEDER OVER LOAD ALARM RELAY :
It is proposed to provide a single pole over current relay for the purpose of
monitoring the load flow on feeders to sound an alarm whenever load flow in the
line exceeds the setting for a given period of time to draw the operator's attention.
The relay shall have CONTINUOUS VARIABLE setting range of 50-200% of 1
Amp. and shall be supplemented by a continuously variable timer of 1 to 10
seconds.
Note:- The Feeder over Load Alarm Relay in built with numerical distance
protection relay is acceptable provided it meets the above specification.

5.16.3 PROTECTION SCHEME FOR BUS COUPLER:


NON DIRECTIONAL THREE OVER CURRENT+ ONE EARTH FAULT
PROTECTION WITH HIGH SET:
The 3 O/C & 1 E/F elements shall be either independent or composite units. The
relay shall be single pole inverse definite minimum time lag having definite min.
time of 3 secs. at 10 times settings. Over current relay with a setting range of
50%-200% of 1 Amp. supplemented with high set units having a setting range of
500% to 2000% of 1 Amp. shall be provided. Earth fault relay with a setting
range of 20%-80% of 1 Amp. supplemented with high set units having a setting
range of 200% to 800% of 1 Amp. shall be provided.
5.16.4 BUSBAR PROTECTION SCHEME :
One bus bar protection scheme shall be provided for each main bus for 220kV
having double bus arrangement. Bus bar protection scheme shall :-
i. be of numerical, low impedance type and modular in construction. The
scheme shall be complete in all respects to cater the need of at-least 14
feeders/ bays.
ii. have maximum operating time upto trip impulse to trip relay for all types of
faults of 15 milli seconds at 5 times setting value.
iii. operate selectively for each bus bar.
iv. give hundred percent security upto 40 kA fault level.
v. incorporate check feature.
vi. incorporate continuous supervision for CT secondaries against any possible
open circuit and if it occurs, shall tender the relevant zone of protection
inoperative and initiate an alarm.
vii. not give false operation during normal load flow in bus bars.
viii. incorporate clear zone indication.
ix. be of phase segregated, triple pole type and provide independent zones of
protection for each bus.
x. include necessary auxiliary relays for each circuit as required for the
scheme.
xi. shall be biased differential type and shall have operate and restraint
characteristics.
xii. be transient free in operation.
xiii include continuous DC supply supervision for alarm and trip circuits
separately and provide separately non-trip alarm for B/B protection alarm
circuit DC fail & B/B protection trip circuit DC fail conditions.
xiv. shall include necessary multitap auxiliary CTs for each bay.

21
xv. include protection 'in/out' switch for each zone.
xvi. include necessary CT switching relays. Also provide indication to monitor
`Operate' status of the CT switching relays with a common push button and
shall have CT selection incomplete alarm with adequate time delay when
proper CT switching has not taken place.
xvii. bus bar protection scheme should cover the blind zone on account of single
CT on B/C circuit.
xviii. Include high speed tripping relays for each bay..
xix. The Scheme shall have in-built features of disturbance recorder and event
logger. The scope of the relay shall include necessary software and
hardware to down load the DR & EL data from relay to the PC installed in
S/Stn. However, the supply of PC is not covered under this clause..

5.16.5 LOCAL BREAKER BACK UP PROTECTION SCHEME:


The relay shall be provided to take care of stuck breaker conditions. The local
breaker back up protection scheme will under such conditions, immediately after
the operation of primary / back up protection, transmit the tripping impulse to all
the circuit breakers connected to that bus zone of which the circuit breaker forms
part. The scheme shall be supplemented with a timer suitable for station DC
supply and continuously adjustable setting of .05 to .5 sec. on pick up.
The relay shall :
i) be triple pole type with a setting range of 20% -80% of rated current.
ii) have operating time of not more than 15 m-sec.
iii) have a resetting time of not more than 15 m-sec.
iv) be of numerical type.
v) have a continuous thermal with stand of two times rated current
irrespective of setting.
Note:- The LBB protection scheme in built with numerical busbar protection
scheme is acceptable provided it meets the above specification.

5.16.6 PROTECTION SCHEME FOR CAPACITOR C&R PANELS:


A) NON DIRECTIONAL THREE OVER CURRENT+ ONE EARTH FAULT
PROTECTION WITH HIGH SET:
The 3 O/C & 1 E/F elements shall be either independent or composite units. The
relay shall be single pole inverse definite minimum time lag having definite min.
time of 3 secs. at 10 times settings. Over current relay with a setting range of
50%-200% of 1 Amp. supplemented with high set units having a setting range of
500% to 2000% of 1 Amp. shall be provided. Earth fault relay with a setting
range of 20%-80% of 1 Amp. supplemented with high set units having a setting
range of 200% to 800% of 1 Amp. shall be provided.
B) TIME DELAY RELAY:-
A time delay relay must be included with adjustable setting range of 0-5 minutes
to provide a time lag before which the bank shall not be again switched on (to
avoid closing of the circuit breaker on a trapped charge).
C) UNDER VOLTAGE PROTECTION :-
One inverse time under voltage relay having setting range of 50% to 90% of
110/√3 volt (Phase-to-neutral) shall be provided to disconnect the capacitor bank
under low voltage conditions.

22
D) OVER VOLTAGE PROTECTION :-
One inverse time over voltage relay suitable for operation with 110/√3 volt AC
supply (Phase to neutral) with setting range of 100% to 130% shall be provided.
E) UNBALANCE PROTECTION :-
The unbalance protection shall be provided through current unbalance relay
connected to the NCT in neutral of capacitor bank connected in double star. Two
such relays, one each for alarm & trip are required. The setting of the relay shall
be 10% to 40% of the CT secondary (i.e. 1A for 66 kV voltage levels) followed by
a time delay through a timer of 0.1 sec. for transient free operation of the
protection.
The relay should not operate for healthy state spill current in neutral. Number of
units of failure on which alarm shall come and tripping is initiated, be clearly
mentioned for proper setting of the relays.

5.16.7 TRIPPING RELAY:


High speed tripping relay shall
i) be instantaneous ( operating time not to exceed 10 milli-seconds.)
ii) reset within 20 milli-seconds.
iii) Be 220 Volt DC operated.
iv) Have adequate contacts to meet the scheme requirement
v) Be provided with operation indicators for each element/coil.

5.17 SYNCHRONISING PANEL:


5.17.1 The synchronising instruments shall be mounted on a swing type synchronising
panel and shall be hinged at one end of 220 kV Duplex board. The synchronising
panel shall have suitable dimensions to avoid congestion of wiring and
equipments mounted there. The panel shall be equipped with the following
equipments:
-1 No.selector switch for synchronising with check-off-without check.
-2 No. voltmeters.
-2 No. frequency meters
-1 No. synchroscopoe
-1 No. synchroscope cut off switch
-2 No. lamps for bright lamp synchronisation
-1 No. Green lamp for synchronising in limit indication
-1 No. reversing voltage transformer for bright lamp synchronisation
-1 No. lamp for synchronisation by pass.
5.17.2 Suitable auxiliary voltage transformers wherever necessary shall also be provided
for synchronising condition.
5.17.3 Synchronising check relay with necessary auxiliary equipments shall be provided
which shall permit breakers to close after checking the requirements of
synchronising of incoming and running supply. The phase angle setting shall not
exceed 35 degree and have voltage difference setting not exceeding 10%. This
relay shall have a response time of less than 200 milliseconds when the two
system conditions are met within preset limits and with the timer disconnected.
The relay shall have a continuously adjustable time setting range of 0.5-3 secs.
A guard relay shall be provided to prevent the closing attempt by means of
synchronising check relay when control switch is kept in closed position long
before the two systems are in synchronism

23
5.18. RELAY SETTINGS :
The successful bidder will be responsible for calculating the relay setting of the
protection schemes included in the bid and obtain HVPN's M&P wing clearance
before their adoption. Any data\ information in regard to the power system
required by the supplier for this purpose shall be supplied by HVPN.
5.19 TIME SYNCHRONISATION EQUIPMENT
i) The Time synchronisation equipment shall receive the co-ordinated
Universal Time (UTC) transmitted through Geo Positioning Satellite System
(GPS) and synchronise equipments to the Indian Standard Time in a substation.
ii) Time synchronisation equipment shall include antenna, all special cables and
processing equipment etc.
iii) It shall be compatible for synchronisation of Event Loggers, Disturbance
recorders and SCADA at a substation through individual port or through Ethernet
realised through optic fibre bus.
iv) The synchronisation equipment shall have 2 micro second accuracy. Equipment
shall give real time corresponding to IST (taking into consideration all factors like
voltage, & temperature variations, propagation & processing delays etc).
v) Equipment shall meet the requirement of IEC 60255 for storage & operation.
vi) The system shall be able to track the satellites to ensure no interruption of
synchronisation signal.
vii) The output signal from each port shall be programmable at site for either one
hour, half hour, minute or second pulse, as per requirement.
viii) The equipment offered shall have six (6) output ports. Various combinations of
output ports shall be selected by the customer, during detailed engineering, from
the following :
· Voltage signal : Normally 0-5V with 50 milli Seconds minimum pulse duration. In
case any other voltage signal required, it shall be decided during detailed
engineering.
· Potential free contact (Minimum pulse duration of 50 milli Seconds.)
· IRIG-B
· RS232C
ix) The equipment shall have a periodic time correction facility of one second
periodicity.
x) Time synchronisation equipment shall be suitable to operate from 220V DC DC
as available at Substation.
xi) Equipment shall have real time digital display in hour, minute, second (24 hour
mode) & have a separate time display unit to be mounted on the top of control
panels having display size of approx. 100 mm height.
5.20. SMALL WIRING :
a) All wiring shall be of switch board type consisting of stranded /single
annealed copper conductor insulated with polyvinyl chloride insulation
suitable for 650 volts service and in accordance with IS : 694.
b) The wiring of the following circuits shall not be less than the size specified
below:
CTs, PTs & CVTs circuits : 2.5 mm2
Control, alarm & supervision circuits etc. : 1.5 mm2

24
c) All wires will be continuous from one terminal to the other and also will have
no tee - junction enroute. The connections shall be securely made with the
help of connecting lugs to ensure non-oxidation of the bare copper
conductor. At the terminal connections, washers shall be interposed
between stud type terminals and holding nuts. All holding nuts shall be
secured by locking nuts. The connection studs shall project at least 6 mm
from the lock nut surface.
d) Bus wires shall be fully insulated and run separately. Fuses and links
shall be provided to enable all the circuits in a panel to be isolated from the
bus wire. Wherever practicable, all circuits in which the voltage exceeds
125 volts shall be kept physically separated from the remaining wiring. The
function of each circuit shall be marked on the associated terminal boards.
e) All wiring diagrams for the control and relay boards shall be drawn as
viewed from the back of the cubicle and shall be in accordance with IS:375
or equivalent IEC. Multi core cable tails shall be so bound to its cable that
each wire may be traced without difficulty.
f) All potential bus wiring, non-trip and trip alarm bus wiring, AC & DC control
supply, panel lighting bus wires and such other wiring which runs from
panel to panel within a C&R panel board shall be laid out in gutters and
shall be suitably screened. In case of `simplex' type C&R boards these
common wires will run through bus wire holes.

5.21. TERMINAL BOARDS, TEST BLOCKS & SPARE CONTACTS :


a) Terminal block connectors built from cells of moulded dielectric and brass
stud inserts shall be provided for terminating the outgoing ends of the
panel wiring and the corresponding tail ends of control cables. Insulating
barriers shall be provided between adjacent connections. The height of the
barriers and the spacing between terminals shall be such as to give
adequate protection while allowing easy access to terminals. Provision shall
be made on each pillar for holding 10% extra connectors.
b) The terminal blocks shall be suitable for 650 Volts service and for
connection with both copper and aluminum wires.
c) Terminal boards shall be mounted in such a manner as to afford easy
access to terminations and to enable ferrule numbers to be read without
difficulty. Wire ends shall be so connected at the terminals that no wire
terminal gets marked due to succeeding connections. Terminal board rows
shall be adequately spaced and shall not be less than 100 mm apart so as
to permit convenient access to wires and terminations. Labels in the form
of engraved plastic plates shall be provided on the fixed portion of terminal
boards. No live metal parts shall be exposed at the back of terminal boards.
d) Switch board type back connected test block with contacts shall be provided
with links or other devices for shorting terminals of CT leads before
interrupting the normal circuit for injection from an external source or for
inserting testing instruments in the circuit without causing open circuit of the
CT. The potential testing studs shall preferably be housed in narrow
recesses of the block, wherever required, shall be placed as close to the
equipments as possible. Test blocks shall be of flush mounting pattern and
the number of test blocks being provided on each control and relay panel
shall be stated in the tender.

25
e) The purpose of all the relays (including the auxiliary relays) switches, lamps
& push buttons etc. is required to be indicated just below the respective
equipment through engraving or painting.
f) Spare contacts of relays are required to be brought on T.B's and shall be
indicated on the drawings.

5.22. BUS WIRES :


The VT, DC, AC, trip alarm , non-trip alarm & DC fail etc. inter panel bus wire
terminals shall be brought on Bus T.B's as well as on T.B's so that any panel
specified herein can be used separately at the Substation specified in this
specification. The said bus wires for the panels specified in case of existing
substations shall be matched with the bus wires of the C&R panels already
available at site, the drawing for matching purposes for which shall be supplied to
the successful bidder. The bus wire terminals shall be indicated on the panel
schematic drawings as well. The bus wire diagram shall also be supplied
alongwith the schematic drawings for each panel.

5.23. FERRULES :
Wire No. shall be indicated on panel schematic and wiring diagrams and
accordingly engraved ferrules with the same numbers and letters as indicated in
the said diagrams shall be provided on the terminal ends of all wires for easy
identification of circuits for inspection and maintenance. Ferrules shall be of strong
& flexible insulating material with glossy finish to prevent adhesion. These shall be
engraved and marked clearly and shall not be effected by dampness. Ferrule
numbering shall be in accordance with IS:375. The same ferrule number shall not
be used on wires in different circuits on a panel. At those points of interconnection
between the wiring carried for equipments of different suppliers where a change of
number cannot be avoided double ferrules shall be provided on each wire with the
appropriate connection diagram of the equipment.

5.24. SPACE HEATERS :


Tubular space heaters suitable for connection to the single phase 220 Volts AC
supply complete with switches located at convenient positions shall be provided at
the bottom of each control and relay panel to prevent condensation of moisture.
The watt loss per unit surface of heater shall be low enough to keep surface
temperature well below visible heat.

5.25. ILLUMINATION :
The C&R panel shall be provided with 220/240 Volts AC interior lighting. The
lamp shall be free from hand shadows. A door operated button switch shall be
provided in each simplex panel. Each simplex panel shall be provided with one
no. illumination lamp with door switch.

5.26 POWER SOCKET :


Single phase 240 volt AC, 5/15A power socket with power on/off switch shall be
provided in each simplex panel.

5.27 SAFETY EARTHING :


Earthing of current free metallic parts or metallic bodies of the equipment mounted
on the switch boards shall be done with bare copper conductor. Copper bus of

26
size 25 mm x 6 mm extending through entire length of a control and relay board
shall be provided. The earthing conductor shall be connected by Rose Courtney
terminals and clamp junctions.
The neutral point of star connected secondary windings of instrument transformers
and one corner of the open delta connected LV side of potential transformer, if
used shall be similarly earthed with the main earth bar of the switch board earthing
system. Multiple earthing of any instrument transformer shall be avoided.
An electrostatic discharge point shall be provided in each panel connected to
earth bus via 1 Mega Ohm resistor.

5.28. NAME PLATE :


An easily accessible engraved or painted panel name plate shall be provided
inside each panel. It must include G.A. drawing No., purchase order No., Bidder's
reference No., name of s/stn. as per purchase order and name of circuit. In
addition to this, an engraved plate indicating the purchase order no. alongwith
name of s/stn. is required to be affixed on the panel at appropriate height so that it
is readable while standing in front of the panel. These are required to be indicated
on the G.A. drawings also.
An engraved label indicating the purpose of all the relays & switches shall also be
provided.

5.29 PANEL DETAILS:


The mountings on various 220 kV & 66kV C&R panels against various
Substations specified herein shall be as under. The bidders shall give the details
of the various panel mountings in the same serial as specified herein as under for
the convenience of checking of the same w.r.t. the provision in the specification.
Any trip relay, auxiliary relay, timers, contact multiplication relay, ICT, IVT & test
block etc. required for the completeness of the scheme shall be added by the
Bidder as per scheme requirements and no cost addition on these accounts shall
be considered at a later date.
The following is the general criteria for the selection of the equipments to be
provided in each type of panel.

5.29.1 MOUNTING DETAILS:

(A) 220 kV C&R PANEL BOARD COMPRISING OF THE FOLLOWING:

(i) 220 kV Transformer C&R Panels for 100 MVA, 220/66 kV Transformers.
Each of these panels will be equipped with the followings:-
Control panel:
1. Black PVC circuit label. 1
2. Mimic diagram section. 1
3. Indication lamps for CB open, close, spring charge and auto 4
trip indications.
4. Semaphore indicators for isolator & Earth Switch position indication. 5
5. Semaphore indicator for CB position indication. 1
6. Ammeter suitably scaled. 1
7. Ammeter selector switch. 1
8. Spring return to neutral CB control switch with sequence 1
device, lost motion device and 2 pairs of bell alarm contacts.

27
9. Spring return to neutral isolator & Earth Switch control switches. 4
10. 24 ways static facia annunciator complete with accept, 1
reset and lamps test push buttons.
11. Trip circuit supervision relays. 6
12. AC/DC changeover relay. 1
13. Set of Trip Ckt. DC supply supervision scheme including one No. 1
push button each for DC fail test and DC fail accept and one
No. indicating lamp (amber) for DC fail visual indication.
To be mounted inside :-
1. Set of illumination lamps with on/off switches. 1
2. Space heater with switch. 1
3. Power socket with on/off switch. 1
4. Set of corridor illumination lamps with door switches at both ends
of the corridor. 1

Relay Panel :-
1. Black PVC circuit label. 1
2. Transformer differential relay. 1
3. REF relay. 1
4. Single pole non-directional over current relay 3
with highset.
5. Transformer over load alarm relay. 1
6. Over fluxing relay. 1
7. High speed tripping relay. 1
8. Aux. relay for Transformer buch., OLTC oil temp., winding 8
temp., oil temp., pressure relief, surge relay trip
functions and 2 nos. spare.
9. Voltage selection relay 1
10. Set of relays for local breaker back up protection. 1
11. High speed tripping relay for bus bar protection. 1
To be mounted Inside :-
1. Set of illumination lamps with on/off switches. 1
2. Space heater with switch. 1
3. Power socket with on/off switch. 1

(ii) 220 kV Feeder C&R Panels for 220kV Lines

Each of these panels shall be equipped with the followings :

Control panel:
1. Black PVC circuit label 1
2. Mimic diagram section. 1
3. Indicating lamps for CB open, close, spring charge 4
and auto trip indications.
4. Indication lamp for carrier healthy indication. 2
5. Semaphore indicators for isolators position indication. 3
6. Semaphore indicator for earth switch position indication. 4
7. Semaphore indicator for CB position indication. 1
8. Ammeter suitably scaled. 1
9. Ammeter selector switch. 1

28
10. Voltmeter suitably scaled. 1
11. Voltmeter selector switch. 1
12. 3 phase, 3 wire, 2 element, dynamometer MW meter 1
suitably scaled.
13. 3 phase, 3 wire, 2 element, dynamometer MVAR meter 1
suitably scaled.
14. 3 phase, 4 wire, 3 element static kWh meter, one for import 2
and one for export energy measurement.
15. 3 phase, 4 wire test terminal block for the above. 1
16. Spring return to neutral CB control switch with sequence 1
device, lost motion device and 2 pairs of bell alarm contacts.
17. Spring return to neutral isolator & Earth Switch control switches. 6
18. Carrier in/out switches. 2
19. Synchronizing switch. 1
20. Push button for dead bus closing. 1
21. 24 way static facia annunciator complete with accept, 1
reset and lamps test push buttons.
22. Trip circuit supervision relays. 6
23. AC/DC changeover relay. 1
24. Set of Trip Ckt. DC supply supervision scheme including one No. 1
push button each for DC fail test and DC fail accept and one
No. indicating lamp (amber) for DC fail visual indication.
To be mounted inside :-
1. Set of cubicle illumination lamps with on/off switches. 1
2. Space heater with switch. 1
3. Power socket with on/off switch. 1
4. Set of corridor illumination lamps with door
switches at both ends of the corridor 1

Relay Panel:
1. Black PVC circuit label. 1
2. Numerical Distance scheme, non-switched with carrier 1
inter-tripping/carrier blocking (selectable at site),
out of step blocking, single & three phase tripping
as Main-I protection including SOTF, VT fuse failure
protection, test blocks, aux. relays & tripping relays.
3. Numerical Distance scheme, non-switched with carrier 1
inter-tripping, out of step blocking, single & 3 phase
tripping as Main-II protection including SOTF, VT fuse
failure protection, test blocks, aux. relays & tripping relays.
4. Single and three-phase auto reclosing scheme including 1
aux. relays & tripping relays.
5. Auto reclose selector switch. 1
6. Check synchronizing & dead line charging relay. 1
7. Set of voltage selection relay 1
8. Carrier receive aux. relays. 2
9. Carrier healthy aux. relays. 2
10. Aux. relay to pole discrepancy. 1
11. Over load alarm relay. 1
12. LBB protection scheme. 1

29
13. High speed trip relay for bus bar protection 1
14. Single pole directional over current relay. 2
15. Single pole directional earth fault relay. 1
To be mounted inside :-
1. Set of cubicle illumination lamps with on/off switches. 1
2. Space heater with switch. 1
3. Power socket with on/off switch. 1
NOTE:- The protection scheme and metering shall be fed from bus PTs.

iii) 220 KV BUS COUPLER CUM BUS-BAR PROTECTION C&R PANEL.


The panel shall be equipped with the following:
Control panel:

1. Black PVC circuit label. 1


2. Mimic diagram section 1
3. Indicating lamps for CB open , close, spring charge and auto trip 4
indications
4. Semaphore indicators for isolator & Earth Switch position 6
iindication and for Bus Earth Switch
5. Semaphore indicator for breaker position indication 1
6. Ammeter suitably scaled 1
7. Ammeter selector switch 1
8. Voltmeter suitably scaled 2
9. Voltmeter selector switch 2
10. Frequency meters 2
11. Spring return to neutral CB Control Switch with sequence device, 1
lost motion device and 2 pairs of bell alarm contacts
12. Spring return to neutral isolator & Earth Switch control switch 4
13. Synchronising selector switch along with push button for dead 1
Bus closing.
14. 24 ways static facia annunciator complete with accept, reset and 1
lamps test push buttons.
15. Trip circuit supervision relays 6
16. AC/ DC changeover relay 1
17. Set of Trip Ckt. DC supply supervision scheme including one No. 1
push button each for DC fail test and DC fail accept and one No.
indicating
lamp (amber) for DC fail visual indication

30
18. Digital frequency meter 1
19. Digital volt meter 1
20. Bus 1/2 voltage selector switch for above two items 1
To be mounted inside
1. Set of cubicle illumination lamps with on/off switches 1
2. Space heater with switch 1
3. Power socket with on/off switch 1
4. AC buzzer for DC fail alarm 1
5. DC bell for trip alarm 1
6. DC hooter for non trip alarm 1
7. Set of corridor illumination lamps with door switches at both 1
ends of the corridor.
Relay Panel:
1. Black PVC circuit label 1
2. Triple pole combined 2 O/C & 1 E/F relay 1
3. Set of high speed trip relay 1
4. LBB protection scheme 1
5. High speed trip relay for bus bar protection 1
6. Bus bar protection scheme as per the detail given at para 1
5.16.4

To be mounted inside:
1. Set of cubicle illumination lamps with on/ off switches 1
2. Space heater with switch 1
3. Power socket with on/ off switches 1

iv) SYNCHRONISING PANEL:

The swing door type synchronising panel shall be equipped as detailed at para
5.17 above.

31
(B) 66 kV C&R panel Board Comprising of the following:-

(i) 66 kV Transformer (incoming) C&R panels for 100 MVA, 220/66 kV


Transformers.
Each of these panels shall be equipped with the followings :-

On the front:
1. Black PVC circuit label. 1
2. Mimic diagram. 1
3. Indication lamps for CB open, close & auto trip indications. 3
4. Spring charge indication lamp. 1
5. Semaphore indicators for isolator position indication. 2
6. Semaphore indicator for CB position indication. 1
7. Voltmeter (to be fed from CVT for AVR) 1
8. Ammeter suitably scaled. 1
9. Ammeter selector switch. 1
10. Spring return to neutral CB control switch with sequence 1
device, lost motion device & two pairs of bell alarm contracts.
11. 10 Way static alarm facia complete including accept, reset & 1
lamp test push buttons.
12. Trip circuit supervision relays. 2
13. Triple pole non directional combined 2 over current and 1
1earth fault relay.
14. High speed trip relay. 1
15. AC/DC change over relay. 1
16. REF relay . 1
17. Set of Trip Ckt. DC supply supervision scheme including one No. 1
push button each for DC fail test and DC fail accept and one
No. indicating lamp (amber) for DC fail visual indication.

To be mounted inside :-
1. Illumination lamp with door switch. 1
2. Space heater with switch. 1
3. Power socket with on/off switch. 1

6.0 TESTS:
6.1 TYPE TESTS:
The equipment should be offered type test. Test reports should not more then
seven years old reckoned from date of bid opening in respect of all the tests
carried out in accredited laboratories (based on ISO/IEC) by a reputed accreditatic
body or witnessed by HVPN or another electric power utility and be submitted by
the successful bidder to HVPNL for approval as schedule given in Bar Chart.
a) Insulation tests as per IEC 60255-5
b) High frequency disturbance test as per IEC 60255-4 (Appendix -E) -Class III
(not applicable for electromechanical relays)
c) Fast transient test as per IEC 1000-4, Level III(not applicable for
electromechanical relays)
d) Relay characteristics, performance and accuracy test as per IEC 60255.
e) Tests for thermal and mechanical requirements as per IEC 60255-6
f) Tests for rated burden as per IEC 60255-6

32
g) Contact performance test as per IEC 60255-0-20
h) Conformance tests as per IEC 61850

6.2 ROUTINE TESTS:


As per quality assurance program (QAP).

6.3 ACCEPTANCE TESTS:


Following tests shall be carried out at the manufacturer’s works after complete
assembly in presence of HVPNL representative, unless dispensed with in writing
by the HVPNL:-
i) Checking wiring of circuits and their continuity.
ii) One minute high voltage test.
iii) Insulation resistance of complete wiring, circuit by circuit with all equipment
mounted on panel.
iv) Checking the operation of protection schemes.

7.0 DOCUMENTATION:
7.1 The successful bidder shall submit four sets of G.A. and schematic drawings for
HVPNL’s approval incorporating following details also.
a) Schematic drawings of breakers are to be incorporated in the panel schematic
drawings.
b) Trip details of transformer are to be incorporated in the panel schematic drawings.
After receipt of HVPNL’s approval, the bidder shall submit final drawings for each
circuit of the following drawings:-
i) Boardwise arrangement drawing (applicable for the panel board at a
Substation having more than one panel).
ii) G.A.drawing alongwith G.A. legend and foundation details.
iii) Schematic drawings alongwith legend & internal wiring details of main
relays like transformer differential relay, REF relay, local breaker back up
schemes, distance protection scheme, bus-bar protection scheme, voltage
selection scheme etc.
iv) Equipment-wise & wire-wise wiring diagrams.
Each set of drawings shall be bound separately.
7.2 The bidder shall furnish specified no. of nicely printed and bound volumes of the
instruction manuals in English language of the equipment. The instruction manual
shall contain step by step instructions for all operational & maintenance
requirements for all the protective and aux. relays, switches, instruments etc.
mounted on the panel and shall include the following aspects.
i) Storage for prolonged duration.
ii) Unpacking.
iii) Erection.
iv) Handling at site.
v) Pre commissioning tests.
vi) Operating procedures.
vii) Maintenance procedure.
viii) Precautions to be taken during operation & maintenance work.
ix) Catalogue numbers of all the components liable to be replaced during the
life of the panels.
x) Internal wiring diagrams of all the relays.

33
Each set of instruction manuals shall be bound separately.
NOTE:- One master set for all the substations shall be supplied with in a week of
placement of order to the Design Directorate to facilitate the checking
and approval of drawings.

34
ANNEXURE-A

TRANSMISSION LINE DATA (TENTATIVE)

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Sr. Name of Circuit O.H. Line U.G. Cable
No. Line Conductor size Cable Size in
length Sq. inch ACSR length Sq. mm
In km(approx) copper equivalent in km(approx.) (Al.)
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

35
ANNEXURE-B

LINE PARAMETERS (per UNIT)/100 MVA BASE/100 km

WITH CONDUCTOR SIZE & POWER CAPACITY

Voltag No. Conduct Resistan Reactan Susceptan Resistan Reactan Line


e of or size ce ce ce ce ce Capacit
(kV) Ckt (inch2) R X Y R0 X0 y
. Ω Ω Ω Ω Ω (MW)

220 D/ 0.40 0.0088 0.0443 0.2700 0.05109 0.21666 300


C

220 S/C 0.40 0.0176 0.0886 0.1350 0.05951 0.26180 150

66 D/ 0.15 0.2347 0.4637 0.0272 0.71210 2.70857 50


C

66 S/C 0.15 0.4695 0.9275 0.0136 0.93744 3.20761 25

Remarks:

1. Size of Earth wire for:-

220 kV = 7/3.15 mm

66 kV = 7/2..5 mm

2. Resistance of conductor at 200 C.

3. Resistivity of Earth Assumed= 100

36
ANNEXURE-C

DETAILS OF CARRIER EQUIPMENT

The carrier terminals available in carrier equipment for feeders are as under:-

CARRIER BOOST

CARRIER SEND
(MAIN-I) + VE

CARRIER SEND + VE
(MAIN-II)
- VE

DIRECT TRIP
(SEND) + VE
- VE

CARRIER HEALTHY
(MAIN-I)

CARRIER HEALTHY
(MAIN-II)

CARRIER SIGNAL
RECEIVE
(MAIN-I)

CARRIER SIGNAL
RECEIVE
(MAIN-II)

DIRECT TRIP
(RECEIVE)

37
SECTION-6
CHAPTER-1
PART-I

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR 220 KV (CROSS LINKED POLYETHYLENE INSULATED


POWER CABLE:

1.1 SCOPE

1.1.1 The scope under this section covers design, manufacuture, testing, packing, supply,
delivery and laying of 220 KV, XLPE, insulated power cable for use with effectively earthed
distribution systems.
1.2 STANDARDS:Unless otherwise specified, the cables shall conform, in all respects, to
IEC-502/1983/IEC-840/1988 and IS:7098 (Part-III)/1993 with latest amendment or latest
edition for cross linked polyethylene insulated PVC sheathed cable for working voltage of
220 KV.
1.3 CLIMATIC CONDITIONS: The climatic conditions under which the cable shall operate
satisfactorily are as follows:-
a) Location : IN THE STATE OF HARYANA
0
b) Maximum ambient temperature of air in shade C : 50
0
c) Minimum ambient temperature of air in shade C : -2.5
0
d) Maximum daily average ambient temperature C : 40
0
e) Maximum yearly average ambient temperature C : 30

f) Maximum relative humidity % : 100

g) Minimum relative humidity % : 26

h) Average number of thunder storm days per annum : 35

i) Average annual rain fall mm : 900

j) Max. wind pressure kg/m2 : 195

k) Altitudes not exceeding above MSL Meter : 1000


0
l) Max. soil temp. at cable depth C : 30

m) Isoceranic level days/year : 50

n) Seismic level (horizontal acceleration) : 0.3g

-1-
1.4 PRINCIPAL PARAMETERS:
1.4.1 220 KV (E) grade XLPE single core power cable of single length, with H.D. aluminium
conductor, shielded with extruded semi-conducting layer, insulated with dry gas cured
cross linked polyethylene (XLPE) insulation, insulation screened with extruded semi-
conducting layer, insulated core copper-wire, screened lapped with a combination of semi-
conducting water swell able and poly aluminium laminated followed by black extruded PE
(Poly-thylene) inner sheath. Single H.D. aluminium wire armoured and graphite coating
PVC outer sheathed overall cable, confirming to IEC-502 (1983) for construction and also
confirming to IS:7098 (Part-III)/1993 or any latest amendments thereof.

1.4.2 Outer sheathing should be designed to afford high degree of mechanical protection and
should also be heat, oil chemicals and weather resistant. Common acid. Alkalis and saline
solution should not have adverse effect on the PVC sheathing material used.

1.4.3 The cable should be suitable for laying in covered trenches and/or under ground for
outdoor.

1.4.4 CABLE PARAMETERS 220 KV


i) Voltage Grade (Uo/U) 127/220
ii) No. of cores Single
iii) Size (mm2) 400mm2,630mm2,800mm2,1000mm2
iv) Nominal system voltage KV 220
v) Highest system voltage KV 245
vi) System Frequency Hz 50
vii) Variation in Frequency + 3%
viii) Fault level individually for
i) Conductor 40KA for1sec
ii) Cu.Screen 31.5KA for 1sec
iii) Armour 31.5KA for 1sec
ix) Maximum allowable temperature
0
a) Design continuous operation at rated C 90
full load current, the max, temp. of
0
conductor shall not exceed. C 250
b) The conductor temperature after a
short circuit for 1.0 sec shall not
exceed.
x) Basic insulation level 1050 KVP
(1.2/50 Micro Second Wave)

xi) 1-min. power frequency withstand voltage (rms) 460 KV

xii) System earthing Effectively earthed

1.5 GENERAL TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS:

1.5.1 CONDUCTOR: The cable conductor shall be made from stranded H.D.aluminium to form
compact circular shaped conductor having resistance within limits specified in
IS:8130/1984 and any amendment thereof. The conductor shall confirm to IEC:228 and
the shape shall be compacted circular shaped.

-2-
1.5.2 CONDUCOTR SHIELD: The conductor having a semi-conducting screen shall ensure
perfectly smooth profile and avoid stress concentration. The conductor screen shall be
extruded in the same operation as the insulation; the semi-conducting polymer shall be
croos-linked.

1.5.3 INSULATION: The XLPE insulation should be suitable for specified 220 kV system
voltage. The manufacturing process shall ensure that insulations shall be free from voids.
The insulation shall withstand mechanical and thermal stressed under steady state and
transient operating conditions. The extrusion method should give very smooth interface
between semi-conducting screen and insulation. The insulation of the cable shall be of
high standard quality, generally confirming to IEC-502 and I.S. 7098 Part-II/1988 (latest
edition).

1.5.4 INSULATION SHIELD: To confine electrical field to the insulation, non-magnetic semi-
conducting shield shall be put over the insulation. The insulation shield shall be extruded
in the same operation as the conductor shield and the insulation by suitable extrusion
process. The XLPE insulation shield should be bonded type. Metallic screening shall be
provided. The metallic screen shall be of copper wire having fault current capacity same
as the conductor (40 KV for 1-sec).

1.5.5 INNER SHEATH: The inner sheath shall comprises of a combination of semi-conducting
water swell able and ploy aluminium laminated tape. The sheath shall be suitable to
withstand the site conditions and the desired temperature. It should be of adequate
thickness, consistent quality and free from all defects. The sheath shall be extruded and of
black P.E. (Poly-ethylene).

1.5.6 ARMOUR: Single H.D. Aluminium wire armouring shall be provided. The dimension of
H.D.Aluminium wire armouring shall be as per latest IS:3975/19988. The armour shall be
having fault current same as capacity conductor (40 KV for 1 sec.)

1.5.7 OUTER SHEATH: Suitable semi conducting layer coated on extruded PVC outer sheath
confirming to IEC: 502/1983, shall be applied over armouring with suitable additives to
prevent attach by rodents and termites.

1.5.8 CONSTRUCTION:
1.5.8.1 All materials used in the manufacture of cable shall be new unused and of finest quality.
All materials should comply with the applicable provision of the tests of the specification.
IS, IEC, Indian Electricity Rules, Indian Electricity Act and any other applicable statutory
provisions rules and regulations.

1.5.9 CURRENT RATING: The cable will have current ratings and derating factors as per
relevant standard IEC.

1.5.9.1 The one-second short circuit rating values each for conductor, screen & armour shall be
furnished and shall be subject to the purchaser’s approval.

1.5.9.2 The current ratings shall be based on maximum conductor temperature of 90 deg. C with
ambient site condition specified for continuous operation at the rated current.

-3-
1.5.9.3 SIZE:
The different sizes of cable shall be 220 KV Single Core
a) 400mm2
b) 630mm2
c) 800mm2
d) 1000mm2

1.5.10 OPERATION:
1.5.10.1Cables shall be capable of satisfactory operation under a power supply system frequency
variation of plus minus 3% voltage variation of plus, minus 10% and combined frequency
voltage variation of 10% (absolute sum).

1.5.10.2 Cable shall be suitable for laying in ducts or buried under ground.

1.5.10.3 Cable shall have heat and moisture resistance properties. These shall be of type
and design with proven record on transmission network service.

1.5.11 LENGHTS: The cable shall be supplied in standard drum lengths as below:

Size of cable Standard Drum Length

a) 66 1c x 400mm2, 630mm2,800mm2, 500 meters + 5% tolerance and


1000mm2 + 2% overall tolerance in total quantity of cable.

1.5.11 INDENTIFICATION MARKING: Identification of cables shall be provided externally at


three meters’ intervals to identify as under:-

i) ‘Name of Manufacture’
ii) ‘Year of manufacture’
iii) ‘Voltage grade’ to be printed/embossed at the interval ofone meter-length. The
identification, by printing or embossing shall be done only on the outer sheath.
Name of purchaser shall also be embossed.
1.6.0 TESTS:
1.6.1 TYPE TESTS
The XLPE Cable offered should be type tested. Test reports should not be more
than seven years old reckoned from date of bid opening in respect of the following
tests carried out in accredited laboratories (based on ISO/IEC) by a reputed
accreditatic body or witnessed by HVPN or another electric power utility and be
submitted by the successful bidder to HVPNL for approval as per schedule given in
Bar Chart:-
i) Physical tests for insulation and outer sheath.
ii) Bending test.
iii) Di-electrical power factor test.
iv) Heating cycle test followed by di-electrical power factor as a function of voltage and
partial discharge test.
v) Impulse withstand test.

1.6.2 ROUTINE TESTS:


As per quality assurance program (QAP).

-4-
1.6.3 ACCEPTANCE TESTS:
All the acceptance tests as stipulated in the relevant standard shall be carried out
by the Supplier in presence of HVPNL representative, unless dispensed with in
writing by the HVPNL.

1.7 INSPECTION
The material shall be inspected and tested before dispatch by an authorised
representative of the Nigam in respect of quality.
The inspecting officer shall also satisfy himself about the correctness of length of cables
as provided in Instruction No. 208 of E.B. Manual of Instruction 1963 Edition amended
vide O/O No. G/BD-33(57) 75 dt. 18.04.75 now HVPNL. In case the supplier is not in a
position to get these tests carried out at his works, such tests may be got carried out by
him at any Govt. recognised test agency at his own expense.

1.8 TEST CERTIFICATES


The supplier shall supply test certificates from a Govt. agency in respect of quality as per
IS:7098(part-II) 1985 with latest amendments thereof for approval of the purchaser.

1.9 PACKING
The cable shall be supplied in non-returnable wooden drum as per IS:10418:1982 so
constructed, as to enable the cable to be transported on each drum. The cable wound on
such drum shall be one continuous length. The ends of cables shall be sealed by means
of non-hygroscopic sealing material.

1.10 MARKING
The marking on the drum shall have the following information: -

a) Reference to Indian Standard & cable code.


b) Name of the manufacturer & trade name.
c) Nominal cross section area of conductor for the cables.
d) Number of core.
e) Sequential No. at each meter.
f) Type of the cable & voltage for which it is suitable.
g) Length of cable on the drum.
h) Approximate gross weight.
i) Net weight of the cable.
j) Drum identification number.
k) P.O. No. and date.
l) Consignee’s name with designation.
m) Year of manufacture.

1.11 DRAWINGS & INSTRUCTION MANUAL


The tenderer shall supply the following drawings with the tender: -

i) Detailed drawing of the cable showing conductor, screening insulation, Armouring,


outer sheath etc.
ii) Detailed drawing showing jointing of cable and sealing of end boxes.

Copies of instruction manuals for testing, installation jointing operation and maintenance of
cables, shall also be submitted with the offer for reference of the purchaser.

1.12 TECHNICAL & GUARANTEED PARTICULARS: The tenderer shall furnish guaranteed
technical particulars as called for in appendix-I (Schedule-A) of this specification.

-5-
Particulars, which are subject to guarantee, shall be clearly marked. Offer not containing
this information will not be considered.

-6-
PART-II
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR LAYING, TESTING AND COMMISSIONING OF 220 KV
XLPE UNDERGROUND POWER CABLE

SECTION-1
SPECIFICATION FOR LAYING OF CABLE

1.1 LAYING, JOINTING AND INSTALLATION (GENERAL):


1.1.1 It will be necessary for the successful tenderer to arrange technical supervision during
installation of cable laying and termination.

1.1.2 The successful tenderer shall arrange for the services of fully qualified and competent
supervising Engineer/Engineers and necessary minimum number of jointers, semi skilled
labourers, as he deems I absolutely necessary.

1.1.3 Provision of special tolls/appliances required for conductor joining and stripping/dressing
and applicable of XLPE insulation etc. shall be made by the successful tenderer.

1.1.4 The successful tenderer shall furnish all necessary information, including drawings,
manuals and instructions relating to both cable laying and jointing practice.

1.1.5 The associated civil works, which are necessary in laying/installation of power cable,
though not specifically mentioned, but shall be completely in the scope of successful
tenderer.

1.1.6 The route map showing the proposed installation of power cable will be issued to the
successful bidder. Cables are to be laid in single trench as per instruction of E.I.C.

1.1.7 Successful tenderer has to arrange at his own for first-aid, fire protection, electricity and
water requirement at site. He shall also arrange for signboard, caution board, safety and
security personnel etc. on cable route.

1.1.8 The successful tenderer has to bear with any temporary interruption that may occur during
actual erection work, when the matter with other agency is involved.

1.1.9 No idling charges or cost over run for the entire project shall be entertained.

1.1.10 Approval for installation of the underground cable route from Electrical Inspector shall be
arranged by Purchaser. However, permission for commencement of work and permission
for commissioning of cable after completion of laying has to be arranged by the successful
tenderer.

1.1.11 Successful tenderer shall arrange space for working office, workshop & store/yard for
storing requisite material like kits, cables etc.

1.1.12 The Arbitration in the dispute shall be strictly as per standard commercial terms &
conditions of the board.

-7-
1.2 LAYING OF POWER CABLE:
1.2.1 The 220 KV (E) XLPE cable shall be installed underground and normally buried directly in
the ground complying with all applicable standards and IS:1255 & their amendments.

1.2.2 The sealing of power cable ends during the storage; execution & completion of jointing
works shall be in the scope of successful tenderer. In no circumstances, the cable ends
shall be kept open. The amount due to damages done because of water/moisture ingress
OR penetration in the cable/conductors during execution shall be recovered from
successful tenderer. It shall be responsibility of successful tenderer to make them good
OR replace free of cost without affecting the completion schedules.

1.2.3 Three single core cables shall be laid in trefoil formation.

1.2.4 The power cable shall be laid generally at a depth of 2500mm and can vary, if obstacles
like power cable of other rating/telephone cable/water pipe line etc, come in the way of
installation. At least minimum Depth of 2000 mm shall be maintained from nearest road
level.

1.2.5 The cables shall be completely surrounded by a layer of having a low thermal resistivity
(selected sand) sand about 250mm over & below of the cable surface throughout width of
the cable trench at no extra cost. (River sand shall be allowed for surrounding layer).

1.2.6 The extra protection of pre-cost flat RCC slab with proportion 1:2:4 having size 600(L)
X300(B) X 50(Thk) mm shall be provided about 250mm over the power cables for
complete route of the cable.

The RCC slab shall be with proportion not less than 1:2:4 (M-150) and also shall have
steel reinforced of 6/8 mm dia. Steel bar (4 nos. of 300mm side and 5 Nos. on 600 mm
side ) at adequate required distance. The slab shall be given curing time of minimum 15
days.

1.2.7 Normally, the back filling shall consist of the materials earlier excavated, however, bigger
stones or piece of rock should be removed OR if required new soil has to be provided and
used for back filling with no extra cost.

1.2.8 The cable drum must be handled correctly and with care during transport and laying of the
power cables, in order to avoid damage to the cables. Any damages done because of poor
handing of the cables to the properties of corporation, private OR to anybody shall be
responsibility of successful bidder & the board reserves the right to recover the amount
due to such damages.

1.2.9 The minimum bending radius of the cable shall be 30xD where D is diameter of the cable.

-8-
1.2.10
The contractor has to keep allotted 220 KV power cable, material supplied by him in safe
custody and transport to the respective sites and will be fully responsible for any damage
to or loss of any or all allotted equipments or materials supplied by him at any stage during
transportation or erection or taking over to the sub station by the HVPNL. The contractor
has to return empty cable drum as instructed by CE. The route map for cable will be
issued free of cost to the contractor before commencement of work.

The contractor has to open site store at sub station site or at place nearby the sub station
site and ensure for safe custody of all the stored materials at his own cost.

The contractor shall have total responsibility for the entire materials stores, loose, semi
assembled and/or erected by him at site in his custody. The Contractor shall make suitable
security arrangements at his own cost to ensure the protection of all materials, equipment
and works from theft, fire pilferage and any other damages and loss. It shall be the
responsibility of the contractor to arrange for security till the works are finally taken over by
the HVPNL.

1.3 CROSSINGS:

1.3.1 a) where road crossing comes in way of laying power cable, the power shall be laid
through NP-4 RCC Hume Pipes. The required length of Hume pipe shall be arranged by
the successful tenderer at no extra cost.

b) The RCC Hume pipe inner dia-meter shall not be less than 1000mm.

c) The RCC pipes to be laid shall have minimum depth in such a way that the back filling
on top surface of the pipe shall be at least 600mm in depth. The pipe joints shall be
smooth so that cables are not damaged during pulling & operation.

d) During the crossing of utilities like water line, drainage lines, telephone lines, gas lines
etc. sufficient care shall be taken & protection shall be made available so that other utilities
do not damage the cable mechanically and/or electrically or do not effect the performance
of the cable.

e) NALA CROSSINGS/CULVERT CROSSINGS: The Nala crossings are to be made with


separate fly-over bridges of adequate sizes to carry all the cables in required formation.
The brides are to be made at the sufficient distances from the edge of Nala considering
the further expansions of roads. The strength shall be such that it should not wash away
with the flow of water during heavy rain.

Detailed route and sectional view for laying cables is available and may be collected.

-9-
1.4 IDENTIFICATOIN, MARKING AND WARNING:

1.4.1 The identification marker shall be of adequate size fabricated from 3mm thick,
25mmx25mm aluminium strip. The marker shall be embossed with letter as stated below:

“HVPNL-220 KV S/S” and “Phase R or Y or B" as the case may be .

The marker shall be tightened with nylon thread along with each cable at interval of 3
meters in such a way that it does not damage/penetrate the outer sheath of cable because
of the dead weight of back filled materials OR soil.

1.4.2 A pre-warning PVC yellow tape with size 152 mm (width) x 100 microns thick
(HDDPE)/LLDPF shall also be laid as per following clause of the specification. The
warning tape shall also contain the “WARNING” printed in black letters as under (In
English as well as Hindi).

“CAUTION: 220000 VOLTS HVPNL CABLE”

1.4.3 A pre-warning tap as per above clause shall be laid below ground level in the earth about
400/500 mm deep along the route of cable and in jointing bays.

1.4.4 The cable route marker is to be made from R.C.C. blocks duly embossed on all the side as
under:-
“HVPNL 220KV CABLE LINE”

The minimum size shall be 600x400x50mm. It shall be at least embedded in ground upto
400mm depth. The exposed portions shall be painted with non-washable paints. The
interval should be minimum 30meters between two markers. It should be put at bends,
curves, road crossing etc. of cable route.

1.5 TEST AFTER INSTALLATION:

1.5.1 Pre-commissioning tests on site, to be undertaken by the successful tenderer shall include
the following:-
a) Insulation Resistance of each cable drum length after laying and before jointing.

b) Tests for detection of damage to outer sheath, if any.

c) Serving insulation resistance after laying each cable length shall withstand a
voltage of 10 KV DC for one minute between each reinforcement and external
conducting surface; In addition, the serving insulation resistance shall be measured
and checked with the values obtained during routine factory tests.

d) On completion of the cable laying and jointing work, the complete installation shall
be checked with a D.C. voltage of 3 Uo applied for 15 minutes between each
conductor and sheath.

e) Conductor resistance of each cable of each complete circuit.


f) Test for 5 min. with system voltage applied between the conductor and the screen.

g) Test for 24 hours with normal operating voltage of the system.

h) Continuity & phase confirmation.

- 10 -
Note: The pre-commissioning test at (f) or (g) at site to be undertaken as an alternative to
the test (d).

1.6 GENERAL:
1) The cable laying shall have to be done, as per actual site condition at the time of
execution, and as per the instruction of the engineer-in-charge.

2) The scope of work shall also include assistance in obtaining required


permission/approval from various statutory authorities i.e. Municipal Corporation, Gram
Panchayat (if any), PWD, Electrical Inspector, Telecom Department etc. Payment
demanded by any statutory authority as a compensation shall be reimbursed by
HVPNL on submission of documentary evidence i.e. receipt of such payment made.

3) The Un-priced schedule of the offered item shall also be submitted in technical bid.
4) The successful bidder has to complete the work within one quarters after
commencement period of one month.

5) The end of cut pieces of cables left out during executions shall be sealed to prevent
ingress of any moisture in the cable before handing over to consignee.

6) Detailed route and sectional view for laying cables is available and may be collected.

7) The rate of laying of 220 KV Cable covers the cost of fixing of 3 phase earth box and
laying of Co-axial cable.

8) Civil work for all other nala crossings, road crossing etc. for all the above lines shall be
considered in scope of bidder.

- 11 -
Section-6
Chapter-2
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR
220V (200AH) AND
48V (300AH) BATTERY BANKS

1.0 SCOPE:

The scope of this specification covers design, manufacture, assembly, supply,


testing at works, packing, forwarding, dispatch of VRLA batteries along with
necessary accessories, fittings etc. to the destination.
These equipments are to be complete in every respect, details to the functions
designated to the entire satisfaction of the purchaser. It is required that the
supplier accepting the contract agrees to furnish all apparatus, appliances and
material whether specifically mentioned or not but which may be found
necessary to complete, to perform and testing any of the herein specified
equipment (s) for compliance with the requirements implied without extra
charges. The erection/maintenance tools and specific tools if any will also form
part of supply.

2.0 General Technical Requirement

All the materials/components used in Battery Chargers and Valve Regulated


Lead Acid Battery (VRLA) shall be free from flaws and defects and shall
conform to relevant standards and good engineering practices:-
2.0.1 For 400 KV Sub-stations, DC System shall consist of two (2) battery sets for
each of 220V and 48V systems respectively. The standard scheme drawing is
enclosed with this specification.
2.0.2 For 220 KV sub-station, DC System shall consist of two (2) float-cum-boost
chargers and one (1) battery set for each of 220V system. For 48V system DC
scheme shall consist of one (1) battery. The standard scheme drawing is
enclosed with this specification.
2.0.3 Bidder shall select number of cells, float and Boost voltage to achieve following
requirement :

Minimum voltage available


Maximum Voltage
System when no charger working Minimum
during Float
Voltage and battery fully discharged Nos of Cell
Operation
up to 1.85 V per cell.
220 Volt 242 Volt 198 Volt 107
48 Volt 52.8 Volt 43.2 Volt 23

2.1 CLIMATIC CONDITIONS:

The equipment to be supplied against the specification shall be suitable for


satisfactory continuous operation under the following tropical conditions:

1
Max. ambient air temperature 500 C
Max. daily average ambient temperature 450 C
Max. yearly weighted ambient temperature 350 C

Min. air temperature (-) 50 C


Max. humidity 100%
Min. relative humidity 26 %
Average number of thunder storm days per annum 40
Average annual rain fall 15 cm to 100 cm.
Number of months during which tropical monsoon 4 months (June to
conditions prevail altitude above MSL Sept). Varies from 61
meters to 815.00 mtrs.
Average number of rainly days per annum. 120 days
Seismic level (Horizontal acceleration) 0.3g.
Degree of pollution Heavy
Intensity of solar radiation 1.0 KW/sq.m.
Max. Wind load 195 kg/sq.m.

3.0 Battery

3.1 Type
The DC Batteries shall be Normal Discharge type Valve Regulated Lead Acid
(VRLA) and shall conform to IS 15549: 2004/IEC 60896-21 & 22, 2004
standard. These shall be factory filled, charged & suitable for a long life under
continuous float operations and occasional discharges. The 220 V DC systems
should be unearthed and 48V DC system is Positive Earth system.
Battery sets shall be capable of operating at a peak ambient temperature of 50
Deg.C. The offered battery shall be compact and shall require no maintenance.
All safety equipment required for installation shall be provided by the
manufacturer.

3.2 Constructional Requirement

Plates:
Positive plates shall be made of flat pasted type using high corrosion resistant
alloy for durability, maintenance free, long life both in cyclic as well as in float
applications. The Grids are of Semi Radial Squarish grid to reduce internal
Resistance and travel current in shorter time.

Negative plates shall be heavy duty, durable flat plate using lead alloy pasted
Semi Radial Squarish Grid. Negative plates shall be designed to match the life
of positive plates and combination of positive and negative plates shall ensure
long life, durability and trouble free operation of battery.

Computer controlled/PLC operated in house equipment should be deployed for


preparation of lead oxide and paste to ensure consistency in paste quality &
properties. Conventional / manual type of paste preparation will not be allowed.

3.3 Containers & Lids

2
The container & lids shall be made of polypropylene Copolymer material and
shall have chemical and electro-chemical compatibility along with acid resistant
and shall conform to UL-94/ ASTM-D-2863 standard. The material shall meet all
the requirements of VRLA batteries and be consistent with the life of battery.
The porosity of the container shall be such as not to allow any gases to escape
except from the regulation valve.
The tensile strength of the material of the container shall be such as to handle
the internal cell pressure of the cells in the worst working condition.
The container shall be capable of withstanding the rigours of transport, storage
and handling. The containers shall be enclosed in a steel tray.
For identification each cell / module shall be marked in a permanent manner to
Indicate the Following information.
I. Cell Serial number.
II. Positive and Negative is embossed on the cover
III. Month and Year of manufacturing.

3.4 Cell Covers

The cell covers shall be made of suitable material compatible with the container
material and permanently fixed with container by Hermetic Heat Sealing
technique. It shall be capable to withstand internal pressure without bulging or
cracking. Fixing of pressure regulation Valve & terminals posts in the cover shall
be such that the seepage of electrolyte, gas escapes and entry of electrostatic
spark are prevented.

3.5. Separators

The separators used in manufacturing of battery cells shall be spun glass micro
porous Matrix having high acid absorption capability & resistant to battery grade
Sulphuric acid along with good insulating properties. Sufficient separator overlap
and PVC shield protection to bottom edges of the plates is to be provided to
prevent short circuit formation between the edges of adjacent plates.

3.6. Pressure Regulation Valve

Each cell shall be provided with a pressure regulation valve. The valve shall be
self re-sealable. The vent plug shall be made with suitable grade of fire retardant
plastic material. Each valve opening shall be covered with flame barrier capable in
preventing the ingress of flame into the cell interior when the valve opens and
hydrogen / oxygen gas mixture is released. The valve unit shall be such that it
cannot be opened without a proper tool.

3.7. Terminal Posts

Both the Positive and Negative terminals of the cells shall be capable of proper
termination and shall ensure its consistency with the life of battery. The terminals
shall have adequate solid copper core cross-section to avoid overheating at
maximum current load. The surface of the terminal post extending above the cell
cover including bolt hole shall be coated with an acid resistant and corrosion
retarding material. Terminal posts or any other metal part which is in contact with
the electrolyte shall be made of the same alloy as that of the plates or of a
proven material that does not have any harmful effect on cell performance. Both
Positive and negative terminal posts of VRLA Battery shall be colored Red and
Black to make it unambiguously identifiable.

3.8. Connectors, Nuts & Bolts, Heat Shrinkable Sleeves

The connectors shall be non corroding lead coated copper of suitable size to

3
enable connections of cells. Copper connections shall be suitably lead coated to
withstand corrosion due to Sulphuric acid/fumes.
Nuts and bolts for connecting the cells shall be made of stainless steel with good
acid resistant characteristics. All inter cell connectors shall be protected with heat
shrinkable silicon sleeves for reducing the environmental impact including a
corrosive environment.

3.9. Flame Arrestors

Each cell shall be equipped with a Flame Arrestor to defuse the Hydrogen gas
escaped during charge and discharge. Material of the flame arrestor shall not
affect the performance of the cell.

3.10. Battery Bank Stand

All batteries shall be mounted in a suitable metallic stand/frame. The frame shall
be powdered coated with acid resistant paint (2 coats) and should have
protection against fungus growth and other harmful effect due to tropical
environment. The suitable insulation shall be provided between stand/frame and
floor to avoid the grounding of the frame/stand. The joining of the frames should
not leave crevices and ensure proper and tight fit.

3.11. Capacity Requirements

When the battery is discharged at 10 hour rate, it shall deliver 80% of C (rated
capacity, corrected at 27º Celsius) before any of the cells in the battery
bank reaches 1.85V/cell.

The battery shall be capable of being recharged from the fully exhausted
condition (1.75V/cell) within 10 hrs up to 90% state of charge. All the cells in a
battery shall be designed for continuous float operation at the specified float
voltage throughout the life.

The capacity (corrected at 27ºCelcius) shall also not be less than C and not more
than 120% of C before any cell in the battery bank reaches 1.75V/cell. The
battery voltage shall not be less than the following values, when a fully charged
battery is put to discharge at C/10 rate:

(a) After Six minutes of discharge: 1.98V/cell


(b) After Six hours of discharge: 1.92V/cell
(c) After 8 hours of discharge: 1.85V/cell
(d) After 10 hours of discharge: 1.75V/cell

Loss in capacity during storage at an average ambient temperature of 35º Celsius


for a period of 6 months shall not be more than 60% and the cell/battery shall
achieve 85% of its rated capacity within 3 charge/discharge cycles and full rated
capacity within 5 cycles, after the storage period of 6 months. Voltage of each cell
in the battery set shall be within 0.05V of the average voltage throughout
the storage period. Ampere hour efficiency shall be better than 90% and watt
hour efficiency shall be better than 80%.

3.12. Expected Battery Life

The battery shall be capable of giving 1200 or more charge/discharge cycles at


80% Depth of discharge (DOD) at an average temperature of 27º C.
DOD (Depth of Discharge) is defined as the ratio of the quantity of
electricity (in Ampere-Hour) removed from a cell or battery on discharge to its
rated capacity.
The battery sets shall have a minimum expected life of 20 years at float

4
operation.
3.13. Accessories along with Battery System

Each battery shall be supplied with following accessories and devices:

a) Torque Wrench.
b) Cell Test Voltmeter (-3-0-+ 3) Volts with least count of 0.01 Volt

3.14. Type Test of Battery

The Bidder/Supplier shall supply type tested battery per IS 15549: 2004/IEC
60896-21 & 22 over the range of at least one capacity per design and should
have met requirement of Service Life test as per above stated IEC standards
within last seven years. The Bidder/Supplier shall submit necessary evidences
enclosed along with tender documents.

Sr.No Description
1 Gas Emission
2 High Current Tolerance
3 Short Circuit Current and DC internal resistance
4 Protection against internal ignition from external spark source
5 Protection against ground short propensity
6 Content & durability of required marking
7 Material Identification
8 Valve Operation
9 Flammability Rating of material
10 Intercell connector performance
11 Discharge Capacity
12 Charge Retention during storage
13 Float Service with daily discharge for reliable mains power
14 Recharge behavior
15 Service life at an operating temperature of 400 C for brief
duration exposure time
16 Impact of stress temperature of 60oC for brief duration
exposure time with 3 hours discharge test
17 Abusive Over discharge
18 Thermal runway sensitivity
19 Low temperature sensitivity
20 Dimensional sensitivity at elevated internal pressure &
temperature
21 Stability against mechanical abuse of units during installation

Test shall be conducted in accordance with IEC 60896-21 & 22,2004


3.14.1 Routine Test of Battery
1. Physical examination test
2. Visual Inspection
3. Dimensions, Mass & Layout
4. Marking & Packing

3.14.2 Acceptance Test of Battery


1. Polarity Marking
2. Verification of Dimensions
3. Test of AH Capacity.

5
3.15. List of Factory & Site Tests for Battery

Sr.No Test Factory Tests Site Tests

1 Physical Verification Yes


2 C/10 Capacity test on the cell Yes

3.16. Installation and Commissioning

Manufacturer of battery shall supervise the installation as recommended in O&M


manual/or relevant standards. All necessary instruments, materials, tools and
tackles required for installation, testing at site and commissioning are to
arranged by battery manufacturer/Bidders.

4.0 MARKING AND PACKING:

4.1 MARKING:

The following information shall be indeligibly and durably marked on the outside
of the cell.

a) Nominal Voltage
b) Manufacturer’s name, type and trade name.
c) AH capacity at 10 hour rate.
Voltage for float operation at 20 deg. C with tolerance of (+/-) 1%.
d) Month & year of manufacturer
e) Country of origin.
f) S.No. of cell/cell No.

4.1.1 The cells and batteries may also be marked with the ISI certification mark, if
any.

4.2 PACKING:
The cells shall be suitably packed so as to avoid any loss or damage during
transit.

5.0 INSTRUCTION MANUAL:


The manufacturer shall supply one copy of instructions manual for initial charging
(if required)/treatment, and routine maintenance during service, with each and
every battery set. The manufacturer shall supply 5 copies of instructions manual
to the purchaser.

The following information shall be provided on, the instruction cards.


a) Designation of cell or battery
b) Ampere hour capacity.
c) Nominal voltage
d) Manufacturer’s instructions for charging
e) Voltage for float operation at 20 deg.C with tolerance (+/-) 1%.
f) Maintenance instructions
g) Environmental & safety provisions required.

6.0 TESTS:

All the acceptance tests as per relevant standards mentioned shall be carried out
for batteries in presence of our inspecting officer free of cost. Type test
certificates (not older than 7 years from the date of opening of tender) are to be
submitted for approval of purchaser.

6
7.0 DRAWINGS:

The tenderer will submit the detailed dimensional drawings for battery sets
including stands.

8.0 TYPE TEST CERTIFICATES:

The tenderer will submit the complete type test certificates as per relevant
standards mentioned (not older than 7 years from the date of opening of tender)
for battery sets with their tenders, without which the offers are likely to be
ignored.

9.0 GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICUALRS:

Guaranteed Technical Particualrs for battery sets as per Annexure-A attached


shall be furnished along with the tender.

10.0 ACCESSORIES:

Each battery set shall be supplied complete with all necessary accessories viz.
stand, inter connections, cell no. Plates with sticker, multi meter complete with
leads, spanners.

11.0 BILL OF MATERIAL:

The firm shall also have to furnish the bill of material used in battery set.

7
SECTION-6
Battery Charger
CHAPTER-3
1. Battery Charger

The DC system for 220V DC is unearthed. The Battery Chargers as well as their
automatic regulators shall be of static type and shall be compatible with VRLA
batteries. All battery chargers shall be capable of continuous operation at the
respective rated load in float charging mode, i.e. Float charging the associated Lead-
Acid Batteries at 2.13 to 2.27 Volts per cell while supplying the DC load. The chargers
shall also be capable of Boost charging the associated DC battery at 2.28 to 2.32
volts per cell at the desired rate.
Charger shall regulate the float/boost voltage in case of prescribed temperature rise
of battery as per manufacturer’s recommendation to avoid thermal runaway.
Necessary temperature sensors shall be provided in mid location of battery banks
and shall be wired up to the respective charger for feedback control. The
manufacturer shall demonstrate this feature during testing of each charger.
1.1 The battery chargers shall be provided with facility for both automatic and manual
control of output voltage and current. A selector switch shall be provided for selecting
the mode of output voltage/current control, whether automatic or manual. When on
automatic control mode during float charging the chargers output voltage shall remain
within + 1% of the set value, for AC input voltage variation of + 1% frequency
variation of + 5% a combined voltage and frequency variation of + 1% and a DC load
variation from zero to full load.
1.2 All battery chargers shall have a constant voltage characteristics throughout the
range (from zero to full load) at the floating value of the voltage so as to keep the
battery fully charged but without harmful overcharge.
1.3 All chargers shall have load limiters having drooping characteristics, which shall
cause, when the voltage control is in automatic mode, a gradual lowering of the
output voltage whet eh DC load current exceeds the Load limiter setting of the
Charger. The Load-limiter characteristics shall be such that any sustained overload or
short circuit in DC system shall not charge the Charger nor shall it cause blowing of
any of the Charger fuses. The Charger shall not trip on overload or external short
circuit.
1.4 Uniform and step less adjustments of voltage setting (in both manual and automatic
modes) shall be provided on the front of the Charger panel covering the entire float
charging output range specified. Step less adjustments of the Load-limiter setting
shall also be possible from 80% to 100% of the rated output current for Charging
mode.
1.5 During Boot Charging, the Battery Charger shall operate on constant current mode
(when automatic regulator is in service). It shall be possible to adjust the Boost
charging current continuously over a range of 50 to 100% of the rated output current
for Boost charging mode.

The Charger output voltage shall automatically go on rising, when it is operating on


Boost mode, as the Battery Chargers up. For limiting the output voltage of the
Charger, a potentiometer shall be provided on the front of the panel, whereby it shall
be possible to set the upper limit of this voltage any where in the output range
specified for Boost Charging mode

-0-
1.6 The Charger manufacturer may offer an arrangement in which the voltage setting
device for Float charging mode is also used as output voltage limit setting device for
Boost charging mode and the Load-limiter of Float charging mode is used as current
setting device in boost charging mode.

1.7 Suitable filter circuits shall be provided in all the chargers to limit the ripple content (
Peak to Peak) in the output voltage to 1% irrespective of the DC load level, when
they are not connected to a battery.

1.8 MCCB

All Battery Chargers shall have 2 Nos. MCCBs on the input side to receive cables
from two sources. Mechanical interlock should be provided such that only one shall
be closed at a time. It shall be of P2 duty and suitable for continuous duty MCCB’s
should have auxiliary contacts for annunciation.

1.9 Rectifier Transformer

The rectifier transformer shall be continuously rated, dry air cooled (A.N) an of class F
insulation type. The rating of the rectifier transformer shall have 10% overload
capacity.

1.10 Rectifier Assembly

The rectifier assembly shall be fully/half controlled bridge type and shall be designed
to meet the duty as required by the respective charger. The rectifier shall be provided
with heat sink having their own heat dissipation arrangements with natural air cooling.
Necessary surge protection devices and rectifier type test acting HRC fuses shall be
provided in each arm of the rectifier connections.

1.11 Instruments

One AC voltmeter and one AC ammeter along with selector switches shall be
provided for all chargers. One DC voltmeter and DC ammeter (with shunt) shall be
provided for all chargers. The instruments shall be flush type, dust proof and moisture
resistant. The instruments shall have easily accessible means for zero adjustment.
The instruments shall be of 15 accuracy class. In addition to the above a centre zero
voltmeter with selector switch shall also be provided for 220 V Chargers for testing
purpose.

1.12 Air Break Switches

One DC output switch shall be provided in all chargers. They shall be air break type
suitable for 500 Volts AC/ 250 DC. The contacts of the switches shall open and close
with a snap action. The operating handle of the switch shall be fully insulated from
circuit. ‘ON’ and ‘OFF’ position on the switch shall be clearly indicated. Rating of
switches shall be suitable for their continuous load. Alternatively, MCCB’s of suitable
ratings shall also acceptable in place of Air Break Switch.

-1-
1.13 Fuses

All fuses shall be HRC Link type. Fuses shall be mounted on fuse carriers which are
in turn mounted on fuse bases. Wherever it is not possible to mount fuses on carriers,
fuses shall be directly mounted on plug-in type base. In such case one insulated fuse
pulling handle shall be supplied for each charger. Fuse rating shall be chosen by the
Bidder depending on the circuit requirement. All fuses in the chargers shall be
monitored. Fuse failure annunciation shall be provided on the failure of any fuse.

1.14 Blocking Diode

Blocking diode shall be provided in the positive pole of the output circuit of each
charger to prevent current flow from the DC battery into the charger.

1.15 Annunciation System

Audio-visual indications through bright LEDs shall be provided in all Chargers for the
following abnormalities:-
a) AC Power failure.
b) Rectifier/chargers fuse blown.
c) Over voltage across the battery when boost charging.
d) Abnormal voltage (High/Low)
e) Any other annunciation if required

Potential free NO contacts of above abnormal conditions shall also be provided for
common remote indication “CHARGER TROUBLE” in Owner’s Control Board.
Indication for charger in float mode and boost mode through indication lamps shall be
provided for chargers. A Potential free contact for float/boost mode shall be provided
for external interlocks.

1.16 Name Plates and Marking

The name plates shall be white with black engraved letters. On top of each Charger,
on front as well as rear sides, larger and bold name plates shall be provided to
identify the Charger. Name plates with full and clear inscriptions shall also be
provided on and inside of the panels for identification of the various equipments and
ease of operation and maintenance.

1.17 Charger Construction

The Chargers shall be indoor, floor-mounted, self-supporting sheet metal enclosed


cubicle type. The Bidder shall supply all necessary base frames, anchor bolts and
hardware. The Chargers shall be fabricated from 2.0mm cold rolled sheet steel and
shall have folded type of construction. Removable gland plates for all cables and lugs
for power cables shall be supplied by the Bidder. The lugs for power cables shall be
made of electrolytic copper with tin coat. Power cable sizes shall be advised to the
Bidder at a later date for provision of suitable lugs and drilling of gland plates. The
Charger shall be tropicalised and vermin proof. Ventilation louvers, if provided shall
be backed with screens. All doors and covers shall be fitted with synthetic rubber
gaskets. The chargers shall have hinged double leaf doors provided on front and on

-2-
backside for adequate access to the Charger’s internals. All the charger cubicle doors
shall be properly earthed. The degree of protection of Charger enclosure shall be at
least IP-42 as per IS: 13947 Part -1.

1.17.1 All indicating instruments, control switches and indicating lamps shall be mounted on
the front side of the Charger.

1.17.2 Each Charger shall be furnished completely wired upto power cable lugs and terminal
blocks and ready for external connections. The control wiring shall be carried out with
PVC insulated, 1.5 sq.mm. stranded copper wired. Control terminals shall be suitable
for connecting two wires, with 2.5 sq.mm stranded copper conductors. All terminals
shall be numbered for ease of connections and identification. Each wire shall bare a
ferrule or tag on each end for identification. At least 20% spare terminals shall be
provided for control circuits.
1.17.3 The insulation of all circuits, except the low voltage electronic circuits shall withstand
test voltage of 2 KV AC for one minute. An air clearance of at least ten (10) mm shall
be maintained throughout for such circuits, right up to the terminal lugs. Whenever
this clearance is not available, the live parts shall be insulated or shrouded.

1.18 Painting
All sheet steel work shall be pre-treated in tanks, in accordance with IS:6005
Degreasing shall be done by alkaline cleaning. Rust and scale shall be removed by
pickling with acid. After pickling, the parts shall be washed in running water. Then
these shall be rinsed in slightly alkaline hot water and dried. The phosphate coating
shall be ‘Class-C’ as specified in IS:6005. Welding shall not be done after
phosphating. The phosphating surfaces shall be rinsed and passivated prior to
application of stoved lead oxide primer coating. After primer application, two coats of
finishing synthetic enamel paint of shade -692 (smoke grey) of IS-5 shall be applied,
unless required otherwise by the Owner. The inside of the chargers shall be glossy
white. Each coat of finishing synthetic enamel paint shall be properly staved. The
paint thickness shall not be less than fifty (50) microns.

1.19 TESTS

1.19.1 Battery Chargers shall conform to all type tests as per relevant Indian Standard
Performance test on the Chargers as per Specification shall also be carried out on
each charger as per specification. Rectifier transformer shall conform to all type tests
in IS:4540 and short circuit test as per IS:2026. Following type tests shall be carried
out for compliance of specification requirements:-

i) Voltage regulation test.


ii) Load limiter characteristics test
iii) Efficiency tests
iv) High voltage tests
v) Temperature rise test
vi) Short circuit test at no load and full load at rated voltage for sustained
short-circuit.
vii) Degree of protection test
viii) Measurement of ripple by oscilloscope.
ix) Temperature compensation feature demonstration

-3-
1.19.2 The Bidder may be required to demonstrate to the OWNER that the chargers
conform to the specification particularly regarding continuous rating, ripple free
output, voltage regulation and load limiting characteristic, before despatch as well
as after installation at site. At site the following tests shall be carried out:-

i) Insulation resistance test


ii) Checking of proper annunciation system operation
1.19.3 If a Charger fails to meet the specified requirements, the Bidder shall replace the
same with appropriate Charger without affecting the commissioning schedule of
the Sub-Station, and without any extra cost to the OWNER.

1.19.4 The Bidder shall present for inspection, the type and routine test certificates for
the following components whenever required by the OWNER.

(i) Switches
(ii) Relays/MCCBs
(iii) Instruments
(iv) DC fuses
(v) SCR
(vi) Diodes
(vii) Condensers
(viii) Potentiometers
(ix) Semiconductor
(x) Annunciator
(xi) Control wiring
(xii) Push buttons and contactors

Makes of above equipment shall be subject to Owner’s approval.

-4-
SECTION-6
CHAPTER-4

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION OF D.C. DISTRIBUTION BOARD.

1. SCOPE:
This specification provides for design, Engineering, manufacture, stage testing,
inspection and testing before dispatch, packing, forwarding and delivery at site of D.C.
Distribution Board, complete with all fittings accessories and associated auxiliary
equipment mandatory which are required for efficient and trouble free operation as per
specified here under.

It is not the intent to specify completely all the details of design and construction of
equipment. However, the equipment shall conform in all respects to the high standard of
engineering, design and workmanship and shall be capable of performing in continuous
commercial operation up to the Bidder’s guarantee acceptable to the purchaser. The
equipment offered shall be complete in all component necessary for its effective and
trouble free operation along with associated equipment interlocks protection scheme etc.
Such components shall be deemed to be within the scope of supply irrespective of
whether those are specially brought out in this Specification and or the commercial order
or not. All similar parts particularly movable ones shall be interchangeable.

1.02 CLIMATIC CONDITIONS :


As per Section-I Vol-II.
1.03 STANDARD:
All material and equipment shall comply in every respect with the requirements of the
latest edition of the relevant Indian Standard IS:1651.
1.04 MANUFACTURE AND WORKMANSHIP:
All the material used in the construction of the equipment shall be of the best quality
obtainable of their respective kinds and whole of the work shall be of the highest class,
well finished and of approved design and make. Casting shall be free from blow holes,
flaws and of the true form and dimensions.
All machined surfaces shall be true and smooth and well finished.
1.05 DUTY AND GENERAL ARRANGEMENTS:
The storage batteries are required for providing an independent and reliable source of
220 Volts D.C. supply for control, protection, alarm and indicating circuits of the high
voltage switchgear in various attended type Sub Stations. The batteries shall be kept in
a state of floating trickle charge and provision be made for rapid charging the batteries
when so required.
The power for the charging apparatus shall be given through an independent 4-core
cable connection from an A.C. 50 cycles 3 phase 415 ± 10% volts switchboard fed from
a Station Transformer. D.C. Distribution shall be through fuse protected rotary switches
mounted on a separate distribution board.
1.06 TYPE OF EQUIPMENT:
All equipment shall be located indoors. D.C. Distribution panel are to be mounted on the
floor in the control room adjacent to the Battery room.

Necessary doors and screens shall be provided wherever required. All equipment shall
be vermin proof. The overall design of the entire equipment should be adequate for the
duty in view to ensure trouble free and dependable service.

-1-
The various cables whether for A.C. supply to the battery charging equipment or for D.C.
Distribution circuits, which are to be arranged by the Bidder shall have P.V.C. insulation.
The conductors may be of copper or aluminum. All panel wiring to be provided by the
supplier, shall consist of suitable colored/marked P.V.C. insulated cables.
1.07 BUS BARS AND SUPPORTS:
The bus bars shall be of aluminium having adequate cross-sections. The bus bars shall
be so designed and mounted that their expansion and contraction does not subject,
either the Bus Bars or their supports, to any stresses. All bus bars and connections shall
be duly marked and colored for identification.
1.08 INSTRUMENTS:
All instruments shall have 96 sq mm dials and flush mounted on the panels. Moving coil
spring controlled instruments shall be used except those for A.C. which may be of the
moving iron type. The error of indication shall not exceed 1% throughout the effective
range of the meter.
1.09 RESPONSIBILITY FOR DESIGNS:
The Bidder shall assume full responsibility for co-ordinate and adequate design and shall
conform to the best engineering practice for the operating conditions specified. In case
the equipment covered by this specification is to be co-ordinate with other equipment,
the Bidder shall furnish complete information and data as may be desired by the
purchaser.
1.10 CELL TERMINALS:
Terminal posts of each cell should be clearly stamped as positive and negative and they
should be made clearly distinguishable. Two pairs of Battery terminal should be
provided, so that a spare cell may be connected before the previous cell in series is
removed for over-haul.
1.11 GROUNDING:
All metal parts should be grounded according to Indian Electricity Rules. Main ground
Bus shall be provided by the purchaser. Special grounding lugs of adequate size shall
be provided by the supplier on the charging equipment.
1.12 INTER CHANGEABILITY:
Corresponding parts of plant and equipment shall be made to gauge or jig and shall be
interchangeable in every respect.
1.13 DOCUMENTATION

The successful bidder shall submit four sets of drawings for HVPNL approval.
The following drawing shall be supplied with the tender: -
i) Outline drawings of all apparatus showing sufficient details to enable the
purchaser to determine whether the design proposed can be installed
satisfactorily or not.
ii) Wiring diagram of battery charger.
NOTE: All above drawings should be a minimum space (14x10cm) for
stamping the approval of drawings by HVPNL.

-2-
1.14 FOUNDATIONS AND FIXINGS:
All plants and equipment shall be provided with a complete set of foundation holding
down bolts, washers, nuts plants and other fixture as may be required and these shall be
supplied by the Bidder. These fittings will be fixed by the purchaser in the foundations
unless otherwise specified. All foundation bolts, fixtures etc. shall be supplied as soon as
possible after the contract drawings have been approved.

1.15 INSTRUCTION AND MARKING PLATES:


All gauges, meters, instruments etc. shall have dials or scales calibrated in metric
system of units. All name plates, instruction plate, warning signs and any marking
what-so-ever on the equipment and its parts and accessories shall be in Hindi-English
Language, using idioms, words and meaning as in current use in India.
In order to facilitate sorting and erection at site every part of the plant and equipment
shall be suitably marked.

1.16 TROPICAL TREATMENT & PAINT:


All corrodible parts and surfaces shall be of such material and shall be provided with
such paint or other protective finish that no part of the installed equipment shall be
injuriously affected by the atmospheric moisture, heat and fumes. The panels shall be
finally painted with light grey paint having shade No.631 of IS:5 with stove enameled
finish.

1.17 PLACE OF MANUFACTURE AND INSPECTION:


The Bidder shall state in his tender the place(s) of manufacture, testing and inspection of
the various portions of the work included in the tender. The purchaser or his duly
authorised agent shall have access to the Bidder's or sub Bidder's work at any time
during working hours for the purpose of inspecting the manufacture and testing of
materials, equipment and completed plant and the Bidder shall provide the necessary
facilities for inspection.

1.18 TESTS:

1.18.1 Type Tests


The equipment should be offered type test. Test reports should not more then seven
years old reckoned from date of bid opening in respect of all the tests carried out in
accredited laboratories (based on ISO/IEC) by a reputed accreditatic body or witnessed
by HVPN or another electric power utility and be submitted by the successful bidder to
HVPNL for approval as schedule given in Bar Chart.
i) Verification of constructional requirements
ii) Verification of marking
iii) Verification of dimensions

-3-
1.18.2 Routine Tests
As per quality assurance program (QAP).

1.18.3 Acceptance Tests


The following acceptance tests for DCDB shall be carried out by the Supplier in
presence of HVPNL representative, unless dispensed with in writing by the HVPNL.

i) Dimension test
ii) Visual check test
iii) quantative check
iv) Functional checks
v) wiring HV Test
vi) Insulation resistance test

1.18.4 SAMPLING SCHEME AND CRITERIA FOR ACCEPTANCE:


The sampling scheme and criteria for acceptance for cells up to and including 600 AH
capacity shall be in accordance with clause 5 1.4 of IS-8320-1976. The sampling
scheme for cells of higher capacities shall be subject to agreement between the user
and the manufacturer.

1.19 SPARE PARTS :-


The Bidder shall quote separately in his tender for spare parts as he world recommend
for the main maintenance operation of the equipment for the period of 5 years. Of
detailed list of such spares parts which item wise prices shall be given under schedule of
requirement and prices. The purchaser may order spares subsequently as may be finally
decided upon, at the rates given in the tender. All spares parts shall be interchangeable
and shall be of same make material and both workmanship as the corresponding parts
furnished with the main equipment.

1.20 DETAILS OF TECHNICAL PARTICULARS AND SPECIFICATION:


Details of the technical particulars and specification required have been given in
Appendix (b). Any other particulars considered necessary by the supplier may also be
given in addition to the above listed in Data requirement sheet.

1.21 COMPLETENESS OF EQUIPMENT:


Any fittings, accessories or apparatus which may not have been specifically mentioned
in the specification, but which are usually necessary in the equipment shall be deemed
to be included in the contract and shall be supplied by the Bidder without extra cost.

-4-
APPENDIX 'A'

SCHEDULE OF REQUIREMENT

D.C. DISTRIBUTION BOARD:


The D.C. Distribution Board shall be housed in a sheet steel cubicle with
adequate ventilation and it should be vermin proof as far as possible and should
be provided with louvers for ventilation backed by fine wire mesh, which applies
to both charging equipment and D.C. Distribution Board. The DCDB shall match
with the battery charging equipment and should be complete with bus bars of
suitable capacity, wiring, rating plates, glands and fixing bolts. The minimum size
of cubical should be 600X700X1600 mm. The following components shall be
provided on the D.C. distribution board:

FOR 200 AH BATTERIES


1. Double pole ON/OFF rotary switch
of 200 Amps. for 200 AH rating and
100 Amps. for 100 AH Battery with
2 Nos. HRC fuses of 100 Amps 1 set

2. Moving coil ammeter of 96mm sq. and


range 0-200 amps. for 200 AH battery
and 0-100 Amps. for 100 AH battery
for measuring the load on the bus. 1 No

3. Change over contactor :

a) 20 Amps. for 200 AH battery and 10 Amps.


for 100 AH battery change over Bidder
AC/DC for switching indication over
to DC. On failure of AC supply and 1 No
also for emergency pilot light in
the event of AC failure.

b) 10 Amps HRC fuses for pilot light 2 Nos.

4. Double pole D.C. Rotary switches with


HRC fuses for each of following feeders:

a) 220 kV closing supply of 50 Amps,


capacity 1 No

b) 66 kV -do- 1 No

-5-
e) 11 kV closing supply 100 Amps.
capacity 1 No

f & g) spare 100 Amp. capacity 2 Nos.


h & i) spare 50 Amp. capacity 2 Nos.

5. Double pole D.C. rotary switch of 10 Amps. rating with 10 Amp. HRC fuses for each of
the following feeders:

a) 11 kV Tripping supply 10 Amp capacity 1 No

b) 66 kV -do- 1 No

c 220 kV -do- 1 No

d) Carrier telephone 10 Amp. capacity 1 No

e) 66 kV Relay & Board panel 10 Amp. capacity 1 No

f) 220 kV Relay & Board panel 10 amp. capacity 1 No

g) Spare 10 Amp capacity 3 Nos.


All the instruments shall be of flush mounted type. The rotary switches shall also be
flush mounted except for the protection portion in the panels. All switches shall be
mounted on the front panel and all the HRC fuses together with their fuse fittings on
the front panel but within a chamber that can be opened by half doors, to occasion
accessibility to the fuses. The various components shall be of the best quality and
from reputed manufacturers. The layout of components, wiring workmanship
reliability etc. shall be of the best quality. Adequate room should be provided within
the charger/DC distribution board cubicles for easy accessibility of components and
also to facilitate ventilation.

-6-
SECTION-6
CHAPTER 5

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION OF 415


VOLTS L.T. SWITCH BOARDS.

1. SCOPE :

This specification covers design, Engineering, manufacture, stage testing, inspection


and testing before despatch, packing, forwarding and delivery at site of 415 Volts AC LT
Switch Board complete with all fittings, accessories and associated auxiliary equipment
mandatory spares as per Volume II which are required for efficient and trouble free
operation as specified hereunder.

It is not the intent to specify herein all the details of design and construction of
equipments. However, the equipment shall conform in all respects to the high standards
of engineering, design and workmanship and shall be capable of performing in
continuous commercial operation up to the Bidder’s guarantee in a manner acceptable
to the Purchaser. The equipment offered shall be complete with all components
necessary for its effective and trouble free operation along with associated equipment,
interlocks protection schemes etc. irrespective of whether those are specially brought
out in this specification and commercially added or not. All similar parts particularly
movable ones shall be interchangeable.

1.02 CLIMATIC CONDITIONS :


The equipment is required to operate satisfactorily under the following site conditions:-

i. Max. Temperature 500C


ii. Min. Temperature -2.50C
iii. Relativehumidity
a) Max. 100%
b) Min. 26%
iii. Average number of rainy days per annum Nearly 120 days
iv. Average rain fall per year. 900 mm
v. Average number of dust storm days per annum 35
vi. Isoceraunic level 45
vii. Max. Wind pressures 195 kg/sqmt.
viii. Altitude above mean sea level Less than 1000 mt.

1.03 STANDARDS:
The metal clad (preferably sheet metal) air break switch to be supplied against this
Specification shall meet with the requirements laid down in IS-4064-1978 (part I & II)
(latest edition). The HRC fuses shall comply with the Is-2208-1962 (latest amended). All
other equipments shall also comply with the requirements of the latest edition of the
respective Indian Standards.

1.04 MATERIAL AND WORKMANSHIP:


All the materials used in the construction of the equipment shall be of the best quality
obtainable of their respective kinds and whole of the work shall be of the highest class,
well finished and of approved design and make of the true form and dimensions.

All machined surfaces shall be true and smooth and well finished.

-1-
1.05 INTER CHANGEABILITY:
Corresponding parts of plant and equipment shall be made to gauge or jig and shall be
interchangeable in every respect.

1.06 DOCUMENTATION
The successful bidder shall submit four sets of drawings for HVPNL approval.
NOTE: All above drawings should be a minimum space (14x10cm) for stamping the
approval of drawings by HVPNL.

1.07 FOUNDATIONS AND FIXINGS:


All plants and equipment shall be provided with a complete set of foundation holding
down bolts, washers, nuts plants and other fixtures as may be required and these shall
be supplied by the Bidder. These fittings will be fixed by the purchaser on the
foundations unless otherwise specified.
1.08 INSTRUCTION AND MARKING PLATES:
All gauge meters, instruments etc. shall have dials or scales calibrated in metric system
of units. All name plates, instruction plate, warning signs and any marking what-so-ever
on the equipment and its parts and accessories shall be in Hindi-English Language,
using idioms, words and meaning as in current use in India.

In order to facilitate sorting and erection at site every part of the plant and equipment
shall be suitably marked.

1.09 PAINTING
The whole of the plant except bright parts, valves and such portions as are finished shall
be painted with two painting coats of approved rust resisting paint in plain colours for
packing and the parts not so painted shall be protected from deterioration during transit.
All the ferrous parts shall be painted with battle ship grey paint by means of spray
painting. The painting should be as per relevant ISS. All the non ferrous parts including
the bus bars, thimbles, jumpers shall be tinned plated and sleeves of proper thickness
and size shall be provided on all the jumpers. After erection at site every painted part
shall be well cleaned filed and chopped and shall then receive two coats of best oil paint
of approved colour, to be supplied by the Bidder without any extra cost.

1.10 TESTS:
1.10.1 TYPE TEST
The equipment should be offered type test. Test reports should not more then seven
years old reckoned from date of bid opening in respect of all the tests carried out in
accredited laboratories (based on ISO/IEC) by a reputed accreditatic body or witnessed
by HVPN or another electric power utility and be submitted by the successful bidder to
HVPNL for approval as schedule given in Bar Chart.

1.10.2 Routine Test


As per quality assurance program (QAP).

1.10.3 Acceptance Test


The following acceptance tests shall be carried out by the Supplier in presence of
HVPNL representative, unless dispensed with in writing by the HVPNL.

-2-
i) Dimensional test
ii) Continuity test
iii) Insulation resistance test
iv) High voltage test
v) Inter locking test

1.11 INSTRUCTION BOOKS:


Applicable parts, lists, catalogues and operating instructions in English Language
specially prepared to cover all the equipment furnished under this specification which
may be needed or prove useful in operation, maintenance, repair, dismantling or
assembling and for the repair and identification of parts for ordering replacements shall
be assembled under a common cover and submitted in duplicate for each unit to the
purchaser free of cost.

1.12 REPRODUCIBLE DRAWINGS:


The Bidder shall supply two sets of full size reproducible drawings (approved by the
purchaser) along with detailed drawings of various major components/accessories etc.
(showing sectional views, wherever necessary) on oil cloth to prove useful in the
erection, operation maintenance and repair of the equipment. He shall also supply
twenty sets of azo prints of the above mentioned drawings for use in field and design
offices.

1.13 PARTICULARS OF THE SYSTEM:


The equipment shall be suitable for 415 Volts 50 cycles, 3 Phase 4 wire system with
neutral solidly earthed.

1.14 RISE IN TEMPERATURE:


The equipment shall be operated at maximum ambient temperature of 500C and as such
the temperature rise of its parts should be proportionately below the figure provided in
respective standards.

1.15 EACH SWITCH SHALL COMPRISE OF:


Metal clad floor mounting combination fuse switch board consisting of a suitable bus bar
of 320 Amps rating for 15 Ckts. Triple pole and neutral bus bar chamber, mounted on a
high floor stand arranged and equipped for the circuits given in the schedule of
requirement and mounted above and below the bus bar chamber to form a suitable
arrangement. The bus bar chamber shall have provision for adding two more switch
units as given in the schedule at a later date. The switches shall be quick make and
break type.
The switch boards shall be installed indoors. The enclosing chambers shall be dust-tight
and vermin proof.
All equipments shall be suitable for reception of Alumiium cable rising from the ground.
The details of equipment required for each switch board has been given in the schedule
of requirement.

1.16 BUS BARS:


The bus shall be made of high conductivity copper or Aluminium and shall have
adequate cross section so as to be capable of carrying 300 Amps in phase and 150
Amps. in neutral.

-3-
The bus bar shall be so designed and mounted in the separate chamber such that their
expansion or contraction does not subject either the bus bars or their insulation supports
to any stresses.
The bus bar shall be properly spaced so as to provide easy access during maintenance
and inspection etc. There should be no joints in the bus bars.
The current density for copper and aluminium bus bars must not exceed 1 A/cm2 and 87
A/cm2 respectively.

1.17 CONNECTIONS:
All the connections for the tee’s from the bus bars shall be bolted type and suitable
spring washers shall be provided to ensure proper jointing and material of the bolts shall
be of suitable metal. All the connections shall be provided with thimbles of suitable
rating.

1.18 METERING EQUIPMENT


Metering equipment for the station transformer/Incomer shall be located between the
L.T. side of the transformer and L.T. Bus Bars. The metering equipment shall include
300/5 Amps C.T.s having burden 15 VA with accuracy class 1 and 3 phase 4wire
unbalanced load integrating electronic KWH meter. A 100 mm dial flush mounted MISC
(moving iron spring controlled) Voltmeter and a 100 mm dial flush mounted MISC
ammeter both with phase selector switch shall also be provided on each switchboard to
indicate the bus bar voltage and total load on the station transformer/Incomer feeder. All
the meters shall be enclosed in separate chamber to have a flush pattern type
appearance. The meters shall be dust tight.

1.19 EARTHING
Two separate earths shall be run and each and every metallic parts of the
stand/switches/bus bar chambers shall be earthed at two different places independently.
The size of the earthing conductor for the switches and individual parts shall not be less
than No. 8 SWG copper conductor and size of the main for earthing shall not be less
than No. 3 SWG copper conductor.

1.20 BUS BAR CHAMBER


The bus bar chamber shall be made out of angle iron of suitable size as specified below
along with other details: -
a) Thickness of sheet steel enclosures, doors, covers
i) Cold rolled 2mm minimum
ii) Hot rolled +2.5mm minimum

b) Degree of protection IP-54 as per BS-


2817/IEC-144
c) Colour finish shade
i) Interior Glossy white
ii) Exterior Light grey
Semi glossy shade

d) Earthing bus material size Copper 25x6 mm

e) Purchaser’s earthing conductor Galvanised steel


Material
Size 30x6 mm
f) Clearance in air of live parts

-4-
i) Phase to Phase 80 mm
ii) Phase to earth 80 mm
1.21 LABELS:

Each switch shall be provided with suitable labels paginated on hard plastic sheet and
duly held in boss framed of the size 75x50 mm for the incoming and outgoing feeders.
The hard plastic sheet shall be of white colour and will be painted in black for the
outgoing feeders whereas it shall be painted bright red for the incoming feeders.

1.22 INTERLOCKING
Interlocks must be provided to ensure that the switch cover cannot be opened when the
switch is in the closed position. It should however be possible for competent examiner to
over ride this interlock and operate the switch with enclosure open.

1.23 FIRE HAZARDS


The switch and its associated apparatus shall be arranged to minimize fire hazards.

1.24 CLEARANCES
The clearances between phases and between phases and earth shall be as per IS-
3072-1975 with latest amendments.

1.25 CONTACTS
All live contacts of the switch shall be adequately shrouded to prevent accidental contact
when the equipment is either in the isolated or normal closed position and shall be silver
plated of suitable thickness. The fixed contacts of the fuse switch unit shall be fully
shrouded with arc resistant material. Material needs to be specified in the tender.

1.26 CABLE AND BOXES:

a) The incoming switch and outgoing switches shall be provided with cable and boxes
of suitable size capacity and rating suitable for PVC cables. Suitable cleating
arrangement shall also be provided for the cables entering the switch fuse units in
the top tier.
The cabling arrangement shall be such that cables outgoing from Isolator unit can be
connected or disconnected easily and safely.

1.27 RUPTURING CAPACITY


The rupturing capacity of the bus bar switchgear/cartridges shall not be lower than 2
MVA at 415 volts.

1.28 The individual fuse switch unit shall be provided in such a way that they can be removed
from the front of the switch board for servicing and maintenance.

1.29 MARKING
All the switches shall be clearly marked with the following particulars: -
a) Reference to the standard.
b) Rated voltage.
c) Rated normal current.
d) Rated marking capacity.
e) Breaking capacity.
f) Type of fuse/links to be used.
g) Name plate.

-5-
1. Supplier name.
2. Purchaser
3. P.O. No.
4. Rating.
5. Serial no.
6. Year of manufacturing.

1.30 OTHER PARTICULARS


The Bidder should clearly furnish the following information in their offer: -
a) Material and plating of the contacts.
b) Current density assumed.
c) Temperature rise under continuous full load over the ambient temp. of 500C.
d) Temperature rise under short circuit condition.
e) Guaranteed Technical particulars as required in appendix-A.

1.31 List of references if similar L.T. Switch Board already in service/supplied with
complete details shall be furnished.

-6-
ANNEXURE ‘A’

SCHEDULE OF REQUIREMENTS

A. 220kV Sub-Stations

415 V 3 Phase 4 wire L.T. Switch Board comprising of 17 circuits TP & N switch fuse units
consisting of one incomer from Station transformer of 500 A and another incomer from alternate
emergency AC supply in case of failure of station transformer supply of 320 A with suitable CTs
and selector switch for incomer feeders and 15 Nos. switch fuse units with HRC fuses for
outgoing feeders having the following ratings for 220 KV S/Stns.

Sr. L.T.Feeders Switch Fuse rating No.


No. rating (Amps)
(Amps)
1. Incoming from Station transformer 500 400 1

2. Alternate Source 320 300 1

3. Oil filtration set feeder 200 160 1

4. Colony lighting feeder 200 160 1

5. Yard lighting feeder 160 100 1

6. Fan control of T/F, OLTC motor and oil 100 63 1


motor of 220/132 or 220/66 KV T/F

7. Fan control of 132/33, 132/11, 66/33, 63 50 1


66/11 KV T/F & OLTC motor

8. 220 KV Breaker operation (compressor 32 25 1


and space heaters etc.) OCB feeder

9. 132/33, 132/11, 66/33, 66/11 KV Breaker 32 25 1


and space heater etc. OCB feeder

10. Outdoor street lighting feeder 63 50 1

11. Water pump and sewerage pump. 63 50 1

12. Carrier room 32 25 1

13. Battery charger 32 25 1

14. Control panel indicator 32 25 1

15. Spare feeder 160 100 1

16. Provision for additional switch fuse unit

-7-
17. To be mounted at a later stage.

TOTAL 17 Nos.

NOTES:
1. Each circuit as indicated above shall have switch rating, HRC fuse rating and LT feeder
labeling as mentioned against each. It shall include bus bar connections, terminals,
cable glands and cable lugs etc.

2. Each Incomer shall be provided with the following equipments:

i) One No. 100mm dial flush mounting moving iron spring controlled (MISC)
ammeter of scale of 0-500A with phase selector switch.

ii) One No. 100 mm dial flush mounting MISC voltmeter of range 0-500V with phase
selector switch.

iii) 3 Nos. 500/5A CTs having burden 15 VA and accuracy class 1 and Instrument
Security factor.

iv) One No. 3 phase , 4 wire unbalanced load integrating watt hour meter
(operatable on 500/5A CTs).

v) TTB for LT CT meter.

3. Make of each component must be listed in bid.

4. The bus bar shall be designed for 500 A for phase and 250 A for neutral.

-8-
SECTION-6
CHAPTER 6

FIRE FIGHTING EQUIPMENT

1.0 SCOPE
Portable fire extinguishers of Carbon Dioxide type and Dry chemical Powder type
shall be provided in adequate numbers for protection the Control Room Building and
all other Buildings in the sub-stations. The protection shall cover all the rooms/areas
of the buildings. The quantity and location of the extinguishers shall be as per the
requirements of Fire protection Manual (Part-I) issued by Tariff Advisory Committee
of India (TAC) and IS:2190.

1.1 Trolley Mounted fire extinguishers of 22.5 kg Carbon Dioxide type and 22.5 kg Dry
Chemical Powder type shall be used for protection of all 220kV, 132/66kV
Transformers and reactors in the S/Stn. Two DCP type and two CO2 type
extinguishers shall be provided for each transformer/reactor.

2.0 PORTABLE TYPE FIRE EXTINGUISHERS:

2.1 This Specification lays down the requirement regarding fire extinguishers of following
types:
a) Carbon Dioxide type
b) Dry Chemical powder type
2.2 All the portable extinguishers shall be capable of discharging freely and completely
in upright position.
2.3 Each extinguisher shall have the instructions for operating the extinguishers on its
body itself.
2.4 All extinguishers shall be supplied with initial charge and accessories as required.
2.5 Portable type extinguishers shall be provided with suitable clamps for mounting on
walls or columns.
2.6 All extinguishers shall be painted with durable enamel paint of fire red colour
confirming to relevant Indian Standards.
2.7 Capacities of each type shall be as indicated in the schedule of quantities.
2.8 Carbon Dioxide (CO2 type) extinguishers shall conform to IS:2878.
2.9 Dry chemical powder type extinguisher shall conform to IS:2171.

2.10 TESTS AND INSPECTION

2.10.1 All tests required to ensure that the equipment conforms to the Specification
requirements and relevant standards and codes.
2.10.2 A performance demonstration test at site of five (5) percent or one (1) number
whichever is higher, of the extinguishers shall be carried out by the Bidder. All
consumable and replaceable items required for this test would be supplied by the
Bidder without any extra cost to the Purchaser.
2.10.3 Performance listing of extinguishers shall be in line of applicable Indian Standards.
In case, where no Indian Standard is applicable for a particular type of extinguishers,
the method of testing shall be mutually discussed and agreed to before placement of
order for the extinguishers.

-1-
2.11 PERFORMANCE GUARANTEE
The Bidder shall guarantee all equipment supplied by him against any defect due to
faulty design, materials and workmanship. The equipment shall be guaranteed to
operate satisfactorily at the rated conditions at site.

2.12 PAINTING
Each fire extinguisher shall be painted with durable enamel paint of fire red colour
conforming to relevant Indian Standards.

3.0 TROLLEY MOUNTED DRY CHEMICAL POWDER TYPE MOBILE FIRE


EXTINGUISHER
The Specification lays down the requirement regarding wheeled fire extinguisher of
dry chemical powder type.

Design, Manufacture, Material of construction and performance of mobile type fire


extinguisher shall comply with the requirements of latest Indian Standards & shall
have BIS approval (ISI marked).

3.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENT


The capacity of the mobile dry chemical powder type fire extinguisher shall be 22.5
kg which means the total capacity of the container, when powder completely filled to
the specified level shall be 22.5 kg.
The fire extinguishers shall be used for Class ‘B’, ‘C’, and ‘E’ fires.

The extinguishers shall operate in the vertical position, mounted on solid rubber tyre
trolley wheels.

The effective throw during operation of the extinguishers shall not be less than 10
meter.

A carbon dioxide cartridge fitted with valved discharge head, shall provide sufficient
carbon dioxide to expel the dry chemical powder.

3.2 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION


The construction of wheeled fire extinguishers shall conform to IS standard and not
be limited to the requirements mentioned here.

The shape of the body of the fire extinguisher shall be cylindrical. It shall have
adequate supporting arrangement.

The balance of the fully equipped assembly shall be so arranged that it can be easily
towed speedily behind a jeep or a car and also wheeled by a single operator.

Two solid rubber tyred trolley wheels shall be fitted to the body of the mobile fire
extinguisher. The rubber tyres shall have an effective life, and less than three (3)
years.

The extinguisher shall be fitted with a discharge hose and nozzle connection. The
hose shall be of rubber or composite construction, having a length of 4.5-meter
minimum. The bursting pressure of the hose shall be minimum 42 kgf/cm (g).

-2-
The design of discharge nozzle shall be such that when the extinguisher is operated
in still air the powder will be thrown in the form of a jet having a range of 10m
(minimum) for a period of 50-60 seconds. The nozzle shall be fitted with a hand
control device.

Provision shall be therefore making a pressure test on the body.

To minimize corrosion, the various components shall be provided with suitable anti-
corrosive as per the requirement of applicable codes.

Each mobile extinguisher shall be complete with initial charge, discharge fittings and
accessories.

3.3 TESTS AND INSPECTION


Testing at manufacturer’s works.

The manufacturer shall conduct all tests required to ensure that the equipment
furnished will conform to this Specification requirements, relevant Indian Standards
and applicable codes. Everybody shall be capable of withstanding an internal
hydraulic pressure of 25 kgf/cm (g) without leakage or visible distortion, prior to
painting, for a minimum period of 5 minutes.

In destruction tests, if called for, ultimate failure shall occur at a test pressure not less
than 32 kgf/cm (g) and if it occurs below 35 kgf/cm (g) there shall not be damage in
any joint, seam casting of fittings.

A performance demonstration test at site on five (5) percent or one (1) number,
whichever is higher, shall be required to be carried out by the BIDDER. All
consumable and replaceable items required for the test shall be supplied by the
BIDDER without any extra cost to Purchaser.

After conduction tests as in 1.1 and 1.4 the body shall be properly washed and
drained off. After 24 hours, the interior shall be examined and it must be free from
any stain, rust etc.

3.4 PERFORMANCE GUARANTEE

The BIDDER shall guarantee all equipment supplied by him against any defect due
to faulty design, materials and workmanship. The equipment shall be guaranteed to
operate satisfactorily at the rated conditions at site.

3.5 PAINTING
Each mobile fire extinguisher shall be painted with durable enamel paint of red colour
conforming to relevant Indian Standard. The mobile foam type fire extinguisher shall
be of make approved by Tariff Advisory Committee/NFPA/FOC/UL. Appliances
conforming to the relevant BS/NFPA Standards are also acceptable provided the
construction generally conform to the IS Standards so that spares refills/cartridges of
Indian make conforming to IS Specification can be used after the operation of the
extinguisher.

Spare charge cartridges equivalent to requirements of 2 Nos. extinguishers shall also


be supplied.

-3-
4.0 TROLLEY MOUNTED CARBON-DIOXIDE TYPE MOBILE FIRE EXTINGUISHER

1.1 This Specification lays down the requirements regarding wheeled fire extinguisher of
carbon-dioxide.

1.2 Design, manufacture, material of construction and performance of extinguisher as


specified herein after shall comply with the requirements of latest applicable Indian
Standards IS-2878 or equivalents and shall have BIS approval (ISI marked).

1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENT


1.3.1 The capacity of the extinguisher shall be 22.5 kg of carbon-dioxide when filled in the
container to a filling ratio of about 0.66, 7.
1.3.2 The extinguisher shall be designed for use where larger high intensity fire hazards
are involved requiring versatility of action. These shall be used for Class ‘B’ fire, i.e.
fire in flammable liquid. Class ‘C’ fire i.e. fire in gaseous substances under pressure
and Class ‘E’ fire, i.e. fires in live electrical equipment.
1.3.3 The extinguisher shall be operated in upright position, by releasing a suitable valve.
1.3.4 The range of effective operation of the extinguishers shall be about 4 meters.

1.4 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION


The construction of wheeled fire extinguisher, carbon-dioxide type, shall in general
conform to IS:2828 subject to the requirements mentioned hereunder:
1.4.1 The carbon-dioxide gas shall conform to IS:307.
1.4.2 The shape of the body of the extinguisher shall be cylindrical. The body shall be of
steel cylinder. It shall have adequate supporting arrangement so that it can rest on
the wheeled body in upright position and the operator be free to direct the stream.
1.4.3 The balance of the full equipped trolley unit shall be so arranged, that despite its
considerable weight, it can be easily wheeled by one man. It should be capable of
being towed speedily behind a jeep or car.
1.4.4 The cylinder shall be mounted on a trolley fitted with two cushion tyred wheels and
fitted with suitable handle. The overall wheel diameter shall be about 280 mm.
The frame of the trolley shall be made of welded steel section.
1.4.5 The design shall permit easy maintenance and operation with one man service.
1.4.6 The extinguisher shall be fitted with a high pressure flexible hose of about 9 m length
and internal dia to hoses shall not be more than 12 mm.
1.4.7 A discharge horn made of fibre or any material non-conducting to electricity shall be
fitted with a handle made of thermal insulating material capable of protecting
operators hand from freezing effects.
1.4.8 Suitable provision for firmly securing the horn to the body, when it is not in use, shall
be provided. The fixing device shall not interfere with the operation or mobility of the
extinguisher.
1.4.9 The discharge valve or operating head shall be capable of being operated
satisfactorily. It shall be made of material as specified in IS:2878.
1.4.10 There shall be no leakage of CO2 from valve or fitting during the use of extinguisher.
Valve shall be provided with suitable safety device to prevent over pressure in
cylinder.
1.4.11 A seal or device shall be fitted to indicate that the extinguisher has not been used.
1.4.12 Each extinguisher shall be complete with initial charge, discharge fittings and other
accessories as required.

-4-
1.5 TEST AND INSPECTION

1.5.1 The extinguisher at ambient temperature shall expel at least 95% of its content as
continuous discharge with in a maximum of 90 seconds and minimum of 30 seconds.
1.5.2 The extinguisher without its attachment shall be shelved for 21 days after filling and
shall be check weighed at the end of the period. There shall be no loss of mass.
1.5.3 Carbon-dioxide cylinder shall be hydrostatically tested at a pressure of 236 kgf/cm
(g) to prove leak tightness for a period of one hour.
1.5.4 Hose assembly with its coupling shall be hydrostatically tested at a pressure of 315
kgf/cm (g) without failure.
4.5.5 All tests required to ensure that the equipment conforms to the Specification
requirements and relevant standards and codes shall be conducted by the
manufacturer. Adequate time ahead of these shop tests the Purchaser shall be
informed so that if he so desires, his representative may witness the tests.
1.5.5 A performance demonstration test at site on five (5) percent or one (1) number,
whichever is higher, shall be required to be carried out by the BIDDER. All
consumable and rechargeable items required for the test shall be supplied by the
BIDDER without any extra cost to Purchaser.

1.6 PERFORMANCE GUARANTEE


The BIDDER shall guarantee all equipment supplied by him against any defect due
to faulty design, materials and workmanship. The equipment shall be guaranteed to
operate satisfactorily at the rated conditions at site.

1.7 PAINTING & MARKING


Each extinguisher shall be painted in red and permanently marked in accordance
with the requirements laid down in IS-2878. besides permanently making on the front
of the extinguisher indicating its purpose, content and usage shall also be provided.

1.7.1 The mobile Carbon-dioxide type fire extinguisher shall be of make approved by Chief
Inspector of Explosives, Nagpur, India and Tariff Advisory
Committee/NFPA/FOC/UL.

2. VENTILATION SYSTEM
Mechanical ventilation systems using exhaust fans shall be provided for all the
rooms which are not considered for air conditioning. Capacity of the fan shall be
selected so as to have the minimum air changes in the various rooms as below:

Battery room, Pantry, toilets : 15 air


Changes/hr.
All other rooms : 12 air
Changes/hr.

For Battery room, the fan shall be bifurcated type spare proof construction.

-5-
SECTION – 6
CHAPTER – 7(I)

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR UNARMOURED


COPPER CONTROL CABLES

1.0 SCOPE
1.1 This specification provides for design, engineering, manufacture, stage testing,
inspection testing before dispatch, packing, forwarding and delivery at site of
unarmoured control cable.

1.2 It is not the intent to specify complete herein all details of the design and construction
of material. However, the material shall conform in all respects to high standards of
engineering, design and workmanship and shall be capable of performing in
continuous commercial operation up to the bidders guarantee acceptable to the
HVPNL. The material offered shall be complete in all components necessary for its
effective and trouble free operation. Such components shall be deemed to be within
the scope of supply irrespective of whether those are specially brought in this
Specification and or the commercial order or not. All similar parts particularly
movable ones shall be interchangeable.

2.0 STANDARDS
2.1 Copper control cable to be supplied shall be PVC insulated. PVC sheathed
unarmoured for indoor and outdoor applications in air, in ground, in water and in
concrete trenches. The control cable shall conform in all respects to the
requirements of IS-1554 (Part-I) 1988 and its subsequent amendments, if any at the
time of placement of order. All CT/PT circuits control cables are to be of size 4 mm2
copper cable. The incoming AC and DC supply cable to MKs/C&R Panels/CBs will
be of size 4 mm2 and 6mm2 copper and all other control cable will be of size 2.5 mm2
copper cable.
2.2 Control cables meeting with the requirement of other authoritative standard, which
ensure equal or better performance than the standards mentioned above, shall be
considered. When the equipment offered by the bidder adopted and the standards
specified in this Specification shall be clearly brought out in the relevant schedule.
Four copies of such standards with authentic translation in English shall be furnished
along with the offer.

2.3 PRINCIPAL PARAMETERS(TECHNICAL)


2.3.1 MATERIAL
All the material used in the manufacture of the cables shall be of the best available
quality with regard to strength, durability and shall also be manufactured according to
best engineering practices.

2.3.2 CONSTRUCTIONAL FEATURES


The insulated core shall be provided with inner sheath, unarmoured but provided
with an outer sheath as specified in IS-1554 (part-I) 1998 amended up to date. The
control cable offered shall be suitable for use in system up to 1100 volts. The
conductors shall be composed of plain annealed high conductivity copper which
before stranding shall be approximately circular in section, smooth, uniform in quality

-1-
and free from scale, in-equalities, spills, splits and other defects. The conductors
shall conform to appropriate dimensions and resistance as per IS-1554 (part-I) 1998.

3.0 GENERAL TECHNICAL PARTICULARS


3.1 INSULATION
The basic material employed as insulating compound shall consist of compounded
polyvinyl chloride (PVC) or suitable copolymers of which major constituent shall be
vinyl chloride or mixture of polyvinyl chloride and suitable copolymers which have
been suitably compounded and processed so as to comply with the requirements of
IS-1554 (part-I) 1988. The PVC compound going into the formation of insulation shall
also comply with the provisions of IS-5831-1970 “PVC insulation and sheath of
electric cable”. The insulation shall withstand the rigours of climate and site
conditions and shall not crack or retract in normal use. The colour code of the cores
of control cable shall be as per clause 10.1 of ISS-1554 (part-I) 1988. However, the
outer PVC sheath shall be black or grey. The colour coding as employed in the
formation of the cable for individual cores and sheath shall be indicated in the bid.
The PVC/Co-polymer compounds going into the formation of the outer sheathing
shall afford a high degree of mechanical protection besides being oil and weather
resistant.

3.2 MARKING
Every cable drum shall be clearly marked with inedible ink or with suitable weather
resistant paint and shall bear the following particulars: -
i) Manufacturer name and trade mark, if any.
ii) HVPNL Order No. and Date.
ii) Year of manufacture.
iii) Nominal sectional area of conductor of the cable.
iv) No. of cores.
v) Type of cable and voltage for which it is suitable.
vi) Length of cable on the drum.
vii) Weight of tare.
viii) Direction of rolling the drum.
ix) Gross weight of the drum.

4.0 TEST
4.1 TYPE TESTS

The copper control cables offered should be type tested. Type test report of similar
cables should not be more than seven years old, reckoned from the date of bid
opening in respect of the following tests, as per relevant ISS-1554/Part-I-1988 and
carried out in accordance with the procedure laid down in relevant
ISS/IEC/Internationally recognized equivalent standard from any accredited test
house/ Lab. For Indian manufacturers, the tests got conducted from Govt. test labs
shall also be acceptable. These type test reports shall be submitted by the
successful bidder to HVPNL for the approval as per schedule given in commercial
document.
i) Test on conductors
a) Annealing Test
b) Conductor Resistance Test
ii) Physical test for insulation and outer sheath.
a) Tensile strength and elongation at break.
b) Ageing in air oven.

-2-
c) Shrinkage test.
d) Hot deformation test.
e) Loss of mass in air oven.
f) Heat shock test.
g) Thermal stability.
iii) Test for Thickness of Insulation and Sheath.
iv) Insulation resistance test.
v) High voltage test (Water immersion test).
vi) High voltage test at room temperature.
vii) Flammability test.

4.2 ROUTINE TESTS :

As per quality assurance program (QAP).

4.3 ACCEPTANCE TESTS:


The following acceptance tests as stipulated in the relevant ISS-1554 (Part-I) shall
be carried out by the Bidder in presence of HVPNL representative, unless dispensed
with in writing by the HVPNL.
i) Annealing Test (for copper)
ii) Conductor Resistance test.
iii) Test for Thickness of Insulation and Sheath.
iv) Tensile strength and elongation at break of insulation and sheath.
v) Insulation resistance test.
vi) High Voltage test at room temperature.

-3-
SECTION – 6
CHAPTER – 8(II)

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR ARMORED


COPPER CONTROL CABLES

1.0 SCOPE

1.1 This specification provides for design, engineering, manufacture, stage testing,
inspection testing before dispatch, packing, forwarding and delivery F.O.R.
destination of armored control cable.

1.2 It is not the intent to specify complete herein all details of the design and construction
of material. However, the material shall conform in all respects to high standards of
engineering, design and workmanship and shall be capable of performing in
continuous commercial operation up to the bidders guarantee acceptable to the
HVPNL. The material offered shall be complete in all components necessary for its
effective and trouble free operation. Such components shall be deemed to be within
the scope of supply irrespective of whether those are specially brought in this
Specification and or the commercial order or not. All similar parts particularly
movable ones shall be interchangeable.

2.0 STANDARDS

2.1 Copper control cable to be supplied shall be PVC insulated. PVC sheathed
unarmoured for indoor and outdoor applications in air, in ground, in water and in
concrete trenches. The control cable shall conform in all respects to the
requirements of IS-1554 (Part-I) 1988 and its subsequent amendments, if any at the
time of placement of order. All CT/PT circuits control cables are to be of size 4 mm2
copper cable. The incoming AC and DC supply cable to MKs/C&R Panels/CBs will
be of size 4 mm2 and 6 mm2 copper and all other control cable will be of size 2.5
mm2 copper cable.

2.2 Control cables meeting with the requirement of other authoritative standard, which
ensure equal or better performance than the standards mentioned above, shall be
considered. When the equipment offered by the bidder adopted and the standards
specified in this Specification shall be clearly brought out in the relevant schedule.
Four copies of such standards with authentic translation in English shall be furnished
along with the offer.

3.0 PRINCIPAL PARAMETERS (TECHNICAL)

3.1 ARMOURING
The insulated core shall be provided with inner sheath, Armouring and outer sheath
as specified in IS-1554 (part-I) 1988 amended up to date. The control cable offered
shall be suitable for use in system up to 1100 volts.

The conductors shall be composed of plain annealed high conductivity copper which
before stranding shall be approximately circular in section, smooth, uniform in quality
and free from scale in-equalities, spills and other defects. The conductors shall
conform to appropriate dimensions and resistance as per IS-1554 (part-I) 1988. the

-4-
Armouring shall be arranged over the inner sheath and shall consist of galvanised
round steel wires, where the specified nominal diameter over the insulation of inner
sheath does not exceed 13mm. The armor of cable having a specified nominal dia
greater than 13mm shall consist of either galvanised round steel wires/strips shall
conform to IS-1554 (part-I) 1988. the steel wires and strips used for Armouring shall
conform to IS-3975-1967. The direction of lay of armor shall be opposite to that of
outer layer of cores.

3.2 MATERIAL
All the material used in the manufacture of the cables shall be of the best available
quality with regard to strength, durability and shall also be manufactured according to
best engineering practices.

4.0 GENERAL TECHNICAL PARTICULARS

4.1 INSULATION
The basic material employed as insulating compound shall consist of compounded
polyvinyl chloride (PVC) or suitable copolymers of which major constituent shall be
vinyl chloride or mixture of polyvinyl chloride and suitable copolymers which have
been suitably compounded and processed so as to comply with the requirements of
IS-1554 (part-I) 1988. The PVC compound going into the formation of insulation shall
also comply with the provisions of IS-5831-1970 “PVC insulation and sheath of
electric cable”. The insulation shall withstand the rigours of climate and site
conditions and shall not crack or retract in normal use. The colour code of the cores
of control cable shall be as per clause 10.1 of ISS-1554 (part-I) 1988. However, the
outer PVC sheath shall be black or grey. The colour coding as employed in the
formation of the cable for individual cores and sheath shall be indicated in the bid.
The PVC/Co-polymer compounds going into the formation of the outer sheathing
shall afford a high degree of mechanical protection besides being oil and weather
resistant.

4.2 MARKING
Every cable drum shall be clearly marked with indelible ink or with suitable weather
resistant paint and shall bear the following particulars: -
j) Manufacturer name and trade mark, if any.
ii) HVPNL Order No. and Date.
iii) Year of manufacture.
iv) Nominal sectional area of conductor of the cable.
v) No. of cores.
vi) Type of cable and voltage for which it is suitable.
vii) Length of cable on the drum.
viii) Weight of tare.
ix) Direction of rolling the drum.

5.0 TEST
5.1 TYPE TESTS
The copper control cables offered should be type tested. Type test report of similar
cables should not be more than seven years old, reckoned from the date of bid
opening in respect of the following tests, as per relevant ISS-1554/Part-I-1988 and
carried out in accordance with the procedure laid down in relevant
ISS/IEC/Internationally recognized equivalent standard from any accredited test

-5-
house/ Lab. For Indian manufacturers, the tests got conducted from Govt. test labs
shall also be acceptable. These type test reports shall be submitted by the
successful bidder to HVPNL for the approval as per schedule given in commercial
document.
i) Test on conductors
a. Annealing Test
b. Conductor Resistance Test
ii) Physical test for insulation and outer sheath.
a. Tensile strength and elongation at break.
b. Ageing in air oven.
c. Shrinkage test.
d. Hot deformation test.
e. Loss of mass in air oven.
f. Heat shock test.
g. Thermal stability.
iii) Test for Thickness of Insulation and Sheath.
iv) Insulation resistance test.
v) High voltage test (Water immersion test).
vi) High voltage test at room temperature.
vii) Flammability test.
viii) Test for armouring wires/strips

5.2 ROUTINE TESTS :

As per quality assurance program (QAP).

5.3 ACCEPTANCE TESTS:


The following acceptance tests as stipulated in the relevant ISS-1554 (Part-I) shall
be carried out by the Bidder in presence of HVPNL representative, unless dispensed
with in writing by the HVPNL.
i) Annealing Test (for copper)
ii) Conductor Resistance test.
iii) Test for Thickness of Insulation and Sheath.
iv) Tensile strength and elongation at break of insulation and sheath.
v) Insulation resistance test.
vi) High Voltage test at room temperature.

-6-
Section-6
Chapter-8
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR 11 kV CROSS LINKED ETHYLENE
INSULATED PVC SHEATHED SINGLE CORE AND THREE CORE POWER
CABLES

1. SCOPE
This specification covers the design, manufacture, testing, inspection at
manufacturer’s work, supply & delivery F.O.R. destination of 630mm2 Single
Core XLPE insulated PVC sheathed Cable and three core XLPE cable suitable
for solidly grounded system size as per clause(5) mentioned below.

2. PARTICULARS OF THE SYSTEM


The cable should be suitable for use on 50 Cycles, 3 Phases solidly earth
neutral system & working voltage of 11kV.

3. STANDARDS
The cable covered under this Specification shall conform in all respects with
the latest editions of IS-7098 (Part-2) 1985 & IS-8130-1984 & IEC:502 of the
latest version thereof.<